Mazda Automobile 2009 6 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AWord to Mazda Owners  
Thank you for choosing a Mazda. We at Mazda design and build vehicles with complete  
customer satisfaction in mind.  
To help ensure enjoyable and trouble-free operation of your Mazda, read this manual  
carefully and follow its recommendations.  
An Authorized Mazda Dealer knows your vehicle best. So when maintenance or service is  
necessary, that's the place to go.  
Our nationwide network of Mazda professionals is dedicated to providing you with the best  
possible service.  
We assure you that all of us at Mazda have an ongoing interest in your motoring pleasure  
and in your full satisfaction with your Mazda product.  
Mazda North American Operations  
Important Notes About This Manual  
Keep this manual in the glove box as a handy reference for the safe and enjoyable use of your Mazda. Should you  
resell the vehicle, leave this manual with it for the next owner.  
All specifications and descriptions are accurate at the time of printing. Because improvement is a constant goal at  
Mazda, we reserve the right to make changes in specifications at any time without notice and without obligation.  
Event Data Recorder  
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder. In the event of a crash, this device records data related to  
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time. These data can help provide a better  
understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur and lead to the designing of safer  
vehicles.  
Air Conditioning and the Environment  
Your Mazda's genuine air conditioner is filled with HFC134a (R134a), a refrigerant that has been found not to  
damage the earth's ozone layer. If the air conditioner does not operate properly, consult an Authorized Mazda  
Dealer.  
Perchlorate  
Certain components of this vehicle such as [air bag modules, seat belt pretensioners, lithium batteries, ...] may  
contain Perchlorate Material– Special handling may apply for service or vehicle end of life disposal. See  
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.  
Please be aware that this manual applies to all models, equipment and options. As a result, you may find  
some explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle.  
©2008 Mazda North American Operations  
Printed in U.S.A. (Print1)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
How to Use This Manual  
We want to help you get the most driving  
pleasure from your vehicle. Your owner's  
manual, when read from cover to cover,  
can do that in many ways.  
NOTE  
A NOTE provides information and sometimes  
suggests how to make better use of your  
vehicle.  
The symbol below, located on some parts  
of the vehicle, indicates that this manual  
contains information related to the part.  
Please refer to the manual for a detailed  
explanation.  
Illustrations complement the words of the  
manual to best explain how to enjoy your  
Mazda. By reading your manual, you can  
find out about the features, important  
safety information, and driving under  
various road conditions.  
The symbol below in this manual means  
“Do not do this” or “Do not let this  
happen”.  
Index: A good place to start is the Index,  
an alphabetical listing of all information  
in your manual.  
You'll find several WARNINGs,  
CAUTIONs, and NOTEs in the manual.  
WARNING  
A WARNING indicates a situation in  
which serious injury or death could  
result if the warning is ignored.  
CAUTION  
A CAUTION indicates a situation in  
which bodily injury or damage to  
your vehicle, or both, could result if  
the caution is ignored.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Your Vehicle at a Glance  
1
Interior, exterior views and part identification of your Mazda.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
2
Use of safety equipment, including seats, seat belt system, child-restraint  
systems and SRS air bags.  
Knowing Your Mazda  
3
Explanation of basic operations and controls; opening/closing and adjustment  
of various parts.  
Before Driving Your Mazda  
4
Important information about driving your Mazda.  
Driving Your Mazda  
5
Explanation of instruments and controls.  
Interior Comfort  
6
Use of various features for drive comfort, including air-conditioning and audio  
system.  
In Case of an Emergency  
7
Helpful information on what to do in an emergency.  
Maintenance and Care  
8
How to keep your Mazda in top condition.  
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
9
Important consumer information including warranties and add-on equipment.  
Specifications  
10  
11  
Technical information about your Mazda.  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Your Vehicle at a Glance  
1
Interior, exterior views and part identification of your Mazda.  
Interior Overview.......................................................................... 1-2  
Interior Equipment (View A) .................................................... 1-2  
Interior Equipment (View B) .................................................... 1-3  
Interior Equipment (View C) .................................................... 1-4  
Exterior Overview ......................................................................... 1-5  
Front .......................................................................................... 1-5  
Rear ........................................................................................... 1-6  
1-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Your Vehicle at a Glance  
Interior Overview  
Interior Equipment (View A)  
Door-lock knob .................................................................................................. page 3-30  
Power door lock switch ..................................................................................... page 3-31  
Headlight leveling switch .................................................................................. page 5-62  
TCS-OFF switch ................................................................................................ page 5-23  
DSC OFF switch ............................................................................................... page 5-25  
BSM OFF switch ............................................................................................... page 5-36  
Lighting control ................................................................................................. page 5-60  
Turn and lane-change signals ............................................................................ page 5-63  
Instrument cluster .............................................................................................. page 5-38  
Wiper and washer lever ..................................................................................... page 5-64  
Lock release lever .............................................................................................. page 3-59  
Trunk release button .......................................................................................... page 3-33  
Outside mirror switch ........................................................................................ page 3-59  
Power window switches .................................................................................... page 3-38  
Power window lock switch ................................................................................ page 3-40  
1-2  
The equipment and installation position varies by vehicle  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Your Vehicle at a Glance  
Interior Overview  
Interior Equipment (View B)  
Audio control switches ...................................................................................... page 6-56  
SRS air bags ...................................................................................................... page 2-41  
Cruise control switches ...................................................................................... page 5-19  
Audio system ..................................................................................................... page 6-16  
Hazard warning flasher switch .......................................................................... page 5-70  
Climate control system ........................................................................................ page 6-2  
MT shift lever .................................................................................................... page 5-10  
AT shift lever ...................................................................................................... page 5-12  
Push button start ................................................................................................ page 3-10  
Seat warmer switches ........................................................................................ page 2-13  
Hood release handle .......................................................................................... page 3-46  
Storage pocket ................................................................................................. page 6-102  
Navigation system (if equipped) .......................................... Refer to the separate manual  
The equipment and installation position varies by vehicle  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-3  
Your Vehicle at a Glance  
Interior Overview  
Interior Equipment (View C)  
SRS air bags ...................................................................................................... page 2-41  
Seat belts ............................................................................................................ page 2-15  
Remote fuel-filler lid release ............................................................................. page 3-45  
Bottle holder .................................................................................................... page 6-101  
Vanity mirror ...................................................................................................... page 6-93  
Overhead lights .................................................................................................. page 6-94  
Rearview mirror ................................................................................................. page 3-60  
Sunvisor ............................................................................................................. page 6-93  
Accessory sockets ............................................................................................ page 6-105  
Front seats ............................................................................................................ page 2-2  
Parking brake ....................................................................................................... page 5-6  
Cup holders...................................................................................................... page 6-100  
Center console ................................................................................................. page 6-103  
Rear seat ............................................................................................................ page 2-10  
1-4  
The equipment and installation position varies by vehicle  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Your Vehicle at a Glance  
Exterior Overview  
Front  
Hood .................................................................................................................. page 3-46  
Windshield wiper blades .................................................................................... page 8-28  
Moonroof ........................................................................................................... page 3-47  
Door lock ........................................................................................................... page 3-30  
Fuel-filler lid ...................................................................................................... page 3-44  
Tires ................................................................................................................... page 8-32  
Light bulbs ......................................................................................................... page 8-37  
The equipment and installation position varies by vehicle  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-5  
Your Vehicle at a Glance  
Exterior Overview  
Rear  
Trunk lid ............................................................................................................ page 3-33  
Rear window antenna ........................................................................................ page 6-16  
Child safety lock ................................................................................................ page 3-32  
Outside mirror .................................................................................................... page 3-59  
Tires ................................................................................................................... page 8-32  
Light bulbs ......................................................................................................... page 8-37  
1-6  
The equipment and installation position varies by vehicle  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
2
Use of safety equipment, including seats, seat belt system, child-restraint  
systems and SRS air bags.  
Seats ............................................................................................... 2-2  
Front Seats (Manually Operated Seats) ..................................... 2-2  
Front Seats (Electrically Operated Seats) .................................. 2-4  
Rear Seat ................................................................................. 2-10  
Head Restraints ....................................................................... 2-12  
Seat Warmerí ......................................................................... 2-13  
Seat Belt Systems ........................................................................ 2-15  
Seat Belt Precautions .............................................................. 2-15  
Seat Belt .................................................................................. 2-19  
Front Seat Belt Pretensioner and Load Limiting Systems ....... 2-21  
Seat Belt Extender ................................................................... 2-23  
Seat Belt Warning Light/Beep ................................................ 2-25  
Child Restraint ............................................................................ 2-27  
Child Restraint Precautions ..................................................... 2-27  
Installing Child-Restraint Systems .......................................... 2-31  
LATCH Child-Restraint Systems ............................................ 2-37  
SRS Air Bags ............................................................................... 2-41  
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Precautions ............... 2-41  
Supplemental Restraint System Components ......................... 2-45  
How the Air Bags Work .......................................................... 2-47  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-1  
Essential Safety Equipment  
Seats  
Make sure the adjustable components  
of a seat are locked in place:  
Front Seats (Manually  
Operated Seats)  
Adjustable seats and seatbacks that  
are not securely locked are  
dangerous. In a sudden stop or  
collision, the seat or seatback could  
move, causing injury. Make sure the  
adjustable components of the seat  
are locked in place by attempting to  
slide the seat forward and backward  
and rocking the seatback.  
WARNING  
Do not modify or replace the front  
seats:  
Modifying or replacing the front seats  
such as replacing the upholstery or  
loosening any bolts is dangerous. The  
front seats contain air bag  
components essential to the  
supplemental restraint system. Such  
modifications could damage the  
supplemental restraint system and  
result in serious injury. Consult an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer if there is  
any need to remove or reinstall the  
front seats.  
qSeat Slide  
WARNING  
Adjust the driver's seat only when the  
vehicle is stopped:  
Adjusting the driver's seat while the  
vehicle is moving is dangerous. The  
driver could lose control of the vehicle  
and have an accident.  
Do not drive with damaged front seats:  
Driving with damaged front seats is  
dangerous. A collision, even one not  
strong enough to inflate the air bags,  
could damage the front seats which  
contain essential air bag  
To move a seat forward or backward, raise  
the lever and slide the seat to the desired  
position and release the lever.  
components. If there was a  
subsequent collision, an air bag may  
not deploy which could lead to  
injuries. Always have an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer inspect the front seats,  
front seat belt pretensioners and air  
bags after a collision.  
Make sure the lever returns to its original  
position and the seat is locked in place by  
attempting to push it forward and  
backward.  
2-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
Seats  
Do not drive with the seatback  
unlocked:  
All of the seatbacks play an  
qSeat Recline  
WARNING  
Do not drive with either front seat  
reclined:  
important role in your protection in a  
vehicle. Leaving the seatback  
unlocked is dangerous as it can allow  
passengers to be ejected or thrown  
around and baggage to strike  
Sitting in a reclined position while the  
vehicle is moving is dangerous  
because you do not get the full  
protection from seat belts. During  
sudden braking or a collision, you  
can slide under the lap belt and  
suffer serious internal injuries. For  
maximum protection, sit well back  
and upright.  
occupants in a sudden stop or  
collision, resulting in severe injury.  
After adjusting the seatback at any  
time, even when there are no other  
passengers, rock the seatback to  
make sure it is locked in place.  
To change the seatback angle, lean  
forward slightly while raising the lever.  
Then lean back to the desired position and  
release the lever.  
Always sit in the passenger seat  
properly with the seatback upright and  
feet on the floor:  
Your front passenger seat has weight  
sensors, sitting in the front passenger  
seat improperly out of position or  
with the seatback reclined too far  
while the vehicle is moving is  
dangerous as it can take off weight  
from the seat bottom and affect the  
weight determination of the front  
passenger sensing system. As a result  
the front passenger will not have the  
supplementary protection of the air  
bag and seat belt pretensioner, which  
could result in serious injury. Always  
sit upright against the seatback with  
your feet on the floor.  
Make sure the lever returns to its original  
position and the seatback is locked in  
place by attempting to push it forward and  
backward.  
2-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
Seats  
Front Seats (Electrically  
Operated Seats)  
CAUTION  
When returning a rear-reclined  
seatback to its upright position,  
make sure you hold onto the  
seatback with your other hand while  
operating the lever. If the seatback is  
not supported, it will flip forward  
suddenly and could cause injury.  
WARNING  
Do not modify or replace the front  
seats:  
Modifying or replacing the front seats  
such as replacing the upholstery or  
loosening any bolts is dangerous. The  
front seats contain air bag  
q
Height Adjustment (Driver's Seat)  
components essential to the  
supplemental restraint system. Such  
modifications could damage the  
supplemental restraint system and  
result in serious injury. Consult an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer if there is  
any need to remove or reinstall the  
front seats.  
By moving the seat lever up or down, the  
driver's seat bottom height can be  
adjusted.  
Up  
Do not drive with damaged front seats:  
Driving with damaged front seats is  
dangerous. A collision, even one not  
strong enough to inflate the air bags,  
could damage the front seats which  
contain essential air bag  
Down  
components. If there was a  
subsequent collision, an air bag may  
not deploy which could lead to  
injuries. Always have an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer inspect the front seats,  
front seat belt pretensioners and air  
bags after a collision.  
2-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
Seats  
qSeat Recline  
CAUTION  
Ø The seat-bottom power  
adjustment is operated by motors.  
Avoid extended operation because  
excessive use can damage the  
motors.  
Ø To prevent the battery from  
running down, avoid using the  
power adjustment when the  
engine is stopped. The adjuster  
uses a large amount of electrical  
power.  
WARNING  
Do not drive with either front seat  
reclined:  
Sitting in a reclined position while the  
vehicle is moving is dangerous  
because you do not get the full  
protection from seat belts. During  
sudden braking or a collision, you  
can slide under the lap belt and  
suffer serious internal injuries. For  
maximum protection, sit well back  
and upright.  
Ø Do not use the switch to make  
more than one adjustment at a  
time.  
Always sit in the front passenger seat  
properly with the seatback upright and  
feet on the floor:  
qSeat Slide  
Your front passenger seat has weight  
sensors, sitting in the front passenger  
seat improperly out of position or  
with the seatback reclined too far  
while the vehicle is moving is  
To slide the seat, move the slide lifter  
switch on the outside of the seat to the  
front or back and hold it. Release the  
switch at the desired position.  
dangerous as it can take off weight  
from the seat bottom and affect the  
weight determination of the front  
passenger sensing system. As a result  
the front passenger will not have the  
supplementary protection of the air  
bag and seat belt pretensioner, which  
could result in serious injury. Always  
sit upright against the seatback with  
your feet on the floor.  
2-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
Seats  
Change the seatback angle by pressing the  
front or rear side of the reclining switch.  
Release the switch at the desired position.  
qSeat Position Memory (Driver's  
Seat)í  
One-touch seat position programming and  
activation is available on the driver's seat.  
q
Height Adjustment (Driver's Seat)  
The seat height can be adjusted by  
moving the switch up or down.  
CAUTION  
When activating the seat position, do  
not place your hands or fingers  
around the seat bottom. The seat  
moves to the desired position  
automatically, and if your hands or  
fingers are placed around the seat  
bottom, it could cause injury.  
Set button  
Programming of the driver's seat positions  
is possible using the following functions:  
l
Programming buttons 1, 2, or 3 and the  
set button.  
2-6  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
Seats  
l
Operation using the advanced key/  
retractable type key  
Setting the driver's seat to a pre-  
programmed position  
Programmed seat positions can activated  
using the following functions:  
There are two methods for setting the  
driver's seat to a pre-programmed  
l
Programming buttons 1, 2, or 3.  
Operation using advanced keyless  
position. For example, the type A method  
can be used before sitting in the seat and  
while the driver's door is open, and the  
type B method can be used after getting in  
the vehicle with the driver's door closed.  
l
functions/keyless entry system  
NOTE  
Individual seat positions can be programmed  
to the three available programming buttons on  
the side of the driver's seat, plus one seat  
position for each advanced key/retractable  
type key used with the vehicle.  
TYPE A  
When the ignition switched off and the  
driver's door is open, press the  
programming button 1, 2, or 3 for the  
desired seating position.  
Operation using the seat-side buttons  
Programming  
NOTE  
In the following cases, the seat position set  
function cancels:  
Park the vehicle in a safe location before  
performing the seat position  
programming. (Vehicle must be stopped)  
l
Any of the seat adjustment switches are  
operated.  
l
The set switch is pressed.  
A programming button 1, 2, or 3 is pressed.  
The vehicle starts moving.  
Vehicle locking/unlocking is done using the  
transmitter.  
Vehicle unlocking is done by pressing the  
request switch on a front door while the  
advanced key is being carried.  
Vehicle unlocking is done by touching the  
1. Adjust the seat to the desired position.  
For each seat position adjustment  
method refer to the following pages:  
Seat Slide (page 2-5)  
Seat Recline (page 2-5)  
Height Adjustment (page 2-6)  
l
l
l
l
2. Press the desired programming button  
1, 2, or 3 while pressing the set button  
until a beep sound is heard.  
The button is programmed after a beep  
sound is heard. Other buttons can be  
programmed using the same procedure.  
l
sensor area on the backside of the front  
door handle while the advanced key is  
being carried.  
TYPE B  
NOTE  
When the ignition is switched ON or the  
driver's door is closed, press and hold the  
desired programming button 1, 2, or 3.  
Vehicle maintenance or other reasons  
requiring the vehicle battery to be  
disconnected will result in the seat position  
memory being erased.  
In this case, re-program the seat positions.  
2-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
Seats  
NOTE  
After the following conditions have been  
met, operate the seat and the advanced  
key/retractable type key to program the  
seat positions.  
In the following cases, the seat position set  
function cancels:  
l
Any of the seat adjustment switches are  
l
operated.  
The ignition switched off  
l
The set switch is pressed.  
(The auxiliary key/retractable type key  
is removed from the ignition switch)  
The driver's door is open  
l
The vehicle starts moving.  
l
Operation using the advanced key/  
retractable type key  
1. Adjust the seat to the desired position.  
For each seat position adjustment  
method, refer to the following pages:  
Seat Slide (page 2-5)  
With advanced key  
Lock button  
Seat Recline (page 2-5)  
Height Adjustment (page 2-6)  
Unlock button  
2. Press and hold the unlock button on the  
advanced key/retractable type key  
while pressing the set button until a  
beep sound is heard.  
The advanced key/retractable type key  
is programmed after a beep sound is  
heard.  
Seat position activation  
With retractable type key  
With the ignition switched off, unlock the  
doors using any of the following methods  
and open the driver's door within about 40  
seconds to set the driver's seat to a pre-  
programmed position.  
Unlock button  
Lock button  
l
Press the unlock switch on the  
advanced key/retractable type key.  
Touch the sensor area on the backside  
l
of the front door handle while the  
advanced key is being carried.  
Operation  
indicator light  
Programming  
One seat position can be programmed into  
each advanced key/retractable type key.  
2-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
Seats  
NOTE  
qLumbar Support Adjustment  
(Driver's Seat)  
If any of the following occurs, the seat position  
activation function cancels:  
The amount of lumbar support can be  
adjusted by rotating dial.  
l
Press the lock/unlock button while the key  
is not inserted into the ignition switch or  
the key slot.  
l
A seat adjustment switch is operated.  
l
The vehicle moves or starts to move.  
l
The selected programming button 1, 2, or 3  
or the set button is pressed again.  
l
Press the request switch on a front door  
while the advanced key is being carried.  
l
Touch the sensor area on the backside of  
the front door handle while the advanced  
key is being carried.  
l
The set switch is pressed.  
Erasing memory  
After the following conditions have been  
met, press the lock button on the  
advanced key/retractable type key while  
pressing the set button until a beep sound  
is heard.  
l
The ignition switch is in the LOCK  
position  
(The auxiliary key/retractable type key  
is removed from the ignition switch)  
The driver's door is open  
l
NOTE  
Memory will also be erased if any of the  
following operations are performed:  
l
The advanced key/retractable type key code  
has been changed.  
Refer to Immobilizer System (with  
Advanced Key) on page 3-50.  
Refer to Immobilizer System (without  
Advanced Key) on page 3-53.  
l
The vehicle battery is disconnected for  
vehicle maintenance or other reasons.  
2-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
Seats  
Always leave your car locked and keep  
the car keys safely away from children:  
Leaving your car unlocked or the  
keys in reach of children is  
Rear Seat  
WARNING  
Make sure luggage and cargo is  
secured before driving:  
dangerous. Children who find their  
way into the trunk through an  
unlocked rear seatback or an open  
trunk can become accidentally locked  
in the trunk. This could result in  
death or brain damage from heat  
prostration, particularly in the  
summer. Always lock the doors and  
the trunk, and as an added measure,  
keep the rear seatbacks locked,  
whether you have children in your  
home or not.  
Not securing cargo while driving is  
dangerous as it could move or be  
crushed during sudden braking or a  
collision and cause injury.  
Do not drive with the seatback  
unlocked:  
All of the seatbacks play an  
important role in your protection in a  
vehicle. Leaving the seatback  
unlocked is dangerous as it can allow  
passengers to be ejected or thrown  
around and baggage to strike  
occupants in a sudden stop or  
collision, resulting in severe injury.  
After returning the seatback at any  
time, even when there are no other  
passengers, rock the seatback to  
make sure it is locked in place.  
Do not leave the key in your vehicle  
with children and keep them in a place  
where your children will not find or  
play with them:  
Leaving children in a vehicle with the  
key is dangerous. This could result in  
someone being badly injured or even  
killed. Children may find these new  
kinds of keys to be an interesting toy  
to play with and could cause the  
power windows or other controls to  
operate, or even make the vehicle  
move.  
Never give the car keys to children and  
do not allow them to play in the  
vehicle:  
Playing with the folding rear seats is  
dangerous.  
NOTE  
When returning a rear seat to its original  
position, also replace the seat belt to its  
normal position. Verify that the seat belt pulls  
out and retracts.  
2-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
Seats  
qSplit-Folding Rear Seatback  
CAUTION  
The seatbacks can be folded down to  
provide more space in the trunk.  
Be careful of the following when  
using the straps (in trunk):  
On a downward slope, the seatback  
could flip forward faster than on a  
flat surface.  
To fold down the seatbacks  
WARNING  
Always remove the child-restraint  
system from the rear seat before  
operating the straps (in trunk) for the  
rear seat:  
1. After checking that the rear seats are  
clear, open the trunk and pull the straps  
(in trunk) on the left and right sides of  
the trunk.  
Operating (pulling) the straps (in  
trunk) while a rear-facing child-  
restraint system is in the rear seat is  
dangerous. It could cause injury to a  
child seated in the child-restraint  
system when the seatback suddenly  
flips forward.  
Make sure there is nobody in the rear  
seat area before operating (pulling) the  
straps (in trunk):  
Not checking the rear seat area for  
persons before folding the seatbacks  
down with the straps (in trunk) is  
dangerous. The rear seat area is  
difficult to see from the rear of the  
vehicle. Operating (pulling) the straps  
(in trunk) without checking could  
cause injury to a person when a  
seatback suddenly flips forward.  
2. Open the rear door and fold the rear  
seatbacks forward.  
To return the seatbacks to the upright  
position  
1. Lift the seatbacks upright.  
2. Pull on the top of the seatbacks from  
inside the vehicle to make sure they are  
locked.  
CAUTION  
Before folding the seatbacks down  
with the straps (in trunk), make sure  
there is no cup in a rear cup holder.  
Folding the seatbacks with the straps  
(in trunk) while a cup is in the cup  
holder could soil or damage the seat  
bottom and seatback.  
WARNING  
Always make sure the seat belts are  
fully pulled out from under the  
seatbacks:  
A seat belt caught under a seatback  
after the seatback is returned to its  
upright position is dangerous. In a  
collision or sudden stop, the seat belt  
cannot provide adequate protection.  
2-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
Seats  
qArmrest  
Head Restraints  
The rear armrest in the center of the rear  
seatback can be used (no occupant in the  
center seat) or placed upright.  
Head restraints are intended to help  
protect you and the passengers from neck  
injury.  
WARNING  
Always drive with the head restraints  
installed when seats are being used  
and make sure they are properly  
adjusted:  
Armrest  
Driving with the head restraints  
adjusted too low or removed is  
dangerous. With no support behind  
your head, your neck could be  
seriously injured in a collision.  
Height adjustment  
To raise a head restraint, pull it up to the  
desired position.  
To lower the head restraint, press the stop-  
catch release, then push the head restraint  
down.  
Adjust the head restraint so that the top is  
even with the top of the passenger's ears,  
never the passenger's neck to prevent  
injury.  
Front seat  
2-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
Seats  
Rear seat  
Seat Warmerí  
Press the HI or LO side of the seat warmer  
switch with the ignition is switched ON.  
The indicator on the switch illuminates  
and the seat warms up.  
If a higher temperature is preferred, press  
the HI side of the switch, and for a lower  
temperature, press the LO side.  
When not using the seat warmer, set the  
switch to neutral with neither HI or LO  
depressed.  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-13  
Essential Safety Equipment  
Seats  
NOTE  
WARNING  
Use the seat warmer when the engine is  
running, and do not continue to use it for a  
long period of time.  
The temperature of the seat warmer cannot be  
adjusted beyond High and Low because the  
seat warmer is controlled by a thermostat.  
Ø Be careful when using the seat  
warmer. The heat from the seat  
warmer may be too hot for some  
people, as indicated below, and  
could cause a low-temperature  
burn.  
Ø
Infants, small babies, elderly  
people, and physically  
challenged people  
People with delicate skin  
People who are excessively  
fatigued  
People who are drunk  
People who have taken sleep-  
inducing medicine such as  
sleeping pills or cold medicine  
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø Do not use the seat warmer with  
anything having high moisture-  
retention ability such as a blanket  
or cushion on the seat. The seat  
may be heated excessively and  
cause a low-temperature burn.  
Ø Do not use the seat warmer even  
when taking a short nap in the  
vehicle. The seat may be heated  
excessively and cause a low-  
temperature burn.  
Ø Do not place heavy objects with  
sharp projections on the seat, or  
insert needles or pins into it. This  
could cause the seat to become  
excessively heated and result in  
injury from a minor burn.  
CAUTION  
Do not use organic solvents to clean  
the seat. It may damage the seat  
surface and the heater.  
2-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
Seat Belt Systems  
Seat Belt Precautions  
Seat belts help to decrease the possibility of severe injury during accidents and sudden  
stops. Mazda recommends that the driver and all passengers always wear seat belts.  
All of the seat belt retractors are designed to keep the lap/shoulder belts out of the way  
when not in use.  
The driver's seat belt has no provisions for child-restraint systems and has only an  
emergency locking mode. The driver may wear it comfortably, and it will lock during a  
collision.  
However, the front passenger's seat and all rear lap/shoulder belt retractors operate in two  
modes: emergency locking mode, and for child-restraint systems, automatic locking mode.  
While we recommend you put all children in the rear seats, if you must use the front  
passenger seat for a child, slide the front passenger seat as far back as possible and make  
sure any child-restraint system is secured properly.  
2-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
Seat Belt Systems  
WARNING  
Always wear your seat belt and make sure all occupants are properly restrained:  
Not wearing a seat belt is extremely dangerous. During a collision, occupants not  
wearing seat belts could hit someone or things inside the vehicle or even be thrown  
out of the vehicle. They could be seriously injured or even killed. In the same  
collision, occupants wearing seat belts would be much safer.  
Do not wear twisted seat belts:  
Twisted seat belts are dangerous. In a collision, the full width of the belt is not  
available to absorb the impact. This puts more force on the bones beneath the belt,  
which could cause serious injury or death.  
Never use one seat belt on more than one person at a time:  
Using one seat belt for more than one person at a time is dangerous. A seat belt  
used in this way cannot spread the impact forces properly and the two passengers  
could be crushed together and seriously injured or even killed. Never use one belt for  
more than one person at a time and always operate the vehicle with each occupant  
properly restrained.  
Do not operate a vehicle with a damaged seat belt:  
Using a damaged seat belt is dangerous. An accident could damage the belt  
webbing of the seat belt in use. A damaged seat belt cannot provide adequate  
protection in a collision. Have an Authorized Mazda Dealer inspect all seat belt  
systems in use during an accident before they are used again.  
Have your seat belts changed immediately if the pretensioner or load limiter has  
been expended:  
One or both front air bags may deploy, and the corresponding pretensioner(s) may  
also deploy at the same time. Like the air bags, the seat belt pretensioners will only  
function once. While it is safer to use a post-crash (a seat belt that was used in an  
accident) than no seat belt at all, using a seat belt with an expended pretensioner or  
load limiter loaded reduces the safety available to you. If the seat belt pretensioners  
are not replaced, the risk of injury in a collision will increase. Expended seat belt  
pretensioners and air bags must be replaced after any collision which caused them  
to deploy. Additionally, the load limiter will only limit loads on the chest once in a  
collision and this is another reason to have the front seat belts inspected. Always  
have an Authorized Mazda Dealer inspect the seat belt pretensioners and air bags  
after any collision.  
2-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
Seat Belt Systems  
CAUTION  
Belt retraction may become difficult if the belts and rings are soiled, so try to keep  
them clean. For more details about cleaning the seat belts, refer to “Cleaning the  
Lap/Shoulder Belt Webbing” (page 8-57).  
qPregnant Women and Persons with Serious Medical Conditions  
Pregnant women should always wear seat belts. Ask your doctor for specific  
recommendations.  
The lap belt should be worn SNUGLYAND AS LOWAS POSSIBLE OVER THE HIPS.  
The shoulder belt should be worn across your shoulder properly, but never across the  
stomach area.  
Persons with serious medical conditions also should wear seat belts. Check with your  
doctor for any special instructions regarding specific medical conditions.  
qEmergency Locking Mode  
In the emergency locking mode, the belt remains comfortable on the occupant and the  
retractor will lock in position during a collision. When the seat belt is fastened, it will  
always be in the emergency locking mode until it is switched to automatic locking mode by  
pulling it all the way out to its full length. If the belt feels tight and hinders comfortable  
movement while the vehicle is stopped or in motion, it may be in the automatic locking  
mode because the belt has been pulled too far out. To return the belt to the more  
comfortable emergency locking mode, wait until the vehicle has stopped in a safe, level  
area, retract the belt fully to convert it back to emergency locking mode and then extend it  
around you again.  
If the belt is locked and cannot be pulled out, retract the belt once, and then try pulling it  
out slowly. If this fails, pull the belt strongly one time and loosen, then pull it out again  
slowly.  
2-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
Seat Belt Systems  
qAutomatic Locking Mode  
Always use the automatic locking mode to keep the child-restraint system from shifting to  
an unsafe position in the event of an accident. To enable seat belt automatic locking mode,  
pull it all the way out and connect it as instructed on the child-restraint system. It will  
retract down to the child-restraint system and stay locked on it. See the section on child  
restraint (page 2-27).  
2-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
Seat Belt Systems  
Seat Belt  
WARNING  
Positioning the Shoulder Portion of the  
Seat Belt:  
qFastening the Seat Belt  
Improper positioning of the shoulder  
portion of the seat belt is dangerous.  
Always make sure the shoulder  
portion of the seat belt is positioned  
across your shoulder and near your  
neck, but never under your arm, on  
your neck, or on your upper arm.  
1. Grasp the seat belt tongue.  
2. Slowly pull out the lap/shoulder belt.  
Lap/shoulder  
belt  
4. Position the lap belt as low as possible,  
not on the abdominal area, then adjust  
the shoulder belt so that it fits snugly  
against your body.  
Seat belt  
tongue  
3. Insert the seat belt tongue into the seat  
belt buckle until you hear a click  
sound.  
Take up slack  
Keep low on  
hip bone  
Too high  
Seat belt tongue  
WARNING  
Positioning the Lap Portion of the Seat  
Belt:  
Seat belt  
buckle  
The lap portion of the seat belt worn  
too high is dangerous. In a collision,  
this would concentrate the impact  
force directly on the abdominal area,  
causing serious injury. Wear the lap  
portion of the belt snugly and as low  
as possible.  
2-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
Seat Belt Systems  
qUnfastening the Seat Belt  
qFront Shoulder Belt Adjuster  
Depress the button on the seat belt buckle.  
If the belt does not fully retract, pull it out  
and check for kinks or twists. Then make  
sure it remains untwisted as it retracts.  
Adjust the height of the shoulder belt if  
the seat belt touches your neck, or if it  
crosses your arm instead of your shoulder.  
To raise the shoulder belt adjuster, push  
the adjuster up. To lower the shoulder belt  
adjuster, pull the adjuster and slide it  
down. Make sure the adjuster is locked.  
To raise  
To lower  
Button  
NOTE  
If a belt does not fully retract, inspect it for  
kinks and twists. If it is still not retracting  
properly, have it inspected at an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer.  
WARNING  
Positioning the Shoulder Portion of the  
Seat Belt:  
Improper positioning of the shoulder  
portion of the seat belt is dangerous.  
Always make sure the shoulder  
portion of the seat belt is positioned  
across your shoulder and near your  
neck, but never under your arm, on  
your neck, or on your upper arm.  
2-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
Seat Belt Systems  
Front Seat Belt Pretensioner  
and Load Limiting Systems  
WARNING  
Wear seat belts only as recommended  
in this owner's manual:  
For optimum protection, the driver and  
front passenger seat belts are equipped  
with pretensioner and load limiting  
systems. For both these systems to work  
properly you must wear the seat belt  
properly.  
Incorrect positioning of the driver and  
front passenger seat belts is  
dangerous. Without proper  
positioning, the pretensioner and  
load limiting systems cannot provide  
adequate protection in an accident  
and this could result in serious injury.  
For more details about wearing seat  
belts, refer to “Fastening the seat  
belts” (page 2-19).  
Pretensioners:  
In moderate or severe frontal or near-  
frontal accidents, the front air bag and  
pretensioner systems deploy  
simultaneously. The front seat belt  
retractors remove slack quickly as the air  
bags are expanding.  
Have your seat belts changed  
immediately if the pretensioner or load  
limiter has been expended:  
One or both front air bags may  
deploy, and the corresponding  
Load limiter:  
The load limiting system releases belt  
webbing in a controlled manner to reduce  
belt force on the occupant's chest. While  
the most severe load on a seat belt occurs  
in frontal collisions, the load limiter has  
an automatic mechanical function and can  
activate in any accident mode with  
sufficient occupant movement.  
Even if the pretensioners have not fired,  
the load limiting function must be  
checked by an Authorized Mazda Dealer  
after any collision.  
pretensioner(s) may also deploy at  
the same time. Like the air bags, the  
seat belt pretensioners will only  
function once. While it is safer to use  
a post-crash (a seat belt that was  
used in an accident) than no seat belt  
at all, using a seat belt with an  
expended pretensioner or load limiter  
loaded reduces the safety available to  
you. If the seat belt pretensioners are  
not replaced, the risk of injury in a  
collision will increase. Expended seat  
belt pretensioners and air bags must  
be replaced after any collision which  
caused them to deploy. Additionally,  
the load limiter will only limit loads  
on the chest once in a collision and  
this is another reason to have the  
front seat belts inspected. Always  
have an Authorized Mazda Dealer  
inspect the seat belt pretensioners  
and air bags after any collision.  
2-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
Seat Belt Systems  
Do not modify the components or  
wiring, or use electronic testing devices  
on the pretensioner system:  
q
Air Bag/Front Seat Belt  
Pretensioner System Warning Light  
Modifying the components or wiring  
of the pretensioner system, including  
the use of electronic testing devices is  
dangerous. You could accidentally  
activate it or make it inoperable  
which would prevent it from  
activating in an accident. The  
occupants or repairers could be  
seriously injured.  
If the air bag/front seat belt pretensioner  
system is working properly, the warning  
light illuminates when the ignition is  
switched ON or after the engine is  
cranked. The warning light turns off after  
a specified period of time.  
Properly dispose of the pretensioner  
system:  
Improper disposal of the pretensioner  
system or a vehicle with non-  
deactivated pretensioners is  
A system malfunction is indicated if the  
warning light constantly flashes,  
constantly illuminates or does not  
illuminate at all when the ignition is  
switched ON. If any of these occur,  
consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer as  
soon as possible. The system may not  
work in an accident.  
dangerous. Unless all safety  
procedures are followed, injury could  
result. Ask an Authorized Mazda  
Dealer how to safely dispose of the  
pretensioner system or how to scrap  
a pretensioner-equipped vehicle.  
NOTE  
l
WARNING  
The pretensioner system will activate in a  
moderate or greater frontal or near-frontal  
collision. The pretensioner system for the  
front passenger is designed to only deploy  
in accordance with the total seated weight  
on the front passenger seat. It will not  
activate in most rollovers, side or rear  
impacts.  
Never tamper with the air bag/  
pretensioner systems and always have  
an Authorized Mazda Dealer perform  
all servicing and repairs:  
Self-servicing or tampering with the  
systems is dangerous. An air bag/  
pretensioner could accidentally  
activate or become disabled causing  
serious injury or death.  
l
Some smoke (non-toxic gas) will be  
released when the air bags and  
pretensioners deploy. This does not indicate  
a fire. This gas normally has no effect on  
occupants, however, those with sensitive  
skin may experience light skin irritation. If  
residue from the deployment of the air bags  
or the front pretensioner system gets on the  
skin or in the eyes, wash it off as soon as  
possible.  
2-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
Seat Belt Systems  
q
Air Bag/Front Seat Belt  
Pretensioner System Warning Beep  
Seat Belt Extender  
If your seat belt is not long enough, even  
when fully extended, a seat belt extender  
may be available to you at no charge from  
your Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
This extender will be only for you and for  
the particular vehicle and seat. Even if it  
plugs into other seat belts, it may not hold  
in the critical moment of a crash.  
When ordering an extender, only order  
one that provides the necessary additional  
length to fasten the seat belt properly.  
Please contact your Authorized Mazda  
Dealer for more information.  
If a malfunction is detected in both the air  
bag/front seat belt pretensioner system  
and the warning light, a warning beep  
sound will be heard for about 1 minute.  
After that, the one-minute beep will be  
repeated every 30 minutes.  
Have your vehicle inspected at an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as  
possible.  
WARNING  
Do not drive the vehicle with the air  
bag/front seat belt pretensioner system  
warning beep sounding:  
Driving the vehicle with the air bag/  
front seat belt pretensioner system  
warning beep sounding is dangerous.  
In a collision, the air bags and the  
front seat belt pretensioner system  
will not deploy and this could result  
in death or serious injury.  
Contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer  
to have the vehicle inspected as soon  
as possible.  
2-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
Seat Belt Systems  
NOTE  
WARNING  
When not in use, remove the seat belt extender  
and store it in the vehicle. If the seat belt  
extender is left connected, the seat belt  
extender might get damaged as it will not  
retract with the rest of the seat belt and can  
easily fall out of the door when not in use and  
be damaged. In addition, the seat belt warning  
light will not illuminate and function properly.  
Do not use a seat belt extender unless  
it is necessary:  
Using a seat belt extender when not  
necessary is dangerous. The seat belt  
will be too long and not fit properly.  
In an accident, the seat belt will not  
provide adequate protection and you  
could be seriously injured. Only use  
the extender when it is required to  
fasten the seat belt properly.  
Do not use an improper extender:  
Using a seat belt extender that is for  
another person or a different vehicle  
or seat is dangerous. The seat belt  
will not provide adequate protection  
and the user could be seriously  
injured in an accident. Only use the  
extender provided for you and for the  
particular vehicle and seat. NEVER  
use the extender in a different vehicle  
or seat. If you sell your Mazda, do  
not leave your seat belt extender in  
the vehicle. It could be used  
accidentally by the new owner of the  
vehicle. After removing the seat belt  
extender, discard it. Never use the  
seat belt extender in any other  
vehicle you may own in the future.  
Do not use an extender that is too  
long:  
Using an extender that is too long is  
dangerous. The seat belt will not fit  
properly. In an accident, the seat belt  
will not provide adequate protection  
and you could be seriously injured.  
Do not use the extender or choose  
one shorter in length if the distance  
between the extender's buckle and  
the center of the user's body is less  
than 15 cm (6 in).  
2-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
Seat Belt Systems  
Driver seated/Front passenger not  
seated  
Seat Belt Warning Light/Beep  
The belt minder is a supplemental  
warning to the seat belt warning function.  
If the driver's seat belt is not fastened  
when the ignition is switched ON, the  
warning light/beep operates to give you  
further reminders according to the chart  
below.  
The seat belt warning light illuminates  
and a beep sound will be heard if the  
driver's seat belt is not fastened when the  
ignition is switched ON.  
Vehicle speed  
Between 0 ― 20  
km/h  
(0 ― 12 mph)  
20 km/h  
(12 mph) or  
more  
Condition  
Seat belt  
Conditions of operation  
Indicator  
Beep  
Condition  
Result  
The warning light  
The driver's seat belt is not illuminates for about 1  
fastened when the ignition is minute and a beep  
switched ON.  
: Fastened  
sound will be heard  
for about 6 seconds.  
: Unfastened  
: Illuminated  
: Flashing  
: Beep  
The driver's seat belt is  
fastened while the warning  
light and the beep sound are  
activated.  
The warning light  
turns off and the beep  
sound stops.  
Once the beep sound is heard, it continues  
sounding even if the vehicle speed lowers  
to 20 km/h (12 mph) or less until the  
seatbelt is fastened or the beep sound  
period has passed.  
The warning light will  
not illuminate and the  
beep sound will not be  
heard.  
The driver's seat belt is  
fastened before the ignition  
is switched ON.  
qBelt Minder  
NOTE  
The belt minder can be deactivated. Consult an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer to deactivate or  
restore the seat belt minder.  
2-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
Seat Belt Systems  
Driver seated/Front passenger seated  
The seat belt warning function reminds  
the front passenger to fasten the seat belt  
according to the chart below.  
Vehicle speed  
Between 0 ― 20  
km/h  
(0 ― 12 mph)  
20 km/h  
(12 mph) or  
more  
Condition  
Seat belt  
(Driver)  
Seat belt  
(Passenger)  
Indicator  
Beep  
: Fastened  
: Unfastened  
: Illuminated  
: Flashing  
: Beep  
Placing heavy items on the front  
passenger seat may cause the front  
passenger seat belt warning function to  
operate depending on the weight of the  
item.  
Once the beep sound is heard, it continues  
sounding even if the vehicle speed lowers  
to 20 km/h (12 mph) or less until the  
seatbelt is fastened or the beep sound  
period has passed.  
NOTE  
l
To allow the front passenger seat weight  
sensor to function properly, do not place  
and sit on an additional seat cushion on the  
front passenger seat. The sensor may not  
function properly because the additional  
seat cushion could cause sensor  
interference.  
l
When a small child sits on the front  
passenger seat, it is possible that neither  
the warning light nor the warning beep  
operate.  
2-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
Child Restraint  
Child Restraint Precautions  
Mazda strongly urges the use of child-restraint systems for children small enough to use  
them.  
You are required by law to use a child-restraint system for children in the U.S. and Canada.  
Check your local and state or provincial laws for specific requirements regarding the safety  
of children riding in your vehicle.  
Whatever child-restraint system you consider, please pick the appropriate one for the age  
and size of the child, obey the law and follow the instructions that come with the individual  
child-restraint system.  
A child who has outgrown child-restraint systems should sit in the rear and use seat belts,  
both lap and shoulder. If the shoulder belt crosses the neck or face, move the child closer to  
the center of the vehicle in the outboard seats, and towards the buckle on the right if the  
child is seated on the center seat.  
Statistics confirm that the rear seat is the best place for all children up to 12 years of age,  
and more so with a supplemental restraint system (air bags).  
A rear-facing child-restraint system should NEVER be used on the front seat with the air  
bag system activated. The front passenger's seat is also the least preferred seat for other  
child-restraint systems.  
To reduce the chance of injuries caused by deployment of the front passenger air bag, your  
vehicle is equipped with the front passenger seat weight sensors. These sensors deactivate  
the front passenger front and side air bags and also the front passenger seat belt  
pretensioner system when the total seated weight on the front passenger seat is less than  
approximately 30 kg (66 lb).  
When an infant or small child sits on the front passenger seat, the system shuts off the front  
passenger air bag, so make sure the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light  
illuminates.  
Even if the front passenger air bag is shut off, Mazda strongly recommends that children be  
properly restrained and child-restraint systems of all kinds are properly secured on the rear  
seats which are the best place for children.  
For more details, refer to “Front passenger seat weight sensors” (page 2-47).  
2-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
Child Restraint  
WARNING  
Use the correct size child-restraint system:  
For effective protection in vehicle accidents and sudden stops, a child must be  
properly restrained using a seat belt or child-restraint system depending on age and  
size. If not, the child could be seriously injured or even killed in an accident.  
Follow the manufacturer's instructions and always keep the child-restraint system  
buckled down:  
An unsecured child-restraint system is dangerous. In a sudden stop or a collision it  
could move causing serious injury or death to the child or other occupants. Make  
sure any child-restraint system is properly secured in place according to the child-  
restraint system manufacturer's instructions. When not in use, remove it from the  
vehicle or fasten it with a seat belt, or latch it down to BOTH LATCH lower anchors  
for LATCH child-restraint systems, and attach the corresponding tether anchor.  
Always secure a child in a proper child-restraint system:  
Holding a child in your arms while the vehicle is moving is extremely dangerous. No  
matter how strong the person may be, he or she cannot hold onto a child in a  
sudden stop or collision and it could result in serious injury or death to the child or  
other occupants. Even in a moderate accident, the child may be exposed to air bag  
forces that could result in serious injury or death to the child, or the child may be  
slammed into an adult, causing injury to both child and adult.  
Never use a rear-facing child-restraint system in the front seat with an air bag that  
could deploy:  
Rear-facing child-restraint systems on the front seat are particularly dangerous.  
The child-restraint system can be hit by a deploying air bag and moved violently  
backward resulting in serious injury or death to the child.  
2-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
Child Restraint  
Do not install a front-facing child-restraint system on the front passenger seat unless  
it is unavoidable:  
In a collision, the force of a deploying air bag could cause serious injury or death to  
the child. If installing a front-facing child-restraint system on the front passenger  
seat is unavoidable, move the front passenger seat as far back as possible.  
Seating a child in a child-restraint system on the front passenger seat is dangerous:  
Your vehicle is equipped with front passenger seat weight sensors. Even with front  
passenger seat weight sensors, if you must use the front passenger seat to seat a  
child, using a child-restraint system on the front passenger seat under the following  
conditions increases the danger of the front passenger air bag deploying and could  
result in serious injury or death to the child.  
Ø The total seated weight of the child with the child-restraint system on the front  
passenger seat is approximately 30 kg (66 lb) or more with a child in the child-  
restraint system.  
Ø Luggage or other items are placed on the seat with the child in the child-restraint  
system.  
Ø A rear passenger or luggage pushing or pulling down on the front passenger  
seatback.  
Ø A rear passenger puts their feet on the front seat rails.  
Ø Luggage or other items are placed on the seatback or hung on the head restraint.  
Ø Heavy items are placed in the seatback map pocket.  
Ø The seat is washed.  
Ø Liquids are spilled on the seat.  
Ø The front passenger seat is moved backward, pushing into luggage or other items  
placed behind it.  
Ø The front passenger seatback contacts the rear seat.  
Ø Luggage or other items are placed between the front passenger seat and driver  
seat.  
Ø Any accessories increasing the total seated weight on the front passenger seat are  
attached to the front passenger seat.  
The designated positions with seat belts on the rear seats are the safest places for  
children. Always use seat belts and child restraints.  
2-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
Child Restraint  
Do not allow a child or anyone to lean over or against the side window of a vehicle  
with side and curtain air bags:  
It is dangerous to allow anyone to lean over or against the side window, the area of  
the front passenger seat, the front and rear window pillars and the roof edge along  
both sides from which the side and curtain air bags deploy, even if a child-restraint  
system is used. The impact of inflation from a side or curtain air bag could cause  
serious injury or death to an out of position child. Furthermore, leaning over or  
against the front door could block the side and curtain air bags and eliminate the  
advantages of supplemental protection. With the front air bag and the additional  
side air bag that comes out of the front seat, the rear seat is always a better location  
for children. Take special care not to allow a child to lean over or against the side  
window, even if the child is seated in a child-restraint system.  
Never use one seat belt on more than one person at a time:  
Using one seat belt for more than one person at a time is dangerous. A seat belt  
used in this way cannot spread the impact forces properly and the two passengers  
could be crushed together and seriously injured or even killed. Never use one belt for  
more than one person at a time and always operate the vehicle with each occupant  
properly restrained.  
CAUTION  
A seat belt or child-restraint system can become very hot in a closed vehicle during  
warm weather. To avoid burning yourself or a child, check them before you or your  
child touches them.  
NOTE  
Your Mazda is equipped with LATCH lower anchors for attachment of specially designed LATCH  
child-restraint systems in the rear seat. When using these anchors to secure a child-restraint system,  
refer to “LATCH Child-Restraint Systems” (page 2-37).  
2-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
Child Restraint  
qRear Seat Child-Restraint System  
Installation  
Installing Child-Restraint  
Systems  
Follow these instructions when using a  
child-restraint system, unless you are  
attaching a LATCH-equipped child-  
restraint system to the rear LATCH lower  
anchors. Refer to “LATCH Child-  
Restraint Systems” (page 2-37).  
Accident statistics reveal that a child is  
safer in the rear seat. The front passenger's  
seat is clearly the worst choice for any  
child under 12, and with rear-facing child-  
restraint systems it is clearly unsafe due to  
air bags.  
NOTE  
Follow the child-restraint system  
Some child-restraint systems now come  
with tethers and therefore must be  
installed on the seats that take tethers to  
be effective. In your Mazda, tethered  
child-restraint systems can only be  
accommodated in the three positions on  
the rear seat.  
manufacturer's instructions carefully. If you  
are not sure whether you have a LATCH  
system or tether, check in the child-restraint  
system manufacturer's instructions and follow  
them accordingly. Depending on the type of  
child-restraint system, it may use LATCH  
system instead of seat belts or if the belt goes  
across the child's chest, may recommend  
against using automatic locking mode.  
Even if your vehicle is equipped with  
front passenger seat weight sensors (page  
2-47), which automatically deactivates the  
front passenger air bag, a rear seat is the  
safest place for a child of any age or size.  
1. Raise the head restraint to the top  
locked position (except center seat  
position).  
Refer to Head restraints on page 2-12.  
Some child-restraint systems also employ  
specially designed LATCH attachments;  
refer to “LATCH Child-Restraint  
Systems” (page 2-37).  
2. Secure the child-restraint system with  
the lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt.  
See the manufacturer's instructions on  
the child-restraint system for belt  
routing instructions.  
WARNING  
Tethered Child-Restraint Systems Work  
Only on Tether-Equipped Rear Seats:  
Installation of a tether equipped  
child-restraint system in the front  
passenger's seat defeats the safety  
design of the system and will result in  
an increased chance of serious injury  
if the child-restraint system goes  
forward without benefit of being  
tethered.  
Place tether equipped child-restraint  
systems where there are tether  
anchors.  
2-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
Child Restraint  
3. To get the retractor into the automatic  
locking mode, pull the shoulder belt  
portion of the seat belt until the entire  
length of the belt is out of the retractor.  
NOTE  
Inspect this function before each use of the  
child-restraint system. You should not be able  
to pull the shoulder belt out of the retractor  
while the system is in the automatic locking  
mode. When you remove the child-restraint  
system, be sure the belt fully retracts to return  
the system to emergency locking mode before  
occupants use the seat belts.  
5. If your child-restraint system requires  
the use of a tether strap, refer to the  
manufacturer's instructions to hook and  
tighten the tether strap (except center  
position).  
Anchor bracket location  
4. Push the child-restraint system firmly  
into the vehicle seat. Be sure the belt  
retracts as snugly as possible. A  
clicking noise from the retractor will be  
heard during retraction if the system is  
in the automatic locking mode. If the  
belt does not lock the seat down tight,  
repeat this step.  
Tether strap position  
Tether  
strap  
Anchor  
bracket  
2-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
Child Restraint  
qIf You Must Use the Front Seat  
for Children  
WARNING  
Use the tether and tether anchor only  
for a child-restraint system:  
If you cannot put all children in the rear  
seat, at least put the smallest children in  
the rear and be sure the largest child up  
front uses the shoulder belt over the  
shoulder.  
NEVER put a rear-facing child-restraint  
system on the front passenger seat, even  
with a seat weight sensor equipped  
vehicle.  
This seat is also not set up for tethered  
child-restraint systems, put them in one of  
the rear seat positions set up with tether  
anchors.  
Likewise the LATCH child-restraint  
system cannot be secured in the front  
passenger's seat and should be used in the  
rear seat.  
Do not allow anyone to sleep against the  
side window if you have an optional side  
and curtain air bag, it could cause serious  
injuries to an out of position occupant. As  
children more often sleep in cars, it is  
better to put them in the rear seat. If  
installing the child-restraint system on the  
front seat is unavoidable, follow these  
instructions when using a front-facing  
child-restraint system in the front  
passenger's seat.  
Using the tether or tether anchor to  
secure anything but a child-restraint  
system is dangerous. This could  
weaken or damage the tether or  
tether anchor and result in injury.  
Always route the tether strap between  
the head restraint and the seatback  
(Except center seat position):  
Routing the tether strap on top of the  
head restraint is dangerous. In a  
collision the tether strap could slide  
off the head restraint and loosen the  
child-restraint system. The child-  
restraint system could move which  
may result in death or injury to the  
child.  
Always attach the tether strap to the  
correct tether anchor position:  
Attaching the tether strap to the  
incorrect tether anchor position is  
dangerous. In a collision, the tether  
strap could come off and loosen the  
child-restraint system. If the child-  
restraint system moves it could result  
in death or injury to the child.  
NOTE  
l
To check if your front seats have side air  
bags:  
Mazda vehicles equipped with side air bag  
will have a “SRS AIRBAG” tag on the  
outboard shoulder of the front seats.  
l
To check if your vehicle has curtain air  
bags:  
Mazda vehicles equipped with curtain air  
bag will have an “SRS AIRBAG” marking  
on the window pillars along the roof edge.  
2-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
Child Restraint  
Do not allow a child or anyone to lean  
over or against the side window of a  
vehicle with side and curtain air bags:  
It is dangerous to allow anyone to  
lean over or against the side window,  
the area of the front passenger seat,  
the front and rear window pillars and  
the roof edge along both sides from  
which the side and curtain air bags  
deploy, even if a child-restraint  
WARNING  
Always move the front passenger seat  
as far back as possible if installing a  
front-facing child-restraint system on it  
is unavoidable:  
As your vehicle has front air bags  
and doubly so because your vehicle  
has side air bags, a front-facing  
child-restraint system should be put  
on the front passenger seat only  
when it is unavoidable.  
Even if the front passenger air bag  
deactivation indicator light  
illuminates, always move the seat as  
far back as possible, because the  
force of a deploying air bag could  
cause serious injury or death to the  
child.  
system is used. The impact of  
inflation from a side or curtain air  
bag could cause serious injury or  
death to an out of position child.  
Furthermore, leaning over or against  
the front door could block the side  
and curtain air bags and eliminate  
the advantages of supplemental  
protection. With the front air bag and  
the additional side air bag that  
comes out of the front seat, the rear  
seat is always a better location for  
children. Take special care not to  
allow a child to lean over or against  
the side window, even if the child is  
seated in a child-restraint system.  
Never use a rear-facing child-restraint  
system in the front seat with an air bag  
that could deploy:  
Rear-facing child-restraint systems  
on the front seat are particularly  
dangerous.  
Even in a moderate collision, the  
child-restraint system can be hit by a  
deploying air bag and moved  
violently backward resulting in  
serious injury or death to the child.  
Even though you may feel assured  
that the front passenger air bag will  
not deploy based on the fact that the  
front passenger air bag deactivation  
indicator light illuminates.  
qFront Passenger's Seat Child-  
Restraint System Installation  
1. Slide the seat as far back as possible.  
2-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
Child Restraint  
2. Secure the child-restraint system with  
the lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt.  
See the manufacturer's instructions on  
the child-restraint system for belt  
routing instructions.  
5. Make sure the front passenger air bag  
deactivation indicator light illuminates  
after installing a child-restraint system  
on the front passenger seat.  
Refer to Front passenger air bag  
deactivation indicator light on page  
2-47.  
3. To get the retractor into the automatic  
locking mode, pull the shoulder belt  
portion of the seat belt until the entire  
length of the belt is out of the retractor.  
4. Push the child-restraint system firmly  
into the vehicle seat. Be sure the belt  
retracts as snugly as possible. A  
clicking noise from the retractor will be  
heard during retraction if the system is  
in automatic locking mode. If the belt  
does not lock the seat down tight,  
repeat the previous step and also this  
one.  
NOTE  
l
Inspect this function before each use of the  
child-restraint system. You should not be  
able to pull the shoulder belt out of the  
retractor while the system is in the  
automatic locking mode. When you remove  
the child-restraint system, be sure the belt  
fully retracts to return the system to  
emergency locking mode before occupants  
use the seat belts.  
l
Follow the child-restraint system  
manufacturer's instructions carefully.  
Depending on the type of child-restraint  
system, it may not employ seat belts which  
are in automatic locking mode.  
2-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
Child Restraint  
WARNING  
Do not seat a child in a child-restraint  
system on the front passenger seat if  
the front passenger air bag  
deactivation indicator light does not  
illuminate:  
While it is always better to install any  
child-restraint system on the rear  
seat, it is imperative that a child-  
restraint system ONLY be used on the  
front passenger seat if the  
deactivation indicator light  
illuminates when the child is seated  
in the child-restraint system (page  
2-47). Seating a child in a child-  
restraint system installed on the front  
passenger seat with the front  
passenger air bag deactivation  
indicator light not illuminated is  
dangerous. If this indicator light does  
not illuminate even when the total  
seated weight is less than  
approximately 30 kg (66 lb), this  
means that the front passenger front  
and side air bags, and seat belt  
pretensioner are ready for  
deployment. If an accident were to  
deploy an air bag, a child in a child-  
restraint system sitting in the front  
passenger seat could be seriously  
injured or killed. If the indicator light  
does not illuminate after seating a  
child in a child-restraint system on  
the front passenger seat, seat a child  
in a child-restraint system on the rear  
seat and consult an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.  
2-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
Child Restraint  
LATCH Child-Restraint Systems  
Your Mazda is equipped with LATCH lower anchors for attachment of specially designed  
LATCH child-restraint systems in the rear seat. Both anchors must be used, otherwise the  
seat will bounce around and put the child in danger. Most LATCH child-restraint systems  
must also be used in conjunction with a tether to be effective. If they have a tether you  
must use it to better assure your child's safety.  
WARNING  
Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the use of the child-restraint system:  
An unsecured child-restraint system is dangerous. In a sudden stop or a collision it  
could move causing serious injury or death to the child or other occupants. Make  
sure the child-restraint system is properly secured in place according to the child-  
restraint system manufacturer's instructions.  
Never attach two child-restraint systems to the same LATCH lower anchor:  
Attaching two child-restraint systems to the same LATCH lower anchor is dangerous.  
In a collision, one anchor may not be strong enough to hold two child-restraint  
system attachments, and it may break, causing serious injury or death. If you use the  
seat position for another child-restraint system when an outboard LATCH position is  
occupied, use the center seat belts instead, and the tether if tether-equipped.  
Make sure the child-restraint system is properly secured:  
An unsecured child-restraint system is dangerous. In a sudden stop or a collision it  
could move causing serious injury or death to the child or other occupants. Follow  
the child-restraint system manufacturer's instructions on belt routing to secure the  
seat just as you would with a child in it so that nobody is tempted to put a child in  
an improperly secured seat later on. When not in use, remove it from the vehicle or  
fasten it with a seat belt, or latch it down to BOTH LATCH lower anchors for LATCH  
child-restraint systems.  
Make sure there are no seat belts or foreign objects near or around the LATCH child-  
restraint system:  
Not following the child-restraint system manufacturer's instructions when installing  
the child-restraint system is dangerous. If seat belts or a foreign object prevent the  
child-restraint system from being securely attached to the LATCH lower anchors and  
the child-restraint system is installed improperly, the child-restraint system could  
move in a sudden stop or collision causing serious injury or death to the child or  
other occupants. When installing the child-restraint system, make sure there are no  
seat belts or foreign objects near or around the LATCH lower anchors. Always follow  
the child-restraint system manufacturer's instructions.  
NOTE  
To install a child-restraint system on the rear-seat center position, use a seat belt-secured child-  
restraint system.  
2-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
Child Restraint  
Anchor bracket location  
qLATCH Child-Restraint System  
Installation Procedure (Rear  
Outboard Seats)  
1. Make sure the seatback is securely  
latched by pushing it back until it is  
fully locked.  
2. Expand the area between the seat  
bottom and the seatback slightly to  
verify the locations of the LATCH  
lower anchors.  
Tether strap position  
Tether  
strap  
3. Raise the head restraint to the top  
locked position.  
Anchor  
bracket  
Refer to Head restraints on page 2-12.  
4. Secure the child-restraint system using  
BOTH LATCH lower anchors,  
following the child-restraint system  
manufacturer's instruction. Pull on the  
child-restraint to be sure both anchors  
are engaged.  
5. If your child-restraint system came  
equipped with a tether, that means it is  
very important to properly secure the  
tether for child safety. Please carefully  
follow the child-restraint system  
manufacturer's instructions when  
installing tethers.  
2-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
Child Restraint  
qLATCH Child-Restraint System  
Installation Procedure (Rear  
Center Seat)  
WARNING  
Use the tether and tether anchor only  
for a child-restraint system:  
The LATCH lower anchors at the center  
of the rear seat are much further apart than  
the sets of LATCH lower anchors for  
child-restraint system installation at other  
seating positions. Child-restraint systems  
with rigid LATCH attachments cannot be  
installed on the center seating position.  
Some LATCH equipped child-restraint  
systems can be placed in the center  
Using the tether or tether anchor to  
secure anything but a child-restraint  
system is dangerous. This could  
weaken or damage the tether or  
tether anchor and result in injury.  
Always route the tether strap between  
the head restraint and the seatback:  
Routing the tether strap on top of the  
head restraint is dangerous. In a  
collision the tether strap could slide  
off the head restraint and loosen the  
child-restraint system. The child-  
restraint system could move which  
may result in death or injury to the  
child.  
position and will reach the nearest  
LATCH lower anchors which are 466 mm  
(18.35 in) apart. LATCH compatible  
child-restraint systems (with attachments  
on belt webbing) can be used at this  
seating position only if the child-restraint  
system manufacturer's instructions state  
that the child-restraint system can be  
installed to LATCH lower anchors that are  
466 mm (18.35 in) apart. Do not attach  
two child-restraint systems to the same  
LATCH lower anchor. If your child-  
restraint system has a tether, it must also  
be used for your child's optimum safety.  
Always attach the tether strap to the  
correct tether anchor position:  
Attaching the tether strap to the  
incorrect tether anchor position is  
dangerous. In a collision, the tether  
strap could come off and loosen the  
child-restraint system. If the child-  
restraint system moves it could result  
in death or injury to the child.  
2-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
Child Restraint  
3. Secure the child-restraint system using  
BOTH LATCH lower anchors,  
following the child-restraint system  
manufacturer's instructions. Pull on the  
child-restraint to be sure both anchors  
are engaged.  
WARNING  
Use the tether and tether anchor only  
for a child-restraint system:  
Using the tether or tether anchor to  
secure anything but a child-restraint  
system is dangerous. This could  
weaken or damage the tether or  
tether anchor and result in injury.  
4. If your child-restraint system came  
equipped with a tether, that means it is  
very important to properly secure the  
tether for child safety. Please carefully  
follow the child-restraint system  
manufacturer's instructions when  
installing tethers.  
Always attach the tether strap to the  
correct tether anchor position:  
Attaching the tether strap to the  
incorrect tether anchor position is  
dangerous. In a collision, the tether  
strap could come off and loosen the  
child-restraint system. If the child-  
restraint system moves it could result  
in death or injury to the child.  
Anchor bracket location  
1. Make sure the seatback is securely  
latched by pushing it back until it is  
fully locked.  
2. Expand the area between the seat  
bottom and the seatback slightly to  
verify the locations of the LATCH  
lower anchors.  
Tether strap position  
Tether  
strap  
Anchor  
bracket  
2-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
SRS Air Bags  
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Precautions  
The front and side supplemental restraint systems (SRS) include 6 air bags. You can locate  
the various air bags by the use of “SRS AIRBAG” location indicators. These indicators  
are visible in the area where the air bags are installed.  
The air bags are installed in the following locations:  
l
The steering wheel hub (driver air bag)  
The front passenger dashboard (front passenger air bag)  
The outboard sides of the front seatbacks (side air bags)  
The front and rear window pillars, and the roof edge along both sides (curtain air bags)  
l
l
l
These systems operate independently depending on the type of accident encountered; the  
side and curtain air bags are not likely to deploy on both sides in the same accident because  
a vehicle is not often hit from both sides. The side and curtain air bags and the frontal air  
bag system will not normally deploy during the same type of accident unless a combination  
of frontal and side impacts occur.  
The air bag supplemental restraint systems are designed to provide supplemental protection  
only in the front seats in certain situations and the rear outside passenger positions only in  
same-side collisions, so seat belts are always important in the following ways:  
Without seat belt usage, the air bags cannot provide adequate protection during an accident.  
Seat belt usage is necessary to:  
l
Keep the occupant from being thrown into an inflating air bag.  
Reduce the possibility of injuries during an accident that is not designed for air bag  
l
inflation, such as roll-over or rear impact.  
Reduce the possibility of injuries in frontal or side collisions that are not severe enough  
l
to activate the air bags.  
Reduce the possibility of being thrown from your vehicle.  
Reduce the possibility of injuries to lower body and legs during an accident because the  
l
l
air bags provide no protection to these parts of the body.  
Hold the driver in a position which allows better control of the vehicle.  
l
Small children must be protected by a child-restraint system as stipulated by law in every  
state and province. In certain states and provinces, larger children must use a child-restraint  
system (page 2-27).  
Carefully consider which child-restraint system is necessary for your child and follow the  
installation directions in this Owner's Manual as well as the child-restraint system  
manufacturer's instructions.  
2-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
SRS Air Bags  
WARNING  
Seat belts must be worn in air bag equipped vehicles:  
Depending only on the air bags for protection during an accident is dangerous.  
Alone, air bags may not prevent serious injuries. The appropriate air bags can be  
expected to inflate only in the first collision with frontal, near frontal or side forces  
that are at least moderate. Vehicle occupants should always wear seat belts.  
Children should not ride in the front passenger seat:  
Placing a child, 12 years or under, in the front seat is dangerous. The child could be  
hit by a deploying air bag and be seriously injured or even killed. Even if the front  
passenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates, always move the front  
passenger seat as far back as possible. A sleeping child is more likely to lean against  
the door and be hit by the side air bag in a moderate, right-side collision. Whenever  
possible, always secure a child 12 years and under on the rear seat with an  
appropriate child-restraint system for the child's age and size.  
Never use a rear-facing child-restraint system in the front seat with an air bag that  
could deploy:  
Rear-facing child-restraint systems on the front seat are particularly dangerous even  
though you may feel assured that a front passenger air bag will not deploy based on  
the fact that the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates.  
The child-restraint system can be hit by a deploying air bag and moved violently  
backward resulting in serious injury or death to the child.  
Do not sit too close to the driver and front passenger air bags:  
Sitting too close to the driver and front passenger air bag modules or placing hands  
or feet on them is extremely dangerous. The driver and front passenger air bags  
inflate with great force and speed. Serious injuries could occur if someone is too  
close. The driver should always hold onto only the rim of the steering wheel. The  
front seat passenger should keep both feet on the floor. Front seat occupants should  
adjust their seats as far back as possible and always sit upright against the  
seatbacks with seat belts worn properly.  
2-42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
SRS Air Bags  
Sit in the center of the seat and wear seat belts properly:  
Sitting too close to the side air bag modules or placing hands on them is extremely  
dangerous. The side air bags inflate with great force and speed directly out of the  
outboard side of the front seat and expand along the front door on the side the car is  
hit. Serious injury could occur if someone is sitting too close to the door or leaning  
against a window, or if rear seat occupants grab the sides of the front seatbacks.  
Furthermore, sleeping up against the door or hanging out the windows in the vehicle  
could block the side and curtain air bags and eliminate the advantages of  
supplemental protection. Give the side and curtain air bags room to work by sitting  
in the center of the seat while the vehicle is moving with seat belts worn properly.  
Do not attach objects on or around the area where driver and front passenger air  
bags deploy:  
Attaching an object to the driver and front passenger air bag modules or placing  
something in front of them is dangerous. In an accident, an object could interfere  
with air bag inflation and injure the occupants.  
Do not attach objects on or around the area where a side air bag deploys:  
Attaching things to the front seat in such a way as to cover the outboard side of the  
seat in any way is dangerous. In an accident the object could interfere with the side  
air bag, which inflates from the outboard side of the front seats, impeding the added  
protection of the side air bag system or redirecting the air bag in a way that is  
dangerous. Furthermore, the bag could be cut open releasing the gas.  
Do not hang net bags, map pouches or backpacks with side straps on the front  
seats. Never use seat covers on the front seats. Always keep the side air bag modules  
in your front seats free to deploy in the event of a side collision.  
Do not attach objects on or around the area where a curtain air bag deploys:  
Attaching objects to the areas where the curtain air bag activates such as on the  
windshield glass, side door glass, front and rear window pillars and along the roof  
edge and assist grips is dangerous. In an accident the object could interfere with the  
curtain air bag, which inflates from the front and rear window pillars and along the  
roof edge, impeding the added protection of the curtain air bag system or redirecting  
the air bag in a way that is dangerous. Furthermore, the bag could be cut open  
releasing the gas.  
Do not place hangers or any other objects on the assist grips. When hanging clothes,  
hang them on the coat hook directly. Always keep the curtain air bag modules free  
to deploy in the event of a side collision.  
Do not place luggage or other objects under the front seats:  
Placing luggage or other objects under the front seats is dangerous. The components  
essential to the supplemental restraint system could be damaged, and in the event of  
a side collision, the appropriate air bags may not deploy, which could result in death  
or serious injury. To prevent damage to the components essential to the  
supplemental restraint system, do not place luggage or other objects under the front  
seats.  
2-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
SRS Air Bags  
Do not touch the components of the supplemental restraint system after the air bags  
have inflated:  
Touching the components of the supplemental restraint system after the air bags  
have inflated is dangerous. Immediately after inflation, they are very hot. You could  
get burned.  
Never install any front-end equipment to your vehicle:  
Installation of front-end equipment, such as frontal protection bar (kangaroo bar,  
bull bar, push bar, or other similar devices), snowplow, or winches, is dangerous. The  
air bag crash sensor system could be affected. This could cause air bags to inflate  
unexpectedly, or it could prevent the air bags from inflating during an accident.  
Front occupants could be seriously injured.  
Do not modify the suspension:  
Modifying the vehicle suspension is dangerous. If the vehicle's height or the  
suspension is modified, the vehicle will be unable to accurately detect a collision  
resulting in incorrect or unexpected air bag deployment and the possibility of serious  
injuries.  
Do not modify the supplemental restraint system:  
Modifying the components or wiring of the supplemental restraint system is  
dangerous. You could accidentally activate it or make it inoperable. Do not make  
any modifications to the supplemental restraint system. This includes installing trim,  
badges, or anything else over the air bag modules. It also includes installing extra  
electrical equipment on or near system components or wiring. An Authorized Mazda  
Dealer can provide the special care needed in the removal and installation of front  
seats. It is important to protect the air bag wiring and connections to assure that the  
bags do not accidentally deploy, the driver seat slide position sensor and front  
passenger seat weight sensors are not damaged and that the seats retain an  
undamaged air bag connection.  
NOTE  
l
When an air bag deploys, a loud inflation noise can be heard and some smoke will be released.  
Neither is likely to cause injury, however, the texture of the air bags may cause light skin injuries  
on body parts not covered with clothing through friction.  
l
Should you sell your Mazda, we urge you to tell the new owner of its air bag systems and that  
familiarization with all instructions about them, from the Owner's Manual, is important.  
2-44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
SRS Air Bags  
Supplemental Restraint System Components  
The supplemental restraint systems (SRS) have two basic subsystems:  
l
The air bag system with inflators and air bags.  
The electrical system with crash sensors and diagnostic module.  
l
The air bags are mounted in the following locations:  
l
The steering wheel hub  
The front passenger dashboard  
The outboard sides of the front seatbacks  
The front and rear window pillars, and the roof edge along both sides  
l
l
l
The air bags are out of sight until activated.  
Driver/Front passenger inflators and air bags  
Crash sensors, and diagnostic module (SAS unit)  
Front seat belt pretensioners (page 2-21)  
Front air bag sensor  
Side crash sensors  
Air bag/front seat belt pretensioner system warning light (page 2-55)  
Side and curtain inflators and air bags  
Front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light (page 2-47)  
Front passenger seat weight sensors (page 2-47)  
Front passenger seat weight sensor control module  
2-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
SRS Air Bags  
Driver and front passenger seat belt buckle switches  
Driver seat slide position sensor  
Front seats  
2-46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
SRS Air Bags  
How the Air Bags Work  
qHow the Front Air Bags Work  
When air bag crash sensors detect a frontal impact of greater than moderate force, an  
electrical current is sent to the inflators.  
Gases are produced to inflate the front air bags and after the inflation, the front air bags  
quickly deflate.  
The front air bags will function only once. After that, the front air bags will not work  
again and must be replaced.  
Only an Authorized Mazda Dealer can replace the system components.  
The front, dual stage air bags control air bag inflation in two energy stages. During an  
impact of moderate severity the front air bags deploy with lesser energy, whereas during  
more severe impacts, they deploy with more energy. Deployment of the front air bags may  
differ between the driver and the front passenger depending on the driver seat position,  
front passenger weight and front seat belt usage, all of which provide data from each sensor  
to the air bag system.  
The front air bags will deploy only  
in a frontal or frontal offset impact.  
Driver seat slide position sensor  
Your vehicle is equipped with a driver seat slide position sensor as a part of the  
supplemental restraint system. The sensor is located under the driver seat. The sensor  
determines whether the driver seat is fore or aft of a reference position and sends the seat  
position to the diagnostic module (SAS unit). The SAS unit is also designed to control the  
deployment of the driver air bag depending on how close the driver seat is to the steering  
wheel.  
The air bag/front seat belt pretensioner system warning light flashes if the sensor has a  
possible malfunction (page 2-55).  
2-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
SRS Air Bags  
Front passenger seat weight sensors  
Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger seat weight sensors as a part of the  
supplemental restraint system. (page 2-34). These sensors are located under both of the  
front passenger seat rails. These sensors determine the total seated weight on the front  
passenger seat. The SAS unit is designed to prevent the front passenger front and side air  
bags and seat belt pretensioner system from deploying if the total seated weight is less than  
approximately 30 kg (66 lbs).  
To reduce the chance of injuries caused by deployment of the front passenger air bag, the  
system deactivates the front passenger front and side air bags and also the seat belt  
pretensioner system when:  
l
There is no passenger in the front passenger seat. (The front passenger air bag  
deactivation indicator light does not illuminate.)  
The total seated weight on the front passenger seat is less than approximately 30 kg (66  
l
lbs). (The front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates.)  
This system shuts off the front passenger front and side air bags and seat belt pretensioner  
system, so make sure the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates  
according to the following table.  
The air bag/front seat belt pretensioner system warning light flashes and the front  
passenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates if the sensors have a possible  
malfunction. If this happens, the front passenger front and side air bags and seat belt  
pretensioner system will not deploy.  
Front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light  
This indicator light illuminates to remind you that the front passenger front and side air  
bags and seat belt pretensioner will not deploy during a collision.  
If the front passenger weight sensors are working properly, the indicator light illuminates  
when the ignition is switched ON. After a specified period of time it goes out.  
2-48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
SRS Air Bags  
The front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates or is off under the following conditions:  
Front passenger seat  
belt pretensioner  
system  
Total seated weight on the Front passenger air bag Front passenger front and  
front passenger seat  
deactivation indicator light  
side air bags  
Deactivated  
Deactivated  
Empty (Not occupied)*  
OFF  
ON  
Deactivated  
Less than approx. 30 kg  
(66 lbs)  
Deactivated  
Approx. 42 kg (93 lbs) or  
more  
OFF  
Ready  
Ready  
* If the front passenger seat belt is buckled, the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates,  
however this does not indicate a malfunction.  
The curtain air bag is always ready to inflate and is not deactivated like the front passenger front and side air bag.  
If the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light does not illuminate when the  
ignition is switched ON and does not illuminate as indicated in the above chart, do not  
allow a child to sit in the front passenger seat; contact the Authorized Mazda Dealer as  
soon as possible. The system may not work properly in an accident.  
WARNING  
Do not decrease the total seated weight on the front passenger seat:  
When an adult or large child sits on the front passenger seat, decreasing the total  
seated weight on the front passenger seat from the total seated weight of  
approximately 42 kg (93 lbs) required for air bag deployment is dangerous. The front  
passenger seat weight sensors will detect the reduced total seated weight condition  
and the front passenger front and side air bags and seat belt pretensioner system  
will not deploy during an accident. The front passenger will not have the  
supplementary protection of the air bag, which could result in serious injury.  
Decreasing the total seated weight on the front passenger seat from the total seated  
weight of approximately 42 kg (93 lbs) could result in an air bag not deploying under  
the following conditions, for example:  
Ø A rear passenger pushes up on the front passenger seat with their feet.  
Ø Luggage or other items placed under the front passenger seat or between the  
front passenger seat and driver seat that push up the front passenger seat  
bottom.  
Ø The front passenger seat occupant sits in a manner that does not place the entire  
weight of the occupant on the seat such as by sitting too close to the door,  
grasping the assist grip or the rim of the moonroof and sitting with the seatback  
reclined too far.  
Ø Any accessories which might decrease the total seated weight on the front  
passenger seat are attached to the front passenger seat.  
The front passenger front and side air bags and seat belt pretensioner systems will  
deactivate if the total seated weight on the front passenger seat is close to 30 kg (66  
lbs) and they will reactivate before the weight exceeds 42 kg (93 lbs).  
2-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
SRS Air Bags  
Do not increase the total seated weight on the front passenger seat:  
When an infant or small child sits on the front passenger seat, increasing the total  
seated weight on the front passenger seat from the total seated weight of  
approximately 30 kg (66 lbs) is dangerous. The front passenger seat weight sensors  
will detect the increased total seated weight, which could result in the unexpected  
deployment of the front passenger front and side air bags and seat belt pretensioner  
system in an accident and may cause serious injury. Increasing the total seated  
weight on the front passenger seat beyond the total seated weight of approximately  
30 kg (66 lbs) could result in the front passenger front and side air bags and seat  
belt pretensioner system deployment in an accident under the following conditions,  
for example:  
Ø Luggage or other items are placed on the seat with the child in the child-restraint  
system.  
Ø A rear passenger or luggage push or pull down on the front passenger seatback.  
Ø A rear passenger steps on the front passenger seat rails with their feet.  
Ø Luggage or other items are placed on the seatback or hung on the head restraint.  
Ø Heavy items are placed in the seatback map pocket.  
Ø The seat is washed.  
Ø Liquids are spilled on the seat.  
Ø The front passenger seat is moved backward, pushing into luggage or other items  
placed behind it.  
Ø The front passenger seatback contacts the rear seat.  
Ø Luggage or other items are placed between the front passenger seat and driver  
seat.  
Ø Any accessories which might increase the total seated weight on the front  
passenger seat are attached to the front passenger seat.  
The front passenger front and side air bags and seat belt pretensioner systems will  
deactivate if the total seated weight on the front passenger seat is less than  
approximately 30 kg (66 lbs) and they will reactivate when the weight exceeds  
approximately 42 kg (93 lbs).  
CAUTION  
Ø To assure proper deployment of the front air bag and to prevent damage to the  
sensors in the front seat bottoms:  
Ø
Do not place sharp objects on the front seat bottoms or leave heavy luggage on  
them.  
Ø
Do not spill any liquids on the front seats or under the front seats.  
Ø To allow the sensors to function properly, always perform the following:  
Ø
Adjust the front seats as far back as possible and always sit upright against the  
seatbacks with seat belts worn properly.  
If you place your child on the front passenger seat, secure the child-restraint  
system properly and slide the front passenger seat as far back as possible (page  
2-34).  
Ø
2-50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
SRS Air Bags  
NOTE  
l
The system requires about 10 seconds to alternate between turning the front passenger front and  
side air bags and seat belt pretensioner system on or off.  
l
The front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light may illuminate repeatedly if luggage or  
other items are put on the front passenger seat, or if the temperature of the vehicle's interior  
changes suddenly.  
l
l
The front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light may illuminate for 10 seconds if the total  
seated weight on the front passenger seat changes.  
If the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light does not illuminate after installing a  
child-restraint system on the front passenger seat, install the child-restraint system on the rear  
seat and consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.  
Driver and front passenger buckle switches  
The buckle switches on the front seat belts detect whether or not the front seat belts are  
securely fastened and further control the deployment of the air bags.  
qHow the Side and Curtain Air Bags Work  
When air bag crash sensors detect a side impact of greater than moderate force, an  
electrical current is sent to the inflators.  
Gases are produced to inflate the side and curtain air bags and after the inflation, the side  
and curtain air bags quickly deflate. However, the side air bag system for the front  
passenger is designed to only deploy in accordance with the total seated weight on the front  
passenger seat, however the curtains are not deactivated.  
The side and curtain air bags will function only once. After that, the side and curtain air  
bags will not work again and must be replaced. Only an Authorized Mazda Dealer can  
replace the systems.  
The side and curtain air bags will deploy only  
on the side the vehicle receives the force of  
the impact.  
2-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
SRS Air Bags  
qAir Bag Activation/Deactivation  
NOTE  
If the front passenger seat weight sensors detect a total seated weight on the front passenger seat is  
less than approximately 42 kg (93 lb), the front passenger front and side air bags and seat belt  
pretensioner may not deploy (page 2-47), but the curtain air bags may deploy.  
l
Front air bag activation  
Frontal impact within about a 30  
degree range from head-on to the  
vehicle.  
The front air bags will inflate if the  
severity of impact is above the designed  
threshold level.  
l
Hitting a solid wall straight on at  
greater than about 22 km/h (14 mph).  
l
Driving into a big hole or hitting the far  
side of a hole.  
l
Hitting a curb, pavement edge or hard  
object.  
Limitations to front air bag activation  
Depending on the severity of impact, the  
front air bags may not inflate in the  
following cases:  
l
Landing hard or the vehicle falling.  
l
Impacts involving trees or poles cause  
severe cosmetic damage but may not  
have enough stopping force to activate  
the air bag.  
2-52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
SRS Air Bags  
l
l
Frontal offset impact to the vehicle  
may not provide the stopping force  
necessary for air bag deployment.  
Vehicle roll-over, may deploy the side  
and curtain air bags but not the front air  
bags.  
l
Rear-ending or running under a truck's  
tail gate may not provide the stopping  
force necessary for air bag deployment.  
Side and curtain air bag activation  
The severity of impact above the designed  
threshold level to one side of the vehicle  
(driver or passenger side areas) will cause  
the side and curtain air bags on that side  
to inflate, but it will not normally deploy  
the front air bags.  
Non-activation of front air bags  
Front air bags will not normally inflate in  
the following cases:  
l
Collision from the rear.  
Limitations to side and curtain air bag  
activation  
Depending on the severity of impact, the  
side and curtain air bags may not inflate in  
the following cases:  
l
Frontal offset impact may not provide  
enough side impact to deploy the side  
and curtain air bags.  
l
Impact to the side, but it may deploy  
the side and curtain air bags.  
2-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
SRS Air Bags  
l
Side impacts involving trees or poles  
Non-activation of side and curtain air  
bag  
can cause severe cosmetic damage but  
may not have enough impact force to  
activate the side and curtain air bags.  
The side and curtain air bags will not  
normally inflate in the following cases:  
l
Collision from the rear.  
l
Vehicle roll-over may not provide  
enough side force to deploy the side  
and curtain air bags.  
l
Collision from the front, but it may  
deploy the front air bags.  
l
Side impacts with two-wheeled  
qConstant Monitoring  
vehicles may not provide enough force  
to deploy the side and curtain air bags.  
The following components of the air bag  
systems are monitored by a diagnostic  
system:  
l
SAS unit  
Front air bag sensor  
Air bag modules  
Side crash sensors  
l
l
l
l
Air bag/Front seat belt pretensioner  
system warning light  
Front seat belt pretensioners  
Front passenger air bag deactivation  
l
l
indicator light  
Related wiring  
Driver seat slide position sensor  
Front passenger seat weight sensors  
l
l
l
2-54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
SRS Air Bags  
The diagnostic module continuously  
monitors the system's readiness. This  
begins when the ignition is switched ON  
and continues while the vehicle is being  
driven.  
q
Air Bag/Front Seat Belt  
Pretensioner System Warning Beep  
If a malfunction is detected in both the air  
bag/front seat belt pretensioner system  
and the warning light, a warning beep  
sound will be heard for about 1 minute.  
After that, the one-minute beep will be  
repeated every 30 minutes.  
q
Air Bag/Front Seat Belt  
Pretensioner System Warning Light  
Have your vehicle inspected at an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as  
possible.  
WARNING  
Do not drive the vehicle with the air  
bag/front seat belt pretensioner system  
warning beep sounding:  
If the air bag/front seat belt pretensioner  
system is working properly, the warning  
light illuminates when the ignition is  
switched ON or after the engine is  
cranked. The warning light turns off after  
a specified period of time.  
Driving the vehicle with the air bag/  
front seat belt pretensioner system  
warning beep sounding is dangerous.  
In a collision, the air bags and the  
front seat belt pretensioner system  
will not deploy and this could result  
in death or serious injury.  
Contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer  
to have the vehicle inspected as soon  
as possible.  
A system malfunction is indicated if the  
warning light constantly flashes,  
constantly illuminates or does not  
illuminate at all when the ignition is  
switched ON. If any of these occur,  
consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer as  
soon as possible. The system may not  
work in an accident.  
qMaintenance  
The air bag systems do not require regular  
maintenance. But if any of the following  
occurs, take your vehicle to an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer as soon as possible:  
WARNING  
Never tamper with the air bag/  
pretensioner systems and always have  
an Authorized Mazda Dealer perform  
all servicing and repairs:  
l
The air bag system warning light  
flashes.  
l
The air bag system warning light  
Self-servicing or tampering with the  
systems is dangerous. An air bag/  
pretensioner could accidentally  
activate or become disabled causing  
serious injury or death.  
remains illuminated.  
The air bag system warning light does  
l
not illuminate when the ignition is  
switched ON.  
The air bag system warning beep  
l
sound will be heard.  
2-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
SRS Air Bags  
l
The air bags have deployed.  
Front passenger air bag deactivation  
WARNING  
l
Do not operate a vehicle with damaged  
air bag/seat belt pretensioner system  
components:  
indicator light does not illuminate  
when the ignition is switched ON or  
does not illuminate as indicated in the  
chart. For more details about this  
indicator light and this chart, refer to  
“Front passenger seat weight sensors”  
(page 2-47).  
Expended or damaged air bag/seat  
belt pretensioner system components  
must be replaced after any collision  
which caused them to deploy or  
damage them. Only a trained  
Authorized Mazda Dealer can fully  
evaluate these systems to see that  
they will work in any subsequent  
accident. Driving with an expended  
or damaged air bag or pretensioner  
unit will not afford you the necessary  
protection in the event of any  
subsequent accident which could  
result in serious injury or death.  
Do not remove interior air bag parts:  
Removing any components such as  
the front seats, front dashboard, the  
steering wheel or parts on the front  
and rear window pillars and along  
the roof edge, containing air bag  
parts or sensors is dangerous. These  
parts contain essential air bag  
components. The air bag could  
accidentally activate and cause  
serious injuries. Always have an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer remove  
these parts.  
Dispose of the air bag properly:  
Improper disposal of an air bag or a  
vehicle with live air bags in it can be  
extremely dangerous. Unless all  
safety procedures are followed, injury  
can result. Ask an Authorized Mazda  
Dealer how to safely dispose of an air  
bag or how to scrap an air bag  
equipped vehicle.  
2-56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Essential Safety Equipment  
SRS Air Bags  
NOTE  
If it becomes necessary to have the components  
or wiring system for the supplementary  
restraint system modified to accommodate a  
person with certain medical conditions in  
accordance with a certified physician, contact  
an Authorized Mazda Dealer, refer to  
“Customer Assistance (U.S.A.)” (page 9-2).  
2-57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Knowing Your Mazda  
3
Explanation of basic operations and controls; opening/closing and adjustment  
of various parts.  
Advanced Keyless Entry and Start System ................................ 3-2  
Advanced Keysí ...................................................................... 3-2  
Operation Using Advanced Keyless Functions ......................... 3-7  
Operation Using Advanced Key Functions ............................. 3-16  
Advanced Key Suspend Function ........................................... 3-19  
Warning Lights and Beep Sounds ........................................... 3-19  
When Warning Indicator/Beep is Activated ............................ 3-22  
Doors and Locks ......................................................................... 3-23  
Keys ........................................................................................ 3-23  
Keyless Entry Systemí .......................................................... 3-24  
Door Locks ............................................................................. 3-29  
Trunk Lid ................................................................................ 3-33  
Inside Trunk Release Lever ..................................................... 3-36  
Power Windows ...................................................................... 3-37  
Fuel-Filler Lid and Cap ........................................................... 3-44  
Hood ....................................................................................... 3-46  
Moonroofí ............................................................................. 3-47  
Security System ........................................................................... 3-50  
Immobilizer System (with Advanced Key) ............................. 3-50  
Immobilizer System (without Advanced Key) ........................ 3-53  
Theft-Deterrent Systemí ........................................................ 3-55  
Steering Wheel and Mirrors ...................................................... 3-59  
Steering Wheel ........................................................................ 3-59  
Mirrors .................................................................................... 3-59  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-1  
Knowing Your Mazda  
Advanced Keyless Entry and Start System  
Advanced Keysí  
The advanced keyless functions (advanced keyless entry and start system) enables the  
following operations while the advanced key is being carried (page 3-7).  
l
Locking/unlocking the doors, and opening the trunk lid, without operating the key.  
Starting the engine without operating the key.  
l
Additional functions are available using the buttons on the advanced key.  
Refer to Operation Using Advanced Key Functions on page 3-16.  
l
The following operations are possible using the transmitter of the keyless entry system  
from a distance (Lock/Unlock/Trunk/Panic button):  
l
Locking/unlocking the doors.  
l
Opening the trunk lid.  
Opening the power windows and the moonroofí.  
l
Operating the theft-deterrent systemí.  
l
l
Turning on the alarm.  
l
Locking/unlocking the doors or starting the engine using the auxiliary key.  
WARNING  
Do not leave the key in your vehicle with children and keep them in a place where  
your children will not find or play with them:  
Leaving children in a vehicle with the key is dangerous. This could result in someone  
being badly injured or even killed. Children may find these new kinds of keys to be  
an interesting toy to play with and could cause the power windows or other controls  
to operate, or even make the vehicle move.  
Radio waves from the advanced key may affect medical equipment such as  
pacemakers:  
Before using the advanced key near people who use medical equipment, ask the  
medical equipment manufacturer or your physician if radio waves from the  
advanced key will affect the equipment.  
NOTE  
l
The driver must carry the advanced key to ensure the system functions properly.  
l
Refer to Immobilizer System (page 3-50) for information regarding keys and engine starting.  
l
(With theft-deterrent system)  
Refer to Theft-Deterrent System (page 3-55) for information regarding keys and the prevention of  
vehicle and vehicle contents theft.  
l
The advanced keyless functions can be turned off.  
Refer to Personalization Features on page 10-8.  
3-2  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Knowing Your Mazda  
Advanced Keyless Entry and Start System  
Lock button Unlock button  
Trunk button  
Panic button  
Auxiliary key  
Key code number plate  
Operation indicator light  
A code number is stamped on the plate attached to the key set; detach this plate and store it  
in a safe place (not in the vehicle) for use if you need to make a replacement key.  
Also write down the code number and keep it in another safe and handy place, but not in  
the vehicle.  
If your key is lost, consult your Authorized Mazda Dealer with the code number ready.  
3-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Knowing Your Mazda  
Advanced Keyless Entry and Start System  
CAUTION  
Ø Because the advanced key uses low-intensity radio waves, it may not function  
correctly under the following conditions:  
Ø
The advanced key is carried with communication devices such as cellular  
phones.  
The advanced key contacts or is covered by a metal object.  
The advanced key is near electronic devices such as personal computers or cell  
phones.  
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Non-Mazda genuine electronic equipment is installed in the vehicle.  
There is equipment which discharges radio waves near the vehicle.  
If the vehicle is near equipment such as wireless pay devices installed at certain  
gas stations.  
Ø The advanced key may consume battery power excessively if it receives high-  
intensity radio waves. Do not place the advanced key near electronic devices such  
as televisions or personal computers.  
Ø To avoid damage to the advanced key, DO NOT:  
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Drop the advanced key.  
Get the advanced key wet.  
Disassemble the advanced key.  
Expose the advanced key to high temperatures on places such as the  
dashboard or hood, under direct sunlight.  
Place heavy objects on the advanced key.  
Put the advanced key in an ultrasonic cleaner.  
Put any magnetized objects close to the advanced key.  
Ø
Ø
Ø
NOTE  
l
Battery life is about one year. Be sure to replace the battery as soon as you see the green KEY  
indicator light in the instrument cluster begin flashing for 30 seconds after turning off the engine,  
otherwise, you will not be able to start the engine using the advanced keyless start system once the  
battery is completely dead Refer to KEY warning light (red) on page 5-53. If this occurs, you will  
have to either force-start the engine or use the auxiliary key Refer to Advanced Key Battery Dead  
Warning on page 3-20.  
l
Additional advanced keys can be obtained at an Authorized Mazda Dealer. Up to 6 advanced keys  
can be used with the advanced keyless functions per vehicle.  
3-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Knowing Your Mazda  
Advanced Keyless Entry and Start System  
Replacing the battery at an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer is recommended to prevent  
damage to the advanced key. If replacing  
the battery by yourself, follow the  
instruction below.  
qAdvanced Key Maintenance  
CAUTION  
Ø Make sure the battery is installed  
with the correct pole facing  
upward. Battery leakage could  
occur if it is not installed correctly.  
Ø When replacing the battery, be  
careful not to bend the electrical  
terminals or get oil on them. Also  
be careful not to get dirt in the  
transmitter as it could be  
damaged.  
Replacing the advanced key battery  
1. Pull out the auxiliary key.  
Ø There is the danger of explosion if  
the battery is not correctly  
replaced.  
Ø Replace only with the same type  
battery (CR2025 or equivalent).  
Ø Dispose of used batteries  
according to the following  
instructions.  
2. Gently and slowly pry open the cover  
using a small flathead screwdriver.  
Ø
Insulate the plus and minus  
terminals of the battery using  
cellophane or equivalent tape.  
Never disassemble.  
Never throw the battery into  
fire or water.  
Ø
Ø
Ø
Never deform or crush.  
The following conditions indicate that the  
battery power is low:  
l
The KEY indicator light (green) flashes  
in the instrument cluster for about 30  
seconds after the engine is turned off.  
The system does not operate and the  
l
operation indicator light on the  
transmitter does not flash when the  
buttons are pressed.  
l
The system's operational range is  
reduced.  
3-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Knowing Your Mazda  
Advanced Keyless Entry and Start System  
3. Remove the battery by pressing its  
edge.  
qService  
If you have a problem with the advanced  
keyless functions, consult an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer.  
If your advanced key is lost or stolen,  
bring all remaining advanced keys to an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as  
possible for a replacement and to make  
the lost or stolen advanced key  
inoperative.  
CAUTION  
Radio equipment like this is governed  
by laws in the United States.  
Changes or modifications not  
expressly approved by the party  
responsible for compliance could void  
the user's authority to operate the  
equipment.  
4. Install a new battery (CR2025 or  
equivalent) with the positive pole  
facing down.  
5. Close the cover.  
6. Reinsert the auxiliary key.  
3-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Knowing Your Mazda  
Advanced Keyless Entry and Start System  
Opening the trunk lid  
Operation Using Advanced  
The operational range for opening the  
trunk lid is an area of up to 80 cm (2.6 ft)  
from the center of the trunk lid.  
Keyless Functions  
qOperational Range  
Exterior transmitter  
The system operates only when the driver  
is in the vehicle or within operational  
range while the advanced key is being  
carried.  
NOTE  
When the battery power is low, or in places  
where there are high-intensity radio waves or  
noise, the operational range may become  
narrower or the system may not operate.  
Operational range  
Locking, unlocking the doors  
Starting the engine  
The operational range for locking/  
unlocking the doors is an area of up to 80  
cm (2.6 ft) from the center of the front  
door handles.  
The operational range for starting the  
engine includes nearly the entire cabin  
area.  
Exterior transmitter  
Interior transmitter  
Operational range  
Operational range  
NOTE  
The system may not operate if you are too  
close to the windows, door handles.  
3-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Knowing Your Mazda  
Advanced Keyless Entry and Start System  
NOTE  
NOTE  
l
l
The trunk is out of the operational range,  
The request switch on driver's door can be  
however, starting the engine may be  
possible.  
The engine may not start if the advanced  
used to close the power windows, refer to  
Opening/Closing Power Windows from  
Outside (page 3-41).  
l
l
l
l
key is placed in the following areas:  
Confirm that all the doors are securely  
locked.  
All the doors cannot be locked when any  
door is open.  
If your vehicle has a theft-deterrent system,  
the hazard warning lights only flash when  
the system is armed.  
Refer to the theft-deterrent system on page  
3-55.  
A beep sound is heard for confirmation  
when the doors are locked using the request  
switch. If you prefer, the beep sound can be  
turned off.  
The volume of the beep sound can also be  
changed.  
l
Around the dashboard  
In the storage compartments such as the  
l
glove box  
On the rear parcel shelf  
l
l
Starting the engine may be possible even if  
the advanced key is outside of the vehicle  
and extremely close to a door and window,  
however, always start the engine from the  
driver's seat.  
If the vehicle is started and driven away  
while the advanced key is not in the vehicle,  
the vehicle will not restart after it is turned  
off and the push button start will switch off.  
If the advanced key is detected within  
operational range, the operation indicator  
light on the transmitter flashes  
l
l
Refer to Personalization Features on page  
10-8.  
l
momentarily.  
The setting can be changed so that the  
doors are locked automatically without  
pressing the request switch when walking  
away from the vehicle (page 10-8).  
(Auto-lock function)  
qLocking, Unlocking Doors  
To lock  
Three seconds after the doors and the trunk  
lid are closed and the advanced key is out  
of the operational range, the doors will lock  
automatically. Also, the hazard warning  
lights flash once. (Even if the driver is in  
the operational range, all doors are locked  
automatically after about 30 seconds.)  
If you are out of the operational range  
before the doors are completely closed or  
another advanced key is left in the vehicle,  
the auto-lock function will not work.  
Always make sure that all doors are closed  
and locked before leaving the vehicle.  
The auto-lock function does not close the  
power windows or moonroof.  
All the doors can be locked by pressing  
the request switch on either front door  
while the advanced key is being carried.  
A beep sound will be heard once and the  
hazard warning lights will flash once.  
Request switch  
3-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Knowing Your Mazda  
Advanced Keyless Entry and Start System  
l
The sensor is installed on the inside of the  
To unlock  
front door handles. The doors cannot be  
unlocked by touching any area other than  
Driver's door handle  
To unlock the driver's door, touch the  
sensor area on the inside of the driver's  
door handle. A beep sound will be heard  
twice and the hazard warning lights will  
flash twice.  
After unlocking the driver's door, unlock  
all the other doors by pressing the door-  
lock switch on the inside of the driver's  
door.  
the sensor area.  
l
l
If you grasp a front door handle while  
wearing gloves, the doors may not unlock,  
or they could require extra time to unlock.  
The doors could unlock if someone is  
carrying the advanced key near the front  
door handle and the front door handle is  
splashed with water such as by rain, or by  
a car wash.  
If your vehicle has a theft-deterrent system,  
the hazard warning lights only flash when  
the system is turned off.  
Refer to the theft-deterrent system on page  
3-55.  
The system can be set to unlock all doors by  
performing a single operation.  
Refer to Personalization Features on page  
10-8.  
A beep sound is heard for confirmation  
when the doors are unlocked using a door  
handle. If you prefer, the beep sound can be  
turned off.  
l
Front passenger door handle  
To unlock the doors, touch the sensor area  
on the inside of a front passenger door  
handle. A beep sound will be heard twice  
and the hazard warning lights will flash  
twice.  
l
l
The volume of the beep sound can also be  
adjusted.  
Refer to Personalization Features on page  
10-8.  
NOTE  
l
The doors cannot be unlocked for about  
three seconds after they are locked even if  
the sensor area on the inside of either front  
door handle is touched.  
l
Grasp either front door handle properly to  
unlock the doors, and make sure it is  
unlocked before opening it.  
If the door handle is pulled before the door  
is unlocked, the door may not open. If this  
happens, lock the door and securely grasp  
the door handle again to confirm that the  
door is unlocked, then open the door.  
3-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Knowing Your Mazda  
Advanced Keyless Entry and Start System  
l
(Auto re-lock function)  
NOTE  
l
After unlocking the doors using the sensor  
on the inside of the door handle, all the  
doors will automatically lock if any of the  
following operations are not done within  
about 30 seconds. If your vehicle has a  
theft-deterrent system, the hazard warning  
lights will flash for confirmation.  
The time required for the doors to lock  
automatically can be changed.  
If the advanced key is left in the trunk, the  
trunk lid will close, however, the trunk lid  
can be opened using the request switch and  
the vehicle could be stolen.  
While the ignition is switched ON, the trunk  
lid can be opened only when the vehicle is  
stopped with the parking brake applied  
(manual transaxle) or with the selector  
lever in the P position (automatic  
transaxle).  
l
Refer to Personalization Features on page  
10-8.  
l
A door or the trunk lid is opened.  
The auxiliary key is inserted into the key  
qStarting the Engine  
l
Locking, unlocking the steering wheel  
slot.  
l
The push button start is in any position  
The steering wheel is locked if a door is  
opened/closed/locked after the power is  
turned off using the push button start  
while the vehicle is stopped.  
This is an automatic safety device to  
protect the vehicle against theft.  
The steering wheel can be unlocked by  
pressing the push button start.  
except off position.  
l
It may require a few seconds for the doors  
to unlock after touching the sensor area on  
the inside of either front door handle.  
qOpening the Trunk Lid with  
Request Switch  
If the electronic steering lock warning  
light is flashing and the beep sound is  
heard, this indicates that the steering  
wheel is not unlocked. To unlock the  
steering wheel, jiggle the steering wheel  
from side to side while pressing the push  
button start.  
The trunk lid can be opened by pressing  
the request switch on the under side of the  
trunk lid above the license plate while the  
advanced key is being carried.  
Request switch  
3-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Knowing Your Mazda  
Advanced Keyless Entry and Start System  
Ignition positions  
Off  
Each time the push button start is pressed,  
the ignition switches in the order of off,  
ACC, and ON. Pressing the push button  
start again from ON switches the ignition  
off.  
The steering wheel locks to help protect  
against theft. Also, the power supply to  
electrical devices is turned off.  
The push button start indicator lights  
(ACC and ON) turn off.  
WARNING  
Before leaving the driver's seat, always  
switch the ignition off, set the parking  
brake, and make sure the shift lever is  
in P (automatic transaxle) or in 1st gear  
or R (manual transaxle):  
Indicator light  
Indicator  
Indicator  
light (ACC)  
light (ON)  
Leaving the driver's seat without  
switching off the ignition, setting the  
parking brake, and shifting the shift  
lever to P (automatic transaxle) or to  
1st gear or R (manual transaxle) is  
dangerous. Unexpected vehicle  
movement could occur which could  
result in an accident.  
NOTE  
l
The order in which the ignition is switched  
can be changed.  
In addition, if your intention is to  
leave the vehicle for even a short  
period, it is important to switch the  
ignition off, as leaving it in another  
position will disable some of the  
vehicle's security systems and run the  
battery down.  
Refer to Personalization Features on page  
10-8.  
l
The engine starts by pressing the push  
button start while depressing the clutch  
pedal (manual transaxle) or the brake  
pedal (automatic transaxle). To switch the  
ignition position, press the push button start  
without depressing the pedal.  
Do not leave the ignition switched ON  
while the engine is not running. Doing so  
could result in the battery going dead. If the  
ignition is left in ACC (For automatic  
transaxle, the shift lever is in the P position,  
and the ignition is in ACC), the ignition  
switches off automatically after one hour.  
The setting can be changed to not switch  
the ignition off automatically.  
ACC (Accessory)  
l
The steering wheel unlocks and some  
electrical accessories will operate.  
The indicator light (ACC) illuminates.  
NOTE  
The advanced keyless entry system does not  
function while the push button start has been  
pressed to ACC, and the doors will not lock/  
unlock even if they have been locked manually.  
Refer to Personalization Features on page  
10-8.  
3-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Knowing Your Mazda  
Advanced Keyless Entry and Start System  
ON  
5. (Manual transaxle)  
Continue to press the clutch pedal  
firmly until the engine has completely  
started.  
This is the normal running position after  
the engine is started. The indicator light  
(ON) turns off. (The indicator light (ON)  
illuminates when the ignition is switched  
ON and the engine is not running.)  
The warning lights (except brakes) should  
be inspected before the engine is started  
(page 5-43).  
(Automatic transaxle)  
Put the vehicle in park (P). If you must  
restart the engine while the vehicle is  
moving, shift into neutral (N).  
NOTE  
(Manual transaxle)  
The starter will not operate if the clutch pedal  
is not depressed sufficiently.  
NOTE  
(With headlight auto-leveling)  
When the push button start is pressed to the  
ON position, the sound of the headlight  
leveling motors operating at the front of the  
engine compartment can be heard. This does  
not indicate an abnormality.  
(Automatic transaxle)  
The starter will not operate if the shift lever is  
not in P or N and the brake pedal is not  
depressed sufficiently.  
6. Verify that the KEY indicator light  
(green) in the instrument cluster and  
the push button start indicator light  
(green) illuminate. If the KEY indicator  
light (green) does not illuminate, make  
sure that the advanced key is being  
carried. If the KEY indicator light  
(green) does not illuminate while the  
advanced key is being carried, you may  
have to use the auxiliary key to start  
the engine instead (page 3-22).  
Starting the engine  
NOTE  
l
The advanced key must be carried because  
the advanced key carries an immobilizer  
chip that must communicate with the engine  
controls at short range.  
l
The engine can be started when the push  
button start is pressed from off, ACC, or  
ON.  
1. Make sure you are carrying the  
advanced key.  
2. Occupants should fasten their seat  
belts.  
3. Make sure the parking brake is on.  
4. Continue to press the brake pedal  
firmly until the engine has completely  
started.  
3-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Knowing Your Mazda  
Advanced Keyless Entry and Start System  
NOTE  
CAUTION  
l
Under the following conditions, the KEY  
warning light (red) flashes to inform the  
driver that the push button start will not  
switch to ACC even if it is pressed from off.  
If the KEY warning light (red)  
illuminates, and the push button  
start indicator light (red) illuminates,  
this could indicate a problem with  
the engine starting system and the  
inability to start the engine or switch  
the ignition to ACC or ON. Have your  
vehicle inspected at an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.  
l
The advanced key battery is dead.  
The advanced key is out of operational  
l
range.  
l
The advanced key is placed in areas  
where it is difficult for the system to  
detect the signal (page 3-7).  
A key from another manufacturer similar  
l
to the advanced key is in the operational  
range.  
l
(Forced engine starting method)  
If the KEY warning light (red) illuminates,  
and the push button start indicator light  
(red) flashes, this could indicate a problem  
with the engine starting system. Have your  
vehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda  
Dealer as soon as possible. If this occurs,  
the engine can be force-started. Press and  
hold the push button start until the engine  
starts. Other procedures necessary for  
starting the engine such as having the  
advanced key in the cabin, and depressing  
the brake pedal (Automatic transaxle) or  
the clutch pedal (Manual transaxle) are  
required.  
l
l
When the engine is force-started, the key  
warning light (red) remains illuminated and  
the key indicator light (green) does not  
illuminate.  
If the attempt to start the engine using the  
forced-start method is unsuccessful, it may  
be necessary to use the auxiliary key.  
7. Press the push button start after the  
KEY indicator light (green) in the  
instrument cluster, and the push button  
start indicator light (green) illuminate.  
3-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Knowing Your Mazda  
Advanced Keyless Entry and Start System  
NOTE  
3. Depress the clutch (manual transaxle)  
l
After starting the engine, the push button  
or brake pedal (automatic transaxle)  
until the ring around the key slot starts  
flashing.  
start indicator lights (ACC and ON) turn  
off and the ignition is in the ON position.  
After pressing the push button start and  
before the engine starts, the operation  
sound of the fuel pump motor from near the  
fuel tank can be heard, however, this does  
not indicate a malfunction.  
l
4. Insert the auxiliary key into the slot  
while it is flashing, but DO NOT  
TURN THE AUXILIARY KEY IN  
THE SLOT.  
l
(With headlight auto-leveling)  
After pressing the push button start and  
before the engine starts, the operation  
sound of the headlight leveling motors  
operating at the front of the engine  
compartment can be heard, however, this  
does not indicate a malfunction.  
8. After starting the engine, let it idle for  
about ten seconds.  
NOTE  
l
Whether the engine is cold or warm, it  
should be started without the use of the  
accelerator.  
If the engine does not start the first time,  
refer to Starting a Flooded Engine under  
Emergency Starting. If the engine still does  
not start, have your vehicle inspected by an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer (page 7-13).  
CAUTION  
After inserting the auxiliary key, do  
not attempt to turn it in the key slot.  
It could damage the vehicle or the  
auxiliary key.  
l
5. Press the push button start to start the  
engine.  
Starting the engine using the auxiliary  
key  
If the engine cannot be started for reasons  
such as the advanced key battery is dead  
or the engine cannot be started using the  
forced-start method, the engine can be  
started using the auxiliary key.  
1. Slide the auxiliary key out from the  
bottom of the advanced key.  
2. Use the auxiliary key to remove the  
key slot cover.  
3-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Knowing Your Mazda  
Advanced Keyless Entry and Start System  
NOTE  
NOTE  
l
l
Leave the auxiliary key in the key slot while  
When the push button start is pressed to off  
from ON, the KEY indicator light (green)  
flashes for approximately 30 seconds  
indicating that the remaining battery power  
of the advanced key is low. Replace with a  
new battery before the advanced key  
becomes unusable.  
Refer to Advanced Key Maintenance (page  
3-5)  
(Automatic transaxle)  
the engine is running.  
l
When leaving the vehicle, remove the  
auxiliary key from the key slot and the  
vehicle.  
A thief does not need your advanced key to  
steal the vehicle if the thief has your  
auxiliary key.  
To switch the ignition position, insert the  
auxiliary key into the key slot, depress the  
clutch pedal (manual transaxle) or the  
brake pedal (automatic transaxle), and then  
press the push button start right after  
releasing the pedal.  
l
l
If the engine is turned off while the shift  
lever is in a position other than P, the  
ignition switches to ACC.  
Emergency engine stop  
Turning off the engine  
Continuously pressing the push button  
start while the engine is running and the  
vehicle is stopped, or quickly pressing it  
any number of times will stop turn the  
engine off immediately.  
1. Stop the vehicle completely.  
2. (Manual transaxle)  
Shift into neutral.  
(Automatic transaxle)  
Shift the shift lever to the P position.  
CAUTION  
Other than an emergency situation,  
do not attempt to stop the engine  
while driving the vehicle.  
3. Press the push button start to turn off  
the engine.  
CAUTION  
When leaving the vehicle, make sure  
the push button start is pressed to  
off.  
3-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Knowing Your Mazda  
Advanced Keyless Entry and Start System  
Transmitter  
Operation Using Advanced  
Key Functions  
Lock button  
Operation indicator light  
qKeyless Entry System  
Unlock button  
Trunk button  
This system uses the more traditional  
keyless entry buttons to remotely lock and  
unlock the doors and opens the trunk lid,  
and opens the power windows and the  
moonroof.  
It can also help you signal for attention.  
Press the buttons slowly and carefully.  
Panic button  
NOTE  
NOTE  
(U.S.A.)  
l
The keyless entry system is designed to  
operate up to about 2.5 m (8 ft) from the  
l
This device complies with Part 15 of the  
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the  
following two conditions: (1) this device  
may not cause harmful interference, and (2)  
this device must accept any interference  
received, including interference that may  
cause undesired operation.  
center of the vehicle, but this may vary due  
to local conditions.  
The system does not operate when the  
auxiliary key is in the key slot.  
l
l
The keyless entry system is fully operational  
when the push button start is switched off.  
The system does not operate if the push  
button start is switched to any position  
other than off.  
All doors cannot be locked by pressing the  
lock button while any door is open. The  
hazard warning lights will also not flash.  
If the transmitter does not operate when  
pressing a button or the operational range  
becomes too small, the battery may be  
dead. To install a new battery, refer to  
Maintenance (page 3-5).  
l
(CANADA)  
This device complies with RSS-210 of  
Industry CANADA. Operation is subject to  
the following two conditions: (1) this device  
may not cause interference, and (2) this  
device must accept any interference,  
including interference that may cause  
undesired operation of the device.  
l
l
NOTE  
The unlock button can be used to open the  
power windows and the moonroof, but the lock  
button cannot be used to close the power  
windows and the moonroof.  
Refer to the following pages:  
Opening/Closing the Power Windows (page  
3-41)  
Opening/Closing the Moonroof (page 3-48)  
The operation indicator light flashes when  
the buttons are pressed.  
3-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Knowing Your Mazda  
Advanced Keyless Entry and Start System  
Lock button  
NOTE  
l
All doors cannot be locked when any door  
is open.  
Confirm that all doors are locked visually  
or audibly by use of the double click.  
To lock the doors, press the lock button. A  
beep sound will be heard once and the  
hazard warning lights will flash once.  
l
To confirm that all doors have been  
locked, press the lock button again within  
5 seconds. If they are closed and locked,  
the horn will sound.  
The system can be set not to sound the  
horn.  
Unlock button  
To unlock the driver's door, press the  
unlock button. A beep will be heard twice  
and the hazard warning lights will flash  
twice.  
Refer to Personalization Features on page  
10-8.  
To unlock all doors, press the unlock  
button again within 3 seconds and two  
more beep sounds will be heard.  
NOTE  
l
A beep sound can be heard for confirmation  
NOTE  
when the doors are locked using the  
advanced keyless transmitter. If you prefer,  
the beep sound can be turned off. The  
volume of the beep sound can be changed.  
Refer to Personalization Features on page  
10-8.  
l
A beep sound can be heard for confirmation  
when the doors are locked using the  
advanced keyless transmitter. If you prefer,  
the beep sound can be turned off. The  
volume of the beep sound can be changed.  
Refer to Personalization Features on page  
10-8.  
l
(Without theft-deterrent system)  
The hazard warning lights will flash once  
to indicate that all doors are locked.  
(With theft-deterrent system)  
The hazard warning lights flash when the  
theft deterrent system is armed.  
l
(Without theft-deterrent system)  
The hazard warning lights will flash twice  
to indicate that all doors are unlocked.  
(With theft-deterrent system)  
The hazard warning lights flash when the  
theft deterrent system is turned off.  
The hazard warning lights do not flash  
unless the theft deterrent system has been  
properly turned off.  
When the doors are unlocked by pressing  
the unlock button on the transmitter while  
the theft-deterrent system is turned off, the  
hazard warning lights will flash twice to  
indicate that the system is turned off.  
Refer to the theft-deterrent system on page  
3-55.  
The hazard warning lights do not flash if all  
the doors are locked before the theft-  
deterrent system is properly armed.  
When the doors are locked by pressing the  
lock button on the transmitter while the  
theft-deterrent system is armed, the hazard  
warning lights will flash once to indicate  
that the system is armed.  
Refer to the theft-deterrent system on page  
3-55.  
The system can be set to unlock all doors by  
performing a single operation.  
Refer to Personalization Features on page  
10-8.  
l
3-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Knowing Your Mazda  
Advanced Keyless Entry and Start System  
NOTE  
NOTE  
(Auto re-lock function)  
However, if the driver is too close to the  
After unlocking with the transmitter, All doors  
will automatically lock and the hazard  
warning light will flash if any of the following  
operations are not performed within about 30  
seconds. If your vehicle has a theft-deterrent  
system, the hazard warning lights will flash for  
confirmation.  
vehicle the panic button may not function.  
(Turning off the alarm)  
The alarm stops by pressing any button on  
the transmitter.  
qAuxiliary Key Function  
The time required for the doors to lock  
automatically can be changed.  
Refer to Personalization Features on page  
10-8.  
Use the auxiliary key stored in the  
advanced key in the event of a dead  
transmitter battery or malfunction.  
l
A door or the trunk lid is opened.  
The auxiliary key is inserted into the key  
slot.  
Removing the auxiliary key  
l
Pull out the auxiliary key from the  
advanced key.  
l
The push button start is in any position  
except off position.  
Trunk button  
To open the trunk, press and hold the  
trunk button until the trunk lid opens.  
NOTE  
To open the trunk when the ignition is switched  
to a position other than off, use the remote  
release button inside the vehicle (page 3-33).  
Panic button  
If you witness from a distance someone  
attempting to break into or damage your  
vehicle, pressing the panic button will  
activate the vehicle's alarm.  
Locking, unlocking the doors  
The doors can be locked/unlocked using  
the auxiliary key, refer to Locking,  
Unlocking with Key (page 3-30).  
NOTE  
Starting the engine  
The panic button will work whether any door  
The engine can be started with the  
auxiliary key, refer to Starting the engine  
(page 3-10).  
or the trunk lid is open or closed.  
(Turning on the alarm)  
Pressing the panic button for 1 second or  
more will trigger the alarm for about 2  
minutes and 30 seconds, and the  
following will occur:  
Locking, unlocking the glove box  
The glove box can be locked/unlocked  
using the auxiliary key, refer to Glove  
Box (page 6-102).  
l
The horn sounds intermittently.  
The hazard warning lights flash.  
l
3-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Knowing Your Mazda  
Advanced Keyless Entry and Start System  
Advanced Key Suspend  
Function  
Warning Lights and Beep  
Sounds  
If an advanced key is left in the vehicle,  
the functions of the advanced key left in  
the vehicle are temporarily suspended to  
prevent theft of the vehicle.  
q
System Malfunction Warning Light  
If any malfunction occurs in the advanced  
keyless function, the KEY warning light  
(red) in the instrument cluster illuminates  
continuously.  
The following are inoperable:  
l
Starting the engine using the push  
button start.  
Operating the request switches.  
CAUTION  
l
To restore these functions, perform any  
one of the following:  
Press a switch on the advanced key  
If the KEY warning light (red) remains  
illuminated, do not continue to drive  
the vehicle with the advanced keyless  
function. Park the vehicle in a safe  
place and use the auxiliary key to  
continue driving the vehicle. Have the  
vehicle inspected at an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.  
Refer to Starting the engine (page  
3-10).  
l
which has had its functions temporarily  
suspended.  
(Manual transaxle)  
l
When carrying another advanced key,  
depress the clutch pedal until the KEY  
indicator light (green) illuminates.  
(Automatic transaxle)  
When carrying another advanced key,  
depress the brake pedal until the KEY  
indicator light (green) illuminates.  
qIgnition Not Switched Off  
(STOP) Warning Beep  
If the driver's door is opened while the  
ignition is switched to ACC, a continuous  
beep sound will be heard to notify the  
driver that the ignition has not been  
switched off (STOP). Left in this  
condition, the keyless entry system will  
not operate, the car cannot be locked, and  
the battery power will be depleted.  
3-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Knowing Your Mazda  
Advanced Keyless Entry and Start System  
qAdvanced Key Removed from  
Vehicle Warning Beep  
qRequest Switch Inoperable  
Warning Beep  
Under the following conditions, a beep  
sound will be heard and the KEY warning  
light (red) will flash continuously when  
the push button start has not been  
switched off to notify the driver that the  
advanced key has been removed. The  
KEY warning light (red) will stop flashing  
when the advanced key is back inside the  
vehicle:  
If the request switch for a front door is  
pressed under the following conditions  
while the advanced key is being carried, a  
beep will be heard 6 times to indicate that  
the front doors cannot be locked.  
l
A door is open (door ajar included).  
The push button start has not been  
l
switched to off.  
The auxiliary key is inserted into the  
l
l
The push button start has not been  
key slot.  
switched off, the driver's door is open,  
and the advanced key is removed from  
the vehicle. (A beep sound will be  
heard 3 times.)  
However the beep sound will be heard  
continuously when the push button  
start is switched to ACC and the door  
is open due to the activation of the  
warning beep sound indicating that the  
push button start is not switched off.  
qAdvanced Key Battery Dead  
Warning  
When the push button start is pressed off  
from ON, the KEY indicator light (green)  
flashes for approximately 30 seconds  
indicating that the remaining battery  
power is low. Replace with a new battery  
before the advanced key becomes  
unusable.  
l
The push button start has not been  
Refer to Advanced Key Maintenance  
(page 3-5).  
switched off and all the doors are  
closed after removing the advanced  
key from the vehicle. (A beep sound  
will be heard 6 times. The volume of  
the beep sound can be changed.)  
Refer to Personalization Features on  
page 10-8.  
NOTE  
The advanced key can be set so that the KEY  
indicator light (green) does not flash even if  
the battery power is low.  
Refer to Personalization Features on page  
10-8.  
NOTE  
Because the advanced key utilizes low-intensity  
radio waves, the Advanced Key Removed From  
Vehicle Warning may activate if the advanced  
key is carried together with a metal object or it  
is placed in a poor signal reception area  
within the vehicle.  
q
Engine Start Not Permitted Warning  
Under the following conditions, the KEY  
warning light (red) flashes to inform the  
driver that the push button start will not  
switch to ACC even if it is switched from  
off.  
l
The advanced key battery is dead.  
The advanced key is not within  
l
operational range.  
3-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Knowing Your Mazda  
Advanced Keyless Entry and Start System  
l
l
The advanced key is placed in areas  
qAdvanced Key Left-in-vehicle  
Warning Beep  
where it is difficult for the system to  
detect the signal (page 3-7).  
A key from another manufacturer  
similar to the advanced key is in the  
operational range.  
If an advanced key is left in the vehicle  
cabin and all the doors are locked using a  
separate advanced key, a beep sound is  
heard for about 10 seconds to remind the  
driver that the advanced key has been left  
in the vehicle cabin. If this happens, the  
doors lock but the functions of the  
advanced key left in the vehicle cabin  
may be temporarily suspended. Perform  
the following procedure to restore the  
functions of the advanced key (page  
3-19).  
qAdvanced Key Left-in-trunk  
Warning Beep  
If the advanced key is left in the trunk  
compartment with all doors locked and  
the trunk lid closed, a beep sound is heard  
for about 10 seconds to remind the driver  
the advanced key has been left in the  
trunk compartment. If this happens, open  
the trunk lid by pressing the request  
switch and remove the advanced key. An  
advanced key removed from the trunk  
may not function because its functions  
may have been temporarily suspended. To  
restore the advanced key function,  
perform the applicable procedure (page  
3-19).  
The volume of the beep sound can be  
changed.  
Refer to Personalization Features on page  
10-8.  
NOTE  
The warning beep does not sound while the  
trunk is open. The warning beep sounds after  
the trunk is closed.  
The system can be set not to open the  
trunk.  
Refer to Personalization Features on page  
10-8.  
qAuxiliary Key Removed Warning  
Beep  
If the auxiliary key is removed under the  
following conditions while it is in use and  
in the ACC or ON position, the warning  
beep sounds three times.  
l
The advanced key is not in the vehicle.  
The battery for the advanced key is  
l
dead.  
3-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Knowing Your Mazda  
Advanced Keyless Entry and Start System  
When Warning Indicator/Beep is Activated  
Under the following conditions, warning beeps are heard and a warning/indicator light in  
the instrument cluster illuminates to notify the driver of improper operation of the  
advanced key to prevent theft of the vehicle (page 3-19).  
Warning  
How to check  
When a door is open, a continuous beep sound will be Check whether the push button start has been switched  
heard.  
off.  
When a door is open, 3 beep sounds are heard, and the  
KEY warning light (red) in the instrument cluster  
flashes.  
Check whether the advanced key has been removed  
from the vehicle.  
When a door is closed, a beep sound is heard 6 times,  
and the KEY warning light (red) in the instrument  
cluster flashes.  
Check whether the advanced key has been removed  
from the vehicle.  
When locking the doors or closing the trunk, the chime Check whether the advanced key has been left in the  
sounds for about ten seconds.  
vehicle or the trunk.  
Check whether the push button start has been switched  
off.  
When attempting to lock the doors by pressing the  
request switch on the front doors, and six beep sounds  
are heard.  
Check whether a door is open.  
The advanced key battery power is low. Replace the  
battery with a new one.  
Refer to Advanced Key Maintenance on page 3-5.  
When the KEY indicator light (green) flashes in the  
instrument cluster.  
The advanced key is malfunctioning. Park the vehicle in  
When the KEY warning light (red) remains illuminated a safe place, and use the auxiliary key to continue  
in the instrument cluster.  
driving the vehicle. Have the vehicle inspected at an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.  
3-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Knowing Your Mazda  
Doors and Locks  
Without keyless entry system  
Keys  
WARNING  
Do not leave the key in your vehicle  
with children and keep them in a place  
where your children will not find or  
play with them:  
Leaving children in a vehicle with the  
key is dangerous. This could result in  
someone being badly injured or even  
killed. Children may find these new  
kinds of keys to be an interesting toy  
to play with and could cause the  
power windows or other controls to  
operate, or even make the vehicle  
move.  
Key code number plate  
A code number is stamped on the plate  
attached to the key set; detach this plate  
and store it in a safe place (not in the  
vehicle) for use if you need to make a  
replacement key.  
NOTE  
l
Refer to Immobilizer System (page 3-53) for  
information regarding keys and engine  
starting.  
NOTE  
l
Write down the code number and keep it in  
a separate safe and convenient place, but  
not in the vehicle.  
l
(With theft-deterrent system)  
Refer to Theft-Deterrent System (page 3-55)  
for information regarding keys and the  
prevention of vehicle and vehicle contents  
theft.  
If your key is lost, consult your Authorized  
Mazda Dealer and have your code number  
ready.  
l
Some types of key chains cannot be  
attached to the retractable type key. In this  
case, use the key ring provided with the  
transmitter which has the key code number  
plate attached.  
The keys operate all locks.  
With keyless entry system  
Retractable  
type key  
Key code number plate  
Key ring  
3-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Knowing Your Mazda  
Doors and Locks  
Key extend/retract method (Retractable  
type key)  
Keyless Entry Systemí  
This system remotely locks and unlocks  
the doors and opens the trunk lid, and  
opens the power windows and the  
moonroof.  
To extend the key, press the release  
button.  
It can also help you signal for attention.  
Operating the theft-deterrent system with  
the keyless entry system transmitter is  
also possible on theft-deterrent system-  
equipped vehicles.  
Press the buttons slowly and carefully.  
CAUTION  
To avoid damage to the transmitter,  
do not:  
Ø Drop the transmitter.  
Ø Get the transmitter wet.  
Ø Disassemble the transmitter.  
Ø Expose the transmitter to any kind  
of magnetic field.  
To retract the key, rotate it into the holder  
while pressing the release button.  
Ø Expose the transmitter to high  
temperatures on places such as  
the dashboard or hood, under  
direct sunlight.  
3-24  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Knowing Your Mazda  
Doors and Locks  
NOTE  
qTransmitter  
l
The keyless entry system is designed to  
operate up to about 2.5 m (8 ft) from the  
center of the vehicle, but this may vary due  
to local conditions.  
The system does not operate when the key is  
in the ignition switch.  
Lock button  
Unlock button  
Panic button  
l
l
Doors can be locked by pressing the lock  
button while any other door is open.  
However, the hazard warning lights will not  
flash and the horn will not sound.  
If the transmitter does not operate when  
pressing a button or the operation range  
becomes too small, the battery may be  
dead. To install a new battery, refer to  
Maintenance (page 3-27).  
Operation  
indicator light  
l
Trunk button  
NOTE  
l
(U.S.A.)  
This device complies with Part 15 of the  
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the  
following two conditions: (1) this device  
may not cause harmful interference, and (2)  
this device must accept any interference  
received, including interference that may  
cause undesired operation.  
l
Additional transmitters can be obtained at  
an Authorized Mazda Dealer. Up to 3  
transmitters can be used with the keyless  
entry system per vehicle. Bring all  
transmitters to an Authorized Mazda  
Dealer when additional transmitters are  
required.  
l
(CANADA)  
This device complies with RSS-210 of  
Industry CANADA. Operation is subject to  
the following two conditions: (1) this device  
may not cause interference, and (2) this  
device must accept any interference,  
including interference that may cause  
undesired operation of the device.  
NOTE  
The unlock button can be used to open the  
power windows and the moonroof, but the lock  
button cannot be used to close the power  
windows and the moonroof.  
Refer to the following pages:  
Opening/Closing the Power Windows (page  
3-41)  
Opening/Closing the Moonroof (page 3-48)  
The operation indicator light flashes when  
the buttons are pressed.  
3-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Knowing Your Mazda  
Doors and Locks  
Lock button  
To unlock all doors, press the unlock  
button again within 5 seconds.  
To lock the doors, press the lock button.  
NOTE  
To confirm that all doors have been  
locked, press the lock button again within  
5 seconds. If they are closed and locked,  
the horn will sound.  
(Without theft-deterrent system)  
The hazard warning lights will flash twice to  
indicate that all doors are unlocked.  
(With theft-deterrent system)  
The system can be set not to sound the  
horn.  
The hazard warning lights flash when the theft  
deterrent system is turned off.  
Refer to Personalization Features on page  
10-8.  
The hazard warning lights do not flash unless  
the theft deterrent system has been properly  
turned off.  
When the doors are unlocked by pressing the  
unlock button on the transmitter while the  
theft-deterrent system is turned off, the hazard  
warning lights will flash twice to indicate that  
the system is turned off.  
Refer to the theft-deterrent system on page  
3-55.  
The system can be set to unlock all doors by  
performing a single operation.  
Refer to Personalization Features on page  
10-8.  
NOTE  
l
Pressing the transmitter lock button to lock  
the doors while any door is open does not  
sound the horn.  
l
(Without theft-deterrent system)  
The hazard warning lights will flash once  
to indicate that all doors are locked.  
l
(With theft-deterrent system)  
The hazard warning lights flash when the  
theft deterrent system is armed.  
The hazard warning lights do not flash if all  
the doors are locked before the theft-  
deterrent system is properly armed.  
When the doors are locked by pressing the  
lock button on the transmitter while the  
theft-deterrent system is armed, the hazard  
warning lights will flash once to indicate  
that the system is armed.  
NOTE  
Auto re-lock function  
After unlocking with the transmitter, all doors  
will automatically lock if one of the doors or  
the trunk lid is not opened within about 30  
seconds.  
The time required for the doors to lock  
automatically can be changed.  
Refer to Personalization Features on page  
10-8.  
Refer to the theft-deterrent system on page  
3-55.  
NOTE  
l
All doors cannot be locked when the key is  
in the ignition switch.  
Confirm that all doors are locked visually  
Trunk button  
l
To open the trunk, press and hold the  
trunk button until the trunk lid opens.  
or audibly by use of the double click.  
Unlock button  
NOTE  
To unlock the driver's door, press the  
unlock button.  
To open the trunk when the ignition is switched  
to a position other than off, use the remote  
release button inside the vehicle (page 3-33).  
3-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Knowing Your Mazda  
Doors and Locks  
Panic button  
CAUTION  
If you witness from a distance someone  
attempting to break into or damage your  
vehicle, pressing the panic button will  
activate the vehicle's alarm.  
Ø Install the battery with the positive  
pole ( ) facing up. Battery  
leakage could occur if it is not  
installed correctly.  
Ø When replacing the battery, be  
careful not to bend the electrical  
terminals or get oil on them. Also  
be careful not to get dirt in the  
transmitter as it could be  
damaged.  
Ø There is the danger of explosion if  
the battery is not correctly  
replaced.  
Ø Replace only with the same type  
battery (CR1620 or equivalent).  
Ø Dispose of used batteries  
according to the following  
instructions.  
NOTE  
The panic button will work whether any door  
or the trunk lid is open or closed.  
Turning on the alarm  
Pressing the panic button for 1 second or  
more will trigger the alarm for about 2  
minutes and 30 seconds, and the  
following will occur:  
l
The horn sounds intermittently.  
The hazard warning lights flash.  
l
Turning off the alarm  
Press any button on the transmitter.  
Ø
Insulate the plus and minus  
terminals of the battery using  
cellophane or equivalent tape.  
Never disassemble.  
Never throw the battery into  
fire and/or water.  
Never deform or crush.  
qTransmitter Maintenance  
If the buttons on the transmitter are  
inoperable and the operation indicator  
light does not flash, the battery may be  
dead.  
Replace with a new battery before the  
transmitter becomes unusable.  
Ø
Ø
Ø
Replacing the transmitter battery  
1. Unfold the key (page 3-23).  
3-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Knowing Your Mazda  
Doors and Locks  
2. Insert a small flathead screwdriver into  
the slot and push the tab to remove the  
key from the transmitter.  
4. Press the tab outward and remove the  
battery slowly and carefully using a  
small flathead screwdriver.  
Tab  
Tab  
3. Insert a small flathead screwdriver into  
the slot and gently pry open the  
transmitter.  
5. Install a new battery (CR1620 or  
equivalent) by inserting it under the  
retainer tabs with the positive pole  
facing up.  
Retainer tab  
6. Align the front and back covers and  
snap the transmitter shut.  
3-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Knowing Your Mazda  
Doors and Locks  
7. Align the key with the transmitter as  
shown in the figure, and insert the key  
until a click sound is heard.  
Door Locks  
WARNING  
Always take all children and pets with  
you or leave a responsible person with  
them:  
Leaving a child or a pet unattended  
in a parked vehicle is dangerous. In  
hot weather, temperatures inside a  
vehicle can become high enough to  
cause brain damage or even death.  
Do not leave the key in your vehicle  
with children and keep them in a place  
where your children will not find or  
play with them:  
CAUTION  
Leaving children in a vehicle with the  
key is dangerous. This could result in  
someone being badly injured or even  
killed.  
Insert the key into the transmitter  
securely until a click sound is heard.  
If it is not inserted securely, it could  
detach from the transmitter.  
Keep all doors locked when driving:  
Unlocked doors in a moving vehicle  
are dangerous. Passengers can fall  
out if a door is accidentally opened  
and can more easily be thrown out in  
an accident.  
qService  
If you have a problem with the keyless  
entry system, consult an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer.  
Always close all the windows and the  
moonroof, lock the doors and take the  
key with you when leaving your vehicle  
unattended:  
If your transmitter is lost or stolen, bring  
all remaining transmitters to an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as  
possible for a replacement and to make  
the lost or stolen transmitter inoperative.  
Leaving your vehicle unlocked is  
dangerous as children could lock  
themselves in a hot vehicle, which  
could result in death. Also, a vehicle  
left unlocked becomes an easy target  
for thieves and intruders.  
CAUTION  
Radio equipment like this is governed  
by laws in the United States.  
Changes or modifications not  
expressly approved by the party  
responsible for compliance could void  
the user's authority to operate the  
equipment.  
3-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Knowing Your Mazda  
Doors and Locks  
qLocking, Unlocking with Key  
q
Locking, Unlocking with Transmitter  
(with Retractable Type Key)  
The driver's door can be locked/unlocked  
with the key.  
Turn the key toward the front to lock,  
toward the back to unlock.  
The doors can be locked/unlocked by  
operating the keyless entry system  
transmitter, refer to Keyless Entry System  
(page 3-24).  
qLocking, Unlocking with Door-  
Lock Knob  
To lock any door from the inside, push the  
door-lock knob.  
Unlock  
Lock  
To unlock, pull it out.  
This does not operate the other door  
locks.  
qLocking with Request Switch  
(with Advanced Key)  
Lock  
The doors can be locked by operating the  
request switch while carrying the  
advanced key outside the vehicle, refer to  
Operations Using Advanced Keyless  
Functions (page 3-7).  
Unlock  
qUnlocking with Door Handle  
(With Advanced Key)  
The doors can be unlocked by operating  
the door handle on the front doors while  
carrying the advanced key outside the  
vehicle, refer to Operations Using  
Advanced Keyless Functions (page 3-7).  
qLocking, Unlocking with  
Transmitter (with Advanced Key)  
The doors can be locked/unlocked by  
operating the keyless entry system  
transmitter, refer to Keyless Entry System  
(page 3-16).  
3-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Knowing Your Mazda  
Doors and Locks  
To lock any door with the door-lock knob  
from the outside, push the door-lock knob  
to the lock position and close the door.  
This does not operate the other door  
locks.  
(With retractable type key)  
The vehicle lock-out prevention feature  
prevents you from locking yourself out of  
the vehicle. With the key in the ignition  
switch, all doors will automatically unlock  
if they are locked using the power door  
locks with any door open.  
Door-lock knob  
Locking, unlocking with key  
All doors lock automatically when the  
driver's door is locked with the key. All  
doors unlock when the driver's door is  
unlocked and the key is held in the unlock  
position for one second or longer.  
NOTE  
l
(With advanced key)  
The driver's door cannot be locked using  
the door-lock knob from the outside.  
Unlock  
Lock  
l
(Without advanced key)  
The driver's door cannot be locked using  
the door-lock knob from the outside if the  
key is in the ignition switch.  
l
When locking the doors this way, be careful  
NOTE  
l
not to leave the key inside the vehicle.  
Holding the key in the unlocked position in  
the driver's door lock for about a second  
unlocks all doors. To unlock only the  
driver's door, insert the key into the driver's  
door lock and turn the key briefly to the  
unlock position and then immediately  
return it to the center position.  
qPower Door Locks  
Vehicle lock-out prevention  
(With advanced key)  
The vehicle lock-out prevention feature  
prevents you from locking yourself out of  
the vehicle. All doors will automatically  
unlock if they are locked using the power  
door locks with any door open.  
l
The system can be set to unlock all doors by  
performing a single operation.  
Refer to Personalization Features on page  
10-8.  
3-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Knowing Your Mazda  
Doors and Locks  
Locking, unlocking with door-lock  
switch  
Locking, unlocking with transmitter  
(with retractable type key)  
All doors lock automatically when lock  
side is pressed. They all unlock when  
unlock side is pressed.  
All doors can be locked/unlocked by  
operating the keyless entry system  
transmitter, refer to Keyless Entry System  
(page 3-24).  
qRear Door Child Safety Locks  
Unlock  
Lock  
These locks are intended to help prevent  
children from accidentally opening the  
rear doors. Use them both whenever a  
child rides in the vehicle.  
If you slide the child safety lock to the  
lock position before closing that door, the  
door cannot be opened from the inside.  
The door can be opened only by pulling  
the outside handle.  
Locking with request switch (with  
advanced key)  
All doors can be locked by operating the  
request switch on the front doors while  
carrying the advanced key outside the  
vehicle, refer to Operations Using  
Unlock  
Lock  
Advanced Keyless Functions (page 3-7).  
Unlocking with door handle (with  
advanced key)  
Driver's door or all doors can be unlocked  
by operating the door handle on the front  
doors while carrying the advanced key  
outside the vehicle, refer to Operating  
Using Advanced Keyless Functions (page  
3-7).  
Locking, unlocking with transmitter  
(with advanced key)  
All doors can be locked/unlocked by  
operating the keyless entry system  
transmitter, refer to Keyless Entry System  
(page 3-16).  
3-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Knowing Your Mazda  
Doors and Locks  
q
Opening and Closing the Trunk Lid  
Trunk Lid  
WARNING  
Never allow a person to ride in the  
trunk:  
WARNING  
Close the trunk lid, be sure the seat  
backs are latched and do not allow  
children to play inside the vehicle:  
Leaving the trunk lid open or leaving  
children in the vehicle with the keys is  
dangerous. Children could open the  
trunk lid and climb inside resulting in  
possible injury or death from heat  
exposure.  
Allowing a person to ride in the trunk  
is dangerous. In addition, the person  
in the trunk could be seriously  
injured or killed during sudden  
braking or a collision.  
Keep the trunk closed when driving:  
Exhaust gas entering the cabin of a  
vehicle through an open trunk is  
dangerous. This gas contains CO  
(carbon monoxide), which is  
Always keep the car from being a  
tempting place to play by latching the  
rear seats, doors and the trunk, and  
keeping the keys where children can  
not play with them:  
colorless, odorless, and highly  
poisonous. If inhaled, it can cause  
loss of consciousness and death.  
Leaving children or animals  
unattended in a parked vehicle is  
dangerous. Babies left sleeping and  
children who lock themselves in cars  
or trunks can die very quickly from  
heat prostration. Do not leave your  
children or pets alone in a car at any  
time. Do not leave the car, the rear  
folding seats or the trunk unlocked.  
Opening the trunk lid with the request  
switch (with advanced key)  
The trunk lid can be opened by operating  
the request switch on the trunk lid while  
carrying the advanced key outside the  
vehicle, refer to Operations Using  
Advanced Keyless Functions (page 3-7).  
Opening the trunk lid with the  
transmitter (with advanced key)  
The trunk lid can be opened by operating  
the keyless entry system transmitter, refer  
to Keyless Entry System (page 3-16).  
3-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Knowing Your Mazda  
Doors and Locks  
Opening the trunk lid with the  
When the trunk lid cannot be opened  
transmitter (with retractable type key)  
If the vehicle battery is dead or there is a  
malfunction in the electrical system and  
the trunk lid cannot be opened, perform  
the following procedure as an emergency  
measure to Open it:  
The trunk lid can be opened by operating  
the keyless entry system transmitter, refer  
to Keyless Entry System (page 3-24).  
Opening the trunk lid with the remote  
release button  
1. Open the cover behind the right rear  
passenger seat head restraint.  
Push the release button.  
Cover  
Lever  
Cover  
NOTE  
While the ignition is switched ON, the trunk lid  
can be opened only when the vehicle is stopped  
with the parking brake applied (manual  
transaxle) or with the selector lever in the P  
position (automatic transaxle).  
2. Pull the lever forward and fold down  
the seatback.  
3. Carefully climb into the trunk from the  
back seat.  
3-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Knowing Your Mazda  
Doors and Locks  
4. Slide the inside trunk release lever in  
the direction of the arrow.  
NOTE  
To prevent the battery from being discharged,  
do not leave the trunk open for a long period  
when the engine is not running.  
After performing this emergency measure,  
have the vehicle inspected at an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as  
possible.  
Closing the trunk lid  
Use both hands to push the trunk lid down  
until the lock snaps shut. Do not slam it.  
Pull up on the trunk lid to make sure it is  
secure.  
qTrunk Light  
The trunk light is on when the lid is open  
and off when it's closed.  
3-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Knowing Your Mazda  
Doors and Locks  
Inside Trunk Release Lever  
WARNING  
Close the trunk lid, be sure the seat  
backs are latched and do not allow  
children to play inside the vehicle:  
Leaving the trunk lid open or leaving  
children in the vehicle with the keys is  
dangerous. Children could open the  
trunk lid and climb inside resulting in  
possible injury or death from heat  
exposure.  
Your vehicle is equipped with an inside  
trunk release lever that provides a means  
of escape for children and adults in the  
event they become locked inside the  
trunk.  
No matter how careful adults might be  
with keys and locking their cars, parents  
should be aware that children may be  
tempted to play around vehicles and use  
the trunk as a hiding place.  
Always keep the car from being a  
tempting place to play by latching the  
rear seats, doors and the trunk, and  
keeping the keys where children can  
not play with them:  
Adults are advised to familiarize  
themselves with the operation and  
location of the inside trunk release lever  
so that all children can be told about it in  
an appropriate way, keeping in mind that  
most vehicles do not have such levers.  
Leaving children or animals  
unattended in a parked vehicle is  
dangerous. Babies left sleeping and  
children who lock themselves in cars  
or trunks can die very quickly from  
heat prostration. Do not leave your  
children or pets alone in a car at any  
time. Do not leave the car, the rear  
folding seats or the trunk unlocked.  
3-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Knowing Your Mazda  
Doors and Locks  
qOpening the Trunk Lid from the  
Inside  
Power Windows  
The ignition must be ON for the power  
windows to operate.  
Slide the inside trunk release lever in the  
direction of the arrow. The lever is made  
of material that will glow for hours in the  
darkness of the trunk following a brief  
exposure to ambient light.  
WARNING  
Make sure the opening is clear before  
closing a window:  
Closing power windows are  
dangerous. A person's hands, head,  
or even neck could be caught by the  
window and result in serious injury  
or even death.  
The inside trunk release lever is located  
on the inside of the trunk lid.  
This warning applies especially to  
children.  
Always lock all passenger power  
windows with the power window lock  
switch on the driver's side while  
children are in the vehicle, and never  
allow children to play with power  
window switches, the advanced key or  
the keyless entry system:  
Leaving the power window switches  
unlocked while children are in the  
vehicle is dangerous. Power window  
switches that are not locked with the  
power window lock switch would  
allow children to operate power  
windows unintentionally which could  
result in serious injury if a child's  
hands, head or neck becomes caught  
by the window.  
Letting children play with advanced  
keys or keyless entry systems are just  
as dangerous.  
CAUTION  
To prevent burning out the fuse and  
damaging the power window system,  
do not open or close more than three  
windows at once.  
3-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Knowing Your Mazda  
Doors and Locks  
Manual opening/closing  
q
Operating the Front Power Windows  
To open a power window to the desired  
position, lightly hold down the switch.  
To close the power window to the desired  
position, lightly pull up the switch.  
NOTE  
l
Each passenger power window can be  
operated with each door switch when the  
power window lock switch on the driver's  
door is in the unlocked position (page  
3-40).  
Owner master control switch  
Close  
l
Each passenger power window can also be  
operated by the power window master  
control switches on the driver's door.  
Driver's  
Open  
window  
Owner master control switch  
Driver's window  
Left rear window  
Front passenger's  
window  
Front passenger's  
window  
Front passenger switch  
Right rear window  
Close  
Open  
Power window lock switch  
l
The following functions can be performed  
for the front power windows using the  
power window master control switches on  
the driver's door or front passenger's door  
switch.  
l
Manual opening/closing  
Auto-opening/closing  
l
Auto-opening/closing  
To fully open a power window  
automatically, press the switch completely  
down.  
To fully close the power window  
automatically, pull the switch completely  
up.  
To stop the power window partway, pull  
or press the switch in the opposite  
direction and then release it.  
3-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Knowing Your Mazda  
Doors and Locks  
NOTE  
WARNING  
(POWER WINDOW RESET PROCEDURE)  
If the battery was disconnected during vehicle  
maintenance, or for other reasons such as a  
switch continues to be operated after the  
window is fully open/close, the power windows  
will not fully open and close automatically.  
Resetting of the automatic function can be  
performed using the driver's master control  
switch or the front passenger door switch.  
The power window auto function reset  
procedure can be done on one or both door  
switches. The power window auto function will  
only resume on the side that has been reset.  
Make sure nothing blocks the window  
just before it reaches the fully closed  
position or while fully holding up the  
power window switch:  
Blocking the power window just  
before it reaches the fully closed  
position or while fully holding up the  
power window switch is dangerous.  
In this case, the jam-safe function  
cannot prevent the window from  
closing all the way. If fingers are  
caught, serious injuries could occur.  
1. Switch the ignition ON.  
NOTE  
l
Depending on driving conditions, a closing  
2. Make sure that the power window lock  
switch located on the driver's door is not  
depressed.  
power window could stop and start opening  
when the window feels a shock that is  
similar to something blocking it.  
3. Press the switch and fully open the power  
window.  
In the event the jam-safe function activates  
and the power window cannot be closed  
automatically, pull and hold the switch fully  
and the window will close.  
The jam-safe window function does not  
operate until the system is re-initialized.  
4. Pull up the switch to fully close the power  
window and continue holding the switch for  
about 2 seconds after the window fully  
closes.  
l
Engine-off power window operation  
5. Repeat Steps 3-4 for the passenger power  
window.  
The power window can be operated for  
about 40 seconds after the ignition is  
switched from ON to ACC or off with all  
doors closed. If either front door is  
opened, the power window will be  
inoperable.  
6. Make sure that the power windows operate  
correctly using the door switches.  
Jam-safe window  
If a person's hands, head or an object  
blocks the window during the manual  
closing operation or the auto-closing  
operation, the window will stop and open  
halfway.  
NOTE  
For engine-off operation of the power window,  
the switch must be held up firmly throughout  
window closure because the auto-closing  
function will be inoperable.  
3-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Knowing Your Mazda  
Doors and Locks  
q
Operating the Rear Power Windows  
qPower Window Lock Switch  
The power windows may be operated  
when the power window lock switch on  
the driver's door is in the unlocked  
position.  
With the lock switch in the unlocked  
position (button not depressed), all power  
windows on each door can be operated.  
With the lock switch in the locked  
position (button depressed), only the  
driver's side power window can be  
operated.  
The rear power windows may be opened  
or closed using the power window master  
control switches on the driver's door.  
Left rear window  
Locked position  
Unlocked position  
Right rear window  
Power window lock switch  
To open the power window to the desired  
position, hold down the switch.  
To close the power window to the desired  
position, pull up the switch.  
WARNING  
Unless a passenger needs to operate a  
power window, keep the power window  
lock switch in the locked position:  
Unintentional power window  
operation is dangerous. A person's  
hands, head, or neck could be caught  
by the window and result in serious  
injury.  
Close  
Open  
NOTE  
When the power window lock switch is in the  
locked position, the light on front passenger's  
power window switch turns off. The light may  
be difficult to see depending on the  
surrounding brightness.  
3-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Knowing Your Mazda  
Doors and Locks  
NOTE  
l
q
Opening/Closing the Power Windows  
and the Moonroof from Outside  
The power windows and the moonroof  
cannot be opened or closed from outside  
the vehicle under the following condition:  
The front power windows and the  
moonroof can be opened or closed from  
outside the vehicle after the doors and the  
trunk lid are closed.  
The front power windows may be  
operated remotely when the power  
window lock switch on the driver's door is  
in the lock or unlocked position.  
l
A door or the trunk lid is opened.  
The key is inserted into the ignition  
l
switch.  
l
The auxiliary key is inserted into the key  
slot. (With advanced key)  
The push button start is in any position  
l
except off. (With advanced key)  
l
The power windows and the moonroof may  
not close completely. Make sure all the  
windows and the moonroof are closed.  
WARNING  
Make sure the opening is clear before  
closing a window and the moonroof:  
Closing power windows and the  
moonroof are dangerous. A person's  
hands, head, or even neck could be  
caught by the window or the  
moonroof and result in serious injury  
or even death.  
If the power windows and the moonroof  
cannot be closed completely, operate each  
power window switch or the tilt/slide switch  
from inside the vehicle. After closing the  
windows and the moonroof from outside the  
vehicle, verify that they are completely  
closed.  
This warning applies especially to  
children.  
Opening  
Because nobody likes getting into a very  
hot car, Mazda has introduced a way to  
open the two front windows and the  
moonroof as you approach the vehicle to  
get the air moving before you get in.  
3-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Knowing Your Mazda  
Doors and Locks  
Advanced key  
WARNING  
Operation  
indicator light  
Use the remote auto-window and the  
auto-moonroof function only when you  
can see the vehicle and it is in a secure  
area:  
Lock button  
Unlock button  
Do not let children play with your  
keys. If they open the window and  
moonroof without your knowing, the  
open windows and moonroof are an  
even bigger invitation to a thief than  
leaving the doors unlocked.  
Trunk button  
Panic button  
Children playing with cars can get  
themselves jammed in windows and  
moonroof, and killed without making  
a sound.  
Retractable type key  
Lock button  
The windows and moonroof can be  
opened for ventilating the cabin before  
getting in the vehicle.  
Unlock button  
Panic button  
With unlock button  
Press the unlock button on the transmitter  
once, then press again within 1.5 seconds  
and hold.  
Operation  
indicator light  
After the doors are unlocked, both  
windows and the moonroof open while  
the unlock button is pressed.  
To stop the windows and the moonroof  
while opening, release the button.  
If the operation is performed from the  
beginning again, the windows and the  
moonroof open.  
Trunk button  
NOTE  
l
The unlock button does not operate unless  
it is pressed twice sequentially.  
l
The lock button cannot be used to close the  
power windows and the moonroof.  
However, you can insert the key in the door  
and lock the doors again and put up all the  
windows if you do not want to climb back in  
the car to operate the windows.  
(With advanced key)  
However, you can use the request switch on  
either front door or insert the Auxiliary key  
in the door and lock the doors again and  
put up the windows if you do not want to  
climb back in the car to operate the  
windows.  
3-42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Knowing Your Mazda  
Doors and Locks  
With key  
NOTE  
(With advanced key)  
If the auto-lock function (page 3-8) has been  
activated, the doors and the trunk lid  
1. Insert the key in the driver's door key  
cylinder.  
automatically lock as you walk away from the  
vehicle, however, the power windows and the  
moonroof cannot be closed. When leaving the  
vehicle, close the windows and the moonroof  
using the power window switch or the tilt or  
slide switch inside the vehicle, the key, or a  
request switch on the front door handles.  
2. Rotate the key clockwise and hold until  
the windows and the moonroof are  
completely open. After the doors are  
unlocked, the windows fully open  
automatically.  
With key  
1. Check that all openings are clear of  
heads, hands and pets.  
Open  
2. Insert the key in the driver's door key  
cylinder.  
3. Rotate the key counterclockwise and  
hold until the windows and the  
moonroof are completely open. After  
the doors are locked, the windows and  
the moonroof close as long as the key  
is turned.  
To stop this operation, turn the key to the  
center position, then turn it clockwise  
again.  
NOTE  
The window and the moonroof opening  
operation also can be stopped by turning the  
key counterclockwise. However, the doors will  
lock.  
Close  
Closing  
The windows and the moonroof can be  
closed in case they are left open after  
getting out of the vehicle.  
With request switch on the driver's  
door (Advanced key)  
1. If the doors are locked, unlock them.  
3-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Knowing Your Mazda  
Doors and Locks  
2. Press and hold the request switch on  
the driver's door. After the doors are  
locked, the windows and the moonroof  
close as long as the request switch is  
pressed.  
Fuel-Filler Lid and Cap  
WARNING  
When removing the fuel cap, loosen the  
cap slightly and wait for any hissing to  
stop. Then remove it:  
Fuel spray is dangerous. Fuel can  
burn skin and eyes and cause illness  
if ingested. Fuel spray is released  
when there is pressure in the fuel  
tank and the fuel cap is removed too  
quickly.  
Request switch  
Before refueling, stop the engine, and  
always keep sparks and flames away  
from the filler neck:  
Fuel vapor is dangerous. It could be  
ignited by sparks or flames causing  
serious burns and injuries.  
Additionally, use of the incorrect fuel  
filler cap or not using a fuel filler cap  
may result in fuel leak, which could  
result in serious burns or death in an  
accident.  
To stop the windows and the moonroof  
from closing, release the request switch. If  
the operation is performed from the  
beginning again, the windows and the  
moonroof close.  
CAUTION  
Always use only a genuine Mazda  
fuel cap or an approved equivalent,  
available at an Authorized Mazda  
Dealer. The wrong cap can result in a  
serious malfunction of the fuel and  
emission control systems. It may also  
cause the check engine light in the  
instrument cluster to illuminate.  
3-44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Knowing Your Mazda  
Doors and Locks  
qFuel-Filler Lid  
CAUTION  
To open, pull the remote fuel-filler lid  
release.  
If the check fuel cap warning light  
illuminates, the fuel-filler cap may  
not be properly installed. If the  
warning light illuminates, park your  
vehicle safely off the right-of-way,  
remove the fuel-filler cap and  
Remote fuel-filler  
lid release  
reinstall it correctly. After the cap has  
been correctly installed, the fuel cap  
warning light may continue to  
illuminate until a number of driving  
cycles have been completed. A drive  
cycle consists of starting the engine  
(after four or more hours with the  
engine off) and driving the vehicle on  
city and highway roads.  
Continuing to drive with the check  
fuel cap warning light illuminated  
could cause the check engine light to  
illuminate as well.  
qFuel-Filler Cap  
To remove the fuel-filler cap, turn it  
counterclockwise.  
To close the fuel-filler cap, turn it  
clockwise until two or more click sounds  
are heard.  
NOTE  
The removed cap can be attached to the inner  
side of the lid during refueling to prevent fuel  
on the cap from dripping onto the vehicle.  
Open  
Close  
3-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Knowing Your Mazda  
Doors and Locks  
3. Grasp the support rod in the padded  
area and secure it in the stay hole  
indicated by the arrow to hold the hood  
open.  
Hood  
WARNING  
Always check that the hood is closed  
and securely locked:  
A hood that is not closed and  
securely locked is dangerous as it  
could fly open while the vehicle is  
moving and block the driver's vision  
which could result in a serious  
accident.  
Pad  
Clip  
qOpening the Hood  
1. With the vehicle parked, pull the  
release handle to unlock the hood.  
Support rod  
qClosing the Hood  
WARNING  
Do not leave items in the engine  
compartment:  
Release handle  
After you have finished checking or  
doing servicing in the engine  
compartment, do not forget and  
leave items such as tools or rags in  
the engine compartment.  
Tools or other items left in the engine  
compartment could cause engine  
damage or a fire leading to an  
unexpected accident.  
2. Insert your hand into the hood opening  
and slide the hood latch lever to the  
right and lift the hood.  
1. Check under the hood area to make  
certain all filler caps are in place and  
all loose items (e.g. tools, oil  
containers, etc.) have been removed.  
2. Insert the support rod in its clip while  
holding up the hood. Verify that the  
support rod is secured in the clip before  
closing the hood.  
3. Close the hood so that it locks securely.  
3-46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Knowing Your Mazda  
Doors and Locks  
NOTE  
Moonroofí  
Before washing your Mazda, make sure the  
moonroof is completely closed so that water  
does not get inside the cabin area. After  
washing your Mazda or after it rains, wipe the  
water off the moonroof before operating it to  
avoid water penetration which could cause  
rust and water damage to your headliner.  
The moonroof can be opened or closed  
electrically only when the ignition is  
switched ON.  
Slide switch  
Tilt switch  
qOperating the Moonroof  
Tilt Operation  
The rear of the moonroof can be tilted  
open to provide more ventilation.  
To fully tilt automatically, momentarily  
press the tilt switch.  
To fully close automatically, momentarily  
pull the tilt switch or press the front of the  
slide switch.  
WARNING  
Do not let passengers stand up or  
extend part of their body through the  
open moonroof while the vehicle is  
moving:  
To stop tilting partway, press any part of  
the tilt or slide switch.  
Extending the head, arms, or other  
parts of the body through the  
moonroof is dangerous. The head or  
arms could hit something while the  
vehicle is moving. This could cause  
serious injury or death.  
Tilt down  
Make sure the opening is clear before  
closing the moonroof:  
Close  
(Tilt down)  
Tilt up  
A closing moonroof is dangerous. The  
hands, head, or even neck of a  
person ―especially a child― could  
be caught in it as it closes, causing  
serious injury or even death.  
Slide Operation  
To fully open automatically, momentarily  
press the rear of the slide switch.  
To fully close automatically, momentarily  
press the front of the slide switch or pull  
the tilt switch.  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-47  
Knowing Your Mazda  
Doors and Locks  
To stop sliding partway, press any part of  
the tilt or slide switch.  
qEngine-off Moonroof Operation  
The moonroof can be operated for about  
40 seconds after the ignition is switched  
from ON to the ACC or LOCK with all  
doors closed. If any door is opened, the  
moonroof will be inoperable.  
Open  
NOTE  
For engine-off operation of the moonroof, the  
switch must be pushed firmly throughout  
moonroof closure because the auto-closing  
function will be inoperable.  
Tilt down  
(Close)  
Close  
qOpening/Closing the Moonroof  
from the Outside  
Power moonroof re-set procedure  
If the battery had been disconnected  
during vehicle maintenance or for other  
reasons, the moonroof may not fully open  
or close. The moonroof's jam-safe  
function does not function while the  
moonroof is re-setting. Carry out the  
following procedure to resume operation:  
The moonroof can be opened or closed  
from outside the vehicle after the doors  
are closed.  
Refer to Opening/Closing the Power  
Windows and the Moonroof from the  
Outside on page 3-41.  
qJam-safe Moonroof  
1. Switch the ignition ON.  
If a person's hands, head or an object  
blocks the moonroof during closing  
operation, the moonroof will stop and  
open halfway.  
2. Press the tilt switch, to partially tilt  
open the rear of the moonroof.  
NOTE  
If the re-set procedure is performed while the  
moonroof is in the slide position (partially  
open) it closes before the rear tilts opens.  
WARNING  
Make sure nothing blocks the  
moonroof just before it reaches the  
fully closed position:  
3. Repeat the procedure in Step 2. The  
rear of the moonroof tilts open to the  
fully open position, then closes a little.  
Blocking the moonroof just before it  
reaches the closed position is  
dangerous.  
In this case, the jam-safe function  
cannot prevent the moonroof from  
stopping. If fingers are caught,  
serious injuries could occur.  
3-48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Knowing Your Mazda  
Doors and Locks  
NOTE  
l
Depending on driving conditions, a closing  
moonroof could stop and start opening  
when the moonroof feels a shock that is  
similar to something blocking it.  
l
The moonroof's jam-safe function does not  
function while the moonroof is initializing.  
qSunshade  
The sunshade can be opened and closed  
by hand.  
The sunshade opens automatically when  
the moonroof is opened, but must be  
closed by hand.  
Sunshade  
CAUTION  
Ø The sunshade does not tilt. To  
avoid damaging the sunshade, do  
not push up on it.  
Ø Do not close the sunshade while  
the moonroof is opening. Trying to  
force the sunshade closed could  
damage it.  
3-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Knowing Your Mazda  
Security System  
Immobilizer System (with  
Advanced Key)  
CAUTION  
Do not allow the following when  
starting the engine with the auxiliary  
key due to an advanced key dead  
battery or other malfunction.  
Otherwise the signal from the  
auxiliary key will not be received  
correctly and the engine may not  
start.  
The immobilizer system allows the engine  
to start only with an advanced key the  
system recognizes.  
If someone attempts to start the engine  
with an unrecognized advanced key, the  
engine will not start, thereby helping to  
prevent the theft of your vehicle.  
If you have a problem with the  
Ø A key ring rests on the key grip.  
immobilizer system or the advanced key  
(including auxiliary key), consult an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
CAUTION  
Ø Radio equipment like this is  
governed by laws in the United  
States.  
Ø Metal parts of other keys or metal  
objects touch the key grip.  
Changes or modifications not  
expressly approved by the party  
responsible for compliance could  
void the user's authority to  
operate the equipment.  
Ø To avoid damage to the key, do  
not:  
Ø Spare auxiliary keys or keys for  
other vehicles equipped with an  
immobilizer system touch or come  
near the auxiliary key.  
Ø
Ø
Ø
Drop the key.  
Get the key wet.  
Expose the key to any kind of  
magnetic field.  
Ø
Expose the key to high  
temperatures on places such as  
the dashboard or hood, under  
direct sunlight.  
Ø Devices for electronic purchases, or  
security passage which touch or  
come near the key.  
3-50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Knowing Your Mazda  
Security System  
NOTE  
(U.S.A.)  
qOperation  
l
Arming  
This device complies with Part 15 of the  
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the  
following two conditions: (1) this device  
may not cause harmful interference, and (2)  
this device must accept any interference  
received, including interference that may  
cause undesired operation.  
The system is armed when the ignition is  
switched from ON to ACC or off. The  
security indicator light in the instrument  
cluster flashes every 2 seconds until the  
system is disarmed.  
l
(CANADA)  
This device complies with RSS-210 of  
Industry CANADA. Operation is subject to  
the following two conditions: (1) this device  
may not cause interference, and (2) this  
device must accept any interference,  
including interference that may cause  
undesired operation of the device.  
The advanced keys (including auxiliary key)  
carry a unique electronic code. For this  
reason, and to assure your safety, obtaining  
a replacement advanced key (including  
auxiliary key) requires some waiting time.  
They are only available through an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
Always keep a spare advanced key in case  
one is lost. If an advanced key is lost,  
consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer as  
soon as possible.  
If you lose an advanced key (including  
auxiliary key), an Authorized Mazda Dealer  
will reset the electronic codes of your  
remaining advanced keys (including  
auxiliary keys) and immobilizer system.  
Bring all the remaining advanced keys  
(including auxiliary keys) to an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer to reset.  
Disarming  
l
The system is disarmed when the ignition  
is switched to ON with the registered  
advanced key.  
The security indicator light illuminates for  
about 3 seconds and goes out.  
If the engine does not start with the  
correct advanced key, and the security  
indicator light keeps illuminating or  
flashing, the system may have a  
malfunction. Consult an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer.  
l
l
Starting the vehicle with a key that has not  
been reset is not possible.  
3-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Knowing Your Mazda  
Security System  
NOTE  
qModification and Add-On  
Equipment  
l
The engine may not start and the security  
indicator light may illuminate or flash if the  
advanced key is placed in an area where it  
is difficult for the system to detect the  
signal, such as on the dashboard, or in the  
glove box. Move the advanced key to  
another place, switch the ignition off, and  
then restart the engine.  
Mazda cannot guarantee the immobilizer  
system's operation if the system has been  
modified or if any add-on equipment has  
been installed.  
CAUTION  
l
Signals from a TVor radio station, or from  
To avoid damage to your vehicle, do  
not modify the system or install any  
add-on equipment to the immobilizer  
system or the vehicle.  
a transceiver or a mobile telephone could  
interfere with your immobilizer system. If  
you are using the proper advanced key and  
the engine fails to start, check the security  
indicator light. If the indicator light is  
flashing, switch the ignition to ACC or off  
and wait for a while, then restart the  
engine. If it does not start after 3 or more  
tries, contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
l
If the security indicator light flashes  
continuously while you are driving, do not  
shut off the engine. Go to an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer and have it checked. If the  
engine is shut off while the indicator light is  
flashing, you will not be able to restart it.  
l
Since the electronic codes are reset when  
repairing the immobilizer system, the  
advanced key (including auxiliary key) are  
needed. Bring all the advanced keys  
(including auxiliary keys) to an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer.  
3-52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Knowing Your Mazda  
Security System  
Immobilizer System  
CAUTION  
(without Advanced Key)  
When starting the engine do not  
allow the following, as the engine  
may not start due to the electronic  
signal from the ignition key not being  
transmitted correctly.  
The immobilizer system allows the engine  
to start only with a key the system  
recognizes.  
Ø A key ring rests on the key grip.  
If someone attempts to start the engine  
with an unrecognized key, the engine will  
not start, thereby helping to prevent the  
theft of your vehicle.  
If you have a problem with the  
immobilizer system or the key, consult an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
Ø Metal parts of other keys or metal  
objects touch the key grip.  
CAUTION  
Ø Radio equipment like this is  
governed by laws in the United  
States.  
Changes or modifications not  
expressly approved by the party  
responsible for compliance could  
void the user's authority to  
operate the equipment.  
Ø To avoid damage to the key, do  
not:  
Ø Spare keys or keys for other  
vehicles equipped with an  
immobilizer system touch or come  
near the key grip.  
Ø
Ø
Ø
Drop the key.  
Get the key wet.  
Expose the key to any kind of  
magnetic field.  
Ø
Expose the key to high  
temperatures on places such as  
the dashboard or hood, under  
direct sunlight.  
Ø Devices for electronic purchases, or  
security passage which touch or  
come near the key.  
3-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Knowing Your Mazda  
Security System  
NOTE  
(U.S.A.)  
qOperation  
l
Arming  
This device complies with Part 15 of the  
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the  
following two conditions: (1) this device  
may not cause harmful interference, and (2)  
this device must accept any interference  
received, including interference that may  
cause undesired operation.  
The system is armed when the ignition  
switch is turned from the ON to the ACC  
or LOCK position.  
The security indicator light in the  
instrument cluster flashes every two  
seconds until the system is disarmed.  
l
(CANADA)  
This device complies with RSS-210 of  
Industry CANADA. Operation is subject to  
the following two conditions: (1) this device  
may not cause interference, and (2) this  
device must accept any interference,  
including interference that may cause  
undesired operation of the device.  
Disarming  
l
The keys carry a unique electronic code.  
The system is disarmed when the ignition  
switch is turned to the ON position with  
the correct ignition key.  
The security indicator light illuminates for  
about three seconds and goes out.  
For this reason, and to assure your safety,  
obtaining a replacement key requires some  
waiting time. They are only available  
through an Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
l
Always keep a spare key, in case one is lost.  
If a key is lost, contact an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.  
If you lose a key, an Authorized Mazda  
Dealer will reset the electronic codes of  
your remaining keys and immobilizer  
system. Bring all the remaining keys to an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer to reset.  
Starting the vehicle with a key that has not  
been reset is not possible.  
If the engine does not start with the  
correct ignition key, and the security  
indicator light keeps illuminating or  
flashing, the system may have a  
malfunction. Consult an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer.  
l
3-54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Knowing Your Mazda  
Security System  
NOTE  
Theft-Deterrent Systemí  
l
Signals from a TVor radio station, or from  
a transceiver or a mobile telephone, could  
interfere with your immobilizer system. If  
you are using the proper key and your  
engine fails to start, check the security  
indicator light. If it is flashing, remove the  
ignition key and wait 2 seconds or more,  
then reinsert it and try starting the engine  
again. If it does not start after 3 or more  
tries, contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
If the security indicator light flashes  
continuously while you are driving, do not  
shut off the engine. Go to an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer and have it checked. If you  
shut off the engine while the light is  
flashing you will not be able to restart it.  
Since the electronic codes are reset when  
repairing the immobilizer system, the keys  
are needed. Bring all the existing keys to an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
If the theft deterrent system detects an  
inappropriate entry into the vehicle, which  
could result in the vehicle or its contents  
being stolen, the alarm alerts the  
surrounding area of an abnormality by  
sounding the horn and flashing the hazard  
warning lights.  
Refer to Operation on page 3-55.  
NOTE  
l
l
The theft-deterrent system operates with the  
key or the keyless entry system transmitter.  
l
(With advanced key)  
The theft-deterrent system can also be  
operated using the advanced keyless  
function.  
The system operates only when the driver is  
in the vehicle or within operational range  
while the advanced key is being carried.  
l
l
The system will not function unless it is  
properly armed. To properly secure the  
vehicle, always make sure all windows are  
completely closed and all doors and the  
trunk lid are locked before leaving the  
vehicle. Remember to take your key and  
transmitter.  
qModification and Add-On  
Equipment  
Mazda cannot guarantee the immobilizer  
system's operation if the system has been  
modified or if any add-on equipment has  
been installed.  
qOperation  
CAUTION  
System triggering conditions  
To avoid damage to your vehicle, do  
not modify the system or install any  
add-on equipment to the immobilizer  
system or the vehicle.  
The horn sounds intermittently and the  
hazard warning lights flash for about 30  
seconds when the system is triggered by  
any one of the following:  
l
Forcing open a door, the hood or the  
trunk lid.  
l
Unlocking a door with the inside door-  
lock knob.  
Unlocking a door with the door lock  
l
switch.  
l
Opening a door by operating an inside  
door-lock knob.  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-55  
Knowing Your Mazda  
Security System  
l
Opening the hood by operating the  
hood release handle.  
(Without advanced key)  
Switching the ignition ON without the  
key.  
(With advanced key)  
Switching the ignition ON without  
using the push button start.  
Opening the trunk lid by operating the  
trunk lid release button.  
qHow to Arm the System  
1. Remove the key from the ignition  
switch.  
(With advanced key)  
Press the push button start to off  
position, if the auxiliary key is inserted  
in the key slot, remove it.  
l
l
2. Make sure the hood and the trunk lid  
are closed. Close and lock all doors and  
the trunk lid from the outside using the  
key. If you have the keyless entry  
system, press the lock button on the  
transmitter.  
(With advanced key)  
Press a request switch on the doors or  
the lock button on the transmitter.  
If the system is triggered again, the lights  
and horn will activate until a door is  
unlocked or the trunk lid is opened with  
the key or with the transmitter.  
(With advanced key)  
The lights and horn can also be  
deactivated by unlocking a door using the  
sensor on the inside of the door handle.  
(Without advanced key)  
The following method will also arm the  
NOTE  
If the battery goes dead while the theft-  
deterrent system is armed, the horn will  
activate and the hazard warning lights will  
flash when the battery is charged or replaced.  
theft-deterrent system:  
Close the hood and the trunk lid . Press  
the area on the door-lock switch  
marked “ ” once. Close all doors.  
The hazard warning lights will flash  
once to indicate that the system is  
armed.  
The theft deterrent system can also be  
armed by activating the auto re-lock  
function with all the doors, the trunk lid  
and the hood closed.  
3. After 20 seconds, the system is fully  
armed.  
3-56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Knowing Your Mazda  
Security System  
l
NOTE  
(With advanced key)  
l
l
The system will disarm if one of the  
Unlock a door using the sensor on  
the inside of the door handle.  
The ignition is switched on.  
following operations takes place within 20  
seconds after closing the trunk lid and  
locking all the doors:  
l
l
Pressing the unlock button on the  
The hazard warning lights will flash twice  
to indicate that the system is turned off.  
transmitter.  
Any door or the trunk lid is opened.  
Unlocking a door with the inside door-  
l
NOTE  
l
When the doors are unlocked by pressing the  
unlock button on the transmitter or using the  
key while the theft-deterrent system is turned  
off, the hazard warning lights will flash twice  
to indicate that the system is turned off.  
lock knob.  
The hood is opened.  
The key is inserted in the ignition switch.  
The auxiliary key inserted into the key  
l
l
l
slot (with advanced key).  
(With advanced key)  
l
qTo Stop the Alarm  
The push button start is pressed or a  
door is unlocked using the sensor on the  
inside of the door handle.  
A triggered alarm can be turned off by  
any one of the following methods:  
l
The ignition is switched on.  
l
Unlock a door with the key.  
Press the unlock button or press and  
hold the trunk button on the keyless  
entry system transmitter.  
The engine is started with the ignition  
To rearm the system, do the arming  
procedure again.  
l
l
When the doors are locked by pressing the  
lock button on the transmitter or using the  
key while the theft-deterrent system is  
armed, the hazard warning lights will flash  
once to indicate that the system is armed.  
There is nothing to sense that a window or  
moonroof is open in the system, you must  
confirm the windows and moonroof before  
you activate the system, and be careful with  
the advanced key not to open the windows  
and moonroof unintentionally when  
unlocking the vehicle.  
l
key or the start knob.  
l
(With advanced key)  
l
Press the unlock button or press and  
l
hold the trunk button on the  
transmitter.  
Unlock a door using the sensor on  
l
the inside of the door handle.  
The engine is started with the push  
l
button start.  
NOTE  
If you have any problem with the theft-  
deterrent system, consult an Authorized Mazda  
Dealer.  
qTo Turn Off an Armed System  
An armed system can be turned off by any  
one of the following methods:  
l
Unlock a door with the key.  
Press the unlock button on the keyless  
l
entry system transmitter.  
Insert the key into the ignition switch  
l
(key slot) and switch the ignition to  
ON.  
3-57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Knowing Your Mazda  
Security System  
qTheft-Deterrent Labels  
A label indicating that your vehicle is  
equipped with a Theft-Deterrent System is  
in the glove compartment.  
Mazda recommends that you affix it to the  
lower rear corner of a front door window.  
3-58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Knowing Your Mazda  
Steering Wheel and Mirrors  
Steering Wheel  
WARNING  
Mirrors  
qOutside Mirrors  
Never adjust the steering wheel while  
the vehicle is moving:  
Check the mirror angles before driving.  
Mirror type  
Adjusting the steering wheel while  
the vehicle is moving is dangerous.  
Moving it can very easily cause the  
driver to abruptly turn to the left or  
right. This can lead to loss of control  
or an accident.  
Flat type (driver's side)  
Flat surface mirror.  
Convex type (front passenger side)  
The mirror has single curvature on its  
surface.  
WARNING  
qSteering Wheel Adjustment  
Be sure to look over your shoulder  
before changing lanes:  
To change the angle or length of the  
steering wheel:  
Changing lanes without looking over  
the appropriate shoulder is  
1. Stop the vehicle, pull down the lock  
release lever under the steering  
column.  
dangerous, particularly not taking  
the actual distance of the vehicle in  
the right convex mirror. You could  
have a serious accident. What you  
see in the convex mirror is closer than  
it appears.  
Lock release lever  
Power mirror  
The ignition must be switched ACC or  
ON.  
To adjust:  
1. Press the left or right side of the  
selector switch to choose the left or  
right side mirror.  
2. Tilt the steering wheel and/or adjust the  
steering column length to the desired  
positions, push the lever up to lock the  
column.  
3. Push the wheel up and down to be  
certain it's locked before driving.  
3-59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Knowing Your Mazda  
Steering Wheel and Mirrors  
2. Depress the mirror switch in the  
appropriate direction.  
qRearview Mirror  
WARNING  
Do not stack cargo or objects higher  
than the seatbacks:  
Selector switch  
Mirror switch  
Cargo stacked higher than the  
seatbacks is dangerous. It can block  
your view in the rearview mirror,  
which might cause you to hit another  
car when changing lanes.  
Rearview mirror adjustment  
Before driving, adjust the rearview mirror  
to center on the scene through the rear  
window.  
After adjusting the mirror, lock the control  
by placing the selector switch in the  
middle position.  
Manual day/night mirror  
Ground illumination lightí  
Light is on or off when the illuminated  
entry system is on (page 6-94).  
Auto-dimming mirror  
Auto-dimming door mirrorsí  
The movement of the auto-dimming door  
mirrors is interlocked with the auto-  
dimming rearview mirror in the interior to  
automatically reduce glare from rear on-  
coming vehicles.  
Refer to Rearview mirror on page 3-60.  
3-60  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Knowing Your Mazda  
Steering Wheel and Mirrors  
NOTE  
Press the OFF button ( ) to cancel the  
automatic dimming function. The  
indicator light will turn off.  
To reactivate the automatic dimming  
function, press the ON button ( ). The  
indicator light will illuminate.  
For the manual day/night mirror, perform the  
adjustment with the day/night lever in the day  
position.  
Reducing glare from headlights  
Manual day/night mirror  
Push the day/night lever forward for day  
driving. Pull it back to reduce glare of  
headlights from cars at the rear.  
Day/Night lever  
OFF button  
ON button  
Indicator light  
Day  
Night  
Auto-dimming mirror  
The auto-dimming mirror automatically  
reduces glare of headlights from cars at  
the rear when the ignition is switched ON.  
The door mirrors also adjust in  
conjunction with the interior rear view  
mirror.  
3-61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Knowing Your Mazda  
Steering Wheel and Mirrors  
NOTE  
l
Do not use glass cleaner or suspend objects  
on or around the light sensor. Otherwise,  
light sensor sensitivity will be affected and  
may not operate normally.  
Light sensor  
Light sensor  
l
For information regarding the 3 buttons  
(
,
,
) on the auto-dimming  
mirror, refer to HomeLink Wireless Control  
System (page 5-70).  
l
The auto-dimmer function is canceled when  
the ignition is switched ON and the shift  
lever/selector lever is in reverse (R).  
3-62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before Driving Your Mazda  
4
Important information about driving your Mazda.  
Fuel and Engine Exhaust Precautions ........................................ 4-2  
Fuel Requirements .................................................................... 4-2  
Emission Control System .......................................................... 4-3  
Engine Exhaust (Carbon Monoxide) ......................................... 4-4  
Before Starting the Engine ........................................................... 4-5  
Before Getting In ...................................................................... 4-5  
After Getting In ......................................................................... 4-5  
Driving Tips................................................................................... 4-6  
Break-In Period ......................................................................... 4-6  
Money-Saving Suggestions ...................................................... 4-6  
Hazardous Driving .................................................................... 4-7  
Floor Mat .................................................................................. 4-7  
Rocking the Vehicle .................................................................. 4-8  
Winter Driving .......................................................................... 4-8  
Driving In Flooded Area ........................................................... 4-9  
Overloading ............................................................................ 4-10  
Driving on Uneven Road ........................................................ 4-11  
Towing ......................................................................................... 4-12  
Trailer Towing ......................................................................... 4-12  
4-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before Driving Your Mazda  
Fuel and Engine Exhaust Precautions  
Fuel Requirements  
Vehicles with catalytic converters or oxygen sensors must use ONLY UNLEADED FUEL,  
which will reduce exhaust emissions and keep spark plug fouling to a minimum.  
Your Mazda will perform best with fuel listed in the table.  
Fuel  
Octane Rating*(Anti-knock index)  
Regular unleaded fuel  
87 [ (R+M)/2 method] or above (91 RON or above)  
* U.S. federal law requires that octane ratings be posted on gasoline station pumps.  
Fuel with a rating lower than 87 octane (91 RON) could cause the emission control system to lose effectiveness. It  
could also cause engine knocking and serious engine damage.  
CAUTION  
Ø USE ONLY UNLEADED FUEL.  
Leaded fuel is harmful to the catalytic converter and oxygen sensors and will lead  
to deterioration of the emission control system and or failures.  
Ø Your vehicle can only use oxygenated fuels containing no more than 10% ethanol  
by volume. Damage to your vehicle may occur when ethanol exceeds this  
recommendation, or if the gasoline contains any methanol. Stop using gasohol of  
any kind if your vehicle engine is performing poorly.  
Ø Never add fuel system additives. Never add cleaning agents other than those  
specified by Mazda. Other cleaning agents and additives may damage the system.  
Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
Gasoline blended with oxygenates such as alcohol or ether compounds are generally  
referred to as oxygenated fuels. The common gasoline blend that can be used with your  
vehicle is ethanol blended at no more than 10%. Gasoline containing alcohol, such as  
ethanol or methanol, may be marketed under the name “Gasohol”.  
Vehicle damage and drivability problems resulting from the use of the following may not  
be covered by the Mazda warranty.  
l
Gasohol containing more than 10% ethanol.  
Gasoline or gasohol containing methanol.  
Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol.  
l
l
4-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before Driving Your Mazda  
Fuel and Engine Exhaust Precautions  
Emission Control System  
Your vehicle is equipped with an emission control system (the catalytic converter is part of  
this system) that enables your vehicle to comply with existing exhaust emissions  
requirements.  
WARNING  
Never park over or near anything flammable:  
Parking over or near anything flammable, such as dry grass, is dangerous. Even with  
the engine turned off, the exhaust system remains very hot after normal use and  
could ignite anything flammable. A resulting fire could cause serious injury or death.  
CAUTION  
Ignoring the following precautions could cause lead to accumulate on the catalyst  
inside the converter or cause the converter to get very hot. Either condition will  
damage the converter and cause poor performance.  
Ø USE ONLY UNLEADED FUEL.  
Ø Do not drive your Mazda with any sign of engine malfunction.  
Ø Do not coast with the ignition switched off.  
Ø Do not descend steep grades in gear with the ignition switched off.  
Ø Do not operate the engine at high idle for more than 5 minutes.  
Ø Do not tamper with the emission control system. All inspections and adjustments  
must be made by a qualified technician.  
Ø Do not push-start or pull-start your vehicle.  
NOTE  
Under U.S. federal law, any modification to the original-equipment emission control system before  
the first sale and registration of a vehicle is subject to penalties. In some states, such modification  
made on a used vehicle is also subject to penalties.  
NOTE  
After the vehicle has been driven a certain distance and the engine is turned off, the sound of a valve  
opening and closing can be heard. This does not indicate an abnormality. Your vehicle has a self-  
checking mechanism which operates after the engine is turned off.  
4-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before Driving Your Mazda  
Fuel and Engine Exhaust Precautions  
Engine Exhaust (Carbon Monoxide)  
WARNING  
Do not drive your vehicle if you smell exhaust gas inside the vehicle:  
Engine exhaust gas is dangerous. This gas contains carbon monoxide (CO), which is  
colorless, odorless, and poisonous. When inhaled, it can cause loss of consciousness  
and death. If you smell exhaust gas inside your vehicle, keep all windows fully open  
and contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer immediately.  
Do not run the engine when inside an enclosed area:  
Running the engine inside an enclosed area, such as a garage, is dangerous. Exhaust  
gas, which contains poisonous carbon monoxide, could easily enter the cabin. Loss  
of consciousness or even death could occur.  
Open the windows or adjust the heating or cooling system to draw fresh air when  
idling the engine:  
Exhaust gas is dangerous. When your vehicle is stopped with the windows closed  
and the engine running for a long time even in an open area, exhaust gas, which  
contains poisonous carbon monoxide, could enter the cabin. Loss of consciousness or  
even death could occur.  
Clear snow from underneath and around your vehicle, particularly the tail pipe,  
before starting the engine:  
Running the engine when a vehicle is stopped in deep snow is dangerous. The  
exhaust pipe could be blocked by the snow, allowing exhaust gas to enter the cabin.  
Because exhaust gas contains poisonous carbon monoxide, it could cause loss of  
consciousness or even death to occupants in the cabin.  
4-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before Driving Your Mazda  
Before Starting the Engine  
Before Getting In  
After Getting In  
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Be sure the windows, outside mirrors,  
and outside lights are clean.  
Inspect inflation pressures and  
condition of tires.  
Look under the vehicle for any sign of  
fluid leaks.  
Are all doors closed and locked?  
Is the seat adjusted properly?  
Are the inside and outside mirrors  
adjusted?  
Is the steering wheel adjusted properly?  
Is everyone's seat belt fastened?  
Check all gauges.  
Check all warning lights when the  
ignition is switched ON.  
Release the parking brake and make  
sure the brake warning light goes off.  
l
l
l
l
If you plan to back up, make sure  
nothing is in your way.  
NOTE  
l
Engine oil, engine coolant, brake/clutch fluid,  
washer fluid, and other fluid levels should be  
inspected. See Maintenance, Section 8.  
Always be thoroughly familiar with your  
Mazda.  
4-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before Driving Your Mazda  
Driving Tips  
Break-In Period  
Money-Saving Suggestions  
No special break-in is necessary, but a few  
precautions in the first 1,000 km (600  
miles) may add to the performance,  
economy, and life of your Mazda.  
How you operate your Mazda determines  
how far it will travel on a tank of fuel. Use  
these suggestions to help save money on  
fuel and repairs.  
l
l
Do not race the engine.  
Do not maintain one constant speed,  
Avoid long warm-ups. Once the engine  
l
runs smoothly, begin driving.  
Avoid fast starts.  
Keep the engine tuned. Follow the  
l
either slow or fast, for a long period of  
time.  
Do not drive constantly at full-throttle  
l
l
maintenance schedule (page 8-3) and  
have an Authorized Mazda Dealer  
perform inspections and servicing.  
or high engine rpm for extended  
periods of time.  
Avoid unnecessary hard stops.  
l
l
Use the air conditioner only when  
l
Avoid full-throttle starts.  
necessary.  
Slow down on rough roads.  
Keep the tires properly inflated.  
Do not carry unnecessary weight.  
l
l
l
l
Do not rest your foot on the brake  
pedal while driving.  
Keep the wheels in correct alignment.  
Keep windows closed at high speeds.  
Slow down when driving in crosswinds  
l
l
l
and headwinds.  
WARNING  
Never stop the engine when going  
down a hill:  
Stopping the engine when going  
down a hill is dangerous. This causes  
the loss of power steering and power  
brake control, and may cause  
damage to the drivetrain. Any loss of  
steering or braking control could  
cause an accident.  
4-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before Driving Your Mazda  
Driving Tips  
Hazardous Driving  
Floor Mat  
WARNING  
WARNING  
Be extremely careful if it is necessary to  
downshift on slippery surfaces:  
Downshifting into lower gear while  
driving on slippery surfaces is  
Make sure the floor mats are hooked  
on the retention pins to prevent them  
from bunching up under the foot  
pedals:  
dangerous. The sudden change in tire  
speed could cause the tires to skid.  
This could lead to loss of vehicle  
control and an accident.  
Using a floor mat that is not secured  
is dangerous as it will interfere with  
the accelerator and brake pedal  
operation, which could result in an  
accident.  
Do not rely on ABS as a substitute for  
safe driving:  
Do not install two floor mats, one on  
top of the other, on the driver's side:  
Installing two floor mats, one on top  
of the other, on the driver's side is  
dangerous as the retention pins can  
only keep one floor mat from sliding  
forward.  
The ABS cannot compensate for  
unsafe and reckless driving, excessive  
speed, tailgating (following another  
vehicle too closely), driving on ice and  
snow, and hydroplaning (reduced tire  
friction and road contact because of  
water on the road surface). You can  
still have an accident.  
In using a heavy duty floor mat for  
winter use always remove the  
original floor mat.  
Loose floor mat(s) will interfere with  
the foot pedal and could result in an  
accident.  
When driving on ice or in water, snow,  
mud, sand, or similar hazards:  
l
Be cautious and allow extra distance  
for braking.  
Avoid sudden braking and sudden  
l
maneuvering.  
Do not pump the brakes. Continue to  
l
press down on the brake pedal.  
Refer to Anti-Lock Brake System  
(ABS) on page 5-7.  
l
If you get stuck, select a lower gear and  
accelerate slowly. Do not spin the front  
wheels.  
For more traction in starting on  
l
slippery surfaces such as ice or packed  
snow, use sand, rock salt, chains,  
carpeting, or other nonslip material  
under the front wheels.  
When setting a floor mat, position the  
floor mat so that its eyelets and inserted  
over the pointed end of the retention  
posts.  
NOTE  
Use snow chains only on the front wheels.  
4-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before Driving Your Mazda  
Driving Tips  
Rocking the Vehicle  
Winter Driving  
l
Carry emergency gear, window  
WARNING  
scraper, flares, a small shovel, jumper  
cables, and a small bag of sand or salt.  
Ask an Authorized Mazda Dealer to  
perform the following precautions:  
Have the proper ratio of antifreeze in  
the radiator.  
Refer to Engine Coolant on page 8-21.  
Inspect the battery and its cables. Cold  
reduces battery capacity.  
Use only cold-weather engine oil (page  
Do not spin the wheels at more than 56  
km/h (35 mph), and do not allow  
anyone to stand behind a wheel when  
pushing the vehicle:  
l
When the vehicle is stuck, spinning  
the wheels at high speed is  
dangerous. The spinning tire could  
overheat and explode. This could  
cause serious injuries.  
l
l
8-19).  
l
Inspect the ignition system for damage  
CAUTION  
Too much rocking may cause engine  
overheating, transaxle failure, and  
tire damage.  
and loose connections.  
Use washer fluid made with  
antifreeze―but do not use engine  
coolant antifreeze for washer fluid  
(page 8-27).  
l
If you must rock the vehicle to free it from  
snow, sand or mud, depress the  
l
Do not use the parking brake in  
freezing weather as it may freeze.  
Instead, shift to P with an automatic  
transaxle and to 1 or R with a manual  
transaxle. Block the rear wheels.  
accelerator slightly and slowly move the  
shift lever from 1 (D) to R.  
qSnow Tires  
Use snow tires on all four wheels  
Do not go faster than 120 km/h (75 mph)  
while driving with snow tires. Inflate  
snow tires 30 kPa (0.3 kgf/cm2, 4.3 psi)  
more than recommended on the tire  
pressure label (driver's door frame), but  
never more than the maximum cold-tire  
pressure shown on the tires.  
Your vehicle is originally equipped with  
all season radials designed to be used all  
year around. In some extreme climates  
you may find it necessary to replace them  
with snow tires during the winter months  
to further improve traction on snow and  
ice covered roads.  
4-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before Driving Your Mazda  
Driving Tips  
Driving In Flooded Area  
WARNING  
Use only the same size and type tires  
(snow, radial, or non-radial) on all four  
wheels:  
WARNING  
Dry wet brakes by driving very slowly  
and applying the brakes lightly until  
brake performance returns to normal:  
Driving with wet brakes is  
Using tires different in size or type is  
dangerous. Your vehicle's handling  
could be greatly affected and result  
in an accident.  
dangerous. Increased stopping  
distance or the vehicle pulling to one  
side when braking could result in a  
serious accident. Light braking will  
indicate whether the brakes have  
been affected.  
CAUTION  
Check local regulations before using  
studded tires.  
qTire Chains  
CAUTION  
Do not drive the vehicle on flooded  
roads as it could cause short  
circuiting of electrical/electronic  
parts, or engine damage or stalling  
from water absorption. If the vehicle  
has been immersed in water, consult  
an Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
This vehicle cannot be operated with tire  
chains because it could cause interference  
with the vehicle body and scratching.  
4-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before Driving Your Mazda  
Driving Tips  
Overloading  
WARNING  
Be careful not to overload your vehicle:  
The gross axle weight rating (GAWR)  
and the gross vehicle weight rating  
(GVWR) of your vehicle are on the  
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard Label  
on the driver's door frame. Exceeding  
these ratings can cause an accident  
or vehicle damage. You can estimate  
the weight of your load by weighing  
the items (or people) before putting  
them in the vehicle.  
4-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before Driving Your Mazda  
Driving Tips  
Driving on Uneven Road  
Your vehicle's suspension and underbody can be damaged if driven on rough/uneven roads  
or over speed bumps at excessive speeds. Use care and reduce speed when traveling on  
rough/uneven roads or over speed bumps.  
Use care not to damage the vehicle's underbody, bumpers or muffler(s) when driving under  
the following conditions:  
l
Ascending or descending a slope with a sharp transition angle  
Ascending or descending a driveway or trailer ramp with a sharp transition angle  
l
Your vehicle is equipped with low profile tires allowing class-leading performance and  
handling. As a result, the sidewall of the tires are very thin and the tires and wheels can be  
damaged if driven through potholes or on rough/uneven roads at excessive speeds. Use  
care and reduce speed when traveling on rough/uneven roads or through potholes.  
4-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before Driving Your Mazda  
Towing  
Trailer Towing  
The Mazda6 is not designed for towing.  
Never tow a trailer with your Mazda6.  
4-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving Your Mazda  
5
Explanation of instruments and controls.  
Starting and Driving ..................................................................... 5-2  
Ignition Switch .......................................................................... 5-2  
Starting the Engine .................................................................... 5-4  
Brake System ............................................................................ 5-5  
Manual Transaxle Operation ................................................... 5-10  
Automatic Transaxle Controls ................................................ 5-12  
Power Steering ........................................................................ 5-19  
Cruise Controlí ...................................................................... 5-19  
Traction Control System (TCS) .............................................. 5-23  
Dynamic Stability Control (DSC)í ........................................ 5-25  
Tire Pressure Monitoring Systemí ......................................... 5-27  
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) Systemí ................................. 5-33  
Instrument Cluster and Indicators ............................................ 5-38  
Meters and Gauges .................................................................. 5-38  
Warning/Indicator Lights and Beep Sounds ............................ 5-43  
Warning/Indicator Lights ........................................................ 5-43  
Beep Sounds ........................................................................... 5-59  
Switches and Controls ................................................................ 5-60  
Lighting Control ..................................................................... 5-60  
Turn and Lane-Change Signals ............................................... 5-63  
Fog Lightsí ............................................................................ 5-64  
Windshield Wipers and Washer .............................................. 5-64  
Rear Window Defroster ........................................................... 5-68  
Horn ........................................................................................ 5-69  
Hazard Warning Flasher .......................................................... 5-70  
HomeLink Wireless Control Systemí .................................... 5-70  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-1  
Driving Your Mazda  
Starting and Driving  
Automatic transaxle  
Ignition Switch  
To turn the key from the ACC to the  
LOCK position, the shift lever must be in  
the P position.  
With advanced key  
Refer to “Starting the engine (page 3-10)”  
for information on how to use the ignition  
switch.  
qIgnition Switch Positions  
(Without Advanced Key)  
Shift lever  
engaged in P  
(park)  
LOCK  
The steering wheel locks to protect  
against theft. Only in this position can the  
key be removed.  
Manual transaxle  
To turn the key from the ACC to the  
LOCK position, push the key in at the  
ACC position, then turn it to the LOCK  
position.  
Push the key  
5-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving Your Mazda  
Starting and Driving  
ON  
WARNING  
This is the normal running position after  
the engine is started. The warning lights  
(except brakes) should be inspected  
before the engine is started (page 5-43).  
Remove the key only when the vehicle  
is parked:  
Removing the key from the ignition  
switch while the vehicle is moving is  
dangerous. Removing the key allows  
the steering wheel to lock. You will  
lose steering control and a serious  
accident could occur.  
NOTE  
When the ignition switch is turned to the ON  
position, the sound of the fuel pump motor  
operating near the fuel tank can be heard. This  
does not indicate an abnormality.  
Before leaving the driver's seat, always  
switch the ignition off, set the parking  
brake, and make sure the shift lever is  
in P (automatic transaxle) or in 1st gear  
or R (manual transaxle):  
START  
The engine is started in this position. It  
will crank until you release the key; then  
it returns to the ON position. The brake  
warning light can be checked after the  
engine is started (page 5-43).  
Leaving the driver's seat without  
switching off the ignition, setting the  
parking brake, and shifting the shift  
lever to P (automatic transaxle) or to  
1st gear or R (manual transaxle) is  
dangerous. Unexpected vehicle  
movement could occur which could  
result in an accident.  
In addition, if your intention is to  
leave the vehicle for even a short  
period, it is important to switch the  
ignition off, as leaving it in another  
position will disable some of the  
vehicle's security systems and run the  
battery down.  
qIgnition Key Reminder  
If the ignition is switched to off (LOCK)  
or ACC with the key inserted, a  
continuous beep sound will be heard  
when the driver's door is opened.  
NOTE  
If turning the key is difficult, jiggle the steering  
wheel from side to side.  
Leaving the key in any position but LOCK  
position also disables some of the security  
features and may run the battery down.  
ACC (Accessory)  
The steering wheel unlocks and some  
electrical accessories will operate.  
5-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving Your Mazda  
Starting and Driving  
Starting the Engine  
CAUTION  
Do not try the starter for more than  
10 seconds at a time. If the engine  
stalls or fails to start, wait 10 seconds  
before trying again. Otherwise, you  
may damage the starter and drain  
the battery.  
With advanced key  
Refer to “Starting the engine (page 3-10)”  
for information on how to start the engine.  
NOTE  
Engine-starting is controlled by the spark  
ignition system.  
This system meets all Canadian Interference-  
Causing Equipment Standard requirements  
regulating the impulse electrical field strength  
of radio noise.  
6. After starting the engine, let it idle for  
about 10 seconds.  
NOTE  
l
In extremely cold weather or after the  
vehicle has not been driven in several days,  
let the engine warm up without operating  
the accelerator.  
Whether the engine is cold or warm, it  
should be started without use of the  
accelerator.  
1. Occupants should fasten their seat  
belts.  
2. Make sure the parking brake is on.  
3. Depress the brake pedal.  
l
4. (Manual transaxle)  
Depress the clutch pedal all the way  
and shift into neutral.  
Keep the clutch pedal depressed while  
cranking the engine.  
l
If the engine does not start the first time,  
refer to Starting a Flooded Engine under  
Emergency Starting. If the engine still does  
not start, have your vehicle inspected by an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer (page 7-13).  
(Automatic transaxle)  
Put the vehicle in park (P). If you must  
restart the engine while the vehicle is  
moving, shift into neutral (N).  
NOTE  
(Manual transaxle)  
The starter will not operate unless the clutch is  
depressed sufficiently.  
(Automatic transaxle)  
The starter will not operate if the shift lever is  
not in P or N.  
5. Turn the ignition switch to the START  
position and hold (up to 10 seconds at  
a time) until the engine starts.  
5-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving Your Mazda  
Starting and Driving  
Brake System  
WARNING  
Do not coast with the engine stalled or  
turned off, find a safe place to stop:  
Coasting with the engine stalled or  
turned off is dangerous. Braking will  
require more effort, and the brake's  
power-assist could be depleted if you  
pump the brake. This will cause  
longer stopping distances or even an  
accident.  
qFoot Brake  
Your Mazda has power-assisted brakes  
that adjust automatically through normal  
use.  
Should power-assist fail, you can stop by  
applying greater force than normal to the  
brake pedal. But the distance required to  
stop will be greater than usual.  
Shift to a lower gear when going down  
steep hills:  
Driving with your foot continuously  
on the brake pedal or steadily  
applying the brakes for long  
distances is dangerous. This causes  
overheated brakes, resulting in  
longer stopping distances or even  
total brake failure. This could cause  
loss of vehicle control and a serious  
accident. Avoid continuous  
application of the brakes.  
Dry brakes that have become wet by  
driving very slowly and applying the  
brakes lightly until brake performance  
is normal:  
Driving with wet brakes is  
dangerous. Increased stopping  
distance or the vehicle pulling to one  
side when braking could result in a  
serious accident. Light braking will  
indicate whether the brakes have  
been affected.  
5-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving Your Mazda  
Starting and Driving  
Setting the parking brake  
qParking Brake  
Depress the brake pedal and then firmly  
pull the parking brake lever fully upwards  
with sufficient force to hold the vehicle in  
a stationary position.  
WARNING  
Before leaving the driver's seat, always  
switch the ignition off, set the parking  
brake, and make sure the shift lever is  
in P (automatic transaxle) or in 1st gear  
or R (manual transaxle):  
Leaving the driver's seat without  
switching off the ignition, setting the  
parking brake, and shifting the shift  
lever to P (automatic transaxle) or to  
1st gear or R (manual transaxle) is  
dangerous. Unexpected vehicle  
movement could occur which could  
result in an accident.  
In addition, if your intention is to  
leave the vehicle for even a short  
period, it is important to switch the  
ignition off, as leaving it in another  
position will disable some of the  
vehicle's security systems and run the  
battery down.  
Releasing the parking brake  
Depress the brake pedal and pull the  
parking brake lever upwards, then press  
the release button. While holding the  
button, lower the parking brake lever all  
the way down to the released position.  
CAUTION  
Driving with the parking brake on  
will cause excessive wear of the brake  
linings or pads.  
NOTE  
For parking in snow, refer to Winter Driving  
(page 4-8) regarding parking brake use.  
5-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving Your Mazda  
Starting and Driving  
NOTE  
qBrake System Warning Light  
Having to add brake fluid is sometimes an  
indicator of leakage. Consult an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer as soon as possible even if the  
brake light is no longer illuminated.  
WARNING  
Do not drive with the brake system  
warning light illuminated. Contact an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer to have the  
brakes inspected as soon as possible:  
Driving with the brake system  
This warning has the following functions:  
Parking brake warning  
The light illuminates when the parking  
brake is applied with the ignition switched  
to START or ON. It turns off when the  
parking brake is fully released.  
warning light illuminated is  
dangerous. It indicates that your  
brakes may not work at all or that  
they could completely fail at any  
time. If this light remains  
Low brake fluid level warning  
If the light stays on after the parking brake  
is fully released, you may have a brake  
problem.  
illuminated, after checking that the  
parking brake is fully released, have  
the brakes inspected immediately.  
Drive to the side of the road and park off  
the right-of-way.  
qAnti-Lock Brake System (ABS)  
The ABS control unit continuously  
monitors the speed of each wheel. If one  
is about to lock up, the ABS responds by  
automatically releasing and reapplying  
that wheel's brake.  
You may notice that the pedal is harder to  
depress or that it may go closer to the  
floor. In either case, it will take longer to  
stop the vehicle.  
The driver will feel a slight vibration in  
the brake pedal and may hear a chattering  
noise from the brake system. This is  
normal when the ABS operates. Continue  
to depress the brake pedal without  
pumping the brakes.  
1. With the engine stopped, open the  
hood and check the brake fluid level  
immediately, and then add fluid if  
required (page 8-22).  
2. After adding fluid, check the light  
again.  
If the warning light remains on, or if the  
brakes do not operate properly, do not  
drive the vehicle. Have it towed to an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
Even if the light turns off have your brake  
system inspected as soon as possible by  
an Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
5-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving Your Mazda  
Starting and Driving  
If the ABS warning light stays on while  
you're driving, the ABS control unit has  
detected a system malfunction. If this  
occurs, your brakes will function normally  
as if the vehicle had no ABS.  
WARNING  
Do not rely on ABS as a substitute for  
safe driving:  
The ABS cannot compensate for  
unsafe and reckless driving, excessive  
speed, tailgating (following another  
vehicle too closely), driving on ice and  
snow, and hydroplaning (reduced tire  
friction and road contact because of  
water on the road surface). You can  
still have an accident.  
Should this happen, consult an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.  
NOTE  
When the engine is jump-started to charge the  
battery, uneven rpm occurs and the ABS  
warning light may illuminate. If this occurs, it  
is the result of the weak battery and does not  
indicate an ABS malfunction.  
NOTE  
Recharge the battery.  
l
Braking distances may be longer on loose  
surfaces (snow or gravel, for example)  
which usually have a hard foundation. A  
vehicle with a normal braking system may  
require less distance to stop under these  
conditions because the tires will build up a  
wedge of surface layer when the wheels  
skid.  
qElectronic Brake Force  
Distribution System Warning  
l
The sound of the ABS operating may be  
heard when starting the engine or  
immediately after starting the vehicle.  
However, it does not indicate a malfunction.  
If the electronic brake force distribution  
control unit determines that some  
components are operating incorrectly, the  
control unit may illuminate the brake  
system warning light and the ABS  
warning light on simultaneously. The  
problem is likely to be the electronic  
brake force distribution system.  
qABS Warning Light  
The warning light stays on for a few  
seconds when the ignition is switched  
ON.  
5-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving Your Mazda  
Starting and Driving  
qBrake Pad Wear Indicator  
WARNING  
When the disc brake pads become worn,  
the built-in wear indicators contact the  
disc plates. This causes a screeching noise  
to warn that the pads should be replaced.  
Do not drive with both the ABS warning  
light and brake warning light  
illuminated. Have the vehicle towed to  
an Authorized Mazda Dealer to have  
the brakes inspected as soon as  
possible:  
Driving when the brake system  
warning light and ABS warning light  
are illuminated simultaneously is  
dangerous.  
When both lights are illuminated, the  
rear wheels could lock more quickly  
in an emergency stop than under  
normal circumstances.  
qBrake Assist  
When you hear this noise, consult an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as  
possible.  
During emergency braking situations  
when it is necessary to depress the brake  
pedal with greater force, the brake assist  
system provides braking assistance, thus  
enhancing braking performance.  
WARNING  
Do not drive with worn disc pads:  
Driving with worn disc pads is  
When the brake pedal is depressed hard or  
depressed more quickly, the brakes apply  
more firmly.  
dangerous. The brakes could fail and  
cause a serious accident. As soon as  
you hear a screeching noise consult  
an Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
NOTE  
l
When the brake pedal is depressed hard or  
depressed more quickly, the pedal will feel  
softer but the brakes will apply more firmly.  
This is a normal effect of the brake assist  
operation and does not indicate an  
abnormality.  
l
(Without DSC vehicles)  
When the brake pedal is depressed hard or  
depressed more quickly, a clicking noise  
from the brake booster may be heard. This  
is a normal effect of the brake assist and  
does not indicate an abnormality.  
l
The brake assist equipment does not  
supersede the functionality of the vehicle's  
main braking system.  
5-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving Your Mazda  
Starting and Driving  
Manual Transaxle Operation  
WARNING  
Do not use sudden engine braking on  
slippery road surfaces or at high  
speeds:  
qManual Transaxle Shift Pattern  
Shifting down while driving on wet,  
snowy, or frozen roads, or while  
driving at high speeds causes sudden  
engine braking, which is dangerous.  
The sudden change in tire speed  
could cause the tires to skid. This  
could lead to loss of vehicle control  
and an accident.  
Neutral position  
Be sure to leave the shift lever in 1 or R  
position and set the parking brake  
when leaving the vehicle unattended:  
Otherwise the vehicle could move  
and cause an accident.  
The shift pattern of the transaxle is  
conventional, as shown.  
Depress the clutch pedal all the way down  
while shifting; then release it slowly.  
CAUTION  
Ø Keep your foot off the clutch pedal  
except when shifting gears. Also,  
do not use the clutch to hold the  
vehicle on an upgrade. Riding the  
clutch will cause needless clutch  
wear and damage.  
Your vehicle is equipped with a device to  
prevent shifting to R (reverse) by mistake.  
Push the shift lever downward and shift to  
R.  
Ø Make sure the vehicle comes to a  
complete stop before shifting to R.  
Shifting to R while the vehicle is  
still moving may damage the  
transaxle.  
NOTE  
If shifting to R is difficult, shift back into  
neutral, release the clutch pedal, and try  
again.  
5-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving Your Mazda  
Starting and Driving  
qRecommendations for Shifting  
Upshifting  
For normal acceleration, we recommend these shift  
points.  
Gear  
Vehicle speed  
24 km/h (15 mph)  
1 to 2  
2 to 3  
3 to 4  
4 to 5  
5 to 6  
43 km/h (27 mph)  
56 km/h (35 mph)  
72 km/h (45 mph)  
90 km/h (56 mph)  
For cruising  
Gear  
1 to 2  
Vehicle speed  
16 km/h (10 mph)  
32 km/h (20 mph)  
48 km/h (30 mph)  
60 km/h (37 mph)  
71 km/h (44 mph)  
2 to 3  
3 to 4  
4 to 5  
5 to 6  
Downshifting  
When you must slow down in heavy  
traffic or on a steep upgrade, downshift  
before the engine starts to overwork. This  
reduces the chance of stalling and gives  
better acceleration when you need more  
speed.  
On a steep downgrade, downshifting  
helps maintain safe speed and prolongs  
brake life.  
5-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving Your Mazda  
Starting and Driving  
Automatic Transaxle Controls  
Various Lockouts:  
Indicates that you must depress the brake pedal to shift (The ignition  
must be switched to ACC or ON).  
Indicates the shift lever can be shifted freely into any position.  
NOTE  
The Sport AT has an option that is not included in the traditional automatic transaxle giving the  
driver the option of selecting each gear instead of leaving it to the transaxle to shift gears. Even if  
you intend to use the automatic transaxle functions as a traditional automatic, you should also be  
aware that you can inadvertently shift into manual shift mode and an inappropriate gear may be  
retained as the vehicle speed increases. If you notice the engine speed going higher or hear the  
engine racing, confirm you have not accidentally slipped into manual shift mode (page 5-15).  
5-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving Your Mazda  
Starting and Driving  
qTransaxle Ranges  
WARNING  
If the engine is running faster than idle,  
do not shift from N or P into a driving  
gear:  
The shift lever must be in P or N to  
operate the starter.  
P (Park)  
It's dangerous to shift from N or P  
into a driving gear when the engine  
is running faster than idle. If this is  
done, the vehicle could move  
suddenly, causing an accident or  
serious injury.  
P locks the transaxle and prevents the  
front wheels from rotating.  
WARNING  
Always set the shift lever to P and set  
the parking brake:  
Do not shift into N when driving the  
vehicle:  
Only setting the shift lever to the P  
position without using the parking  
brake to hold the vehicle is  
dangerous. If P fails to hold, the  
vehicle could move and cause an  
accident.  
Shifting into N while driving is  
dangerous. Engine braking cannot be  
applied when decelerating which  
could lead to an accident or serious  
injury.  
CAUTION  
Ø Shifting into P, N or R while the  
vehicle is moving can damage  
your transaxle.  
Ø Shifting into a driving gear or  
reverse when the engine is running  
faster than idle can damage the  
transaxle.  
CAUTION  
Do not shift into N when driving the  
vehicle. Doing so can cause transaxle  
damage.  
NOTE  
Apply the parking brake or depress the brake  
pedal before moving the shift lever from N to  
prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly.  
R (Reverse)  
In position R, the vehicle moves only  
backward. You must be at a complete stop  
before shifting to or from R, except under  
rare circumstances as explained in  
Rocking the Vehicle (page 4-8).  
D (Drive)  
D is the normal driving position. From a  
stop, the transaxle will automatically shift  
through a 5-gear/6-gear* sequence.  
* 3.7-liter engine  
N (Neutral)  
M (Manual)  
In N, the wheels and transaxle are not  
locked. The vehicle will roll freely even  
on the slightest incline unless the parking  
brake or brakes are on.  
M is the manual shift mode position.  
Gears can be shifted up or down by  
operating the shift lever.  
Refer to Manual Shift Mode (page 5-15).  
5-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving Your Mazda  
Starting and Driving  
NOTE  
l
qActive Adaptive Shift (AAS)  
When the ignition is switched off (LOCK),  
Active Adaptive Shift (AAS)  
the shift lever cannot be shifted from P.  
To be sure the vehicle is in park, the  
ignition key cannot be removed unless the  
shift lever is in P.  
automatically controls the transaxle shift  
points to best suit the road conditions and  
driver input. This optimizes engine  
performance and improves driving  
comfort. When cornering the vehicle,  
AAS mode will hold the transaxle in the  
gear the vehicle was in before entering the  
curve, allowing the vehicle to be  
accelerated from the same gear after  
exiting the curve.  
l
l
(With Advanced Key)  
The ignition cannot be switched from ACC  
to off (LOCK) when the shift lever is not in  
P.  
qShift-Lock Override  
If the driver accelerates rapidly, or  
accelerates and decelerates rapidly by  
operating the accelerator and brake pedal  
for a certain period of time while the  
selector lever is in the D position, AAS  
mode could activate. When this occurs,  
AAS mode will maintain the transaxle in  
the optimum gear and the driver may  
sense that the transaxle is not shifting,  
however this does not indicate an  
abnormality.  
If the shift lever will not move from P  
using the proper shift procedure, continue  
to hold down the pedal.  
1. Remove the shift-lock override cover  
using a cloth-wrapped flat head  
screwdriver.  
2. Insert a screwdriver and push it down.  
Cover  
qShift-Lock System  
The shift-lock system prevents shifting  
out of P unless the brake pedal is  
depressed.  
To shift from P:  
1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.  
2. Start the engine.  
3. Move the shift lever.  
4. Take the vehicle to an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer to have the system  
checked.  
3. Move the shift lever.  
5-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving Your Mazda  
Starting and Driving  
Indicators  
qManual Shift Mode  
Shift position indicator  
This mode gives you the feel of driving a  
manual transaxle vehicle by operating the  
shift lever and allows you to control  
engine rpm and torque to the front wheels  
much like a manual transaxle when more  
control is desired.  
In manual shift mode, the “M” of the shift  
position indicator in the instrument panel  
illuminates.  
Gear position indicator  
The numeral for the selected gear  
illuminates.  
To change to manual shift mode, shift the  
lever from D to M.  
NOTE  
Shift position indicator  
Changing to manual mode can be done while  
driving the vehicle with no damage occurring  
to the transaxle.  
D range/gear position indicator  
NOTE  
l
If the gears cannot be shifted down when  
driving at higher speeds, the gear position  
indicator will flash twice to signal that the  
gears cannot be shifted down.  
l
(2.5-liter engine model)  
To return to automatic shift mode, shift  
the lever from M to D.  
If the automatic transaxle fluid (ATF)  
temperature becomes too high, there is the  
possibility that the transaxle will switch to  
automatic shift mode, canceling manual  
shift mode and turning off the gear position  
indicator illumination. This is a normal  
function to protect the AT. After the ATF  
temperature has decreased, the gear  
position indicator illumination turns back  
on and driving in manual shift mode is  
restored.  
NOTE  
l
If you change to manual shift mode when  
the vehicle is stopped, the gear will shift to  
M1.  
l
(2.5-liter engine model)  
If you change to manual shift mode without  
depressing the accelerator pedal when  
driving in D range, 5th gear, the gear will  
shift to M4.  
5-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving Your Mazda  
Starting and Driving  
Shifting  
Manually Shifting down  
(M6í→M5→M4→M3→M2→M1)  
To shift down to a lower gear, tap the shift  
lever forward ( ) once.  
Manually Shifting up  
(M1→M2→M3→M4→M5→M6í)  
To shift up to a higher gear, tap the shift  
lever back ( ) once.  
WARNING  
NOTE  
Do not use engine braking on slippery  
road surfaces or at high speeds:  
Shifting down while driving on wet,  
snowy, or frozen roads, or while  
driving at high speeds causes sudden  
engine braking, which is dangerous.  
The sudden change in tire speed  
could cause the tires to skid. This  
could lead to loss of vehicle control  
and an accident.  
l
When driving slowly, the gears may not  
shift up depending on vehicle speed.  
l
In manual shift mode, gears do not shift up  
automatically. Do not run the engine with  
the tachometer needle in the RED ZONE. If  
the tachometer needle enters the RED  
ZONE, you may feel engine-braking  
because the fuel delivery will be stopped to  
protect the engine. However, this does not  
indicate an abnormality.  
l
NOTE  
When depressing the accelerator fully, the  
transaxle will shift to a lower gear,  
depending on vehicle speed.  
l
When driving at high speeds, the gear may  
not shift down depending on vehicle speed.  
l
During deceleration, the gear may  
automatically shift down depending on  
vehicle speed.  
l
When depressing the accelerator fully, the  
transaxle will shift to a lower gear,  
depending on vehicle speed.  
5-16  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving Your Mazda  
Starting and Driving  
Shifting down  
Second gear fixed mode  
If the vehicle speed is higher than the speed specified  
for each gear, the gear cannot be shifted to a lower  
gear so as to protect the transaxle.  
When the shift lever is tapped back (  
)
while the vehicle is stopped or driven at  
about 10 km/h (6 mph) or less, the  
transaxle is set in the second gear fixed  
mode. The gear is fixed in second while in  
this mode for easier starting and driving  
on slippery roads. If the shift lever is  
tapped back ( ) or forward ( ) while in  
the second gear fixed mode, the mode will  
be canceled.  
(2.5-liter engine model)  
Gear  
M5→M4  
Vehicle speed  
190 km/h (118 mph)  
135.1 km/h (83.9 mph)  
89.7 km/h (55.7 mph)  
44.9 km/h (27.8 mph)  
M4→M3  
M3→M2  
M2→M1  
(3.7-liter engine model)  
Gear  
Vehicle speed  
Shifting specification  
M6→M5  
M5→M4  
M4→M3  
M3→M2  
M2→M1  
230 km/h (142 mph)  
187.3 km/h (116.3 mph)  
130 km/h (80 mph)  
82 km/h (50 mph)  
Shifting up  
If the vehicle speed is lower than the speed specified  
for each gear, the gear cannot be shifted up to a  
higher gear.  
40.7 km/h (25.2 mph)  
(2.5-liter engine model)  
During deceleration, the gears shift down  
automatically when speed is reduced to the  
following:  
Gear  
Vehicle speed  
You can shift up to M2 whether  
the vehicle is stopped or  
moving.  
M1→M2  
(2.5-liter engine model)  
Gear  
Vehicle speed  
30.8 km/h (19.1 mph)  
10 km/h (6 mph)  
M2→M3  
M3→M4  
M4→M5  
20.5 km/h (12.8 mph)  
33.9 km/h (21.1 mph)  
34.1 km/h (21.2 mph)  
M5 or M4→M3  
M3 or M2→M1  
(3.7-liter engine model)  
(3.7-liter engine model)  
Gear  
Vehicle speed  
Gear  
Vehicle speed  
M6→M5  
51.4 km/h (31.9 mph)  
39.1 km/h (24.2 mph)  
27.8 km/h (17.2 mph)  
7.2 km/h (4.4 mph)  
You can shift up to M2 whether  
the vehicle is stopped or  
moving.  
M1→M2  
M5→M4  
M4→M3  
M2→M3  
M3→M4  
M4→M5  
M5→M6  
15 km/h (10 mph)  
M3 or M2→M1  
30.8 km/h (19.2 mph)  
42.1 km/h (26.2 mph)  
54.4 km/h (33.9 mph)  
NOTE  
The gear does not shift down to M1  
automatically while in the second gear fixed  
mode.  
If the vehicle is kicked down at the following speeds  
or lower, the gears shift down automatically:  
(2.5-liter engine model)  
Gear  
M5→M4  
Vehicle speed  
180 km/h (111 mph)  
126 km/h (78 mph)  
49.4 km/h (30.6 mph)  
M4→M3  
M3→M2  
5-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving Your Mazda  
Starting and Driving  
(3.7-liter engine model)  
qDriving Tips  
Gear  
M6→M5  
Vehicle speed  
Passing  
230 km/h (142 mph)  
166 km/h (103 mph)  
72 km/h (44 mph)  
47 km/h (29 mph)  
For extra power when passing another  
vehicle or climbing steep grades, depress  
the accelerator fully. The transaxle will  
shift to a lower gear, depending on vehicle  
speed.  
M5→M4  
M4→M3  
M3→M2  
Recommendations for shifting  
Upshifting  
Climbing steep grades from a stop  
For normal acceleration and cruising, we recommend  
these shift points.  
(2.5-liter engine model)  
To climb a steep grade from a stopped  
position:  
1. Depress the brake pedal.  
Gear  
M1 to M2  
Vehicle speed  
24 km/h (15 mph)  
2. Shift to D or M1, depending on the  
load weight and grade steepness.  
M2 to M3  
M3 to M4  
M4 to M5  
40 km/h (25 mph)  
65 km/h (40 mph)  
73 km/h (45 mph)  
3. Release the brake pedal while  
gradually accelerating.  
(3.7-liter engine model)  
Descending steep grades  
Gear  
Vehicle speed  
24 km/h (15 mph)  
40 km/h (25 mph)  
M1 to M2  
M2 to M3  
M3 to M4  
M4 to M5  
M5 to M6  
When descending a steep grade, shift to  
lower gears, depending on load weight  
and grade steepness. Descend slowly,  
using the brakes only occasionally to  
prevent them from overheating.  
65 km/h (40 mph)  
73 km/h (45 mph)  
80 km/h (50 mph)  
Downshifting  
When you must slow down in heavy  
traffic or on a steep upgrade, downshift  
before the engine starts to overwork. This  
gives better acceleration when you need  
more speed.  
On a steep downgrade, downshifting  
helps maintain safe speed and prolongs  
brake life.  
5-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving Your Mazda  
Starting and Driving  
Power Steering  
Cruise Controlí  
Power steering is only operable when the  
engine is running. If the engine is off or if  
the power steering system is inoperable,  
you can still steer, but it requires more  
physical effort.  
With cruise control, you can set and  
automatically maintain any speed of more  
than about 32 km/h (20 mph).  
WARNING  
Do not use the cruise control under the  
following conditions:  
If the steering feels stiffer than usual  
during normal driving, consult an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
Using the cruise control under the  
following conditions is dangerous  
and could result in loss of vehicle  
control.  
Ø Hilly terrain  
Ø Steep inclines  
Ø Heavy or unsteady traffic  
Ø Slippery or winding roads  
Ø Similar restrictions that require  
inconsistent speed  
CAUTION  
Never hold the steering wheel to the  
extreme left or right for more than 5  
seconds with the engine running.  
This could damage the power  
steering system.  
qCruise Main Indicator Light  
(Amber)/Cruise Set Indicator  
Light (Green)  
The indicator light has two colors.  
Cruise Main Indicator Light (Amber)  
The indicator light illuminates amber  
when the ON/OFF switch is pressed up  
and the cruise control system is activated.  
Cruise Set Indicator Light (Green)  
The indicator light illuminates green when  
a cruising speed has been set.  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-19  
Driving Your Mazda  
Starting and Driving  
3. Immediately release the cruise control  
SET+/SET- switch by pressing it up or  
down when the vehicle reaches the  
desired speed. Release the accelerator  
pedal simultaneously.  
qActivation/Deactivation  
To activate the system, press up on the  
ON/OFF switch.  
The cruise main indicator light  
illuminates.  
To deactivate the system, press down on  
the ON/OFF switch.  
The cruise main indicator light turns off.  
Cruise control switch  
NOTE  
l
Release the cruise control switch at the  
desired speed, otherwise the speed will  
continue increasing while the switch is  
pulled up, and continue decreasing while it  
is pulled down (except when the accelerator  
pedal is depressed).  
On a steep grade, the vehicle may  
momentarily slow down while ascending,  
or speed up while descending.  
WARNING  
Keep the ON/OFF switch off when  
cruise control is not in use:  
l
Leaving the ON/OFF switch on when  
not using the cruise control is  
dangerous as you may hit one of the  
other buttons and put the vehicle in  
cruise control unexpectedly. This  
could result in loss of vehicle control.  
l
Cruise control will turn off if vehicle speed  
drops below about 27 km/h (17 mph) when  
cruise is activated, such as when climbing a  
steep grade.  
qTo Set Speed  
1. Activate the cruise control system by  
momentarily pressing up the ON/OFF  
switch.  
2. Accelerate to the desired speed, which  
must be more than 32 km/h (20 mph).  
5-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving Your Mazda  
Starting and Driving  
To increase speed using accelerator  
pedal  
qTo Increase Cruising Speed  
Follow either of these procedures.  
Depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate  
to the desired speed.  
Press down or press up on the cruise  
control SET +/SET - switch and release it  
immediately.  
To increase speed using cruise control  
switch  
Press up the cruise control SET + switch  
and hold it. Your vehicle will accelerate.  
Release the switch at the speed you want.  
Cruise control switch  
Cruise control switch  
NOTE  
Accelerate if you want to speed up temporarily  
when the cruise control is on. Greater speed  
will not interfere with or change the set speed.  
Take your foot off the accelerator to return to  
the set speed.  
Your vehicle has a tap-up feature that  
allows you to increase your current speed  
in increments of 1.6 km/h (1 mph) by a  
momentary tap of the cruise control SET  
+ switch. Multiple taps will increase your  
vehicle speed 1.6 km/h (1 mph) for each  
tap.  
qTo Decrease Cruising Speed  
Press down the cruise control SET -  
switch and hold it. The vehicle will  
gradually slow.  
Release the switch at the speed you want.  
Cruise control switch  
5-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving Your Mazda  
Starting and Driving  
l
Your vehicle has a tap-down feature that  
allows you to decrease your current speed  
in decrements of 1.6 km/h (1 mph) by a  
momentary tap of the cruise control SET -  
switch. Multiple taps will decrease your  
vehicle speed 1.6 km/h (1 mph) for each  
tap.  
Press the CANCEL switch.  
qTo Resume Cruising Speed at  
More Than 32 km/h (20 mph)  
If some other method besides the ON/  
OFF switch was used to cancel cruising  
speed (such as applying the brake pedal)  
and the system is still activated, the most  
recent set speed will automatically resume  
when the RESUME switch is pressed.  
If vehicle speed is below 32 km/h (20  
mph), increase the vehicle speed up to 32  
km/h (20 mph) or more and press the  
RESUME switch.  
The system turns off when the ignition is  
off.  
NOTE  
Cruise control will cancel at about 15 km/h (9  
mph) below the preset speed (such as may  
happen when climbing a long, steep grade).  
qTo Cancel  
To cancel the system, use one of these  
methods:  
l
Pull down the ON/OFF switch.  
Slightly depress the brake pedal.  
Depress the clutch pedal (Manual  
l
l
transaxle only).  
5-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving Your Mazda  
Starting and Driving  
qTCS/DSC Indicator Light  
Traction Control System  
(TCS)  
The Traction Control System (TCS)  
enhances traction and safety by  
controlling engine torque and braking*.  
When the TCS detects driving wheel  
slippage, it lowers engine torque and  
operates the brakes* to prevent loss of  
traction.  
This indicator light stays on for a few  
seconds when the ignition is switched  
ON. If the TCS or DSC* is operating, the  
indicator light flashes.  
This means that on a slick surface, the  
engine adjusts automatically to provide  
optimum power to the drive wheels  
without causing them to spin and lose  
traction.  
If the light stays on, the TCS, DSC* or the  
brake assist system* may have a  
malfunction and they may not operate  
correctly. Take your vehicle to an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
* DSC-equipped vehicles only  
*DSC-equipped vehicles only  
WARNING  
Do not rely on the traction control  
system as a substitute for safe driving:  
The traction control system (TCS)  
cannot compensate for unsafe and  
reckless driving, excessive speed,  
tailgating (following another vehicle  
too closely), and hydroplaning  
(reduced tire friction and road  
contact because of water on the road  
surface). You can still have an  
accident.  
NOTE  
l
In addition to the indicator light flashing, a  
slight lugging sound will come from the  
engine. This indicates that the TCS is  
operating properly.  
l
On slippery surfaces, such as fresh snow, it  
will be impossible to achieve high rpm  
when the TCS is on.  
Use snow tires and drive at reduced  
speeds when roads are covered with ice  
and/or snow:  
Driving without proper traction  
devices on snow and/or ice-covered  
roads is dangerous. The traction  
control system (TCS) alone cannot  
provide adequate traction and you  
could still have an accident.  
5-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving Your Mazda  
Starting and Driving  
qTCS OFF Indicator Lightí  
qTCS OFF Switchí  
Press the TCS OFF switch to turn off the  
TCS. The TCS OFF indicator light will  
illuminate.  
This indicator light stays on for a few  
seconds when the ignition is switched  
ON.  
It also illuminates when the TCS OFF  
switch is pressed and TCS is switched off.  
Refer to TCS OFF Switch on page 5-24.  
If the light remains illuminated and the  
TCS is not switched off, take your vehicle  
to an Authorized Mazda Dealer. The TCS  
may have a malfunction.  
Press the switch again to turn the TCS  
back on. The TCS OFF indicator light  
will turn off.  
NOTE  
(3.7-liter engine)  
NOTE  
If the battery is disconnected or a fuse is  
replaced, the TCS will be inoperable. When  
this happens, the TCS OFF indicator light  
flashes and the TCS indicator light illuminates.  
To reactivate the TCS, perform the following  
procedure with the battery connected.  
l
When TCS is on and you attempt to free the  
vehicle when it is stuck, or drive it out of  
freshly fallen snow, the TCS will activate.  
Depressing the accelerator will not  
increase engine power and freeing the  
vehicle may be difficult. When this happens,  
turn off the TCS.  
1. Switch the ignition ON  
l
(DSC-equipped vehicles)  
2. Turn the steering clockwise fully, then turn  
it counterclockwise fully.  
Press the DSC OFF switch to turn off the  
TCS (page 5-26).  
l
If the TCS is off when the engine is turned  
off, it automatically activates when the  
ignition switch is turned on.  
3. Make sure the TCS OFF indicator light and  
TCS indicator light turn off.  
If the TCS indicator light and the TCS OFF  
indicator light remain illuminated even after  
switching the ignition ON, attempt the  
procedure again. If this still does not work,  
consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
l
Leaving the TCS on will provide the best  
traction.  
5-24  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving Your Mazda  
Starting and Driving  
Dynamic Stability Control  
(DSC)í  
CAUTION  
Ø The DSC may not operate correctly  
unless the following are observed:  
The Dynamic Stability Control (DSC)  
automatically controls braking and engine  
torque in conjunction with systems such  
as ABS and TCS to help control side slip  
when driving on slippery surfaces, or  
during sudden or evasive maneuvering,  
enhancing vehicle safety.  
Ø
Ø
Ø
Use tires of the correct size  
specified for your Mazda on all  
four wheels.  
Use tires of the same  
manufacturer, brand and tread  
pattern on all four wheels.  
Do not mix worn tires.  
Ø The DSC may not operate correctly  
when a temporary spare tire is  
installed because the tire diameter  
changes.  
Refer to ABS (page 5-7) and TCS (page  
5-23).  
DSC operation is possible at speeds  
greater than15 km/h (9 mph).  
qTCS/DSC Indicator Light  
WARNING  
Do not rely on the dynamic stability  
control as a substitute for safe driving:  
The dynamic stability control (DSC)  
cannot compensate for unsafe and  
reckless driving, excessive speed,  
tailgating (following another vehicle  
too closely), and hydroplaning  
(reduced tire friction and road  
contact because of water on the road  
surface). You can still have an  
accident.  
This indicator light stays on for a few  
seconds when the ignition is switched  
ON. If the TCS or DSC is operating, the  
indicator light flashes.  
If the light stays on, the TCS, DSC or the  
brake assist system may have a  
malfunction and they may not operate  
correctly. Take your vehicle to an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-25  
Driving Your Mazda  
Starting and Driving  
qDSC OFF Indicator Light  
qDSC OFF Switch  
Press the DSC OFF switch to turn off the  
TCS/DSC. The DSC OFF indicator light  
will illuminate.  
This indicator light stays on for a few  
seconds when the ignition is switched  
ON.  
It also illuminates when the DSC OFF  
switch is pressed and TCS/DSC is  
switched off (page 5-26).  
If the light stays on when the TCS/DSC is  
not switched off, take your vehicle to an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer. The dynamic  
stability control may have a malfunction.  
Press the switch again to turn the TCS/  
DSC back on. The DSC OFF indicator  
light will go out.  
NOTE  
NOTE  
If the battery is disconnected or a fuse is  
replaced, the DSC will be inoperable. In this  
case, the DSC OFF indicator light flashes and  
the TCS/DSC indicator light illuminates.  
To make the DSC operable, do the following  
procedure with the battery connected.  
l
When DSC is on and you attempt to free the  
vehicle when it is stuck, or drive it out of  
freshly fallen snow, the TCS (part of the  
DSC system) will activate. Depressing the  
accelerator will not increase engine power  
and freeing the vehicle may be difficult.  
When this happens, turn off the TCS/DSC.  
1. Switch the ignition ON.  
l
If the TCS/DSC is off when the engine is  
2. Turn the steering clockwise fully, then turn  
it counterclockwise fully.  
turned off, it automatically activates when  
the ignition is switched on.  
l
Leaving the TCS/DSC on will provide the  
best stability.  
3. Make sure the DSC OFF indicator and the  
TCS/DSC indicator go off.  
If the TCS/DSC indicator light and the DSC  
OFF indicator light remain illuminated even  
after switching the ignition ON, consult an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
5-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving Your Mazda  
Starting and Driving  
Tire Pressure Monitoring Systemí  
The tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) monitors the pressure for each tire.  
If tire pressure is too low in one or more tires, the system will inform the driver via the  
warning light in the instrument panel and by the warning beep sound.  
The tire pressure sensors installed on each wheel send tire pressure data by radio signal to  
the receiver unit in the vehicle.  
Tire pressure sensors  
NOTE  
When the ambient temperature is low due to seasonal changes, tire temperatures are also lower.  
When the tire temperature decreases, the air pressure decreases as well. The TPMS warning light  
may illuminate more frequently. Visually inspect the tires daily before driving, and check tire  
pressures monthly with a tire pressure gauge. When checking tire pressures, use of a digital tire  
pressure gauge is recommended.  
TPMS does not alleviate your need to check the pressure and condition of all four tires  
regularly.  
íSome models.  
5-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving Your Mazda  
Starting and Driving  
CAUTION  
Ø Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold  
and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer  
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a  
different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation  
pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those  
tires.)  
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure  
monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one  
or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire  
pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as  
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-  
inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation  
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's  
handling and stopping ability.  
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it  
is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-  
inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire  
pressure telltale.  
Ø Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to  
indicate when the system is not operating properly.  
The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale.  
When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately  
one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will  
continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.  
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to  
detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a  
variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or  
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always  
check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on  
your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow  
the TPMS to continue to function properly.  
Ø To avoid false readings, the system samples for a little while before indicating a  
problem. As a result it will not instantaneously register a rapid tire deflation or  
blow out.  
NOTE  
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two  
conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any  
interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.  
5-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving Your Mazda  
Starting and Driving  
qTire Pressure Monitoring System  
Warning Light  
WARNING  
If the tire pressure monitoring system  
warning light illuminates or flashes, or  
the tire pressure warning beep sound is  
heard, decrease vehicle speed  
immediately and avoid sudden  
maneuvering and braking:  
If the tire pressure monitoring system  
warning light illuminates or flashes,  
or the tire pressure warning beep  
sound is heard, it is dangerous to  
drive the vehicle at high speeds, or  
perform sudden maneuvering or  
braking. Vehicle drivability could  
worsen and result in an accident.  
To determine if you have a slow leak  
or a flat, pull over to a safe position  
where you can check the visual  
condition of the tire and determine if  
you have enough air to proceed to a  
place where air may be added and  
the system monitored again, an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer or a tire  
repair station.  
This warning light illuminates for a few  
seconds when the ignition is switched  
ON.  
Thereafter, the warning light illuminates  
and a beep is heard when tire pressure is  
too low in one or more tires, and flashes  
when there is a system malfunction.  
Do not ignore the TPMS Warning Light:  
Ignoring the TPMS warning light is  
dangerous, even if you know why it is  
illuminated. Have the problem taken  
care of as soon as possible before it  
develops into a more serious  
situation that could lead to tire  
failure and a dangerous accident.  
Warning light illuminates/Warning  
beep sounds  
When the warning light illuminates, and  
the warning beep sound is heard (about 3  
seconds), tire pressure is too low in one or  
more tires.  
5-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving Your Mazda  
Starting and Driving  
Adjust the tire pressure to the correct tire  
pressure. Refer to the specification charts  
(page 10-7).  
NOTE  
l
Perform tire pressure adjustment when the  
tires are cold. Tire pressure will vary  
according to the tire temperature, therefore  
let the vehicle stand for 1 hour or only drive  
it 1.6 km (1 mile) or less before adjusting  
the tire pressures. When pressure is  
adjusted on hot tires to the cold inflation  
pressure, the TPMS warning light/beep may  
turn on after the tires cool and pressure  
drops below specification.  
CAUTION  
When replacing/repairing the tires or  
wheels or both, have the work done  
by an Authorized Mazda Dealer, or  
the tire pressure sensors may be  
damaged.  
Also, an illuminated TPMS warning light,  
resulting from the tire air pressure dropping  
due to cold ambient temperature, may turn  
off if the ambient temperature rises. In this  
case, it will also be necessary to adjust the  
tire air pressures. If the TPMS warning  
light illuminates due to a drop in tire air  
pressure, make sure to check and adjust the  
tire air pressures.  
l
After adjusting the tire air pressures, it may  
require some time for the TPMS warning  
light to turn off. If the TPMS warning light  
remains illuminated, drive the vehicle at a  
speed of at least 25 km/h (16 mph) for 10  
minutes, and then verify that it turns off.  
Tires loose air naturally over time and the  
TPMS cannot tell if the tires are getting too  
soft over time or you have a flat. However,  
when you find one low tire in a set of four-  
that is an indication of trouble; you should  
have someone drive the vehicle slowly  
forward so you can inspect any low tire for  
cuts and any metal objects sticking through  
tread or sidewall. Put a few drops of water  
in the valve stem to see if it bubbles  
l
indicating a bad valve. Leaks need to be  
addressed by more than simply refilling the  
trouble tire as leaks are dangerous - take it  
to an Authorized Mazda Dealer which has  
all the equipment to fix tires, TPMS systems  
and order the best replacement tire for your  
vehicle.  
5-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving Your Mazda  
Starting and Driving  
If the warning light illuminates again even  
after the tire pressures are adjusted, there  
may be a tire puncture. Replace the  
punctured tire with the temporary spare  
tire (page 7-6).  
qTires and Wheels  
CAUTION  
When inspecting or adjusting the tire  
air pressures, do not apply excessive  
force to the stem part of the wheel  
unit. The stem part could be  
damaged.  
NOTE  
A tire pressure sensor is not installed to the  
temporary spare tire. The warning light will  
flash continuously while the temporary spare  
tire is being used.  
Changing tires and wheels  
The following procedure allows the  
TPMS to recognize a tire pressure sensor's  
unique ID signal code whenever tires or  
wheels are changed, such as changing to  
and from winter tires.  
Warning light flashes  
When the warning light flashes, there may  
be a system malfunction. Consult an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
NOTE  
qSystem Error Activation  
Each tire pressure sensor has a unique ID  
signal code. The signal code must be  
registered with the TPMS before it can work.  
The easiest way to do it is to have an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer change your tire and  
complete ID signal code registration.  
When the warning light flashes, there may  
be a system malfunction. Consult an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
A system error activation may occur in  
the following cases:  
l
When there is equipment or a device  
When having tires changed at an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer  
near the vehicle using the same radio  
frequency as that of the tire pressure  
sensors.  
Tire pressure sensor ID signal code  
registration is completed when an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer changes your  
vehicle's tires.  
l
When using the following devices in  
the vehicle that may cause radio  
interference with the receiver unit.  
l
A digital device such as a personal  
When changing tires yourself  
computer.  
A current converter device such as a  
l
If you or someone else changes tires, you  
or someone else can also undertake the  
steps for the TPMS to complete the ID  
signal code registration.  
DC-AC converter.  
When excess snow or ice adheres to  
l
the vehicle, especially around the  
wheels.  
When the tire pressure sensor batteries  
1. After tires have been changed, switch  
the ignition ON, then back to ACC or  
off (LOCK).  
l
are exhausted.  
When using a wheel with no tire  
l
pressure sensor installed.  
When using tires with steel wire  
2. Wait for about 15 minutes.  
l
reinforcement in the side walls.  
5-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving Your Mazda  
Starting and Driving  
l
3. After about 15 minutes, drive the  
vehicle at a speed of at least 25 km/h  
(16 mph) for 10 minutes and the tire  
pressure sensor ID signal code will be  
registered automatically.  
A new tire pressure sensor is installed  
to a new wheel.  
NOTE  
l
The tire pressure sensor ID signal code  
must be registered when a new tire pressure  
sensor is purchased. For purchase of a tire  
pressure sensor and registration of the tire  
pressure sensor ID signal code, consult an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
When reinstalling a previously removed tire  
pressure sensor to a wheel, replace the  
grommet (seal between valve body/sensor  
and wheel) for the tire pressure sensor.  
NOTE  
If the vehicle is driven within about 15 minutes  
of changing tires, the tire pressure monitoring  
system warning light will flash because the  
sensor ID signal code would not have been  
registered. If this happens, park the vehicle for  
about 15 minutes, after which the sensor ID  
signal code will register upon driving the  
vehicle for 10 minutes.  
l
Replacing tires and wheels  
CAUTION  
Ø When replacing/repairing the tires  
or wheels or both, have the work  
done by an Authorized Mazda  
Dealer, or the tire pressure sensors  
may be damaged.  
Ø The wheels equipped on your  
Mazda are specially designed for  
installation of the tire pressure  
sensors. Do not use non-genuine  
wheels, otherwise it may not be  
possible to install the tire pressure  
sensors.  
Be sure to have the tire pressure sensors  
installed whenever tires or wheels are  
replaced.  
When having a tire or wheel or both  
replaced, the following types of tire  
pressure sensor installations are possible.  
l
The tire pressure sensor is removed  
from the old wheel and installed to the  
new one.  
The same tire pressure sensor is used  
l
with the same wheel. Only the tire is  
replaced.  
5-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving Your Mazda  
Starting and Driving  
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) Systemí  
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system is designed to assist the driver by monitoring  
blind spots on both sides of the vehicle to the rear in certain situations such as when  
changing lanes on roads and freeways.  
The BSM system monitors the detection areas on both sides of the vehicle to the rear when  
the vehicle speed is about 32 km/h (20 mph) or more, and notifies the driver of vehicles in  
the detection area by illuminating the BSM warning light.  
If the turn signal lever is operated in the direction the BSM warning light is illuminated, the  
system warns the driver of the vehicle in the detection area with a beep sound.  
Detection areas  
WARNING  
Do not rely completely on the BSM system and be sure to look over your shoulder  
before changing lanes:  
The BSM system can assist the driver in confirming the safety of the surroundings  
but is not a complete substitute. The driver is responsible for assuring lane changes  
and other maneuvers. Always pay attention to the direction in which the vehicle is  
traveling and the vehicle's surroundings.  
NOTE  
l
The BSM system does not operate when the vehicle speed is lower than about 32 km/h (20 mph).  
l
The radar sensors are equipped inside the rear bumper. (page 5-36)  
l
The radar sensors do not detect human, animal, or static objects such as fences. In addition, the  
system pauses when the selector lever is shifted to the R position. (The system resumes  
automatically when the selector lever is shifted from the R position.)  
íSome models.  
5-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving Your Mazda  
Starting and Driving  
l
The detectability of the radar sensors has its limitations. The BSM system may not operate  
properly under the following conditions:  
l
Ice, snow, or soil adheres to the rear bumper surface around the radar sensors.  
During adverse weather conditions such as rain or snow, or under conditions where water is  
l
sprayed.  
l
The rear bumper area around the radar sensors is blocked by foreign material (such as  
stickers or a bicycle carrier).  
l
The radar sensors may not detect all types of vehicles around your vehicle, especially the  
following types of vehicles:  
l
Motorcycles  
l
Vehicles with body shapes that radar may not reflect such as a flatbed trailer with no cargo.  
Vehicles with lower body height such as sports cars.  
l
l
Have the radar sensors inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer if any shock is applied to the  
rear bumper, even in a minor accident. If the vehicle is driven with a damaged radar sensor, the  
system may not operate properly resulting in an accident.  
l
For repairs or paintwork around the radar sensors, or replacement of the bumper, consult an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
l
The radar sensors of the BSM system may be regulated under the radio wave related laws of the  
country where the vehicle is driven. The sensors in this system are approved for use in the U.S.A.  
(including territories), Canada, and Mexico. If a vehicle with a BSM system is driven in a country  
other than the U.S.A., Canada, or Mexico, the system has to be turned off using the BSM OFF  
switch.  
l
The detection area of the system has been determined based on the lane width of general  
freeways. Therefore on a road with a narrower lane width, the system may detect vehicles on a  
lane next to the adjacent lane and operate the warning light/beep. On a road with wider lane  
width, the system may not detect vehicles on the adjacent lane and may not operate the warning  
light/beep.  
l
Operation of the warning light/beep may be delayed or the system may not operate the warning  
light/beep under the following conditions:  
l
The vehicle accelerates from a standing-start with a vehicle alongside.  
A vehicle moves from a lane two lanes over to the adjacent lane.  
The difference in vehicle speed between your vehicle and another vehicle is larger when  
l
l
passing or being passed, and the vehicle passes the detection area within a short period of  
time.  
On a steep incline, or when there is a difference in height between lanes.  
l
l
Immediately after the system has been activated by pressing the BSM OFF switch again after it  
has been turned off (BSM OFF indicator light in instrument panel illuminates) by pressing the  
switch.  
l
Although the system may detect objects on the road side such as parked vehicles or guardrails and  
operate the warning light/beep, it does not indicate a malfunction.  
l
If the vehicle is driven on a road with less traffic and few vehicles that the radar sensors can  
detect, the system may pause (The BSM OFF indicator light in the instrument panel flashes).  
However, it does not indicate a malfunction.  
5-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving Your Mazda  
Starting and Driving  
l
The following conditions may affect the visibility of the BSM warning lights on the outside mirror,  
making it difficult to confirm the illumination of the lights:  
l
Ice or snow adheres to the surface of the outside mirrors.  
l
The door window glass is tinted.  
BSM warning beep  
qBSM Warning Light/Beep  
The warning beep operates when the turn  
signal lever is operated to the side where  
the BSM warning light is illuminated.  
BSM warning light  
Equipped on the left and right door  
mirrors.  
NOTE  
The system can be personalized so that the  
BSM warning beep does not operate. Refer to  
Personalization Features on page 10-8.  
qBSM OFF Indicator Light  
This warning light illuminates for a few  
seconds when the ignition is switched  
ON.  
If the BSM system detects a vehicle in the  
detection area while the vehicle is driven  
at a speed of about 32 km/h (20 mph) or  
more, the BSM warning light illuminates  
on the side of the vehicle where the rear  
on-coming vehicle is detected.  
This indicator light illuminates for a few  
seconds when the ignition is switched  
ON.  
The BSM OFF indicator light illuminates  
when the BSM system is turned off by  
pressing the BSM OFF switch.  
The indicator light flashes if the BSM  
system has a malfunction. Consult an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
NOTE  
l
If ice or snow adhere to the outer mirror  
surface, the BSM warning light may not be  
visible.  
If the door window glass is tinted, it may  
affect the visibility of the BSM warning  
light, making it difficult to confirm the  
illumination of the light.  
NOTE  
If the vehicle is driven on a road with less  
traffic and few vehicles that the radar sensors  
can detect, the system may pause (The BSM  
OFF indicator light in the instrument panel  
flashes). However, it does not indicate a  
malfunction.  
l
5-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving Your Mazda  
Starting and Driving  
Always keep the bumper surface near the  
radar sensor area clean so that the BSM  
system operates normally. Refer to the  
Exterior Care (page 8-54).  
qBSM OFF Switch  
When the BSM switch is pressed, the  
BSM system turns off and the BSM OFF  
indicator light illuminates.  
NOTE  
l
The BSM OFF indicator light flashes if the  
radar sensors cannot operate normally. If  
the light remains flashing after cleaning the  
bumper surface near the radar sensor area,  
consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
l
For repairs or paintwork around the radar  
sensors, or replacement of the bumper,  
consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
qSafety Certification  
Radiation Hazard  
Press the BSM OFF switch again to turn  
on the BSM system. The BSM OFF  
indicator light turns off.  
This BSM (blind spot monitoring) device  
emits intentional electromagnetic  
radiation in the 24 GHz to 25 GHz  
frequency range. The total radiated  
average power over the entire bandwidth  
NOTE  
If the ignition is switched off (LOCK) with the  
BSM system turned off, the system becomes  
operable automatically when the ignition is  
switched ON.  
_
is below 14 dBm (40 µW). The active  
emitting antenna surface is 72 cm2;  
therefore the radiated power density in  
front of the BSM device is 0.55 µW/cm2.  
This value is far below the legal human  
exposure protection limit of 1 mW/  
cm2(MPE) in Europe and US.  
qCare of Radar Sensors  
The radar sensors are equipped inside the  
rear bumper.  
Declaration of compliance for 24 GHz  
blind spot radar  
(U.S.A)  
FCC ID: KR5SV2008BSD  
This vehicle is equipped with a 24 GHz  
blind spot monitoring (BSM) radar  
system, which complies with part 15 of  
the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the  
following conditions:  
1. This device may not cause harmful  
interference, and  
Radar sensors  
5-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving Your Mazda  
Starting and Driving  
2. This device must accept any  
interference received, including  
interference that may cause undesired  
operation.  
WARNING  
Changes or modifications not  
expressively approved by the party  
responsible for compliance could void  
the user's authority to operate the  
equipment.  
3. This device may only work when the  
vehicle is in operation pursuant to § 15.  
252 (a) (4).  
(CANADA)  
ICDCE2008075 (temporary permission  
until RSS-220 is in force)  
This vehicle is equipped with a 24 GHz  
blind spot monitoring (BSM) radar  
system, which complies with the (actually  
draft) RSS-220 standard of Industry  
Canada. Operation is subject to the  
following conditions:  
1. This device may not cause harmful  
interference, and  
2. This device must accept any  
interference received, including  
interference that may cause undesired  
operation.  
3. This device may only work when the  
vehicle is in operation pursuant to  
RSS-220 5.2 (b)  
(MEXICO)  
RLVSISV07-725 (duration: June 18,  
2008)  
Brand: Siemens VDO  
Model: TYPE SV2007 BSD  
NOTE  
During printing time of this user manual the  
approvals listed below are granted. Further  
countries may become available or actual  
certification identifiers may be subject to  
change or update.  
5-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving Your Mazda  
Instrument Cluster and Indicators  
Meters and Gauges  
(Black-out meter)  
When the ignition is switched ON, the dashboard gauges illuminate.  
Speedometer ...................................................................................................... page 5-39  
Odometer, Trip Meter and Trip Meter Selector .................................................. page 5-39  
Tachometer ........................................................................................................ page 5-40  
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge .................................................................. page 5-40  
Fuel Gauge ........................................................................................................ page 5-41  
Dashboard Illumination ..................................................................................... page 5-41  
Outside Temperature Display ............................................................................. page 5-42  
5-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving Your Mazda  
Instrument Cluster and Indicators  
NOTE  
(Standard meter)  
The odometer and trip meter can be displayed  
as follows even when the ignition is switched  
to ACC or off (LOCK).  
qSpeedometer  
The speedometer indicates the speed of  
the vehicle.  
qOdometer, Trip Meter and Trip  
The headlight switch must be in the  
or  
Meter Selector  
position to see the display.  
l
Displays for 10 minutes after the ignition is  
switched to ACC or off (LOCK) from ON.  
Displays for 10 minutes after the driver's  
door is opened.  
The display mode can be changed  
between trip meter A and trip meter B by  
pressing the selector while one of them is  
displayed. The selected mode will be  
displayed.  
l
Odometer  
The odometer records the total distance  
the vehicle has been driven.  
Trip meter  
Odometer  
The trip meter can record the total  
distance of two trips. One is recorded in  
trip meter A, and the other is recorded in  
trip meter B.  
Trip meter A  
For instance, trip meter A can record the  
distance from the point of origin, and trip  
meter B can record the distance from  
where the fuel tank is filled.  
Press the selector  
Odometer  
When trip meter A is selected, pressing  
the selector again within one second will  
change to trip meter B mode.  
Trip meter B  
Press the selector  
When trip meter A is selected, TRIP A  
will be displayed. When trip meter B is  
selected, TRIP B will be displayed.  
The trip meter records the total distance  
the vehicle is driven until the meter is  
again reset. Return it to “0.0” by holding  
the selector depressed for 1 second or  
more. Use this meter to measure trip  
distances and to compute fuel  
consumption.  
5-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving Your Mazda  
Instrument Cluster and Indicators  
NOTE  
CAUTION  
l
Only the trip meters record tenths of  
kilometers (miles).  
Do not run the engine with the  
tachometer needle in the RED ZONE.  
This may cause severe engine  
damage.  
l
The trip record will be erased when:  
The power supply is interrupted (blown  
l
fuse or the battery is disconnected).  
The vehicle is driven over 999.9 km  
l
(mile).  
q
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge  
The engine coolant temperature gauge  
shows the temperature of the engine  
coolant.  
qTachometer  
The tachometer shows engine speed in  
thousands of revolutions per minute  
(rpm).  
3.7-liter engine  
Red zone  
If the needle is near H, it indicates  
overheating.  
2.5-liter engine  
CAUTION  
Driving with an overheated engine  
can cause serious engine damage  
(page 7-11).  
Red zone  
5-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving Your Mazda  
Instrument Cluster and Indicators  
qFuel Gauge  
qDashboard Illumination  
The fuel gauge shows approximately how  
much fuel is remaining in the tank when  
the ignition is switched ON.  
Rotate the knob to adjust the brightness of  
the instrument cluster and other  
illuminations in the dashboard.  
We recommend keeping the tank over 1/4  
full. When the low fuel warning light  
illuminates or when the needle is near E,  
refuel as soon as possible.  
NOTE  
l
The brightness of dashboard illuminations  
can be adjusted when the headlight switch  
is in the  
or  
position.  
l
l
When the dashboard illumination  
brightness cannot be adjusted any more, a  
beep sound will be heard.  
(Black-out meter)  
The brightness of the instrument cluster  
illumination can be adjusted when the  
headlight switch is in any position.  
Low fuel  
warning light  
Dim  
NOTE  
l
Bright  
After refueling, it may require some time for  
the needle to stabilize. In addition, the  
needle may deviate while driving on a slope  
or curve since the fuel moves in the tank.  
l
The direction of the arrow (  
) shows next  
to the low fuel warning light indicates that  
the fuel-filler lid is on the left side of the  
vehicle.  
Canceling the illumination dimmer  
(Black-out meter and dashboard  
illuminations)  
When the headlight switch is in the  
or  
position, the illumination of the  
instrument cluster and the information  
display dims.  
When driving on snowy or foggy roads,  
or in other situations when the instrument  
cluster or information display's visibility  
is reduced due to glare from surrounding  
brightness, cancel the illumination  
dimmer and increase the illumination  
intensity.  
5-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving Your Mazda  
Instrument Cluster and Indicators  
To cancel the illumination dimmer, press  
the dashboard illumination knob.  
NOTE  
If the dashboard illumination knob is kept at  
the illumination dimmer cancel position, the  
instrument cluster and the information display  
will not dim when the headlight switch is  
turned to the  
or  
position again.  
qOutside Temperature Display  
The outside temperature is displayed  
when the ignition is switched ON.  
NOTE  
l
The displayed ambient temperature varies  
from the actual ambient temperature  
depending on the surrounding conditions as  
well as the driving conditions.  
l
To have the ambient temperature display  
changed from Fahrenheit (°F) to  
Centigrade (°C), contact an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer.  
5-42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving Your Mazda  
Warning/Indicator Lights and Beep Sounds  
Warning/Indicator Lights  
Signal  
Warning/Indicator Lights  
Brake System Warning Light  
Page  
5-45  
Charging System Warning Light  
5-47  
5-47  
5-47  
5-48  
5-46  
5-48  
Engine Oil Pressure Warning Light  
Check Engine Light  
Powertrain Malfunction/Reduced Power Warning Light  
ABS Warning Light  
Air Bag/Front Seat Belt Pretensioner System Warning Light  
5-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving Your Mazda  
Warning/Indicator Lights and Beep Sounds  
Signal  
Warning/Indicator Lights  
Page  
Low Fuel Warning Light  
5-49  
Check Fuel Cap Warning Light  
Seat Belt Warning Light/Beep  
Door-Ajar Warning Light  
5-49  
5-49  
5-51  
5-51  
5-51  
Low Washer Fluid Level Warning Light  
Automatic Transaxle Warning Light  
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light  
5-51  
KEY Warning Light (Red)/KEY Indicator Light (Green)  
Electronic Steering Lock Warning Light  
Security Indicator Light  
5-53  
5-55  
5-55  
5-55  
5-56  
5-56  
5-56  
5-57  
5-57  
Headlight High-Beam Indicator Light  
Shift Position Indicator Light  
TCS/DSC Indicator Light  
TCS OFF Indicator Light  
DSC OFF Indicator Light  
Cruise Main Indicator Light (Amber)/Cruise Set Indicator Light (Green)  
5-44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving Your Mazda  
Warning/Indicator Lights and Beep Sounds  
Signal  
Warning/Indicator Lights  
Page  
BSM OFF Indicator Light  
Lights-On Indicator Light  
5-58  
5-58  
5-58  
Turn Signal/Hazard Warning Indicator Lights  
2. After adding fluid, check the light  
again.  
qBrake System Warning Light  
If the warning light remains on, or if the  
brakes do not operate properly, do not  
drive the vehicle. Have it towed to an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
Even if the light turns off have your brake  
system inspected as soon as possible by  
an Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
This warning has the following functions:  
Parking brake warning  
NOTE  
The light illuminates when the parking  
brake is applied with the ignition switched  
to START or ON. It turns off when the  
parking brake is fully released.  
Having to add brake fluid is sometimes an  
indicator of leakage. Consult an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer as soon as possible even if the  
brake light is no longer illuminated.  
Low brake fluid level warning  
WARNING  
If the light stays on after the parking brake  
is fully released, you may have a brake  
problem.  
Do not drive with the brake system  
warning light illuminated. Contact an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer to have the  
brakes inspected as soon as possible:  
Driving with the brake system  
Drive to the side of the road and park off  
the right-of-way.  
warning light illuminated is  
You may notice that the pedal is harder to  
depress or that it may go closer to the  
floor. In either case, it will take longer to  
stop the vehicle.  
dangerous. It indicates that your  
brakes may not work at all or that  
they could completely fail at any  
time. If this light remains  
illuminated, after checking that the  
parking brake is fully released, have  
the brakes inspected immediately.  
1. With the engine stopped, open the  
hood and check the brake fluid level  
immediately, and then add fluid if  
required (page 8-22).  
5-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving Your Mazda  
Warning/Indicator Lights and Beep Sounds  
qABS Warning Light  
qElectronic Brake Force  
Distribution System Warning  
The warning light stays on for a few  
seconds when the ignition is switched  
ON.  
If the electronic brake force distribution  
control unit determines that some  
components are operating incorrectly, the  
control unit may illuminate the brake  
system warning light and the ABS  
warning light on simultaneously. The  
problem is likely to be the electronic  
brake force distribution system.  
If the ABS warning light stays on while  
you're driving, the ABS control unit has  
detected a system malfunction. If this  
occurs, your brakes will function normally  
as if the vehicle had no ABS.  
Should this happen, consult an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.  
WARNING  
Do not drive with both the ABS warning  
light and brake warning light  
illuminated. Have the vehicle towed to  
an Authorized Mazda Dealer to have  
the brakes inspected as soon as  
possible:  
NOTE  
When the engine is jump-started to charge the  
battery, uneven rpm occurs and the ABS  
warning light may illuminate. If this occurs, it  
is the result of the weak battery and does not  
indicate an ABS malfunction.  
Driving when the brake system  
warning light and ABS warning light  
are illuminated simultaneously is  
dangerous.  
Recharge the battery.  
When both lights are illuminated, the  
rear wheels could lock more quickly  
in an emergency stop than under  
normal circumstances.  
5-46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving Your Mazda  
Warning/Indicator Lights and Beep Sounds  
If the light illuminates while driving:  
qCharging System Warning Light  
1. Drive to the side of the road and park  
off the right-of-way on level ground.  
2. Turn off the engine and wait 5 minutes  
for the oil to drain back into the oil  
pan.  
3. Inspect the engine oil level (page 8-20).  
If it's low, add the appropriate amount  
of engine oil while being careful not to  
overfill.  
This warning light illuminates when the  
ignition is switched ON and turns off  
when the engine is started.  
4. Start the engine and check the warning  
light.  
If the warning light illuminates while  
driving, it indicates a malfunction of the  
alternator or of the charging system.  
Drive to the side of the road and park off  
the right-of-way. Consult an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer.  
If the light remains illuminated even after  
you add oil, stop the engine immediately  
and have your vehicle towed to an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
CAUTION  
CAUTION  
Do not continue driving when the  
charging system warning light is  
illuminated because the engine could  
stop unexpectedly.  
Do not run the engine if the oil  
pressure is low. It could result in  
extensive engine damage.  
qCheck Engine Light  
q
Engine Oil Pressure Warning Light  
This indicator light illuminates when the  
ignition is switched ON and turns off  
when the engine is started.  
This warning light illuminates when the  
ignition is switched ON and turns off  
when the engine is started.  
If this light illuminates while driving, the  
vehicle may have a problem. It is  
important to note the driving conditions  
when the light illuminated and consult an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
This warning light indicates low engine  
oil pressure.  
5-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving Your Mazda  
Warning/Indicator Lights and Beep Sounds  
The check engine light may illuminate in  
the following cases:  
The fuel tank level being very low or  
If the powertrain malfunction/reduced  
power warning light remains on, do not  
drive at high speeds and consult an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as  
possible.  
l
approaching empty.  
The engine's electrical system has a  
l
problem.  
The emission control system has a  
l
q
Air Bag/Front Seat Belt  
Pretensioner System Warning Light  
problem.  
If the check engine light remains on or  
flashes continuously, do not drive at high  
speeds and consult an Authorized Mazda  
Dealer as soon as possible.  
qPowertrain Malfunction/Reduced  
Power Warning Light (3.7-liter  
engine)  
If the air bag/front seat belt pretensioner  
system is working properly, the warning  
light illuminates when the ignition is  
switched ON or after the engine is  
cranked. The warning light turns off after  
a specified period of time.  
A system malfunction is indicated if the  
warning light constantly flashes,  
constantly illuminates or does not  
illuminate at all when the ignition is  
switched ON. If any of these occur,  
consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer as  
soon as possible. The system may not  
work in an accident.  
This warning light illuminates for a few  
seconds when the ignition is switched  
ON.  
If this light illuminates while driving, the  
vehicle may have a problem. It is  
important to note the driving conditions  
when the light illuminated and consult an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
WARNING  
Never tamper with the air bag/  
pretensioner systems and always have  
an Authorized Mazda Dealer perform  
all servicing and repairs:  
The powertrain malfunction/reduced  
power warning light may illuminate in the  
following cases:  
Self-servicing or tampering with the  
systems is dangerous. An air bag/  
pretensioner could accidentally  
activate or become disabled causing  
serious injury or death.  
l
The engine's electrical system has a  
problem.  
The emission control system has a  
l
problem.  
5-48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving Your Mazda  
Warning/Indicator Lights and Beep Sounds  
qLow Fuel Warning Light  
qSeat Belt Warning Light/Beep  
The seat belt warning light illuminates  
and a beep sound will be heard if the  
driver's seat belt is not fastened when the  
ignition is switched ON.  
Low fuel  
warning light  
This warning light in the fuel gauge  
signals that the fuel tank will soon be  
empty.  
Conditions of operation  
Condition  
Result  
The warning light  
Refuel as soon as possible.  
The driver's seat belt is not illuminates for about 1  
fastened when the ignition is minute and a beep  
switched ON.  
sound will be heard  
for about 6 seconds.  
qCheck Fuel Cap Warning Light  
The driver's seat belt is  
fastened while the warning  
light and the beep sound are  
activated.  
The warning light  
turns off and the beep  
sound stops.  
The warning light will  
not illuminate and the  
beep sound will not be  
heard.  
The driver's seat belt is  
fastened before the ignition  
is switched ON.  
This warning light illuminates for a few  
seconds when the ignition is switched  
ON.  
Belt minder  
NOTE  
The belt minder can be deactivated. Consult an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer to deactivate or  
restore the seat belt minder.  
If the check fuel cap warning light  
illuminates while driving, the fuel-filler  
cap may not be installed properly. Stop  
the engine and reinstall the fuel-filler cap.  
Refer to the fuel-filler cap on page 3-45.  
5-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving Your Mazda  
Warning/Indicator Lights and Beep Sounds  
Driver seated/Front passenger not  
seated  
Driver seated/Front passenger seated  
The seat belt warning function reminds  
the front passenger to fasten the seat belt  
according to the chart below.  
The belt minder is a supplemental  
warning to the seat belt warning function.  
If the driver's seat belt is not fastened  
when the ignition is switched ON, the  
warning light/beep operates to give you  
further reminders according to the chart  
below.  
Vehicle speed  
Between 0 ― 20  
km/h  
(0 ― 12 mph)  
20 km/h  
(12 mph) or  
more  
Condition  
Seat belt  
(Driver)  
Vehicle speed  
Seat belt  
(Passenger)  
Between 0 ― 20  
km/h  
(0 ― 12 mph)  
20 km/h  
(12 mph) or  
more  
Condition  
Indicator  
Beep  
Seat belt  
Indicator  
Beep  
: Fastened  
: Unfastened  
: Illuminated  
: Flashing  
: Beep  
: Fastened  
: Unfastened  
: Illuminated  
: Flashing  
: Beep  
Placing heavy items on the front  
passenger seat may cause the front  
passenger seat belt warning function to  
operate depending on the weight of the  
item.  
Once the beep sound is heard, it continues  
sounding even if the vehicle speed lowers  
to 20 km/h (12 mph) or less until the  
seatbelt is fastened or the beep sound  
period has passed.  
Once the beep sound is heard, it continues  
sounding even if the vehicle speed lowers  
to 20 km/h (12 mph) or less until the  
seatbelt is fastened or the beep sound  
period has passed.  
NOTE  
l
To allow the front passenger seat weight  
sensor to function properly, do not place  
and sit on an additional seat cushion on the  
front passenger seat. The sensor may not  
function properly because the additional  
seat cushion could cause sensor  
interference.  
l
When a small child sits on the front  
passenger seat, it is possible that neither  
the warning light nor the warning beep  
operate.  
5-50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving Your Mazda  
Warning/Indicator Lights and Beep Sounds  
qDoor-Ajar Warning Light  
CAUTION  
If the automatic transaxle warning  
light illuminates, the transaxle has  
an electrical problem. Continuing to  
drive your Mazda in this condition  
could cause damage to your  
transaxle. Consult an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.  
This warning light illuminates when any  
door or the trunk is not securely closed.  
Close the door or the trunk securely  
before driving the vehicle.  
qTire Pressure Monitoring System  
(TPMS) Warning Light  
qLow Washer Fluid Level  
Warning Light  
This warning light illuminates for a few  
seconds when the ignition is switched  
ON.  
This warning light indicates that little  
washer fluid remains. Add fluid (page  
8-27).  
Thereafter, the warning light illuminates  
and a beep is heard when tire pressure is  
too low in one or more tires, and flashes  
when there is a system malfunction.  
q
Automatic Transaxle Warning Light  
This warning light stays on for a few  
seconds when the ignition is switched  
ON.  
The light illuminates when the transaxle  
has a problem.  
5-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving Your Mazda  
Warning/Indicator Lights and Beep Sounds  
Adjust the tire pressure to the correct tire  
pressure. Refer to the specification charts  
(page 10-7).  
WARNING  
If the tire pressure monitoring system  
warning light illuminates or flashes, or  
the tire pressure warning beep sound is  
heard, decrease vehicle speed  
immediately and avoid sudden  
maneuvering and braking:  
CAUTION  
When replacing/repairing the tires or  
wheels or both, have the work done  
by an Authorized Mazda Dealer, or  
the tire pressure sensors may be  
damaged.  
If the tire pressure monitoring system  
warning light illuminates or flashes,  
or the tire pressure warning beep  
sound is heard, it is dangerous to  
drive the vehicle at high speeds, or  
perform sudden maneuvering or  
braking. Vehicle drivability could  
worsen and result in an accident.  
To determine if you have a slow leak  
or a flat, pull over to a safe position  
where you can check the visual  
condition of the tire and determine if  
you have enough air to proceed to a  
place where air may be added and  
the system monitored again, an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer or a tire  
repair station.  
Do not ignore the TPMS Warning Light:  
Ignoring the TPMS warning light is  
dangerous, even if you know why it is  
illuminated. Have the problem taken  
care of as soon as possible before it  
develops into a more serious  
situation that could lead to tire  
failure and a dangerous accident.  
Warning light illuminates/Warning  
beep sounds  
When the warning light illuminates, and  
the warning beep sound is heard (about 3  
seconds), tire pressure is too low in one or  
more tires.  
5-52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving Your Mazda  
Warning/Indicator Lights and Beep Sounds  
NOTE  
If the warning light illuminates again even  
l
Perform tire pressure adjustment when the  
tires are cold. Tire pressure will vary  
after the tire pressures are adjusted, there  
may be a tire puncture. Replace the  
punctured tire with the temporary spare  
tire (page 7-6).  
according to the tire temperature, therefore  
let the vehicle stand for 1 hour or only drive  
it 1.6 km (1 mile) or less before adjusting  
the tire pressures. When pressure is  
adjusted on hot tires to the cold inflation  
pressure, the TPMS warning light/beep may  
turn on after the tires cool and pressure  
drops below specification.  
NOTE  
A tire pressure sensor is not installed to the  
temporary spare tire. The warning light will  
flash continuously while the temporary spare  
tire is being used.  
Also, an illuminated TPMS warning light,  
resulting from the tire air pressure dropping  
due to cold ambient temperature, may turn  
off if the ambient temperature rises. In this  
case, it will also be necessary to adjust the  
tire air pressures. If the TPMS warning  
light illuminates due to a drop in tire air  
pressure, make sure to check and adjust the  
tire air pressures.  
Warning light flashes  
When the warning light flashes, there may  
be a system malfunction. Consult an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
qKEY Warning Light (Red)/KEY  
Indicator Light (Green) (with  
Advanced Key)  
l
After adjusting the tire air pressures, it may  
require some time for the TPMS warning  
light to turn off. If the TPMS warning light  
remains illuminated, drive the vehicle at a  
speed of at least 25 km/h (16 mph) for 10  
minutes, and then verify that it turns off.  
Tires loose air naturally over time and the  
TPMS cannot tell if the tires are getting too  
soft over time or you have a flat. However,  
when you find one low tire in a set of four-  
that is an indication of trouble; you should  
have someone drive the vehicle slowly  
forward so you can inspect any low tire for  
cuts and any metal objects sticking through  
tread or sidewall. Put a few drops of water  
in the valve stem to see if it bubbles  
l
This indicator has two colors.  
KEY Warning Light (Red)  
When illuminated  
l
When the push button start is pressed  
ON, it illuminates momentarily and  
then turns off.  
If any malfunction occurs in the  
l
indicating a bad valve. Leaks need to be  
addressed by more than simply refilling the  
trouble tire as leaks are dangerous - take it  
to an Authorized Mazda Dealer which has  
all the equipment to fix tires, TPMS systems  
and order the best replacement tire for your  
vehicle.  
advanced keyless system, it illuminates  
continuously.  
5-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving Your Mazda  
Warning/Indicator Lights and Beep Sounds  
l
Under the following conditions, the  
WARNING  
Do not drive the vehicle with the KEY  
warning light illuminated:  
KEY warning light (red) will flash  
continuously when the push button  
start has not been pressed off to notify  
the driver that the advanced key has  
been removed. The KEY warning light  
(red) will stop flashing when the  
advanced key is back inside the  
vehicle:  
If the KEY warning light remains  
illuminated, do not continue to drive  
using the advanced key system. Park  
the vehicle in a safe place and use  
the auxiliary key to continue driving  
the vehicle. Have the vehicle  
l
The push button start has not been  
inspected at an Authorized Mazda  
Dealer as soon as possible.  
pressed off, the driver's door is  
open, and the advanced key is  
removed from the vehicle.  
When flashing  
l
The push button start has not been  
l
pressed off and all the doors are  
closed after removing the advanced  
key from the vehicle.  
Under the following conditions, the  
KEY warning light (red) flashes to  
inform the driver that the push button  
start will not switch to ACC even if it  
is pressed from off.  
The advanced key battery is dead.  
The advanced key is not within  
operational range.  
The advanced key is placed in areas  
where it is difficult for the system to  
detect the signal (page 3-7).  
A key from another manufacturer  
NOTE  
Because the advanced key utilizes low-intensity  
radio waves, the Advanced Key Removed From  
Vehicle Warning may activate if the advanced  
key is carried together with a metal object or it  
is placed in a poor signal reception area.  
l
l
l
KEY Indicator Light (Green)  
When illuminated  
l
similar to the advanced key is in the  
operational range.  
When the brake pedal is depressed with  
an automatic transaxle or the clutch pedal  
is depressed with a manual transaxle, the  
system confirms that the correct advanced  
key is inside the vehicle, the KEY  
indicator light (green) illuminates, and the  
push button start can be pressed to ACC  
(page 3-10).  
When flashing  
When the push button start is pressed off  
from ON, the KEY indicator light (green)  
flashes for approximately 30 seconds  
indicating that the remaining battery  
power is low. Replace with a new battery  
before the advanced key becomes  
unusable.  
5-54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving Your Mazda  
Warning/Indicator Lights and Beep Sounds  
Refer to Advanced Key Maintenance on  
page 3-6.  
The light stops flashing when the ignition  
is switched ON with the correct ignition  
key.  
At this time, the immobilizer system is  
disarmed and the light illuminates for  
about 3 seconds and then turns off.  
NOTE  
The advanced key can be set so that the KEY  
indicator light (green) does not flash even if  
the battery power is low.  
Refer to Personalization Features on page  
10-8.  
If the engine does not start with the  
correct ignition key, and the security  
indicator light keeps illuminating or  
flashing, the system may have a  
malfunction. Consult an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer.  
qElectronic Steering Lock  
Warning Lightí  
qHeadlight High-Beam Indicator  
Light  
The warning light remains illuminated for  
a few seconds after the push button start is  
pressed ON.  
It flashes if the steering wheel is not  
unlocked after the push button start is  
pressed. (page 3-10)  
This light indicates one of two things:  
l
The high-beam headlights are on.  
The turn signal lever is in the flash-to-  
l
qSecurity Indicator Light  
pass position.  
This indicator light starts flashing every 2  
seconds when the ignition is switched  
from ON to ACC and the immobilizer  
system is armed.  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-55  
Driving Your Mazda  
Warning/Indicator Lights and Beep Sounds  
If the light stays on, the TCS, DSC or the  
qShift Position Indicator Light  
(Automatic Transaxle)  
brake assist system may have a  
malfunction and they may not operate  
correctly. Take your vehicle to an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
This indicates the selected shift position.  
qTCS OFF Indicator Lightí  
This indicator light stays on for a few  
seconds when the ignition is switched  
ON.  
It also illuminates when the TCS OFF  
switch is pressed and TCS is switched off.  
Refer to TCS OFF Switch on page 5-24.  
If the light remains illuminated and the  
TCS is not switched off, take your vehicle  
to an Authorized Mazda Dealer. The TCS  
may have a malfunction.  
Gear position indicator  
In manual mode, the “M” of the shift  
position indicator illuminates and the  
numeral for the selected gear displays in  
the gear position indicator.  
qTCS/DSC Indicator Light  
This indicator light stays on for a few  
seconds when the ignition is switched  
ON. If the TCS or DSC is operating, the  
indicator light flashes.  
5-56  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving Your Mazda  
Warning/Indicator Lights and Beep Sounds  
NOTE  
NOTE  
(3.7-liter engine)  
If the battery is disconnected or a fuse is  
If the battery is disconnected or a fuse is  
replaced, the TCS will be inoperable. When  
this happens, the TCS OFF indicator light  
flashes and the TCS indicator light illuminates.  
To reactivate the TCS, perform the following  
procedure with the battery connected.  
replaced, the DSC will be inoperable. In this  
case, the DSC OFF indicator light flashes and  
the TCS/DSC indicator light illuminates.  
To make the DSC operable, do the following  
procedure with the battery connected.  
1. Switch the ignition ON.  
1. Switch the ignition ON  
2. Turn the steering clockwise fully, then turn  
it counterclockwise fully.  
2. Turn the steering clockwise fully, then turn  
it counterclockwise fully.  
3. Make sure the DSC OFF indicator and the  
TCS/DSC indicator goes off.  
3. Make sure the TCS OFF indicator light and  
TCS indicator light turn off.  
If the TCS/DSC indicator light and the DSC  
OFF indicator light remain illuminated even  
after switching the ignition ON, consult an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
If the TCS indicator light and the TCS OFF  
indicator light remain illuminated even after  
switching the ignition ON, attempt the  
procedure again. If this still does not work,  
consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
qCruise Main Indicator Light  
(Amber)/Cruise Set Indicator  
Light (Green)í  
qDSC OFF Indicator Lightí  
This indicator light stays on for a few  
seconds when the ignition is switched  
ON.  
The indicator light has two colors.  
Cruise Main Indicator Light (Amber)  
It also illuminates when the DSC OFF  
switch is pressed and TCS/DSC is  
switched off (page 5-26).  
The indicator light illuminates amber  
when the ON/OFF switch is pressed and  
the cruise control system is activated.  
Cruise Set Indicator Light (Green)  
If the light stays on when the TCS/DSC is  
not switched off, take your vehicle to an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer. The dynamic  
stability control may have a malfunction.  
The indicator light illuminates green when  
a cruising speed has been set.  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-57  
Driving Your Mazda  
Warning/Indicator Lights and Beep Sounds  
qBSM OFF Indicator Lightí  
qTurn Signal/Hazard Warning  
Indicator Lights  
This indicator light illuminates for a few  
seconds when the ignition is switched  
ON.  
When operating the turn signal lights, the  
left or right turn signal indicator light  
flashes to indicate which turn signal light  
is operating (page 5-63).  
The BSM OFF indicator light illuminates  
when the BSM system is turned off by  
pressing the BSM OFF switch.  
The indicator light flashes if the BSM  
system has a malfunction. Consult an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
When operating the hazard warning  
lights, both turn signal indicator lights  
flash (page 5-70).  
NOTE  
NOTE  
If an indicator light remains illuminated (does  
not flash) or if it flashes abnormally, one of the  
turn signal bulbs may be burned out.  
If the vehicle is driven on a road with less  
traffic and few vehicles that the radar sensors  
can detect, the system may pause (The BSM  
OFF indicator light in the instrument panel  
flashes). However, it does not indicate a  
malfunction.  
qLights-On Indicator Light  
(Black-out meter)  
This indicator light illuminates when the  
exterior lights and dashboard illumination  
are on.  
5-58  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving Your Mazda  
Warning/Indicator Lights and Beep Sounds  
qIgnition Key Reminder  
Beep Sounds  
If the ignition is switched to off (LOCK)  
or ACC with the key inserted, a  
q
Air Bag/Front Seat Belt  
Pretensioner System Warning Beep  
continuous beep sound will be heard  
when the driver's door is opened.  
If a malfunction is detected in both the air  
bag/front seat belt pretensioner system  
and the warning light, a warning beep  
sound will be heard for about 1 minute.  
After that, the one-minute beep will be  
repeated every 30 minutes.  
qTire Inflation Pressure Warning  
Beep  
The warning beep sound will be heard for  
about 3 seconds when there is any  
abnormality in tire inflation pressures  
(page 5-27).  
Have your vehicle inspected at an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as  
possible.  
qAdvanced Keyless Warningí  
WARNING  
Do not drive the vehicle with the air  
bag/front seat belt pretensioner system  
warning beep sounding:  
Warning indicators for the advanced key,  
such as “the advanced key removed from  
vehicle warning”, use a beep sound and  
warning/indicator lights in the instrument  
cluster.  
Driving the vehicle with the air bag/  
front seat belt pretensioner system  
warning beep sounding is dangerous.  
In a collision, the air bags and the  
front seat belt pretensioner system  
will not deploy and this could result  
in death or serious injury.  
Contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer  
to have the vehicle inspected as soon  
as possible.  
Refer to Warning and Beep Sounds on  
page 3-19.  
qElectronic Steering Lock  
Warning Beepí  
The warning beep operates if the steering  
wheel is not unlocked after the push  
button start is pressed. (page 3-10)  
qSeat Belt Warning Beep  
If the driver's seat belt is not fastened  
when the ignition is switched ON, a beep  
sound will be heard for about 6 seconds.  
If the driver or the front passenger's seat  
belt is not fastened and the vehicle is  
driven at a speed faster than about 20  
km/h (12 mph), a beep sound will be  
heard again for a specified period of time.  
Refer to Seat Belt Warning Light/Beep on  
page 5-49.  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-59  
Driving Your Mazda  
Switches and Controls  
Type B (With AUTO position)  
Lighting Control  
qHeadlights  
Type A (Without AUTO position)  
Turn the headlight switch to turn the  
headlights, other exterior lights and  
dashboard illumination on or off.  
Switch Position  
Turn the headlight switch to turn the  
headlights, other exterior lights and  
dashboard illumination on or off.  
Headlights  
Off  
Off  
Off  
On  
On  
On  
Taillights  
Parking lights  
License lights  
Dashboard  
Auto  
Switch Position  
Headlights  
Off  
Off  
Off  
On  
On  
On  
illumination  
Taillights  
Parking lights  
License lights  
Dashboard illumination  
NOTE  
l
If the light switch is left on, the lights will  
automatically switch off approximately 30  
seconds after switching the ignition to ACC  
or off (LOCK). The time setting can be  
changed. Refer to Personalization Features  
on page 10-8.  
NOTE  
l
If the light switch is left on, the lights will  
automatically switch off approximately 30  
seconds after switching the ignition to ACC  
or off (LOCK). The time setting can be  
changed. Refer to Personalization Features  
on page 10-8.  
l
To prevent discharging the battery, do not  
leave the lights on while the engine is off  
unless safety requires them.  
l
To prevent discharging the battery, do not  
leave the lights on while the engine is off  
unless safety requires them.  
AUTO (Auto-light control)  
When the headlight is in the AUTO  
position and the ignition is switched ON,  
the light sensor senses the surrounding  
lightness or darkness and automatically  
turns on or off the headlights, other  
exterior lights and dashboard illumination  
(see chart above).  
5-60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving Your Mazda  
Switches and Controls  
NOTE  
l
CAUTION  
The light may not turn off immediately even  
if the surrounding area becomes well-lit  
because the light sensor determines that it  
is nighttime if the surrounding area is  
continuously dark for several minutes such  
as inside long tunnels, traffic jams inside  
tunnels, or in indoor parking lots.  
Ø Do not shade the light sensor by  
adhering a sticker or a label on  
the windshield. Otherwise the light  
sensor will not operate correctly.  
In this case, the light turns off if the light  
switch is turned to the OFF position.  
The timing for turning on the headlights,  
other exterior lights and dashboard  
illumination can be delayed by adjusting  
the sensitivity of the light sensor. Consult an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer regarding sensor  
adjustment.  
l
Light sensor  
l
The sensitivity of the AUTO lights may be  
changed.Refer to Personalization Features  
on page 10-8.  
Ø The light sensor also works as a  
rain sensor for the auto-wiper  
control. Keep hands and scrapers  
clear of the windshield when the  
ignition is switched ON as fingers  
could be pinched or the wipers and  
wiper blades damaged when the  
wipers activate automatically. If  
you are going to clean the  
windshield, be sure the wipers are  
turned off completely - this is  
particularly important when  
clearing ice and snow - when it is  
particularly tempting to leave the  
engine running.  
Xenon fusion headlight bulbsí  
The low-beam bulbs of the headlights  
have xenon fusion bulbs that produce a  
bright white beam over a wide area.  
WARNING  
Do not replace the xenon fusion bulbs  
yourself:  
Replacing the xenon fusion bulbs  
yourself is dangerous. Because the  
xenon fusion bulbs require high  
voltage, you could receive an electric  
shock if the bulbs are handled  
incorrectly. Consult an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer when the replacement  
is necessary.  
NOTE  
If the headlights flicker, or the brightness  
weakens, the bulb-life may be depleted and a  
replacement is necessary. Consult an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-61  
Driving Your Mazda  
Switches and Controls  
qHeadlight High-Low Beam  
qHeadlight Levelingí  
Push the lever forward for high beam.  
Pull back to original position for low  
beam.  
The number of passengers and weight of  
cargo in the luggage compartment change  
the angle of the headlights.  
The headlight leveling switch adjusts this  
angle.  
High beam  
Low beam  
qFlashing the Headlights  
To flash the headlights, pull the lever fully  
toward you. The headlight switch does  
not need to be on, and the lever will return  
to the normal position when released.  
Select the proper setting from the following chart.  
Front seat  
Rear  
seat  
Switch  
Load  
Position  
Driver Passenger  
×
×
×
×
×
―
×
―
―
×
―
―
―
×
0
0
1
2
3
×
×
×
―
―
×
×: Yes  
―: No  
q
Daytime Running Lights (Canada)  
In Canada, vehicles must be driven with  
the headlights on during daytime  
operation.  
For that reason, the daytime running lights  
automatically turn on when the ignition is  
switched ON.  
NOTE  
The Daytime Running Lights turn off when the  
parking brake is applied.  
5-62  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving Your Mazda  
Switches and Controls  
NOTE  
l
Turn and Lane-Change  
Signals  
If an indicator light stays on without  
flashing or if it flashes abnormally, one of  
the turn signal bulbs may be burned out.  
A personalized function is available to  
change the number of flashes.Refer to  
Personalization Features on page 10-8.  
A personalized function is available to  
change the turn indicator sound  
qTurn Signal  
l
l
Move the signal lever down (for a left  
turn) or up (for a right turn) to the stop  
position. The signal will self-cancel after  
the turn is completed.  
volume.Refer to Personalization Features  
on page 10-8.  
If the indicator light continues to flash  
after a turn, manually return the lever to  
its original position.  
Right turn  
Right lane  
change  
OFF  
Left lane  
change  
Left turn  
Green indicators on the dashboard show  
which signal is working.  
Lane-change signals  
Move the lever slightly toward the  
direction of the change ―until the  
indicator flashes― and hold it there. It  
will return to the off position when  
released.  
5-63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving Your Mazda  
Switches and Controls  
Fog Lightsí  
Windshield Wipers and  
Washer  
Use this switch to turn on the fog lights.  
They help you to see as well as to be seen.  
The ignition must be switched ON.  
To turn the fog lights on, rotate the fog  
WARNING  
light switch to the  
position.  
Use only windshield washer fluid or  
plain water in the reservoir:  
The headlight switch must be in the  
position to turn on the fog lights.  
Using radiator antifreeze as washer  
fluid is dangerous. If sprayed on the  
windshield, it will dirty the  
windshield, affect your visibility, and  
could result in an accident.  
Only use windshield washer fluid  
mixed with anti-freeze protection in  
freezing weather conditions:  
Using windshield washer fluid  
without anti-freeze protection in  
freezing weather conditions is  
dangerous as it could freeze on the  
windshield and block your vision  
which could cause an accident.  
In addition, make sure the  
Fog light switch  
To turn them off, rotate the fog light  
switch to the OFF position or turn the  
headlight switch to the  
position.  
or OFF  
windshield is sufficiently warmed  
using the defroster before spraying  
the washer fluid.  
NOTE  
l
The fog lights will turn off when the  
headlights are set at high beam.  
(With auto-light control)  
l
If the fog light switch is in the ON position  
and the headlight switch is in the AUTO  
position, the fog lights will be turned on  
when the headlights, the exterior lights and  
dashboard illumination are automatically  
turned on.  
5-64  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving Your Mazda  
Switches and Controls  
NOTE  
Variable-speed intermittent wipers  
Because heavy ice and snow can jam the wiper  
blades, the wiper motor is protected from  
motor breakdown, overheating and possible  
fire by a circuit breaker. This mechanism will  
automatically stop operation of the blades, but  
only for about 5 minutes.  
Set the lever to INT and choose the  
interval timing by rotating the ring.  
If this happens, turn off the wiper switch and  
park off the right-of-way, and remove the snow  
and ice.  
After 5 minutes, turn on the switch and the  
blades should operate normally. If they do not  
resume functioning, consult an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer as soon as possible. Drive to  
the side of the road and park off the right-of-  
way. Wait until the weather clears before trying  
to drive with the wipers inoperative.  
INT ring  
Type B (With AUTO position)  
qWindshield Wipers  
Type A (With INT position)  
Turn the wipers on by pulling the lever  
down.  
AUTO ― Auto control  
LO ― Low speed  
HI ― High speed  
Turn the wipers on by pulling the lever  
down.  
INT ― Intermittent  
LO ― Low speed  
HI ― High speed  
For a single wiping cycle, press the lever  
up to MIST.  
MIST ― Mist  
For a single wiping cycle, press the lever  
up to MIST.  
MIST ― Mist  
5-65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving Your Mazda  
Switches and Controls  
AUTO (Auto-wiper control)  
When the wiper lever is in the AUTO  
position, the rain sensor senses the  
amount of rainfall on the windshield and  
turns the wiper on or off automatically  
(off―intermittent―low speed―high  
speed).  
CAUTION  
Ø Do not shade the rain sensor by  
adhering a sticker or a label on  
the windshield. Otherwise the rain  
sensor will not operate correctly.  
The sensitivity of the rain sensor can be  
adjusted by turning the switch on the  
wiper lever.  
Rain sensor  
From the center position (normal), turn  
the switch towards (+) for higher  
sensitivity (faster response) or turn the  
_
switch towards ( ) for less sensitivity  
(slower response).  
Higher sensitivity  
Switch  
Center  
position  
Less sensitivity  
5-66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving Your Mazda  
Switches and Controls  
Ø When the wiper lever is in the  
AUTO position and the ignition is  
switched ON, the wipers may  
move automatically in the  
following cases:  
NOTE  
l
Switching the auto-wiper lever from the  
OFF to the AUTO position while driving at  
a vehicle speed of 4 km/h (2 mph) or higher  
(or after driving the vehicle) activates the  
windshield wipers once, after which they  
operate according to the rainfall amount.  
The auto-wiper control may not operate  
when the rain sensor temperature is about  
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
If the windshield above the rain  
sensor is touched.  
If the windshield above the rain  
sensor is wiped with a cloth.  
If the windshield is struck with  
a hand or other object.  
If the rain sensor is struck with  
a hand or other object from  
inside the vehicle.  
l
l
_
10 °C (14 °F) or lower, or about 85 °C  
(185 °F) or higher.  
If the windshield is coated with water  
repellent, the rain sensor may not be able to  
sense the amount of rainfall correctly and  
auto-wiper control may not operate  
properly.  
Keep hands and scrapers clear of  
the windshield when the ignition is  
switched ON as fingers could be  
pinched or the wipers and wiper  
blades damaged when they  
activate automatically.  
If you are going to clean the  
windshield, be sure the wipers are  
turned off completely - this is  
particularly important when  
clearing ice and snow - when it is  
particularly tempting to leave the  
engine running.  
l
If dirt or foreign matter (e.g. ice or matter  
containing salt water) adheres to the  
windshield above the rain sensor or if the  
windshield is iced, it could cause the wipers  
to move automatically. However, if the  
wipers cannot remove this ice, dirt or  
foreign matter, the auto-wiper control will  
stop operation. In this case, pull the wiper  
lever to the low speed or high speed  
position for manual operation, or remove  
the ice, dirt or foreign matter by hand to  
restore the auto-wiper operation.  
5-67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving Your Mazda  
Switches and Controls  
qWindshield Washer  
Rear Window Defroster  
Pull the lever toward you and hold it to  
spray washer fluid.  
The rear window defroster clears frost,  
fog, and thin ice from the rear window.  
The ignition must be switched ON.  
OFF  
Press the switch to turn on the rear  
window defroster. The rear window  
defroster operates for about 15 minutes  
and turns off automatically.  
Washer  
The indicator light illuminates during  
operation.  
To turn off the rear window defroster  
before the 15 minutes has elapsed, press  
the switch again.  
NOTE  
With the wiper lever in the OFF or INT (Type  
A)/AUTO (Type B) position, the wipers will  
operate continuously until the lever is  
released.  
Fully Automatic Type Air-Conditioning  
Indicator light  
If the washer does not work, inspect the  
fluid level (page 8-27). If it's normal,  
consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
5-68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving Your Mazda  
Switches and Controls  
Manual Type Air-Conditioning  
Horn  
Indicator light  
To sound the horn, press the  
the steering wheel.  
mark on  
CAUTION  
Do not use sharp instruments or  
window cleaners with abrasives to  
clean the inside of the rear window  
surface. They may damage the  
defroster grid inside the window.  
NOTE  
This defroster is not designed for melting snow.  
If there is an accumulation of snow on the rear  
window, remove it before using the defroster.  
qMirror Defrosterí  
To turn on the mirror defrosters, switch  
the ignition ON and press the rear window  
defroster switch (page 5-68).  
NOTE  
For vehicles equipped with mirror de-fogging  
equipment,  
mirror.  
is indicated on each door  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-69  
Driving Your Mazda  
Switches and Controls  
Hazard Warning Flasher  
HomeLink Wireless  
Control Systemí  
The hazard warning lights should always  
be used when you stop on or near a  
roadway in an emergency.  
NOTE  
HomeLink and HomeLink house are registered  
trademarks of Johnson Controls.  
The hazard warning lights warn other  
drivers that your vehicle is a traffic hazard  
and that they must take extreme caution  
when near it.  
The HomeLink system replaces up to 3  
hand-held transmitters with a single built-  
in component in the auto-dimming mirror.  
Pressing the HomeLink button on the  
auto-dimming mirror activates garage  
doors, gates and other devices  
surrounding your home.  
Indicator light  
Depress the hazard warning flasher and all  
the turn signals will flash.  
HomeLink button  
NOTE  
l
The turn signals do not work when the  
hazard warning lights are on.  
l
Check local regulations about the use of  
hazard warning lights while the vehicle is  
being towed to verify that it is not in  
violation of the law.  
5-70  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving Your Mazda  
Switches and Controls  
NOTE  
FCC ID: NZLOBIHL3  
WARNING  
Do not use the HomeLink system with  
any garage door opener that lacks the  
safety stop and reverse feature:  
Using the HomeLink system with any  
garage door opener that lacks the  
safety stop and reverse feature as  
required by federal safety standards  
is dangerous. (This includes garage  
doors manufactured before April 1,  
1982.)  
CANADA:4112A-OBIHL3  
This device complies with FCC rules part 15.  
Operation is subject to the following  
conditions:  
1- This device may not cause any harmful  
interference and  
2- This device must accept any interference  
that may be received including interference  
that may cause undesired operation.  
NOTE  
Using these garage door openers can  
increase the risk of serious injury or  
death. For further information,  
contact HomeLink at 1-800-355-3515  
or www.homelink.com or your  
Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
The programming will not be erased even if  
the battery is disconnected.  
qPre-programming the HomeLink  
System  
Always check the areas surrounding  
garage doors and gates for people or  
obstructions before programming or  
during operation of the HomeLink  
system:  
NOTE  
It is recommended that a new battery be  
placed in the hand-held transmitter of the  
device being programmed to HomeLink for  
quicker training and accurate transmission of  
the radio-frequency signal.  
Programming or operating the  
HomeLink system without verifying  
the safety of areas surrounding  
garage doors and gates is dangerous  
and could result in an unexpected  
accident and serious injury if  
someone were to be hit.  
l
Verify that there is a remote control  
transmitter available for the device you  
would like to program.  
Disconnect the power to the device.  
l
q
Programming the HomeLink System  
CAUTION  
HomeLink has been tested and  
complies with FCC and Industry  
Canada rules. Changes or  
modifications not expressly approved  
by the party responsible for  
compliance could void the user's  
authority to operate the device.  
CAUTION  
When programming a garage door  
opener or a gate, disconnect the  
power to these devices before  
performing programming, as  
continuous operation of the devices  
could damage the motor.  
5-71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving Your Mazda  
Switches and Controls  
The HomeLink system provides 3 buttons  
which can be individually selected and  
programmed using the transmitters for  
current, on-market devices as follows:  
5. Press and hold the just-trained  
HomeLink button and observe the  
indicator light.  
If the indicator light stays on constantly,  
programming is complete and your  
device should activate when the  
1. Press and hold the two outer  
HomeLink buttons (buttons one and  
three) ― releasing only when the  
indicator light begins to flash (after 20  
seconds). Do not hold the buttons for  
longer than 30 seconds and do not  
repeat step 1 to program a second and/  
or third hand-held transmitter to the  
remaining two HomeLink buttons.  
HomeLink button is pressed and released.  
NOTE  
To program the remaining two HomeLink  
buttons, begin with “Programming” ― step 2.  
Do not repeat step 1.  
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for  
two seconds and then turns to a  
constant light, continue with  
“Programming” steps 6―8 to complete  
the programming of a rolling code  
equipped device (most commonly a  
garage door opener).  
2. Position the end of your hand-held  
transmitter 2.5―7.5 cm (1―3 inches)  
away from the HomeLink button you  
wish to program while keeping the  
indicator light in view.  
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the  
chosen HomeLink and hand-held  
transmitter buttons. Do not release the  
buttons until step 4 has been  
completed.  
6. At the garage door opener receiver  
(motor-head unit) in the garage, locate  
the “learn” or “smart” button. This can  
usually be found where the hanging  
antenna wire is attached to the motor-  
head unit.  
NOTE  
Some gate operators and garage door openers  
may require you to replace this Programming  
Step 3 with procedures noted in the “Gate  
Operator/Canadian Programming” section.  
7. Firmly press and release the “learn” or  
“smart” button. (The name and color of  
the button may vary by manufacturer.)  
NOTE  
4. After the HomeLink indicator light  
changes from a slow to a rapidly  
blinking light, release both the  
HomeLink and hand-held transmitter  
buttons.  
There are 30 seconds in which to initiate step  
8.  
8. Return to the vehicle and firmly press,  
hold for two seconds and release the  
programmed HomeLink button. Repeat  
the “press/hold/release” sequence a  
second time, and, depending on the  
brand of the garage door opener (or  
other rolling code equipped device),  
repeat this sequence a third time to  
complete the programming process.  
NOTE  
If the HomeLink indicator light does not  
change to a rapidly blinking light, contact  
HomeLink at www.homelink.com or call 1-  
800-355-3515 for assistance.  
5-72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving Your Mazda  
Switches and Controls  
HomeLink should now activate your  
rolling code equipped device.  
Continue to press and hold the HomeLink  
button while you press and release ―  
every two seconds (“cycle”) your hand-  
held transmitter until the frequency signal  
has successfully been accepted by  
HomeLink. (The indicator light will flash  
slowly and then rapidly.)  
NOTE  
To program the remaining two HomeLink  
buttons, begin with “Programming” ― step 2.  
Do not repeat step 1.  
Proceed with “Programming” step 4 to  
complete.  
For questions or comments, please contact  
HomeLink at www.homelink.com or 1-  
800-355-3515.  
qOperating the HomeLink System  
qGate operator/Canadian  
Programming  
Press the programmed HomeLink button  
to operate a programmed device. The  
code will continue being transmitted for a  
maximum of 20 seconds.  
Canadian radio-frequency laws require  
transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)  
after several seconds of transmission ―  
which may not be long enough for  
HomeLink to pick up the signal during  
programming. Similar to this Canadian  
law, some U.S. gate operators are  
designed to “time-out” in the same  
manner.  
qReprogramming the HomeLink  
system  
To program a device to HomeLink using a  
HomeLink button previously trained,  
follow these steps:  
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink  
button. DO NOT release the button.  
If you live in Canada or you are having  
difficulties programming a gate operator  
by using the “Programming” procedures  
(regardless of where you live), replace  
“Programming HomeLink” step 3 with  
the following:  
2. The indicator light will begin to flash  
after 20 seconds. Without releasing the  
HomeLink button, proceed with  
“Programming” - step 2.  
NOTE  
qErasing Programmed HomeLink  
Buttons  
If programming a garage door opener or gate  
operator, it is advised to unplug the device  
during the “cycling” process to prevent  
possible overheating.  
To erase the existing programming from  
all three operating channels, press and  
hold the two outside buttons (  
,
)
on the auto-dimming mirror until the  
HomeLink indicator light begins to flash  
after approximately 20 seconds.  
Verify that the programming has been  
erased when you resell the vehicle.  
5-73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
6
Use of various features for drive comfort, including air-conditioning and audio  
system.  
Climate Control System ............................................................... 6-2  
Operating Tips ........................................................................... 6-2  
Vent Operation .......................................................................... 6-3  
Types of the Climate Control System ....................................... 6-5  
Manual Type ............................................................................. 6-6  
Fully Automatic Type ............................................................. 6-11  
Audio System ............................................................................... 6-16  
Antenna ................................................................................... 6-16  
Operating Tips for Audio System ........................................... 6-16  
Audio Set ................................................................................ 6-27  
Audio Control Switch Operationí ......................................... 6-56  
AUX Mode (Auxiliary input)í ............................................... 6-59  
Safety Certification ................................................................. 6-62  
Bluetooth Audio .......................................................................... 6-63  
Bluetooth Audioí ................................................................... 6-63  
Bluetooth Hands-Free................................................................. 6-72  
Bluetooth Hands-Freeí .......................................................... 6-72  
Basic Bluetooth Hands-Free Operation................................... 6-76  
Convenient Use of the Hands-Free System ............................. 6-79  
Hands-Free Setting .................................................................. 6-85  
When Bluetooth Hands-Free Cannot be Used ........................ 6-91  
Safety Certification ................................................................. 6-92  
Mazda Bluetooth Hands-Free Customer Service .................... 6-92  
Interior Equipment ..................................................................... 6-93  
Sunvisors ................................................................................. 6-93  
Interior Lights ......................................................................... 6-94  
Information Display ................................................................ 6-96  
Cup Holder ............................................................................ 6-100  
Bottle Holder ......................................................................... 6-101  
Storage Compartments .......................................................... 6-102  
Accessory Sockets ................................................................ 6-105  
íSome models.  
6-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Climate Control System  
qParking in Direct Sunlight  
Operating Tips  
If the vehicle has been parked in direct  
sunlight during hot weather, open the  
windows to let warm air escape, then run  
the climate control system.  
qOperating the Climate Control  
System  
Operate the climate control system with  
the engine running.  
qNot Using for a Long Period  
NOTE  
Run the air conditioner about 10 minutes  
at least once a month to keep internal  
parts lubricated.  
To prevent the battery from being discharged,  
do not leave the fan control dial on for a long  
period of time with the ignition in ON when the  
engine is not running.  
qCheck the Refrigerant before the  
Weather Gets Hot  
qClearing the Air Inlet  
Have the air conditioner checked before  
the weather gets hot. Lack of refrigerant  
may make the air conditioner less  
efficient. Consult an Authorized Mazda  
Dealer for refrigerant inspection.  
Clear all obstructions such as leaves,  
snow and ice from the hood and the air  
inlet in the cowl grille to improve the  
system efficiency.  
qFoggy Windows  
The air conditioner is filled with  
HFC134a (R134a), a refrigerant that will  
not damage the ozone layer.  
If the air conditioner is low on refrigerant  
or has a malfunction, consult an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
The windows may fog up easily in humid  
weather. Use the climate control system to  
defog the windows.  
To help defog the windows, operate the  
air conditioner to dehumidify the air.  
q
Replacement of the Cabin Air Filter  
NOTE  
The air conditioner may be used along with the  
heater to dehumidify the air.  
If your vehicle is equipped with an air  
filter for the air conditioner, it is necessary  
to change the filter periodically as  
indicated in scheduled maintenance (page  
8-3). Consult an Authorized Mazda  
Dealer for replacement of the cabin air  
filter.  
qOutside/Recirculated Air Position  
Use the outside air position in normal  
conditions. The recirculated air position  
should be used only when driving on  
dusty roads or for quick cooling of the  
interior.  
6-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Climate Control System  
Vent Operation  
Center Vents  
qAdjusting the Vents  
Directing airflow  
Side Vents  
To adjust the direction of airflow, move  
the adjustment knob.  
Dial  
To adjust the direction of airflow, open the  
vents and rotate them left and right.  
Open  
Close  
Knob  
Push  
NOTE  
When using the air conditioner under humid  
ambient temperature conditions, the system  
may blow condensed air (fog) from the vents.  
This is not a sign of trouble but a result of  
humid air being suddenly cooled.  
6-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Climate Control System  
qSelecting the Airflow Mode  
Dashboard Vents  
Defroster and Floor Vents  
Defroster Vents  
Dashboard and Floor Vents  
Floor Vents  
6-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Climate Control System  
Types of the Climate Control System  
Manual type and fully automatic type climate control systems are explained separately.  
Check your vehicle's climate control type and read the appropriate pages.  
Manual Type ............................................................................................................ page 6-6  
Fully Automatic Type ............................................................................................. page 6-11  
6-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Climate Control System  
Manual Type  
A/C switch  
Air intake selector  
Temperature control dial  
Fan control dial  
Mode selector dial  
MAX-A/C position  
qControl Switches  
For quick cabin cooling, rotate the  
temperature control dial counterclockwise  
to the MAX-A/C position. The A/C  
system automatically turns on and the air  
intake mode switches to the recirculation  
position automatically.  
Temperature control dial  
Fan control dial  
Cold  
Hot  
This dial controls temperature. Turn it  
clockwise for hot and counterclockwise  
for cold.  
Slow  
Fast  
6-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Climate Control System  
This dial allows variable fan speeds.  
0―Fan off  
Press the switch once again to turn the air  
conditioner off.  
1―Low speed  
NOTE  
2―Medium low speed  
3―Medium high speed  
4―High speed  
l
The air conditioner may not function when  
the outside temperature approaches 0 °C  
(32 °F).  
l
When the mode is set to  
or  
with the  
Mode selector dial  
fan control dial in a position other than 0  
and the temperature control dial in the  
maximum cold position, the air intake  
selector switches to the recirculated air  
mode and the A/C turns on automatically.  
If A/C is not desired, press the A/C switch  
to turn it off.  
If recirculated air mode is not desired,  
press the air intake selector to switch to  
outside air mode.  
Turn the mode selector dial to select  
airflow mode (page 6-4).  
Air intake selector  
NOTE  
l
The mode selector dial can be set at the  
intermediate positions ( ) between each  
mode. Set the dial to a intermediate  
position if you want to slightly adjust the  
airflow amount.  
l
For example, when the mode selector dial is  
at the  
position between the  
and  
positions, airflow from the floor vent is less  
than that of the  
position.  
This switch controls the source of air  
entering the vehicle.  
í
A/C switch  
Press the  
switch to alternate  
between the outside air and recirculated  
air modes.  
It is recommended that under normal  
conditions the switch be kept in the  
outside air mode.  
Outside air mode (indicator light  
turned off)  
Press the A/C switch to turn the air  
conditioner on. The indicator light on the  
switch will illuminate when the fan  
control dial is set at position 1, 2, 3, or 4.  
Outside air is taken into the vehicle. Use  
this mode for normal ventilation and  
heating.  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-7  
Interior Comfort  
Climate Control System  
Recirculated air mode (indicator light  
illuminated)  
NOTE  
l
If the windshield fogs up easily, set the  
mode selector dial to the  
If cooler air is desired at face level, set the  
mode selector dial at the  
adjust the temperature control dial to  
maintain maximum comfort.  
The air to the floor is warmer than air to  
the face (except when the temperature  
control dial is set at the extreme hot or cold  
position).  
position.  
Outside air is shut off. Air within the  
vehicle is recirculated.  
l
l
l
position and  
This mode can be used when driving on a  
dusty road or in similar conditions. It also  
helps to provide quicker cooling of the  
interior.  
WARNING  
Do not use the recirculated air mode in  
cold or rainy weather:  
In the  
or  
position, the air  
conditioner is automatically turned on  
(however, the indicator light does not  
illuminate) and the outside air mode is  
automatically selected to defrost the  
windshield.  
Using the recirculated air mode in  
cold or rainy weather is dangerous as  
it will cause the windows to fog up.  
Your vision will be hampered, which  
could lead to a serious accident.  
In the  
or  
position, the outside air  
mode cannot be changed to the recirculated  
air mode.  
qHeating  
qCooling (With Air Conditioner)í  
1. Set the mode selector dial to the  
position.  
1. Set the mode selector dial to the  
position.  
2. Set the temperature control dial to the  
hot position.  
2. Set the temperature control dial to the  
cold position.  
3. Set the fan control dial to the desired  
speed.  
3. Set the fan control dial to the desired  
speed.  
4. Turn on the air conditioner by pressing  
the A/C switch.  
5. Adjust the fan control dial and  
temperature control dial to maintain  
maximum comfort.  
6-8  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Climate Control System  
q
Windshield Defrosting and Defogging  
CAUTION  
When using the air conditioner while  
driving up long hills or in heavy  
traffic, closely monitor the  
temperature gauge (page 5-40).  
The air conditioner may cause engine  
overheating. If the gauge indicates  
overheating, turn the air conditioner  
off (page 7-11).  
1. Set the mode selector dial to the  
position.  
2. Set the temperature control dial to the  
desired position.  
3. Set the fan control dial to the desired  
speed.  
WARNING  
NOTE  
Do not defog the windshield using the  
position with the temperature  
control set to the cold position:  
l
When maximum cooling is desired, set the  
temperature control dial to the extreme cold  
position and set the air intake selector to  
the recirculated air mode, then set the fan  
control dial to position 4.  
Using the  
position with the  
temperature control set to the cold  
position is dangerous as it will cause  
the outside of the windshield to fog  
up. Your vision will be hampered,  
which could lead to a serious  
l
l
If warmer air is desired at floor level, set  
the mode selector dial at the  
position  
and adjust the temperature control dial to  
maintain maximum comfort.  
The air to the floor is warmer than air to  
the face (except when the temperature  
control dial is set at the extreme hot or cold  
position).  
accident. Set the temperature control  
to the hot or warm position when  
using the  
position.  
qVentilation  
1. Set the mode selector dial to the  
position.  
2. Set the air intake selector to the outside  
air mode.  
3. Set the temperature control dial to the  
desired position.  
4. Set the fan control dial to the desired  
speed.  
6-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Climate Control System  
NOTE  
NOTE  
l
For quick cabin cooling, rotate the  
One of the functions of the air conditioner is  
dehumidifying the air and, to use this function,  
the temperature does not have to be set to cold.  
Therefore, set the temperature control dial to  
the desired position (hot or cold) and turn on  
the air conditioner when you want to  
dehumidify the cabin air.  
temperature control dial counterclockwise  
to the MAX-A/C position. The A/C system  
automatically turns on and the air intake  
mode switches to the recirculation position  
automatically.  
l
For maximum defrosting, set the  
temperature control dial to the extreme hot  
position and the fan control dial to position  
4.  
l
If warm air is desired at the floor, set the  
mode selector dial to the  
position.  
l
In the  
, or  
position, the air  
conditioner is automatically turned on  
(however, the indicator light does not  
illuminate) and the outside air mode is  
automatically selected to defrost the  
windshield.  
In the  
or  
position, the outside air  
mode cannot be changed to the recirculated  
air mode.  
qDehumidifying (With Air  
Conditioner)í  
Operate the air conditioner in cool or cold  
weather to help defog the windshield and  
side windows.  
1. Set the mode selector dial to the  
desired position.  
2. Set the air intake selector to the outside  
air mode.  
3. Set the temperature control dial to the  
desired position.  
4. Set the fan control dial to the desired  
speed.  
5. Turn on the air conditioner by pressing  
the A/C switch.  
6-10  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Climate Control System  
Fully Automatic Type  
Climate control information is displayed on the information display.  
Information display  
AUTO  
A/C  
Air intake display  
Fan speed display  
Mode selector display  
Temperature setting display (driver)  
Temperature setting display (passenger)  
Mode selector switch  
A/C switch  
Windshield defroster switch  
Air intake selector  
AUTO switch  
OFF switch  
DUAL switch  
Fan control dial  
Passenger temperature control dial  
Driver temperature control dial  
6-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Climate Control System  
Temperature control dial  
qControl Switches  
AUTO switch  
Cold  
Hot  
This dial controls temperature. Turn it  
clockwise for hot and counterclockwise  
for cold.  
By pressing the AUTO switch the  
following functions will be automatically  
controlled in accordance with the selected  
set temperature:  
l
When the DUAL switch is off:  
Turn the driver temperature control dial  
to control the temperature.  
When the DUAL switch is on:  
l
Airflow temperature  
Amount of airflow  
Selection of airflow mode  
Outside/Recirculated air selection  
l
l
Turn the driver or front passenger  
temperature control dial to control the  
temperature.  
l
l
l
Air conditioner operation  
NOTE  
NOTE  
AUTO switch indicator light  
The system changes to the individual operation  
mode (DUAL switch indicator light  
illuminated) by turning the front passenger  
temperature control dial even when the DUAL  
switch is off, which allows individual control  
of the set temperature for the driver and front  
passenger.  
l
When on, it indicates AUTO operation, and  
the system will function automatically.  
l
When off, it indicates the operation of other  
switches such as the mode selector switch,  
fan control dial and windshield defroster  
switch. Other functions will continue to  
operate automatically.  
Fan control dial  
OFF switch  
Slow  
Fast  
The fan has seven speeds. The selected  
speed will be displayed.  
Pressing the OFF switch shuts off the  
climate control system.  
6-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Climate Control System  
Mode selector switch  
NOTE  
l
The air conditioning operates when the A/C  
switch is pressed even if the fan is off.  
The air conditioner may not function when  
the outside temperature approaches 0 °C  
(32 °F). (Indicator light remains on even  
when system is off.)  
l
Air intake selector  
The desired airflow mode can be selected  
(page 6-4).  
NOTE  
l
With the airflow mode set to the  
position and the temperature control dial  
set at a medium temperature, heated air is  
directed to the feet and a comparably lower  
air temperature will flow through the  
Outside or recirculated air positions can  
be selected. Press the switch to select  
outside/recirculated air positions.  
central, left and right vents.  
l
To set the air vent to  
, press the  
windshield defroster switch.  
Recirculated air position (  
)
l
In the  
position, the air conditioner is  
Use this position when going through  
tunnels, driving in congested traffic (high  
engine exhaust areas) or when quick  
cooling is desired.  
automatically turned on and the outside air  
mode is automatically selected to defrost  
the windshield. In the  
position, the  
outside air mode cannot be changed to the  
recirculated air mode.  
Outside air position (  
)
Use this position for normal conditions  
and defogging.  
A/C switch  
WARNING  
Do not use the  
rainy weather:  
Using the  
position in cold or  
position in cold or  
rainy weather is dangerous as it will  
cause the windows to fog up. Your  
vision will be hampered, which could  
lead to a serious accident.  
Pressing the A/C switch while the AUTO  
switch is turned on will turn off the air  
conditioning (cooling/dehumidifying  
functions). The air conditioning can be  
turned on and off by pressing the A/C  
switch while the fan control dial is on.  
6-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Climate Control System  
DUAL switch  
Press the switch to defrost the windshield  
and front door windows.  
NOTE  
In the  
position, the air conditioner is  
automatically turned on and the outside air  
mode is automatically selected to defrost the  
windshield. In the  
position, the outside air  
mode cannot be changed to the recirculated  
air mode.  
Use the DUAL switch to change the mode  
between the individual operation (driver  
and passenger) and interconnection  
modes.  
qOperation of Automatic Air  
Conditioning  
1. Press the AUTO switch. Selection of  
the airflow mode, air intake selector  
and amount of airflow will be  
automatically controlled.  
Individual operation mode (indicator  
light illuminated)  
The set temperature can be controlled  
individually for the driver and front  
passenger.  
Interconnection mode (indicator light  
turned off)  
The set temperature for the driver and  
front passenger is controlled  
simultaneously.  
NOTE  
2. Use the temperature control dial to  
select a desired temperature.  
Press the DUAL switch or turn the  
front passenger temperature control  
dial to control the set temperature  
individually for the driver and front  
passenger.  
The system changes to the interconnection  
mode automatically if the windshield defroster  
switch is pressed. The system will not change  
to the individual operation mode by pressing  
the DUAL switch or turning the front  
passenger temperature control dial.  
Windshield defroster switch  
To turn off the system, press the OFF  
switch.  
6-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Climate Control System  
NOTE  
NOTE  
l
Setting the temperature to the maximum  
high or low will not provide the desired  
temperature at a faster rate.  
Use the temperature control dial to increase  
the air flow temperature and defog the  
windshield more quickly.  
l
When selecting heat, the system will restrict  
airflow until it has warmed to prevent cold  
air from blowing out of the vents.  
qSunlight/Temperature Sensor  
The fully automatic air conditioner  
function measures inside and outside  
temperatures, and sunlight. It then sets  
temperatures inside the passenger  
compartment accordingly.  
q
Windshield Defrosting and Defogging  
CAUTION  
Do not obstruct either sensor,  
otherwise the automatic air  
conditioner will not operate properly.  
Press the windshield defroster switch.  
In this position, the outside air position is  
automatically selected, and the air  
conditioner automatically turns on. The  
air conditioner will directly dehumidify  
the air to the front windshield and side  
windows (page 6-4). Airflow amount will  
be increased.  
Sunlight sensor  
WARNING  
Set the temperature control to the hot  
or warm position when defogging (  
position):  
Using the  
position with the  
Interior temperature sensor  
temperature control set to the cold  
position is dangerous as it will cause  
the outside of the windshield to fog  
up. Your vision will be hampered,  
which could lead to a serious  
accident.  
6-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
Antenna  
Operating Tips for Audio  
System  
qAM/FM Radio Antenna  
The rear window antenna receives both  
AM and FM signals.  
WARNING  
Do not adjust the audio control  
switches while driving the vehicle:  
Adjusting the audio while driving the  
vehicle is dangerous as it could  
CAUTION  
When washing the inside rear  
window, use a soft cloth dampened  
in lukewarm water, gently wiping the  
antenna lines.  
Use of glass cleaning products could  
damage the antenna.  
distract your attention from the  
vehicle operation which could lead to  
a serious accident. Always adjust the  
audio while the vehicle is stopped.  
Even if the audio control switches are  
equipped on the steering wheel, learn  
to use the switches without looking  
down at them so that you can keep  
your maximum attention on the road  
while driving the vehicle.  
qSatellite Radio Antennaí  
The satellite radio antenna receives  
SIRIUS signals.  
Satellite radio antenna  
CAUTION  
For the purposes of safe driving,  
adjust the audio volume to a level  
that allows you to hear sounds  
outside of the vehicle including car  
horns and particularly emergency  
vehicle sirens.  
NOTE  
l
To prevent the battery from being  
discharged, do not leave the audio system  
on for a long period of time when the  
engine is not running.  
l
If a cellular phone or CB radio is used in  
or near the vehicle, it could cause noise to  
occur from the audio system, however, this  
does not indicate that the system has been  
damaged.  
6-16  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
Signals from an FM transmitter are similar  
to beams of light because they do not  
bend around corners, but they do reflect.  
Unlike AM signals, FM signals cannot  
travel beyond the horizon. Therefore, FM  
stations cannot be received at the great  
distances possible with AM reception.  
qRadio Reception  
AM characteristics  
AM signals bend around such things as  
buildings or mountains and bounce off the  
ionosphere. Therefore, they can reach  
longer distances than FM signals. Because  
of this, two stations may sometimes be  
picked up on the same frequency at the  
same time.  
Ionosphere  
FM wave  
AM wave  
Ionosphere  
FM wave  
100—200 km (60—120 miles)  
Atmospheric conditions can also affect  
FM reception. High humidity will cause  
poor reception. However, cloudy days  
may provide better reception than clear  
days.  
Station 1  
Station 2  
FM characteristics  
An FM broadcast range is usually about  
40―50 km (25―30 miles) from the  
source. Because of extra coding needed to  
break the sound into two channels, stereo  
FM has even less range than monaural  
(non-stereo) FM.  
Multipath noise  
Since FM signals can be reflected by  
obstructions, it is possible to receive both  
the direct signal and the reflected signal at  
the same time. This causes a slight delay  
in reception and may be heard as a broken  
sound or a distortion. This problem may  
also be encountered when in close  
FM Station  
proximity to the transmitter.  
40—50km  
(25—30 miles)  
Reflected wave  
Direct  
6-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
Flutter/Skip noise  
Strong signal noise  
Signals from an FM transmitter move in  
straight lines and become weak in valleys  
between tall buildings, mountains, and  
other obstacles. When a vehicle passes  
through such an area, the reception  
conditions may change suddenly, resulting  
in annoying noise.  
This occurs very close to a transmitter  
tower. The broadcast signals are  
extremely strong, so the result is noise and  
sound breakup at the radio receiver.  
Station drift noise  
When a vehicle reaches the area of two  
strong stations broadcasting at similar  
frequencies, the original station may be  
temporarily lost and the second station  
picked up. At this time there will be some  
noise from this disturbance.  
Weak signal noise  
In suburban areas, broadcast signals  
become weak because of distance from  
the transmitter. Reception in such fringe  
areas is characterized by sound breakup.  
Station 2  
Station 1  
88.1 MHz  
88.3 MHz  
6-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
l
The CD revolves at high speed within  
the unit. Defective (cracked or badly  
bent) CDs should never be used.  
qOperating Tips for CD Player/In-  
Dash CD Changer  
Condensation phenomenon  
Immediately after turning on the heater  
when the vehicle is cold, the CD or  
optical components (prism and lens) in the  
CD player/In-dash CD changer may  
become clouded with condensation. At  
this time, the CD will eject immediately  
when placed in the unit. A clouded CD  
can be corrected simply by wiping it with  
a soft cloth. Clouded optical components  
will clear naturally in about an hour. Wait  
for normal operation to return before  
attempting to use the unit.  
l
Do not use non-conventional discs  
such as heart-shaped, octagonal discs,  
etc. The disc may not eject resulting in  
a malfunction.  
Handling the CD player/In-dash CD  
changer  
The following precautions should be  
observed.  
l
Do not spill any liquid on the audio  
system.  
l
If the memory portion of the CD is  
transparent or translucent, do not use  
the disc.  
l
Do not insert any objects, other than  
CDs, into the slot.  
Transparent  
6-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
l
l
A new CD may have rough edges on  
Use discs that have been legitimately  
produced. If illegally-copied discs such  
as pirated discs are used, the system  
may not operate properly.  
its inner and outer perimeters. If a disc  
with rough edges is used, proper  
setting will not be possible and the CD  
player/In-dash CD changer will not  
play the CD. In addition, the disc may  
not eject resulting in a malfunction.  
Remove the rough edges in advance by  
using a ball-point pen or pencil as  
shown below. To remove the rough  
edges, rub the side of the pen or pencil  
against the inner and outer perimeter of  
the CD.  
l
Be sure never to touch the signal  
surface when handling the CDs. Pick  
up a CD by grasping the outer edge or  
the edge of the hole and the outer edge.  
l
When driving over uneven surfaces,  
the sound may jump.  
l
l
Do not stick paper or tape on the CD.  
Avoid scratching the reverse side (the  
side without a label). The disc may not  
eject resulting in a malfunction.  
Dust, finger smudges, and dirt can  
decrease the amount of light reflected  
from the signal surface, thus affecting  
sound quality. If the CD should  
l
The CD player/In-dash CD changer has  
been designed to play CDs bearing the  
identification logo as shown. No other  
discs can be played.  
become soiled, gently wipe it with a  
soft cloth from the center of the CD to  
the edge.  
Do not use record sprays, antistatic  
agents, or household spray cleaners.  
Volatile chemicals such as benzine and  
thinner can also damage the surface of  
the CD and must not be used. Anything  
that can damage, warp, or fog plastic  
should never be used to clean CDs.  
l
6-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
l
l
l
Insert discs one by one. If two discs are  
inserted at the same time, the system  
may not operate properly.  
CD TEXT textual information cannot  
be displayed by audio units other than  
the CD player/In-dash CD changer.  
(Only playback is possible.)  
The following player can play MP3/  
WMA files recorded in CD-ROM, CD-  
R, and CD-RW.  
Storing CDs in the vehicle exposed to  
direct sunlight or high temperature may  
damage the CD-R/CD-RWs, and make  
them unplayable.  
CD-R/CD-RW exceeding 700 MB  
cannot be played.  
This unit may not be able to play  
certain discs made using a computer  
due to the application (writing  
software) setting used. (For details,  
consult the store where the application  
was purchased.)  
l
l
l
· CD player  
· In-dash CD changer  
l
l
l
l
The CD player/In-dash CD changer  
ejects the CD if the CD is inserted  
upside down. Also dirty and/or  
defective CDs may be ejected.  
An 8 cm (3 in) CD can be played in the  
CD player.  
When playing an 8 cm (3 in) CD with  
the CD player, use a CD adapter. If an  
8 cm (3 in) CD adapter is not used, the  
CD player may be damaged. Always  
use a CD adapter.  
The In-dash CD changer is specially  
made for 12 cm (5 in) CDs.  
An 8 cm (3 in) CD can be played in the  
In-dash CD changer if an 8 cm (3 in)  
CD adapter is used.  
It is possible that certain text data, such  
as titles, recorded on a CD-R/CD-RW  
may not be displayed when musical  
data (CD-DA) is playing.  
The period from when a CD-RW is  
inserted to when it begins playing is  
longer than a normal CD or CD-R.  
Completely read the instruction manual  
and cautions for CD-R/CD-RWs.  
Do not use discs with cellophane tape  
adhering, partially peeled off labels, or  
adhesive material exuding from the  
edges of the CD label. Also, do not use  
discs with a commercially-available  
CD-R label affixed. The disc may not  
eject resulting in a malfunction.  
l
l
If an 8 cm (3 in) CD adapter is not  
used, the In-dash CD changer may be  
damaged. Always use a CD adapter.  
Do not insert cleaning discs in the CD  
player/In-dash CD changer.  
l
l
l
Do not insert any disc with a peel-off  
seal affixed to it.  
This unit may not be able to play  
certain CD-R/CD-RWs made using a  
computer or music CD recorder due to  
disc characteristics, scratches,  
smudges, dirt, etc., or due to dust or  
condensation on the lens inside the  
unit.  
6-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
l
If a disc has both music data (CD-DA)  
and MP3 files, playback of the two file  
types differs depending on how the  
disc was recorded.  
Packet written discs cannot be played  
on this unit.  
This unit does not play CDs recorded  
using MP3i (MP3 interactive), MP3  
PRO and RIFF MP3 formats.  
qOperating Tips for MP3  
NOTE  
Supply of this product only conveys a license  
for private, non-commercial use and does not  
convey a license nor imply any right to use this  
product in any commercial (i.e. revenue-  
generating) real time broadcasting (terrestrial,  
satellite, cable and/or any other media),  
broadcasting/streaming via the Internet,  
intranets and/or other networks or in other  
electronic content distribution systems, such as  
pay-audio or audio-on-demand applications.  
An independent license for such use is  
required. For details, please visit  
l
l
About folders and files  
l
The order of hierarchy for MP3 files  
and folders during playback or other  
functions is from shallow to deep. The  
arrangement and playing order of a  
recorded disc containing MP3 files is  
as follows:  
http://www.mp3licensing.com.  
l
This audio system handles MP3 files  
l
File number  
that have been recorded on CD-R/CD-  
RW/CD-ROMs. Discs that have been  
recorded using the following formats  
can be played:  
A numerical file number is assigned  
to each file in a folder in the order of  
hierarchy from shallow to deep.  
l
Folder number  
l
ISO 9660 level 1  
ISO 9660 level 2  
Joliet extended format  
Romeo extended format  
A numerical folder number is  
assigned to each folder in the order  
of hierarchy from shallow to deep.  
l
l
l
l
This unit handles MP3 files  
NOTE  
conforming to the MP3 format  
containing both header frames and data  
frames.  
Folders and tracks (files) within the same  
hierarchy play in the order they were written to  
the disc depending on the write software.  
l
This unit can play multi-session  
recorded discs that have up to 40  
sessions.  
This unit can play MP3s with sampling  
l
frequencies of 16/22.05/24/32/44.1/48  
kHz.  
This unit can play MP3 files that have  
l
been recorded in bit rates of 8 kbps to  
320 kbps. Nonetheless, to insure  
enjoyment of music with consistent  
sound quality, it is recommended to use  
discs that have been recorded at a bit  
rate of 128 kbps or more.  
6-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
l
The maximum number of characters  
that can be used for file names is as  
follows. However, this unit will only  
display up to 32 characters, including  
the file extension (.mp3).  
Folder  
No.  
: Folder : Track (File)  
01  
02  
03  
04  
Maximum number of  
characters in a file name  
(including a separator “.”  
and the three letters of the  
file extension)  
3
2
4
05  
ISO9660 level 1  
12*  
31*  
ISO9660 level 2  
Joliet extended  
format  
06  
64  
5
1
Romeo extended  
format  
128  
* English one-byte characters (capitalized only) and  
underbar “_” are available.  
Level1  
Level3  
Level2  
Level4  
CAUTION  
Playback may not occur in the above  
hierarchy depending on the audio unit.  
This unit can only play MP3 files that  
have an MP3 file extension (.mp3)  
attached. Do not attach an MP3 file  
extension to any other type file as it  
could cause noise to be emitted or a  
malfunction in the unit.  
l
l
l
The folder order is automatically  
assigned and this order cannot be  
optionally set.  
Any folder without an MP3 file will be  
ignored. (It will be skipped and the  
folder number will not be displayed.)  
MP3 files not conforming to the MP3  
format containing both header frames  
and data frames will be skipped and  
not played.  
This unit will play MP3 files that have  
up to eight levels. However, the more  
levels a disc has, the longer it will take  
to initially start playing. It is  
recommended to record discs with two  
levels or less.  
About ID3 Tag display  
l
This unit can only display ID3 Tag  
album, track and artist names that have  
been input using Ver.1.0/1.1/2.2/2.3  
formats. Any other data that may have  
been input cannot be displayed.  
l
l
This unit can only display English  
(including numerals) one-byte  
characters. Use only English (including  
numerals) one-byte characters when  
inputting ID3 tags. Two-byte characters  
and some special symbols cannot be  
displayed.  
l
l
A single disc with up to 512 files can  
be played and a single folder with up to  
255 files can be played.  
When naming an MP3 file, be sure to  
add an MP3 file extension (.mp3) after  
the file name.  
6-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
Specialized glossary  
MP3  
Bit rate  
Refers to the volume of data per second,  
expressed in bps (bits per second).  
Generally, the larger the number of the  
transfer bit rate when compressing an  
MP3 file, the more information regarding  
musical reproduction it carries, and  
therefore the better the sound quality.  
Abbreviation for “MPEG Audio Layer 3”.  
A technical standard for audio  
compression as decided by an ISO  
(International Organization for  
Standardization) MPEG working group.  
Use of MP3 allows for audio data to be  
compressed to approximately a tenth of  
the source data size.  
Packet writing  
A general term for the method, similar to  
that used for floppy discs or hard drives,  
of recording the required file in a single  
increment on a CD-R and similar.  
ISO 9660  
An international standard for logical  
formatting of CD-ROM files and folders.  
It is divided into three separate levels  
based on differences in file naming  
procedures, data configuration and other  
characteristics.  
ID3 Tag  
ID3 tag is a method for storing  
information related to the music in an  
MP3 file. Information such as track, artist  
and album name can be stored. This  
content can be freely edited using ID3  
editing function software.  
Multi-session  
A session is the complete amount of data  
recorded from the beginning to the end of  
a single period of CD-ROM, CD-R/CD-  
RW data recording. Multi-session refers to  
the existence of data from two or more  
sessions on a single disc.  
VBR  
Abbreviation for Variable Bit Rate. While  
CBR (Constant Bit Rate) is generally  
used, VBR varies the bit rate for audio  
compression according to compression  
conditions and this allows for  
Sampling  
Refers to the process of encoding analog  
audio data at regular intervals and  
converting it to digital data. The sampling  
rate refers to the number of times a  
sample is taken in one second and is  
expressed in Hz units. Increasing the  
sampling rate improves the sound quality  
but also increases the data size.  
compression with preference given to  
sound quality.  
qOperating Tips for WMA  
WMA is short for Windows Media Audio  
and is the audio compression format used  
by Microsoft.  
Audio data can be created and stored at a  
higher compression ratio than MP3.  
* Microsoft and Windows Media are  
registered trademarks of Microsoft  
Corporation U.S. in the United States  
and other countries.  
6-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
Playable WMA file specification  
CD-R and CD-RW including WMA files  
can be played with this unit. Discs which  
conform to the following formats can be  
played.  
Playable WMA files are as follows:  
Item  
Content  
Windows Media  
Audio Version 7.0,  
8.0, 9.0  
Specification  
32kHz. . . . . . . 32, 40,  
48 kbps  
44.1kHz . . . . . 32, 48,  
64, 80, 96, 128, 160,  
192, 256, 320 kbps  
Sampling  
frequency  
Bit rate  
48kHz. . . . . . . 64, 96,  
128, 160, 192 kbps  
VBR (Variable Bit Rate)  
Channel mode  
Supported  
Stereo/Monaural  
Title, artist name,  
album name  
WMA tag  
CAUTION  
This unit plays files with the (.wma)  
file extension as a WMA file. Do not  
use the WMA file extension for files  
other than WMA files. It may cause  
noise or a malfunction.  
l
l
l
In a WMA file, the track name, artist  
name and album name are recorded  
with data called “WMA-Tag”, and the  
information can be displayed.  
WMA files which do not comply with  
the specific standard may not be played  
correctly or its file and folder name  
may not be displayed correctly.  
The file extension may not be provided  
depending on the computer operating  
system, version, software, or settings.  
In this case, add the file extension  
“.wma” to the end of the file name, and  
then write the disc.  
6-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MEMO  
6-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
Audio Set  
Audio information is displayed on the information display.  
CD Player  
In-Dash CD Changer  
Power/Volume/Sound Controls .............................................................................. page 6-28  
Operating the Radio ............................................................................................... page 6-32  
Operating the Satellite Radio ................................................................................. page 6-34  
Operating the Compact Disc (CD) Player .............................................................. page 6-46  
Operating the In-Dash CD Changer ....................................................................... page 6-50  
Operating the Auxiliary jack .................................................................................. page 6-54  
Error Indications ..................................................................................................... page 6-55  
6-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
qPower/Volume/Sound Controls  
Power/Volume dial  
Audio control dial  
Power ON/OFF  
Audio sound adjustment  
Switch the ignition to ACC or ON.  
1. Press the audio control dial to select the  
function. The selected function will be  
indicated.  
Press the power/volume dial to turn the  
audio system on.  
Press the power/volume dial again to turn  
the audio system off.  
NOTE  
To prevent the battery from being discharged,  
do not leave the audio system on for a long  
period of time when the engine is not running.  
Volume adjustment  
To adjust the volume, turn the power/  
volume dial.  
Turn the power/volume dial to the right to  
increase volume, to the left to decrease it.  
6-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
*1 Depending on the mode selected, the  
indication changes.  
Standard audio-equipped model  
*2 Depending on the model, this  
function, may not be available.  
*1  
2. Turn the audio control dial to adjust the  
selected functions as follows:  
Standard audio-equipped model  
Indication  
Turn Left Turn Right  
Select mode  
Decrease  
bass  
Increase  
bass  
*1  
Decrease  
treble  
Increase  
treble  
Shift the  
Shift the  
*1  
sound to the sound to the  
front  
rear  
*1 *2  
*2  
Shift the  
sound to the sound to the  
Shift the  
left  
right  
OFF  
ON  
Bose Sound System-equipped model  
OFF  
OFF  
ON  
ON  
*1  
*1  
Select mode  
*1  
*1  
*1*2  
*2  
6-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
Bose® Sound System-equipped model  
Select the desired ALC mode.  
Indication  
Turn Left Turn Right  
Mode  
Volume change  
OFF  
OFF  
ON  
ON  
No change  
Minimum  
Decrease  
bass  
Increase  
bass  
Decrease  
treble  
Increase  
treble  
Shift the  
sound to the sound to the  
Shift the  
Medium  
front  
rear  
Shift the  
Shift the  
sound to the sound to the  
left  
right  
OFF  
ON  
Maximum  
OFF  
OFF  
ON  
ON  
Turn the audio control dial to select ALC  
OFF or ALC LEVEL1―7 modes. The  
selected mode will be indicated.  
Select mode  
NOTE  
About 5 seconds after selecting any mode, the  
volume function will be automatically selected.  
To reset bass, treble, fade, and balance, press  
the audio control dial for 2 seconds. The unit  
will beep and “CLEAR” will be displayed.  
Automatic Level Control (ALC)  
The automatic level control is a feature  
that automatically adjusts audio volume  
and sound quality according to the vehicle  
speed.  
The volume increases in accordance with  
the increase in vehicle speed, and  
decreases as vehicle speed decreases.  
6-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
*AUDIOPILOT® (Bose® Sound  
System-equipped model)  
Welcome modeí  
The welcome mode provides the  
following presentation:  
AUDIOPILOT® automatically adjusts  
audio volume and sound quality in  
accordance with the level of noise  
entering the vehicle interior while driving.  
When AUDIOPILOT® is turned on, the  
system automatically calculates the  
conditions for optimum hearing of sound  
which may be difficult to hear depending  
on exterior noise.  
l
Sound is heard when the ignition is  
turned on.  
Illumination turns on when a door is  
l
opened after unlocking the doors.  
Only the sound effect can be switched on  
or off.  
BT SETUP modeí  
* AUDIOPILOT® is a registered  
trademark of Bose Corporation.  
*Centerpoint® (Bose® Sound System-  
equipped model)  
Music and other audio such as voice data  
recorded on portable audio devices and  
mobile phones available on the market  
which are equipped with the Bluetooth  
transmission function can be listened to  
via wireless transmission over the  
vehicle's speakers. Using the BT SETUP  
mode, these devices can be programmed  
to the Bluetooth unit or changed. For  
details, refer to Bluetooth audio (page  
6-63).  
Centerpoint® offers you the experience of  
5.1-channel surround sound in your  
vehicle even with your conventional 2-  
channel stereo CDs.  
Centerpoint® can be set on or off.  
NOTE  
Centerpoint® operates optimally with a 2-  
l
channel stereo CD. MP3 audio files can be  
played, however, MP3 audio files encoded  
with high compression may result in poor  
sound quality.  
Centerpoint® is available for 2-channel  
l
stereo audio except for AM radio/FM radio/  
SIRIUS digital satellite radio/AUX/BT  
audio.  
* Centerpoint® is a registered trademark  
of Bose Corporation.  
BEEP setting  
The beep-sound when operating the audio  
system can be set on or off.  
ILLM EFT setting (Illumination setting  
during operation)  
The audio system illumination during  
operation can be set on or off.  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-31  
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
qOperating the Radio  
Channel preset buttons  
Channel preset buttons  
Band selector buttons  
Seek  
tuning  
buttons  
Auto memory  
button  
Manual tuning  
dial  
Scan button  
Radio ON  
Tuning  
Press a band selector button (  
turn the radio on.  
,
) to  
The radio has the following tuning  
methods: Manual, Seek, Scan, Preset  
channel, and Auto memory tuning. The  
easiest way to tune stations is to set them  
on preset channels.  
Band selection  
Choose AM by pressing the AM button  
(
(
) and FM by pressing the FM button  
).  
NOTE  
If the power supply is interrupted (fuse blows  
or the battery is disconnected), the preset  
channels will be erased.  
The selected mode will be indicated. If  
FM stereo is being received, “ST” will be  
displayed.  
Manual tuning  
NOTE  
Turning the manual tuning dial will  
change the frequency higher or lower.  
If the FM broadcast signal becomes weak,  
reception automatically changes from  
STEREO to MONO for reduced noise, and the  
“ST” indicator will go out.  
Seek tuning  
Pressing the seek tuning button (  
,
)
will cause the tuner to seek a higher or  
lower frequency automatically.  
6-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
NOTE  
Press and hold the auto memory button  
If you continue to press and hold the button,  
the frequency will continue changing without  
stopping.  
(
) for about 2 seconds until a beep  
sound is heard; the system will  
automatically scan and temporarily store  
up to 6 stations with the strongest  
frequencies in each selected band in that  
area.  
Scan tuning  
Press the scan button (  
) to  
automatically sample strong stations.  
Scanning stops at each station for about 5  
seconds. To hold a station, press the scan  
After scanning is completed, the station  
with the strongest frequency will be tuned  
and its frequency displayed.  
button (  
) again during this interval.  
Press and release the auto memory button  
Preset channel tuning  
(
) to recall stations from the auto-  
stored stations. One stored station will be  
selected each time; its frequency and  
channel number will be displayed.  
The 6 preset channels can be used to store  
6 AM and 12 FM stations.  
1. To set a channel first select AM, FM1,  
or FM2. Tune to the desired station.  
NOTE  
If no stations can be tuned after scanning  
operations, “A” will be displayed.  
2. Depress a channel preset button for  
about 2 seconds until a beep sound is  
heard. The preset channel number and  
station frequency will be displayed.  
The station is now held in the memory.  
3. Repeat this operation for the other  
stations and bands you want to store.  
To tune one in the memory, select AM,  
FM1, or FM2 and then press its  
channel preset button. The station  
frequency and the channel number will  
be displayed.  
NOTE  
If the power supply is interrupted (fuse blows  
or the battery is disconnected), the preset  
channels will be erased.  
Auto memory tuning  
This is especially useful when driving in  
an area where the local stations are not  
known. Additional AM/FM stations can  
be stored without disturbing the  
previously set channels.  
6-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
qOperating the Satellite Radioí  
Channel preset buttons  
Channel preset buttons  
Band selector buttons  
Seek  
tuning  
buttons  
Category  
button  
Electronic Serial  
number/Display  
button  
Text button  
Scan button  
Manual tuning  
dial  
Instant replay button  
Satellite button  
Information display  
All operations of the satellite radio are displayed on the Information display.  
Channel number, Channel name, Category name, Artist name, Song title,  
ID code, Preset channel number, Bank number, Error signs  
6-34  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
NOTE  
What is satellite radio?  
This equipment has been tested and found to  
comply with the limits for a Class B digital  
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.  
These limits are designed to provide  
reasonable protection against harmful  
interference in a residential installation. This  
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate  
radio frequency energy and, If not installed  
and used in accordance with the instructions,  
may cause harmful interference to radio  
communications. However, there is no  
guarantee that interference will not occur in a  
particular installation. If this equipment does  
cause harmful interference to radio or  
television reception, which can be determined  
by turning the equipment off and on, the user  
is encouraged to try to correct the interference  
by one or more of the following measures:  
- Increase the separation between the  
equipment and tuner.  
SIRIUS is radio the way it was meant to  
be: More than 100 new channels of digital  
quality programming delivered to listeners  
coast to coast via satellite. That means  
channels of completely commercial-free  
music plus more channels of news, sports,  
and entertainment from names like  
CNBC, Discovery, SCI-FI Channel, A&E,  
House of Blues, E!, NPR, Speed vision  
and ESPN.  
SIRIUS is live, dynamic entertainment,  
completely focused on listeners. Every  
minute of every day of every week will be  
different. All commercial-free music  
channels are created in-house and hosted  
by DJs who know and love the music. Do  
you like Reggae? How about Classic  
Rock or New Rock? SIRIUS has an array  
of choices spanning a vast range of  
musical tastes including the hits of the  
50's, 60's, 70's, & 80's as well as Jazz,  
Country, Blues, Pop, Rap, R&B,  
- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a  
circuit different from that to which the tuner is  
connected.  
- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/  
TV technician for help.  
Bluegrass, Alternative, Classical, Heavy  
Metal, Dance and many others.  
From its state-of-the-art, digital  
broadcasting facility in Rockefeller  
Center, New York City, SIRIUS will  
deliver the broadest, deepest mix of radio  
entertainment from coast to coast.  
SIRIUS will bring you music and  
entertainment programming that is simply  
not available on traditional radio in any  
market across the country. It's radio like  
you've never heard before.  
Sign up for SIRIUS Radio today! For  
more information, visit siriusradio.com.  
Satellite radio can be subscribed to and  
received in the United States. (Except  
Alaska and Hawaii) and Canada.  
6-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
How to subscribe to satellite radio  
When you call the SIRIUS Customers  
Care number you have two options  
available.  
(1) The full package which allows you  
access to all SIRIUS content except  
pay- per-view.  
(2) The family package which allows  
access to certain channels. Please see  
the website: www.sirius.com for  
details.  
Please have the following information  
ready when attempting to activate your  
service:  
Once the system is installed you must first  
subscribe to the SIRIUS Radio service to  
activate the system.  
The SIRIUS Radio service uses an ID  
code to identify your radio. This code is  
needed to subscribe to SIRIUS Radio, and  
if needed, is also used to report any  
problems should there be any in the  
future. Listeners can subscribe using any  
of the following methods:  
l
Visiting SIRIUS on the web at www.  
sirius.com  
Subscribing to SIRIUS customer care,  
l
SIRIUS ID (ESN*)  
Valid credit card information (type,  
l
l
available 24 hours a day, 7 days a  
week.  
Calling (888) 539-7474  
number, expiration date)  
When you are ready to receive the on-air  
activation signals you will be instructed  
(for activation via phone) to turn on your  
tuner, have the antenna pointed skyward,  
and to set the channel to channel 184.  
Once the signal is sent from the national  
studio it may take up to 10 minutes to be  
received by your unit.  
l
l
E-mail at: customercare@sirius-  
radio.com  
Writing to: SATELLITE RADIO  
l
1221 Avenue of the Americas  
New York, NY 10020  
Attention: Customer Care  
Customers should have their SIRIUS  
Radio ID Electronic Serial Number  
(ESN#) ready.  
NOTE  
On-air activation is completed after the  
procedure, in most cases from 10 seconds to  
10 minutes.  
NOTE  
Your ESN# should have been recorded at the  
time of installation. If not, refer to  
“DISPLAYING THE SIRIUS ID (ESN)” to  
retrieve your ESN#.  
* ESN: Electronic Serial Number  
SIRIUS operation  
All operations of the satellite radio are  
conducted by means of the audio unit.  
Satellite radio activation  
For activation and subscription  
SIRIUS radio mode selection  
information call toll-free at 1-888-539-  
SIRI (7474). A SIRIUS Customer Care  
representative will take the necessary  
information and walk you through the  
activation process. Or you can visit  
SIRIUS online at WWW.siriusradio.com  
and click on the “Join” button.  
When the satellite button is pressed during  
ACC ON, it will play the last SIRIUS  
channel in use before the mode was  
switched over to another mode or the  
power was turned off.  
When the satellite button is pressed in a  
mode other than the SIRIUS mode, the  
last channel in use will be received.  
6-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
Every time the satellite button is pressed,  
the bank changes in the order shown  
below.  
When the SIRIUS mode is switched to  
another mode, or when the power is  
turned off, the present channel which is  
being received is stored as the last  
channel.  
Channel selection  
SR1  
SR2  
SR3  
Turning the manual tuning dial allows you  
to select the desired receiving channel.  
l
Turn the knob clockwise: Channel Up  
l
Turn the knob counterclockwise:  
Channel Down  
Unsubscribed channel  
When a selected station has not been  
subscribed to, the display indicates the  
following:  
[CALL + 888] and [539 + SIRI] (Flashes  
alternately)  
NOTE  
SR1, SR2 and SR3: 6 stations can be stored in  
each bank for convenient access to your  
favorite stations.  
NOTE  
Operation in the initial state  
When the subscription contract is canceled, all  
of the channels including channel 184 appear  
as unsubscribed.  
It may take some time to start up the  
equipment when it is in the initial state,  
when there is a change in the user's  
subscription condition, or when the  
SIRIUS channel map is changed.  
Invalid channel  
When a selected channel is not  
broadcasting, [SR + (bank number) +  
INVALID] is displayed for 1 second,  
followed by [SR + (bank number) +  
CHANNEL], which is also displayed for  
1 second. The display then returns to the  
previous valid channel.  
“UPDATING xx%” is displayed when the  
SIRIUS channel map is changed. If the  
unit is initialized or the user contract  
content is changed, “UPDATING” is  
displayed. Updating could take as long as  
3 minutes depending on the geographical  
area. When the unit is in an initialized  
state, channel 184 is displayed after the  
display indicates “UPDATING 100%”. If  
the SIRIUS channel map or the user  
contract content is changed, the channel  
prior to the change is displayed after  
“UPDATING” is displayed. After the  
initialization display, it may take as long  
as 12 seconds to receive channel 184.  
NOTE  
If the last channel selected has become  
unavailable because of a channel update the  
above indication is displayed until any button  
is pressed.  
6-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
Preset channel programming  
NOTE  
Six stations can be stored in each bank, SR1,  
SR2, and SR3 for convenient access to your  
favorite stations.  
(Programming with “channel number”  
display)  
1. Select the desired channel to be  
programmed. At this point, the  
following is displayed:  
[SR + (bank number) + (channel  
number)]  
Preset channel call-up  
Press and release the channel preset  
button,  
[SR + (bank number) + CH + (preset  
number) + (channel number)] appears.  
When the preset button is pressed during  
text mode, its channel number is  
displayed first for 3 second and then its  
text is displayed.  
2. Keep pressing the channel preset  
button for 1.5 seconds or more.  
The programming process is complete  
after the channel number flashes. Then,  
[SR + (bank number)] is displayed and  
a beep sound is heard at the same time.  
NOTE  
In the initial setting, all channels are preset to  
184.  
3. [SR + (bank number) + CH + (preset  
number) + (channel number)] are  
displayed.  
Category change  
(Programming with “text” display (e.g.  
channel name))  
Press the category button (UP or DOWN)  
and select the desired category.  
Press the category button (UP):  
l
1. Select the desired channel to be  
programmed. At this point, the  
following is displayed:  
[SR + (bank number) + (selected text  
(e.g. channel name))]  
Category up  
Press the category button (DOWN):  
l
Category down  
Every time the category (UP) button is  
pressed for 1.5 second or less, the  
category is changed over in the order  
shown below.  
At this time, the lowest (smallest-number)  
channel within the category indicated is  
received.  
When the highest (or lowest) category is  
reached, the category is changed over in  
the order shown below.  
Highest category→Category all→Lowest  
category  
2. Keep pressing the channel preset  
button for 1.5 seconds or more.  
The programming process is complete  
after the text (e.g. channel name)  
flashes. Then, [SR + (bank number)] is  
displayed and you will hear beep sound  
at the same time.  
3. SR + (bank number) + CH + (preset  
number) + (channel number)] are  
displayed.  
NOTE  
4. Three seconds later, it returns to normal  
display. [SR + (bank number) + (text  
(e.g. channel name))]  
While in “CATEGORY ALL” mode, all  
channels covering a category can be accessed  
(Category off condition).  
6-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
Channel selection within a category  
(Channel number display)  
l
When the display button is pressed  
while in info display mode, the mode  
changes to the channel number display  
mode.  
If category is not in “ALL” and the  
channel number is displayed, turning the  
manual tuning dial moves the channel  
number up/down in the present category.  
l
Turn the manual tuning dial clockwise:  
(Channel name display)  
Channel Up  
Turn the manual tuning dial  
l
When the display button is pressed  
l
while in channel number display mode,  
it changes to channel name display  
mode.  
counterclockwise: Channel Down  
NOTE  
The channel number needs to be indicated in  
the display to use manual tuning dial for this  
function.  
l
l
There are short (8 fixed characters) and  
long names for the channel name.  
The long name is displayed first, and 3  
seconds later the short name is  
displayed. If there is no short name, the  
long name is displayed.  
To display the rest of the characters of  
the channel name, press the text button  
(TEXT). The display scrolls the next 8  
characters. Press the text button  
(TEXT) again after the last 8 characters  
have been displayed to return to the  
beginning of the title.  
Channel number, channel name,  
category, artist, song titles and info  
display  
l
Each time the display button is pressed  
during SIRIUS reception, the display of  
the text data is changed over in the order  
shown below.  
l
l
While the short name is displayed,  
pressing the text button switches the  
display to the long name.  
Three seconds after scrolling the long  
name, the display automatically returns  
to the first part of the long name. Three  
more seconds and the short name  
appears.  
Channel number  
Song title  
Channel name  
Category  
name  
Info  
Artist name  
l
If there is no channel name,  
“No TITLE” is displayed.  
NOTE  
(Category name display)  
When the display button is pressed  
l
Eight characters are displayed on 1 screen.  
l
l
To display the rest of the characters of a  
while in channel name display mode, it  
changes to the category name display  
mode.  
long title, press the text button (  
The display scrolls the next 8 characters.  
Press the text button ( ) again after  
the last 8 characters have been displayed to  
return to the beginning of the title.  
).  
l
There are short (8 fixed characters) and  
long names for the category name.  
6-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
l
The long name is displayed first, and 3  
(Song title display)  
When the display button is pressed  
l
seconds later the short name is  
displayed. If there is no short name, the  
long name is displayed.  
while in artist name display mode, it  
changes to the song title display mode.  
To display the rest of the characters of  
l
l
To display the rest of the characters of  
the category name, press the text  
button (TEXT). The display scrolls the  
next 8 characters. Press the text button  
(TEXT) again after the last 8 characters  
have been displayed to return to the  
beginning of the title.  
the song title, press the text button  
(TEXT). The display scrolls the next 8  
characters. Press the text button  
(TEXT) again after the last 8 characters  
have been displayed to return to the  
beginning of the title.  
l
l
While the short name is displayed,  
Three more seconds after scrolling the  
pressing the text button switches the  
display to the long name.  
Three seconds after scrolling the long  
name, the display automatically returns  
to display the first part of the long  
name. Three more seconds and the  
short name appears.  
song title, the display automatically  
returns to display the first part of the  
song title.  
If there is no song title, “No SONG” is  
displayed.  
l
l
(INFO (such as composer's name)  
display)  
When the display button is pressed  
l
If there is no category name,  
“No CATEGORY” is displayed.  
l
while in song title display mode, it  
changes to the INFO display mode.  
To display the rest of the characters of  
(Artist name display)  
When the display button is pressed  
l
l
while in category name display mode,  
it changes to the artist name display  
mode.  
the composer's name, press the text  
button (TEXT). The display scrolls the  
next 8 characters. Press the text button  
(TEXT) again after the last 8 characters  
have been displayed to return to the  
beginning of the title.  
Three seconds after scrolling the text,  
the display automatically returns to  
display the first part of the text.  
l
To display the rest of the characters of  
the artist's name, press the text button  
(TEXT). The display scrolls the next 8  
characters. Press the text button  
(TEXT) again after the last 8 characters  
have been displayed to return to the  
beginning of the title.  
l
l
If there is no composer name,  
“No INFO” is displayed.  
l
Three seconds after scrolling the artist  
name, the display automatically return  
to display the first part of the artist's  
name.  
If there is no artist's name,  
“No ARTIST” is displayed.  
Instant replay  
This function allows you to rewind and  
replay the program that you were  
previously or are currently listening to.  
Press the instant replay button ( ).  
l
6-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
When the seek tuning button ( ) is  
pressed (about 1.5 seconds), playback  
starts from the beginning of the current  
program.  
When the seek tuning button ( ) is  
pressed twice, playback starts from the  
beginning of the previous program.  
When the seek tuning button ( ) is  
pressed for about 1.5 seconds or longer,  
the program is reversed while the button  
is being pressed.  
(How to cancel the instant replay)  
l
Turn off the ACC or POWER.  
Press any one of the following buttons:  
FM/AM, CD, AUX, SAT,  
CATEGORY, or a channel preset  
button.  
l
l
l
l
Short-press the seek tuning button (  
to the last track while tracking up.  
)
To fast-forward to the end of the track  
long-press the seek tuning button ( ).  
Hold the scan button, then press  
channel preset button 4, 5, or 6.  
Turn the manual tuning dial.  
Press the up/down switch on the audio  
control switch.  
When the seek tuning button ( ) is  
pressed (about 1.5 seconds), playback  
starts from the beginning of the next  
program. When the seek tuning button  
l
l
l
(
) is pressed (about 1.5 seconds) while  
Insert or play a CD.  
the last program is being played, the  
instant replay mode is cancelled.  
When the seek tuning button ( ) is  
pressed for 1.5 seconds or longer, the  
program is fast-forwarded while the  
button is being pressed. When pressing  
and holding the button until the end of the  
program, the instant replay mode is  
cancelled.  
Displaying the SIRIUS ID (ESN)  
When the ESN button is pressed for 1.5  
seconds or longer, a 12-digit Electronic  
Serial Number (ESN) for the SIRIUS  
tuner is displayed.  
(How to clear the message)  
l
Turn off the ACC.  
Turn off the POWER.  
Press any one of the following buttons:  
When the instant replay button is pressed  
again, playback is paused, or playback  
starts if it has been paused.  
l
l
FM/AM, CD, AUX, SAT, ESN/DISP,  
CAT, SCAN, Instant replay, seek  
tuning button ( ), or a channel preset  
button.  
Turn the manual tuning dial.  
Insert or play a CD.  
Instant replay (PAUSE)  
If the instant replay button is pressed  
while the instant replay mode is off,  
instant replay mode is turned on in a  
paused condition (PAUSE). Press the  
instant replay button again to resume  
playback from the point at which it was  
paused.  
l
l
(If the SIRIUS ID (ESN) for the tuner  
does not display)  
If “ESN + FAIL” is displayed after  
pressing the ESN button for 1.5 seconds  
or longer, contact an Authorized Mazda  
Dealer.  
NOTE  
l
If the channel is changed, the instant replay  
buffer data is deleted.  
l
After turning on the power and switching to  
SIRIUS digital satellite radio mode, the  
instant replay mode is not available for  
several seconds after changing channels.  
6-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
Initialization of ID code  
NOTE  
Master code:  
If the registered ID code is forgotten,  
return the ID code to the default [0000] by  
performing the following steps:  
The Master Code is used to initialize or re-  
initialize the ID code in the event that the code  
is not set to [0000] and/or the personalized ID  
code is not known. The initialization process  
resets the ID code to [0000]. The master code  
can potentially defeat the intent of the security  
of the parental lock if it is located by persons  
not authorized by the owner to access certain  
channels.  
Setting condition: SAT mode  
(Master code input preparation)  
1. Hold the scan button, then press  
channel preset button 4, hold both  
buttons together for 1.5 seconds.  
2. “ENTER PIN” appears for 3 seconds  
which indicates that it is in code input  
mode.  
SIRIUS Satellite Radio Master Code: [0913]  
(How to clear the message)  
l
Press any of the following FM/AM,  
3. “SR1 - - - -” appears, which indicates  
that it is ready for code input.  
SAT, CD, AUX, LOAD, EJECT,  
POWER buttons.  
Turn the ACC off or insert a CD.  
(Master code input)  
l
4. Input the master code using the channel  
preset buttons 1-4.  
NOTE  
l
When a numeric value other than the  
Press the scan button inputting the  
code.  
(The master code is already set at the  
time of factory shipment.)  
master code is input and the scan button is  
pressed, “SR1 Err” is displayed and then it  
returns to the “SR1 - - - -” display again.  
l
If an ID code is not input for 10 seconds,  
“Err” is displayed and it returns to the  
former display.  
(Master code input determination)  
5. Determine the master code which has  
been input by pressing the scan button.  
l
Channel preset buttons 1, 2, 3, 4 and the  
scan button are used for inputting the ID  
code. Buttons 5 and 6 cannot be used.  
6. “PIN CLEARED” appears which  
indicates that the master code input has  
been completed.  
Change of ID code  
Setting condition: SAT mode  
When changing the ID code, the new ID  
code is input after the previous one is  
input first.  
7. The ID code is set to the default [0000]  
and the initialization process is  
completed.  
(Registered ID code input)  
1. Hold the scan button, then press  
channel preset button 5, hold both  
buttons together for 1.5 seconds.  
6-42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
2. “ENTER PIN” appears for 3 seconds  
which indicates that it is in code input  
mode.  
(New ID code input)  
9. Input the new ID code using channel  
preset buttons 1-4.  
3. “SR1 - - - -” appears, which indicates  
that it is ready for code input.  
Example: If “1234” is input as the new  
code, “SR1 1234” is displayed.  
Press the scan button after the code is  
input.  
4. Input the registered ID code using  
channel preset buttons 1-4. Then press  
the scan button.  
(New ID code input determination)  
Example: When the registered ID code  
is “2323”, input “2323”. At this time  
“SR1 2323” is displayed.  
Press 1 for the first digit, 2 for the  
second, 3 for the third, and 4 for the  
last digit. For example, if your number  
is 2323, press 1 three times, 2 four  
times, 3 three, and 4 four times. If the  
display goes off while inputting, begin  
from Step 1.  
10. Determine the new ID code which  
has been input by pressing the scan  
button.  
11. “PIN CHANGED” appears for 3  
seconds which indicates that the new  
ID code input has been completed.  
12. It returns to the former display.  
(How to clear the message)  
l
Press any of the following FM/AM,  
NOTE  
SAT, CD, AUX, LOAD, EJECT,  
POWER buttons.  
Turn the ACC off or insert a CD.  
The registered ID code is the default [0000] at  
the time of factory shipment. If [0000] results  
in “Err” on the display, go to the  
“INITIALIZATION OF ID CODE” section to  
reset to [0000].  
l
NOTE  
l
If an ID code is not input for 10 seconds,  
“Err” is displayed and it returns to the  
former display.  
Channel preset buttons 1, 2, 3, 4 and the  
(Verification with the registered ID  
code)  
l
scan button are used for input of the ID  
code. Buttons 5 and 6 cannot be used.  
5. Determine the input code by pressing  
the scan button.  
6. If it does not match with the previously  
registered code, “SR1 Err” is displayed  
and then it returns to “SR1 - - - -”.  
Individual channel locking  
If a channel is locked, the channel is  
muted.  
7. If it matches with the previously  
registered code, “ENTER PIN” appears  
again and it switches to code input  
mode.  
NOTE  
If the registered ID code is forgotten, return  
the ID code to the default [0000]. (See  
“INTIALIZATION OF ID CODE” section)  
8. “SR1 - - - -” appears, and it is ready for  
input of the new ID code.  
6-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
(Locking a channel)  
(How to clear the message)  
Press any of the following FM/AM,  
l
1. Select a channel to be locked by  
turning the manual tuning dial.  
Example: Select channel 100  
SAT, CD, AUX, LOAD, EJECT,  
POWER buttons.  
Turn the ACC off or insert a CD.  
l
(Registered ID code input preparation)  
NOTE  
l
If an ID code is not input for 10 seconds,  
“Err” is displayed and it returns to the  
former display.  
2. Hold the scan button, then press  
channel preset button 6, hold both  
buttons together for 1.5 seconds.  
l
Channel preset buttons 1, 2, 3, 4 and the  
3. “ENTER PIN” appears for 3 seconds  
which indicates that it is in code input  
mode.  
scan button are used for input of the ID  
code. Buttons 5 and 6 cannot be used.  
Lock cancellation  
4. “SR1 - - - -” appears which indicates  
Setting condition: SAT mode  
that it is ready for code input.  
(Registered ID code input)  
(Releasing a locked channel)  
5. Input the registered ID code using  
channel preset buttons 1-4. Example: If  
the registered ID code is “2323”, input  
“2323”. At this time “SR1 2323” is  
displayed. Press the scan button after  
the code is input.  
1. Select a channel to be released by  
turning the manual tuning dial.  
Example: Select the locked channel  
(i.e. 100). At this time,  
“SR1 LOCK 100” is displayed.  
(Registered ID code input preparation)  
(Registered ID code input  
determination)  
2. Hold the scan button, then press  
channel preset button 6, hold both  
buttons together for 1.5 seconds.  
6. Determine the code which has been  
input by pressing the scan button.  
3. “ENTER PIN” appears for 3 seconds  
which indicates that it is in code input  
mode.  
7. If it does not match the registered code,  
“SR1 Err” is displayed and then it  
returns to “SR1 - - - -”.  
4. “SR1 - - - -” appears, which indicates  
that it is ready for code input.  
8. If it matches the registered code,  
“SR1 LOCK” appears for 3 seconds  
which indicates that the code input has  
been completed.  
(Registered ID code input)  
5. Input the registered ID code using  
channel preset buttons 1-4. Example:  
When the registered ID code is “2323”,  
input “2323”. At this time “SR1 2323”  
is displayed. Press the scan button after  
the code is input.  
9. “SR1 LOCK 100” appears which  
indicates that the parental lock is  
activated. At this time, mute is on and  
no sound is heard.  
6-44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
NOTE  
(2) In case of an antenna malfunction,  
“ANTENNA FAIL” is displayed.  
Check the satellite radio antenna,  
antenna cable and DLP antenna  
connector.  
If “Err” is displayed, go to the  
“INITIALIZATION OF ID CODE” section to  
reset the ID code to [0000].  
(Registered ID code input  
determination)  
NOTE  
If a broken DLP* unit is replaced with a new  
unit, cancel the license for the broken unit and  
make sure to carry out new registration for the  
replaced unit. If the license for the broken unit  
is not canceled, you will be charged a  
reception fee for both units.  
6. Determine the input code by pressing  
the scan button.  
7. If it does not match the registered code,  
“SR1 Err” is displayed and then it  
returns to “SR1 - - - -”.  
* DLP: Down Link Processor  
(SATELLITE RADIO Module)  
8. If it matches the registered code,  
“SR1 UNLOCK” appears for 3  
seconds which indicates that the code  
input has been completed.  
9. “SR1 100” appears which indicates that  
the parental lock is off. At this time,  
sound is heard.  
(How to clear the message)  
l
Press any of the following FM/AM,  
SAT, CD, AUX, LOAD, EJECT,  
POWER buttons.  
Turn the ACC off or insert a CD.  
l
NOTE  
l
If an ID code is not input for 10 seconds,  
“Err” is displayed and it returns to the  
former display.  
l
Channel preset buttons 1, 2, 3, 4 and the  
scan button are used for input of the ID  
code. Buttons 5 and 6 cannot be used.  
Error signs  
(1) Depending on the surrounding  
conditions (such as large trees,  
buildings, or tunnels) and special  
weather conditions, the reception of  
SIRIUS radio waves may be  
decreased or temporarily interrupted.  
“ACQUIRING SIGNAL” may  
appear.  
6-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
qOperating the Compact Disc (CD) Player  
Track up/Fast-forward button  
Load button  
CD play button  
CD slot  
CD eject button  
Display button  
Folder up  
button  
Folder  
down button  
Random  
button  
Repeat button  
Scan button  
Text button  
Track down/Reverse button  
Type  
Playable data  
Ejecting the CD  
Music/MP3/WMA CD · Music data (CD-DA)  
Press the CD eject button ( ) to eject the  
CD.  
player  
· MP3/WMA file  
NOTE  
Playback  
If a disc has both music data (CD-DA) and  
MP3/WMA files, playback of the two or three  
file types differs depending on how the disc  
was recorded.  
Press the CD play button ( ) to start  
play when a CD is in the unit.  
If a CD is not in the unit when the CD  
play button ( ) is pressed, “NO DISC”  
will flash on and off.  
Inserting the CD  
Insert the CD into the slot, label-side up.  
The auto-loading mechanism will set the  
CD and begin play.  
NOTE  
When the load button (  
CD will load and play even if the CD eject  
button ( ) had been previously pressed.  
) is pressed, the  
NOTE  
There will be a short lapse before play begins  
while the player reads the digital signals on  
the CD.  
6-46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
Fast-forward/Reverse  
During MP3/WMA CD playback  
Press and hold the fast-forward button  
(Track repeat)  
(
) to advance through a track at high  
1. Press the repeat button (  
) during  
speed.  
playback to play the current track  
repeatedly. “TRACK RPT” is  
displayed.  
Press and hold the reverse button ( ) to  
reverse through a track at high speed.  
Track search  
2. To cancel the repeat playback, press the  
button again after 3 seconds.  
Press the track up button ( ) once to skip  
forward to the beginning of the next track.  
Press the track down button ( ) once to  
skip back to the beginning of the current  
track.  
(Folder repeat)  
1. Press the repeat button (  
) during  
playback, and then press the button  
again within 3 seconds to play the  
tracks in the current folder repeatedly.  
“FOLDER RPT” is displayed.  
Folder search (during MP3/WMA CD  
playback)  
To change to the previous folder, press the  
folder down button ( ), or press the  
folder up button ( ) to advance to the  
next folder.  
2. Press the button again to cancel the  
repeat playback.  
Random playback  
Music scan  
Tracks are randomly selected and played.  
This feature helps to find a program by  
playing about the first 10 seconds of each  
track.  
During music CD playback  
1. Press the random button (  
) during  
playback to play the tracks on the CD  
randomly. “RDM” is displayed.  
Press the scan button (  
playback to start the scan play operation  
(the track number will flash).  
Press the scan button (  
cancel scan playback.  
) during  
2. Press the button again to cancel the  
random playback.  
) again to  
During MP3/WMA CD playback  
(Folder random)  
NOTE  
If the unit is left in scan, normal playback will  
1. Press the random button (  
) during  
resume where scan was selected.  
playback to play the tracks in the folder  
randomly. “FOLDER RDM” is  
displayed.  
Repeat playback  
During music CD playback  
2. To cancel the random playback, press  
the button again after 3 seconds.  
1. Press the repeat button (  
playback to play the current track  
) during  
repeatedly. “RPT” is displayed.  
2. Press the button again to cancel the  
repeat playback.  
6-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
(CD random)  
MP3/WMA CD  
1. Press the random button (  
) during  
File number/Elapsed time  
playback, and then press the button  
again within 3 seconds to play the  
tracks on the CD randomly.  
“DISC RDM” is displayed.  
Folder number/Track number  
File name  
2. Press the button again to cancel the  
random playback.  
Switching the display  
For files with a file name or other name  
that have been input, the display changes  
in the order of the file names or other  
names each time the display button (  
is pressed during playback.  
Folder name  
)
Album name (ID3 Tag)  
Song name (ID3 Tag)  
Artist name (ID3 Tag)  
Music CD  
Track number/Elapsed time  
File name  
Album name  
Artist name  
NOTE  
(MP3/WMA CD)  
This unit can only read English (including  
numerals) one-byte characters. Depending on  
the CD writing software used, proper display  
may not be possible.  
Display scroll  
Only 8 characters (File name) or 12  
characters (Except file name) can be  
displayed at one time. To display the rest  
of the characters of a long title, press the  
text button (  
the next 12 characters. Press the text  
button ( ) again after the last 12  
). The display scrolls  
characters have been displayed to return  
to the beginning of the title.  
6-48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
NOTE  
The displayable number of characters is  
limited. If the number of characters, including  
the file extension (.mp3/.wma), exceeds 32  
characters, it may not be fully displayed.  
Message display  
If “CHECK CD” is displayed, it means  
that there is some CD malfunction. Check  
the CD for damage, dirt, or smudges, and  
then properly reinsert. If the message  
appears again, take the unit to an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer for service.  
6-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
qOperating the In-Dash CD Changer  
Track up/Fast-forward button  
Load button  
Channel preset buttons  
CD eject button  
Display button  
Disc  
up/Folder up  
button  
Disc  
down/Folder  
down button  
Random  
button  
Repeat  
button  
Scan button  
Text button  
CD play button CD slot  
Track down/Reverse button  
Type  
Playable data  
Normal insertion  
1. Press the load button (  
Music/MP3/WMA CD ·Music data (CD-DA)  
).  
player  
·MP3/WMA file  
2. When “IN” is displayed, insert the CD.  
NOTE  
If a disc has both music data (CD-DA) and  
MP3/WMA files, playback of the two or three  
file types differs depending on how the disc  
was recorded.  
Inserting CDs into desired tray number  
1. Press and hold the load button (  
)
for about 2 seconds until a beep sound  
is heard.  
Inserting the CD  
2. Press the channel preset button for the  
desired tray number while “WAIT” is  
displayed.  
The CD must be label-side up when  
inserting. The auto-loading mechanism  
will set the CD and begin play.  
The disc number and the track number  
will be displayed.  
3. When “IN” is displayed, insert the CD.  
NOTE  
The CD cannot be inserted to the desired tray  
number if the number is already occupied.  
NOTE  
There will be a short lapse before play begins  
while the player reads the digital signals on  
the CD.  
6-50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
Multiple insertion  
Multiple ejection  
1. Press and hold the CD eject button (  
1. Press and hold the load button (  
)
)
for about 2 seconds until a beep sound  
is heard.  
for about 2 seconds until a beep sound  
is heard.  
The “DISC OUT” display flashes.  
2. When “IN” is displayed, insert the CD.  
2. Press the CD eject button ( ) again  
for less than 5 seconds after the beep  
sound is heard.  
3. When “IN” is displayed again, insert  
the next CD.  
NOTE  
NOTE  
The first-inserted CD will be played  
If the button is not pressed and about 5  
seconds have elapsed while “DISC OUT” is  
flashing, CDs are automatically ejected.  
automatically when:  
l
No other CD is inserted within 15 seconds  
after “IN” is displayed.  
l
The CD trays are full.  
3. Pull out the CD, then the next CD will  
be ejected.  
Ejecting the CD  
Normal ejection  
NOTE  
l
CDs will be ejected starting with the one  
with the lowest number.  
All CDs in the tray will be ejected  
continuously.  
CDs can be ejected when the ignition is  
switched off. Press and hold the CD eject  
button ( ) for about 2 seconds and all  
CDs will eject.  
1. Press the CD eject button ( ). The  
disc number and “DISC OUT” will be  
displayed.  
l
l
2. Pull out the CD.  
NOTE  
When the CD is ejected during play, the next  
CD will be played automatically.  
Playback  
Ejecting CDs from desired tray number  
Press the CD play button ( ) to start  
play when a CD is in the unit.  
If a CD is not in the unit when the CD  
play button ( ) is pressed, “NO DISC”  
will flash on and off.  
1. Press and hold the CD eject button (  
for about 2 seconds until a beep sound  
is heard.  
)
The “DISC OUT” display flashes.  
Fast-forward/Reverse  
2. Press the channel preset button for the  
desired CD number for less than 5  
seconds after the beep sound is heard.  
Press and hold the fast-forward button  
(
) to advance through a track at high  
speed.  
3. Pull out the CD.  
Press and hold the reverse button ( ) to  
reverse through a track at high speed.  
Track search  
Press the track up button ( ) once to skip  
forward to the beginning of the next track.  
6-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
Press the track down button ( ) once to  
skip back to the beginning of the current  
track.  
2. Press the button again to cancel the  
repeat playback.  
During MP3/WMA CD playback  
(Track repeat)  
Disc search  
During music CD playback  
1. Press the repeat button (  
) during  
To change the disc, press the DISC button  
playback to play the current track  
repeatedly. “TRACK RPT” is  
displayed.  
(
or ) during playback.  
During MP3/WMA CD playback  
2. To cancel the repeat playback, press the  
button again after 3 seconds.  
To change the disc, press the DISC button  
(
or ) for 1.5 seconds or more during  
playback.  
(Folder repeat)  
Folder search (during MP3/WMA CD  
playback)  
1. Press the repeat button (  
) during  
playback, and then press the button  
again within 3 seconds to play the  
tracks in the current folder repeatedly.  
“FOLDER RPT” is displayed.  
To change to the previous folder, press the  
folder down button ( ) for less than 1.5  
seconds, or press the folder up button (  
)
for less than 1.5 seconds to advance to the  
next folder.  
2. Press the button again to cancel the  
repeat playback.  
Music scan  
Random playback  
This feature helps to find a program by  
playing about the first 10 seconds of each  
track.  
Tracks are randomly selected and played.  
During music CD playback  
1. Press the random button (  
playback to play the tracks in the CD  
randomly. “RDM” is displayed.  
) during  
Press the scan button (  
playback to start the scan play operation  
(the track number will flash).  
) during  
Press the scan button (  
cancel scan playback.  
) again to  
2. Press the button again to cancel the  
random playback.  
NOTE  
During MP3/WMA CD playback  
(Folder random)  
If the unit is left in scan, normal playback will  
resume where scan was selected.  
1. Press the random button (  
) during  
Repeat playback  
playback to play the tracks in the folder  
randomly. “FOLDER RDM” is  
displayed.  
During music CD playback  
1. Press the repeat button (  
) during  
2. To cancel the random playback, press  
the button again after 3 seconds.  
playback to play the current track  
repeatedly. “RPT” is displayed.  
6-52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
(CD random)  
MP3/WMA CD  
1. Press the random button (  
) during  
playback, and then press the button  
again within 3 seconds to play the  
tracks on the CD randomly.  
Disc number/File  
number/Elapsed time  
“DISC RDM” is displayed.  
Disc tray number  
2. Press the button again to cancel the  
random playback.  
Disc number/Folder  
number/Track number  
Switching the display  
File name  
For files with a file name or other name  
that have been input, the display changes  
in the order of the file names or other  
names each time the display button (  
is pressed during playback.  
Folder name  
)
Album name (ID3 Tag)  
Song name (ID3 Tag)  
Artist name (ID3 Tag)  
Music CD  
Disc number/Track  
number/Elapsed time  
Disc tray number  
File name  
NOTE  
(MP3/WMA CD)  
This unit can only read English (including  
numerals) one-byte characters. Depending on  
the CD writing software used, proper display  
may not be possible.  
Album name  
Artist name  
Display scroll  
Only 8 characters (File name) or 12  
characters (Except file name) can be  
displayed at one time. To display the rest  
of the characters of a long title, press the  
text button (  
the next 12 characters. Press the text  
button ( ) again after the last 12  
). The display scrolls  
characters have been displayed to return  
to the beginning of the title.  
6-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
NOTE  
The displayable number of characters is  
limited. If the number of characters, including  
the file extension (.mp3/.wma), exceeds 32  
characters, it may not be fully displayed.  
Message display  
If “CHECK CD” is displayed, it means  
that there is some CD malfunction. Check  
the CD for damage, dirt, or smudges, and  
then properly reinsert. If the message  
appears again, take the unit to an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer for service.  
qOperating the Auxiliary jackí  
You can connect portable audio units or  
similar products on the market to the  
auxiliary jack to listen to music or audio  
over the vehicle's speakers, refer to  
Auxiliary Input (page 6-59).  
6-54  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
qError Indications  
If you see an error indication on the display, find the cause in the chart. If you cannot clear  
the error indication, take the vehicle to an Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
Indication  
Cause  
Solution  
Insert the CD properly. If the error indication  
does not disappear, consult an Authorized Mazda  
Dealer  
CD is inserted upside down  
CHECK CD  
Insert another CD properly. If the error indication  
does not disappear, consult an Authorized Mazda  
Dealer  
CD is defective  
6-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
With Bluetooth Hands-Free only/  
Bluetooth Hands-Free and navigation  
system  
Use the talk button, pick-up button, and  
hang-up button for navigation system  
sound operation.  
Audio Control Switch  
Operationí  
When the audio unit is turned on,  
operation of the audio unit from the  
steering wheel is possible.  
For details, refer to the separate manual  
“NAVIGATION SYSTEM”.  
NOTE  
Because the audio unit will be turned off under  
the following conditions, the switches will be  
inoperable.  
Pick-up button  
Talk button  
Hang-up button  
l
When the ignition is turned off (LOCK).  
l
When the power button on the audio unit is  
pressed and the audio unit is turned off.  
l
When the CD being played is ejected and  
the audio unit is turned off.  
Without Bluetooth Hands-Free and  
navigation system  
NOTE  
l
The talk button, pick-up button, and hang-  
up button are operable with the audio unit  
turned off.  
l
Mazda has installed this system to prevent  
distraction while driving the vehicle and  
using audio controls on the dashboard.  
Always make safe driving your first priority.  
qAdjusting the Volume  
To increase the volume, pull up the  
volume switch.  
To decrease the volume, press down the  
volume switch.  
6-56  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
Without Bluetooth Hands-Free and  
navigation system  
qChanging the Source  
Press the mode switch (  
) to change  
the audio source (FM1 radio> FM2 radio>  
AM radio> CD player or CD changer>  
SIRIUS1> SIRIUS2> SIRIUS3> AUX>  
BT audio> cyclical).  
Without Bluetooth Hands-Free and  
navigation system  
With Bluetooth Hands-Free only/  
Bluetooth Hands-Free and navigation  
system  
With Bluetooth Hands-Free only/  
Bluetooth Hands-Free and navigation  
system  
6-57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
NOTE  
With Bluetooth Hands-Free only/  
Bluetooth Hands-Free and navigation  
system  
CD, CD changer, SIRIUS digital satellite  
radio, and BT audio modes cannot be selected  
in the following cases:  
· SIRIUS digital satellite radio unit, or BT  
audio unit is not equipped on the audio  
system.  
· CD has not been inserted.  
· With the SIRIUS digital satellite radio, the  
mode which was selected last is displayed.  
Connect a portable audio unit or similar  
product on the market to the auxiliary jack to  
listen to music or audio over the vehicle's  
speakers. Change the audio source to AUX  
mode (page 6-59).  
The audio source is changed to the AUX mode  
only when a commercially available portable  
audio unit is connected to the auxiliary jack.  
When listening to the radio or SIRIUS  
digital satellite radio  
Pull up or press down the seek switch, the  
radio switches to the next/previous stored  
station in the order that it was stored  
(1―6).  
qSeek Switch  
Without Bluetooth Hands-Free and  
navigation system  
Pull up or press down the seek switch for  
about 2 seconds until a beep sound is  
heard to seek all usable stations at a  
higher or lower frequency whether  
programmed or not.  
When playing a CD or BT audio  
Pull up the seek switch to skip to the next  
track.  
Press down the seek switch to repeat the  
current track.  
Pull up or press down and hold the seek  
switch to continuously switch the tracks  
up or down.  
6-58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
qMute Switchí  
AUX Mode (Auxiliary  
input)í  
Press the mute switch ( ) once to mute  
audio, press it again to resume audio  
output.  
You can connect portable audio units or  
similar products on the market to the  
auxiliary jack to listen to music or audio  
over the vehicle's speakers.  
NOTE  
If the ignition is turned off (LOCK) with the  
audio muted, the mute will be canceled.  
Therefore, when the engine is restarted, the  
audio is not muted. To mute the audio again,  
press the mute switch ( ).  
Auxiliary jack  
Without Bluetooth Hands-Free and  
navigation system  
WARNING  
Do not adjust the portable audio unit  
or a similar product while driving the  
vehicle:  
Adjusting the portable audio unit or  
a similar product while driving the  
vehicle is dangerous as it could  
distract your attention from the  
vehicle operation which could lead to  
a serious accident. Always adjust the  
portable audio unit or a similar  
product while the vehicle is stopped.  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-59  
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
2. Pass the connection plug cord through  
the cutout of the console and insert the  
plug into the auxiliary jack.  
CAUTION  
Ø Close the lid when the auxiliary  
jack is not in use to prevent  
foreign objects and liquids from  
penetrating the auxiliary jack.  
Ø Noise may occur during playback  
if the accessory socket equipped  
on the vehicle is used. (If noise  
occurs, do not use the accessory  
socket.)  
Plug  
NOTE  
l
Before using the auxiliary jack, read the  
manufacturer's instructions for the product  
being connected.  
l
Use a commercially-available, non-  
WARNING  
Do not allow the connection plug cord  
to get tangled with the parking brake  
or the shift lever:  
impedance (3.5 ) stereo mini plug for  
connecting the portable audio unit to the  
auxiliary jack. Before using the auxiliary  
jack, read the manufacture's instructions  
for connecting a portable audio unit to the  
auxiliary jack.  
To prevent discharging of the battery, do  
not use the auxiliary input for long periods  
with the engine off or idling.  
Allowing the plug cord to become  
tangled with the parking brake or  
the shift lever is dangerous as it  
could interfere with driving, resulting  
in an accident.  
l
l
Noise may occur depending on the product  
CAUTION  
Do not place objects or apply force to  
the auxiliary jack with the plug  
connected.  
connected to the auxiliary jack.  
With regard to connecting a portable audio  
or similar device to a power source, use the  
battery for the device, not the accessory  
socket.  
l
NOTE  
l
Connecting the auxiliary jack  
Insert the plug to the auxiliary jack  
securely.  
1. Open the console lid.  
l
Insert or remove the plug with the plug  
perpendicular to the auxiliary jack hole.  
l
Insert or remove the plug by holding its  
base.  
To operate the portable audio unit  
1. Switch the ignition to ACC or ON.  
2. Press the power/volume dial to turn the  
audio system on.  
6-60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
3. Press the AUX button (  
) of the  
audio unit or the mode switch (  
)
of the audio control switches on the  
steering wheel to change to the AUX  
mode.  
Audio Unit  
Audio Control  
Switches  
NOTE  
l
Set the volume of the portable audio unit to  
the maximum within the range that the  
sound does not become distorted, then  
adjust the volume using the power/volume  
dial of the audio unit or the up/down switch  
of the audio control switch.  
l
If the connection plug is pulled out from the  
auxiliary jack while in AUX mode, noise  
may occur.  
6-61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Audio System  
Safety Certification  
This CD player is made and tested to meet exacting safety standards. It meets FCC  
requirements and complies with safety performance standards of the U.S. Department of  
Health and Human Services.  
CAUTION  
Ø This CD player should not be adjusted or repaired by anyone except qualified  
service personnel.  
If servicing is required, contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
Ø Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those  
specified herein may result in hazardous laser exposure. Never operate the CD  
player with the top case of the unit removed.  
Ø Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for  
compliance could void the user's authority to operate this equipment.  
NOTE  
For CD player section:  
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two  
conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any  
interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.  
NOTE  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,  
pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection  
against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can  
radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions,  
may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that  
interference will not occur in a particular installation.  
6-62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Bluetooth Audio  
Applicable Bluetooth specification  
Ver. 2.0 or higher  
Bluetooth Audioí  
qWhat is Bluetooth Audio?  
Audio profile  
l
A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution  
Profile) Ver. 1.0  
AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control  
Profile) Ver. 1.0  
Bluetooth audio outline  
By programming portable audio devices  
equipped with the Bluetooth  
communication function to the vehicle's  
Bluetooth unit, you can listen to music or  
audio recorded on these audio devices  
from the vehicle's speakers.  
After programming, operate the audio  
system's control panel or the navigation  
system to play/stop the music or audio.  
l
A2DP is a profile which transmits only  
audio to the Bluetooth unit. If your  
Bluetooth audio device corresponds only  
to A2DP, but not AVRCP, you cannot  
operate it using the control panel of the  
vehicle's audio or navigation systems. In  
this case, the Bluetooth audio device can  
be operated by controlling the device  
itself, the same as when a portable audio  
system without the Bluetooth  
CAUTION  
Ø Always program audio devices to  
the Bluetooth audio system while  
the vehicle is stopped.  
communication function is connected to  
the AUX terminal.  
Ø Because only specified Bluetooth  
audio devices can be used, consult  
an Authorized Mazda Dealer when  
purchasing or changing devices.  
Bluetooth audio devices which  
correspond to specified Bluetooth  
versions and profiles can be  
Bluetooth-connected to the  
vehicle's Bluetooth unit, however,  
even among these devices are ones  
which cannot be Bluetooth-  
connected or have limited  
Function  
Playback  
A2DP  
No  
A2DP+AVRCP  
Yes  
Pause  
No  
Yes  
File (Track) up/down  
No  
Yes  
Yes: Available  
No: Not available  
functionality. Each device to be  
used with the vehicle's Bluetooth  
unit needs to be checked  
individually for compatibility.  
Consult an Authorized Mazda  
Dealer concerning device  
Bluetooth is the registered trademark of  
Bluetooth SIG. Inc.  
compatibility.  
Phone: 800-430-0153  
Web: www.MazdaUSA.com/  
bluetooth  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-63  
Interior Comfort  
Bluetooth Audio  
NOTE  
qBluetooth Audio preparation  
l
It may not be possible to play a Bluetooth  
Bluetooth audio device set-up  
audio device if it is placed anywhere  
transmission is compromised, such as  
inside a metal container or the trunk. Move  
the Bluetooth audio device to a location  
where transmission is possible.  
Bluetooth audio programming, changes,  
deletions, and display of programmed  
device information can be performed.  
1. The mode changes as follows each  
time the audio control dial is pressed.  
Select “BT SETUP”.  
l
Battery consumption of Bluetooth audio  
devices is higher while Bluetooth-  
connected.  
l
If a non-Bluetooth device is to be used, a  
Standard audio-equipped model  
commercially-available Bluetooth adapter  
is required. When playing an audio device  
with a Bluetooth adapter installed,  
*1  
programming of the audio device may not  
be possible or audio may not be heard from  
the vehicle speakers if the connection of the  
adapter and the device is poor. If this  
happens, check if the Bluetooth adapter is  
properly connected.  
*1  
*1  
*1 *2  
*2  
6-64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Bluetooth Audio  
Display  
Mode  
Pairing  
Function  
Bose Sound System-equipped model  
Bluetooth  
PAIR DEVICE  
program  
mode  
audio device  
programming  
*1  
Changing link  
to Bluetooth  
audio device  
*1  
Link change  
mode  
LINK CHANGE  
PAIR DELETE  
Deleting link  
to Bluetooth  
audio device  
Pairing  
deletion mode  
Displaying  
vehicle's  
Bluetooth unit  
information  
Device  
information  
display mode  
DEVICE INFO  
3. Press the audio control dial to  
determine the mode.  
*1  
Bluetooth audio device programming  
*1  
Any Bluetooth audio device must be  
programmed to the vehicle's Bluetooth  
unit before it can be listened to over the  
vehicle's speakers.  
*1*2  
*2  
A maximum of seven devices including  
Bluetooth audio devices and hands-free  
mobile phones can be programmed to one  
vehicle.  
*1 Depending on the mode selected, the  
indication changes.  
*2 Depending on the model, this  
function, may not be available.  
2. Turn the audio control dial and select a  
desired mode.  
6-65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Bluetooth Audio  
NOTE  
3. Input the PIN code of your Bluetooth  
audio device by pressing channel  
preset buttons 1 to 4 while “PIN 0000”  
is displayed.  
l
Always perform Bluetooth audio device  
programming while the vehicle is stopped.  
l
If a Bluetooth device has already been  
programmed to the vehicle as a hands-free  
mobile phone, it does not need to be  
programmed again when using the device  
as a Bluetooth audio device. Conversely, it  
does not need to be programmed again as a  
hands-free mobile phone if it has already  
been programmed as a Bluetooth audio  
device.  
Press channel preset button 1 to input  
the first digit, 2 for the second, 3 for  
the third, and 4 for the forth. For  
example, if the PIN code were “4213”,  
press channel preset button 1 four  
times (1, 2, 3, 4), button 2 twice (1, 2),  
button 3 once (1), and button 4 three  
times (1, 2, 3). If the “PIN 0000”  
display disappears before finishing the  
PIN code input, repeat the procedure  
from Step 1.  
l
The transmission range of a Bluetooth  
audio device is about 10 m (32 ft).  
Therefore, if there is another Bluetooth  
audio device within a 10 m (32 ft) radius of  
the vehicle, the device may be identified  
and programmed instead.  
4. Press the audio control dial while the  
input PIN code is displayed.  
“PAIRING” flashes on the display.  
l
Device registration can also be done using  
voice recognition (page 6-76).  
5. Operate the Bluetooth audio device and  
set it to the program mode while  
“PAIRING” is flashing.  
Concerning the operation of a Bluetooth  
audio device itself, refer to its instruction  
manual.  
Some Bluetooth audio devices have PIN  
codes (four digits). Refer to the audio  
device's instruction manual because the  
programming procedure differs depending  
on whether it has a PIN code or not.  
6. When the programming is completed,  
“
” and “PAIR SUCCESS” are  
displayed after about 10-30 seconds,  
after which “PAIR SUCCESS”  
continues to be displayed for three  
seconds, and then the unit returns to the  
normal display.  
Programming a Bluetooth audio device  
which has a PIN code (4 digits)  
1. Using the audio control dial, select the  
pairing program mode  
“PAIR DEVICE” in the “BT SETUP”  
mode. (Refer to  
“Bluetooth audio device set-up” for  
details.)  
2. Press the audio control dial to  
determine the mode.  
After “ENTER PIN” is displayed on  
the information display for 3 seconds,  
“PIN 0000” is displayed and the PIN  
code can be input.  
6-66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Bluetooth Audio  
NOTE  
6. When the programming is completed,  
l
If the programming failed, “Err” flashes  
“
” and “PAIR SUCCESS” are  
for three seconds then it returns to the  
normal display.  
displayed after about 10-30 seconds,  
after which “PAIR SUCCESS”  
continues to be displayed for three  
seconds, and then the unit returns to the  
normal display.  
l
Programming cannot be performed while  
the vehicle is moving. If you attempt to  
perform programming while the vehicle is  
moving, “PAIR DISABLE” is displayed and  
it returns to the normal display.  
If seven Bluetooth audio devices have  
already been programmed to the vehicle,  
programming cannot be performed and  
“MEMORY FULL” is displayed. Delete  
one programmed device to program  
another one.  
NOTE  
l
If the programming failed, “Err” flashes  
for three seconds then returns to the normal  
display.  
Programming cannot be performed while  
the vehicle is moving. If you attempt to  
perform programming, “PAIR DISABLE”  
is displayed and it returns to the normal  
display.  
If seven Bluetooth audio devices have  
already been programmed to the vehicle,  
programming cannot be performed and  
“MEMORY FULL” is displayed. Delete  
one programmed device to program  
another one.  
l
l
Programming a Bluetooth audio device  
which does not have a PIN code (4  
digits)  
l
1. Using the audio control dial, select the  
pairing program mode  
“PAIR DEVICE” in the “BT SETUP”  
mode. (Refer to  
“Bluetooth audio set up” for details.)  
Changing the link to a Bluetooth audio  
device  
2. Press the audio control dial to  
determine the mode.  
After “ENTER PIN” is displayed on  
the information display for 3 seconds,  
“PIN 0000” is displayed and the PIN  
code can be input.  
If several devices have been programmed,  
the Bluetooth unit links the device last  
programmed. If you would like to link a  
different programmed device, it is  
necessary to change the link. The order of  
device priority after the link has been  
changed is maintained even when the  
ignition is switched off (LOCK).  
3. Press the audio control dial while  
“PIN 0000” is displayed.  
“PAIRING” flashes on the display.  
1. Using the audio control dial, select the  
link change mode “LINK CHANGE”  
in the “BT SETUP” mode. (Refer to  
“Bluetooth audio device set-up” for  
details.)  
4. Operate the Bluetooth audio device and  
set it to the program mode while  
“PAIRING” is flashing.  
5. As the Bluetooth audio device requires  
a PIN code, input “0000”.  
2. Press the audio control dial to  
determine the mode.  
6-67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Bluetooth Audio  
3. The name of the currently linked  
Bluetooth audio device is displayed.  
If no Bluetooth audio device is  
currently linked, the name of the first  
device among the programmed devices  
is displayed.  
6. If the link to the desired device is  
successful, the “ ” symbol is  
displayed again, together with  
“LINK CHANGED”.  
“LINK CHANGED” is displayed for  
three seconds, then it returns to the  
normal display.  
4. Turn the audio control dial to select the  
name of the device you would like to  
link.  
NOTE  
l
If a hands-free type mobile phone has been  
the most recently programmed device, the  
Bluetooth unit links this device. If you  
would like to use a Bluetooth audio type  
device which has been previously  
programmed to the Bluetooth unit, the link  
must be changed to this device.  
If an error occurs while trying to link a  
device, “Err” is displayed for 3 seconds,  
and the display returns to  
Device name 1  
Device name 2  
Device name 3  
l
“LINK CHANGE”. If this occurs, check the  
programming status of the Bluetooth audio  
device and the location of the device in the  
vehicle (not in the trunk or a metal-type  
box), and then try the link operation again.  
Device name 4  
Device name 5  
Device name 6  
Device name 7  
l
Device selection can also be done using  
voice recognition (page 6-85).  
How to confirm the device currently  
linked  
Switch to the link-change mode. (Refer to  
“Changing the link to a Bluetooth audio  
device”)  
The device name displayed first is the  
device which is currently linked.  
5. Press the audio control dial to select the  
device you would like to link.  
The “ ” symbol disappears, and  
“PAIRING” flashes in the display.  
Deleting the link to a Bluetooth audio  
device  
NOTE  
1. Using the audio control dial, select the  
pairing delete mode “PAIR DELETE”  
in the “BT SETUP” mode. (Refer to  
“Bluetooth audio device set-up” for  
details.)  
When “GO BACK” is selected and the audio  
control dial is pressed, the display returns to  
“LINK CHANGE”.  
2. Press the audio control dial to  
determine the mode.  
6-68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Bluetooth Audio  
3. The name of the first device among the  
programmed devices is displayed.  
NOTE  
The display changes as follows depending on  
whether the audio control dial is rotated  
clockwise or counterclockwise.  
-Clockwise: “SURE ? YES” displayed  
-Counterclockwise: “SURE ? NO” displayed  
4. Rotate the audio control dial and select  
the name of the programmed device  
you would like to delete.  
7. Press the audio control dial to delete  
the selected device.  
Device name 1  
Device name 2  
Device name 3  
NOTE  
Select “GO BACK” and press the audio  
control dial to return to the “PAIR DELETE”  
display.  
8. “PAIR DELETED” is displayed for 3  
seconds after the deletion is completed,  
and then it returns to the normal  
display.  
Device name 4  
Device name 5  
NOTE  
Device name 6  
Device name 7  
If an error occurs while trying to delete the  
programmed device, “Err” flashes in the  
display for 2 seconds and then it returns to the  
“LINK DELETE” display.  
Bluetooth audio device information  
display  
1. Using the audio control dial, select the  
pair device information display mode  
“PAIR DEVICE” in the “BT SETUP”  
mode. (Refer to  
“Bluetooth audio device set-up” for  
details.)  
NOTE  
Only the names of programmed devices can be  
displayed. If only one device is programmed,  
only the name for this device is displayed.  
5. If a selection other than “GO BACK”  
is made and the audio control dial is  
pressed, “SURE ? NO” is displayed.  
2. Press the audio control dial to  
determine the mode.  
6. Rotate the audio control dial clockwise  
and switch the display to  
“SURE ? YES”.  
3. The name of the Bluetooth unit device  
is displayed.  
6-69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Bluetooth Audio  
4. Rotate the audio control dial to select  
the information for the Bluetooth unit  
which you would like to view.  
2. Turn on the Bluetooth audio device's  
power.  
Make sure that the “ ” symbol is  
displayed in the information display.  
The symbol is not displayed if an  
unprogrammed Bluetooth audio device  
is being used or the vehicle's Bluetooth  
unit has a malfunction.  
Device name  
3. Press the AUX button to switch the  
Bluetooth audio mode to “BT”.  
BT address  
4. The audio recorded to the Bluetooth  
audio device begins playback.  
NOTE  
l
If the mode is switched from Bluetooth  
NOTE  
audio mode to another mode (radio mode),  
audio playback from the Bluetooth audio  
device stops.  
When “GO BACK” is selected, the display  
returns to “DEVICE INFO”.  
l
If a call is received on a hands-free mobile  
5. When the audio control dial is pressed  
the information is displayed.  
phone during playback from the Bluetooth  
audio device, the playback is stopped.  
Playback from the Bluetooth audio device  
resumes after the call ends.  
qHow to use the Bluetooth Audio  
system  
Playback  
Switching to Bluetooth audio mode  
1. To listen to a Bluetooth audio device  
over the vehicle's speaker system,  
switch the mode to Bluetooth audio  
mode. (Refer to  
To listen music or voice audio recorded to  
a Bluetooth audio device, switch to the  
Bluetooth audio mode to operate the  
audio device using the audio system or  
navigation system control panels.  
“Switching to Bluetooth audio mode”)  
Any Bluetooth audio device must be  
programmed to the vehicle's Bluetooth  
unit before it can be used. (Refer to  
“Bluetooth audio device programming”)  
2. To stop playback, press the Play/Pause  
(
) button.  
3. Press the button again to resume  
playback.  
1. Switch the ignition to ACC or ON.  
Selecting a file (track)  
During playback  
Short-press the track down button ( ):  
Selects the beginning of the current file  
(track).  
Short-press the track up button ( ):  
Selects the next file (track).  
6-70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Bluetooth Audio  
While playback is paused  
Short-press the track-down button ( ):  
Selects the file (track) previous to the  
current one.  
Short-press the track up button ( ):  
Selects the next file (track).  
NOTE  
l
If the track down button ( ) is pressed  
while the first file (track) in the folder is  
displayed, the audio unit displays the last  
file (track) in the folder.  
l
Conversely, if the track up button ( ) is  
pressed while the last file (track) in the  
folder is displayed, the audio unit displays  
the first file (track) in the folder.  
6-71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Bluetooth Hands-Free  
Bluetooth Hands-Freeí  
CAUTION  
The types of devices (Mobile phone)  
which can be connected to the  
hands-free unit are limited, so before  
purchasing or changing your device  
(Mobile phone) model, consult an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
Devices (Mobile phone) which can be  
connected to the hands-free system  
need to be compliant with Bluetooth  
specifications and the appropriate  
profile, however, even among these  
Bluetooth devices (Mobile phone) are  
some which will not connect with  
your Mazda or will have limited  
function. Therefore, consult Mazda  
Bluetooth Hands-Free Customer  
Service for information regarding  
device (Mobile phone) compatibility:  
Phone: 800-430-0153  
qWhat is Bluetooth Hands-Free?  
Bluetooth Hands-Free Outline  
By connecting a Bluetooth equipped  
device (Mobile phone) to the hands-free  
unit equipped on the vehicle, making and  
receiving calls are possible using the talk  
button, pick-up button and hang-up button  
located on the steering wheel, and saying  
the voice commands.  
WARNING  
Perform phonebook registration related  
operations while the vehicle is parked:  
Performing phonebook registration  
while driving the vehicle could be a  
distraction to your driving and result  
in an accident. In addition, a mistake  
in performing the phonebook  
Web: www.MazdaUSA.com/  
bluetooth  
operation could result in the loss of  
important data.  
Applicable Bluetooth specification  
Ver. 2.0 or higher  
Response profile  
Bluetooth equipped device (Mobile  
phone)  
l
HFP (Hands Free Profile) Ver. 1.5  
DUN (Dial-up Networking Profile)  
A Bluetooth equipped device (Mobile  
phone) communicates with the hands-free  
unit equipped on the vehicle using radio  
transmission (Bluetooth).  
l
Ver. 1.1  
l
PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile)  
Ver. 1.0  
For example, if the device (Mobile phone)  
is placed in a coat pocket, the phone calls  
can be made through your mobile service  
without direct use of the device (Mobile  
phone).  
l
A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution  
Profile) Ver. 1.0  
AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control  
Profile) Ver. 1.0  
l
6-72  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Bluetooth Hands-Free  
Bluetooth is the registered trademark of  
Bluetooth SIG. Inc.  
Talk button operations  
A short press or a long press of the talk  
button is used depending on the operation  
status as follows:  
NOTE  
l
If the ignition is turned off (LOCK) during  
l
Short press (Press the button less than  
a hands-free call, the line is transferred to  
the device (Mobile phone) automatically.  
0.7 sec.)  
l
Long press (Press the button 0.7 sec. or  
l
If the device (Mobile phone) is in a location  
more.)  
where radio reception is difficult such as a  
metal container or in the trunk, the call may  
not be connected using Bluetooth. If  
Information display  
Telephone numbers, Bluetooth Hands-  
Free messages, and operation status are  
displayed.  
communication is not possible, change the  
location of the device (Mobile phone).  
qComponent Parts  
Bluetooth Hands-Free consists of the  
following parts:  
l
Talk button  
Pick-up button  
Hang-up button  
Information display  
Microphone  
Audio unit/Navigation system  
l
l
l
l
l
Talk button, Pick-Up button and Hang-  
Up button  
Microphone  
Basic functions of Bluetooth Hands-Free  
can be used such as making calls or  
hanging up using the talk button, pick-up  
button and hang-up button on the steering  
wheel.  
The microphone is used for speaking  
voice commands or exchanging  
conversation.  
Microphone  
Pick-up button  
Talk button  
Hang-up button  
6-73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Bluetooth Hands-Free  
l
Audio unit/Navigation system  
Dialects or different wording other than  
hands-free prompts cannot be  
recognized by voice recognition. Speak  
in the wording specified by the voice  
commands.  
The audio unit or navigation system is  
used for adjusting the volume.  
qVoice  
Please be aware that the voice recognition  
may error despite following the above  
points.  
To prevent the deterioration in voice  
recognition rate and voice quality, the  
following points must be observed:  
l
It is not necessary to face the  
qFunction Restrictions While  
microphone or approach it. Speak the  
voice commands while maintaining a  
safe driving position.  
Using Bluetooth Hands-Free  
Functions are limited as follows while  
Bluetooth Hands-Free is being used.  
l
Close the windows and/or the  
l
Beep sound and voice guidance related  
to the audio unit and navigation system  
are not heard.  
Beep sound related to the A/C  
operation is not heard.  
The navigation system's voice  
recognition command does not  
function.  
moonroof to reduce loud noises from  
outside the vehicle, or turn down the  
airflow of the climate control system  
while Bluetooth Hands-Free is being  
used. Voice recognition may not  
function correctly or voice quality may  
deteriorate under the following  
conditions.  
l
l
l
A passenger is speaking.  
Driving with the window and/or the  
l
qHow to Use This Section  
moonroof open.  
Driving on bumpy roads.  
Noise outside of the vehicle is loud.  
(Construction sites, inside tunnels,  
excess oncoming traffic, or heavy  
rain.)  
Operation noise from turn signals,  
wipers, or the horn is heard.  
A/C airflow is strong or wind is  
blowing on the microphone.  
There is noise coming from cargo  
loaded in the vehicle.  
Descriptions in the text are as follows:  
Say: Voice commands to be spoken by  
you.  
Prompt: Voice guidance output from the  
speaker.  
A beep sound [Beep] is output from the  
speaker. Speak after the beep sound is  
heard.  
Example)  
Say: [Beep] “Dial”  
Prompt: “Number, please”  
Say: [Beep] “XXXXXXXXXXX (Ex.  
“555-1234”) (Telephone number)”  
l
l
l
l
l
l
Voice commands may not be  
recognized depending on the voice. If  
the voice commands are not recognized  
correctly, repeat the commands in a  
louder voice, at a natural pace, as if  
speaking to another person.  
Bluetooth Hands-Free Activation  
Method  
Without the navigation system  
Press the pick-up button or talk button  
(Short press).  
6-74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Bluetooth Hands-Free  
With the navigation system  
Cancel  
Method 1  
Press the pick-up button.  
Method 2  
The Bluetooth Hands-Free system  
transitions to idling status if the following  
operation is performed while the system is  
activating.  
Press the hang-up button, or the talk  
button (Long press).  
1. Press the talk button (Short press).  
2. Say: [Beep] “Telephone” or “Phone”  
The hands-free system is activated.  
Functions of the hands-free telephone,  
such as making and receiving calls, can be  
used after the activation. (For details on  
the telephone functions, refer to “Basic  
Bluetooth Hands-Free Operation” or  
“Convenient Use of the Hands-Free  
System”.)  
NOTE  
(With the navigation system)  
When the talk button is pressed with a long  
press, the hands-free system is activated  
without having to speak “Telephone” or  
“Phone”.  
For vehicles with a navigation system, the  
navigation system is activated by speaking the  
voice recognition command of the navigation  
system after pressing the talk button (Short  
press). For voice recognition details with the  
navigation system, refer to the separate  
“NAVIGATION SYSTEM MANUAL”.  
Tutorial  
The tutorial explains how to use  
Bluetooth Hands-Free.  
To activate the tutorial, do the following:  
1. Activate Bluetooth Hands-Free (page  
6-74).  
2. Say: [Beep] “Tutorial”  
3. Follow the prompts to receive the  
appropriate voice guidance  
instructions.  
6-75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Bluetooth Hands-Free  
9. Prompt: “French (Desired language)  
selected, returning to main menu”  
(Spoken in the newly selected  
language).  
Basic Bluetooth Hands-  
Free Operation  
q
Bluetooth Hands-Free Preparation  
Method 2  
Language setting  
1. Activate Bluetooth Hands-Free (page  
6-74).  
English, Spanish, and Canadian French  
are available. If the language setting is  
changed, all of the voice guidance and  
voice input commands are done in the  
selected language.  
2. Say: [Beep] “French” (Say the desired  
language: “English”, “French”, or  
“Spanish”.) (Change the desired  
language by saying the language  
name.)  
NOTE  
If the language setting is changed, device  
3. Prompt: “Would you like to change  
the language to French (Desired  
language) ?”  
registration is maintained.  
Phonebook records are not cleared, but each  
language has a separate phonebook.  
Therefore, entries created in one language will  
need to be re-entered in the phonebook of the  
new language.  
4. Say: [Beep] “Yes”  
5. Prompt: “Please wait. Switching to  
French phonebook. French selected,  
returning to main menu” (Spoken in  
the newly selected language).  
Method 1  
1. Activate Bluetooth Hands-Free (page  
6-74).  
Device programming (Pairing)  
To use Bluetooth Hands-Free, the device  
has to be programmed to the hands-free  
unit using the following procedure.  
A maximum of seven devices including  
hands-free mobile phones and Bluetooth  
audio devices can be programmed to one  
vehicle.  
2. Say: [Beep] “Setup”  
3. Prompt: “Select one of the following:  
Pairing options, confirmation prompts,  
language, passcode, select phone or  
select music player.”  
4. Say: [Beep] “Language”  
5. Prompt: “Select a language: English,  
French, or Spanish.”  
6. Say: [Beep] “French” (Speak the  
desired language: “English”, “French”  
or “Spanish”)  
7. Prompt: “French (Desired language)  
selected. Is this correct?”  
8. Say: [Beep] “Yes”  
6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Bluetooth Hands-Free  
NOTE  
9. Say: [Beep] “XXXX” (Speak an  
arbitrary 4-digit pairing code. This can  
be any combination of 4 numbers.)  
l
A device can be programmed only when the  
vehicle is parked.  
l
If a Bluetooth device has already been  
programmed to the vehicle as a Bluetooth  
audio device, it does not need to be  
programmed again when using the device  
as a hands-free mobile phone. Conversely,  
it does not need to be programmed again as  
a Bluetooth audio device if it has already  
been programmed as a hands-free mobile  
phone.  
Since the communication range of a  
Bluetooth equipped device is about 10  
meters (32 ft), if a device is placed within a  
10-meter (32 ft) radius of the vehicle, it may  
be detected/programmed unintentionally  
while another device is being programmed.  
NOTE  
Record the code as it will be used to program  
your device in Step 16.  
10. Prompt: “Pairing code XXXX (4-  
digit number). Is this correct?”  
11. Say: [Beep] “Yes” or “No”  
12. If “Yes”, go to Step 13.  
l
If “No”, the procedure returns to Step  
8.  
13. Prompt: “Start pairing procedure on  
the device. See the device manual for  
instructions.”  
14. Using the device, perform a search  
for the Bluetooth device (Peripheral  
device).  
1. Activate the Bluetooth application of  
the device.  
NOTE  
NOTE  
For the operation of the device, refer to its  
instruction manual.  
For the operation of the device, refer to its  
instruction manual.  
2. Activate Bluetooth Hands-Free (page  
6-74).  
15. Select “Mazda” from the device list  
searched by the device.  
3. Say: [Beep] “Setup”  
16. Input the 4-digit pairing code set in  
Step 9 to the device.  
4. Prompt: “Select one of the following:  
Pairing options, confirmation prompts,  
language, passcode, select phone or  
select music player.”  
17. Prompt: “Please say the name of the  
device after the beep.”  
18. Say: [Beep] “XXXX - - -” (Speak a  
“device tag”, an arbitrary name for  
the device.)  
5. Say: [Beep] “Pairing options”  
6. Prompt: “Select one of the following:  
Pair, edit, delete, or list.”  
Example: “Stan's device.”  
7. Say: [Beep] “Pair”  
NOTE  
Speak a programmed “device tag” within 10  
seconds.  
If more than two devices are to be  
programmed, they cannot be programmed with  
the same or similar “device tag”.  
8. Prompt: “Please say a 4-digit pairing  
code.”  
6-77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Bluetooth Hands-Free  
19. Prompt: “Adding XXXXXX - - -  
(Ex. “Stan's device”) (Device tag). Is  
this correct?”  
8. Prompt: “Dialing”  
qReceiving an Incoming Call  
20. Say: [Beep] “Yes”  
1. Prompt: “Incoming call, press the  
pickup button to answer”.  
21. Prompt: “Pairing complete”  
2. To accept the call, press the pick-up  
button.  
To reject the call, press the hang-up  
button.  
After a device is registered, the system  
automatically identifies the device. By  
activating Bluetooth Hands-Free again, or  
by activating Bluetooth Hands-Free first  
after switching the ignition from off  
(LOCK) to ACC, the system reads out a  
voice guidance, “XXXXXX - - - (Ex.  
“Stan's device”) (Device tag) is  
qHanging Up a Call  
Press the hang-up button during the call.  
Beep will confirm that call is ended.  
connected”.  
NOTE  
qVolume Adjustment  
Device registration can also be done by  
operating the audio unit or panel buttons on  
the navigation unit. Refer to “Bluetooth Audio  
Preparation” (page 6-64)(For audio unit) or  
the separate manual “NAVIGATION  
SYSTEM” (For navigation unit).  
Turn the power/volume dial of the audio  
unit or navigation system to adjust the  
volume.  
Turn the power/volume dial to the right to  
increase volume, to the left to decrease it.  
Audio unit  
Navigation system  
qMaking a Call Using a Telephone  
Number  
1. Activate Bluetooth Hands-Free (page  
6-74).  
2. Say: [Beep] “Dial”  
3. Prompt: “Number, please”  
4. Say: [Beep] “XXXXXXXXXXX (Ex.  
“555-1234”) (Telephone number)”  
5. Prompt: “Dialing XXXXXXXXXXX  
(Ex. “555-1234”) (Telephone number)  
is this correct?”  
NOTE  
l
The volume can also be adjusted using the  
volume button on the steering wheel.  
l
The music volume of the audio unit and the  
navigation system cannot be adjusted while  
Bluetooth Hands-Free is being used.  
6. Say: [Beep] “Yes” or “No”.  
7. When “Yes” is spoken, the procedure  
proceeds to Step 8.  
When “No” is spoken, the procedure  
returns to Step 3.  
6-78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Bluetooth Hands-Free  
q
Voice Guidance Interrupt Operation  
Convenient Use of the  
Voice guidance can be stopped by  
Hands-Free System  
pressing the talk button (Short press)  
while it is being heard. A new voice input  
command can then be spoken by the user.  
· Press the talk button (Short press).  
qPhonebook Usage  
Phonebook registration  
Phone numbers can be registered to the  
Bluetooth Hands-Free phonebook.  
qHelp Function Use  
The help function informs the user of all  
the available voice commands under the  
current conditions.  
1. Activate Bluetooth Hands-Free (page  
6-74).  
2. Say: [Beep] “Phonebook”  
1. Press the talk button (Short press).  
3. Prompt: “Select one of the following:  
New entry, edit, list names, delete,  
erase all or import contact.”  
2. Say: [Beep] “Help”  
3. Follow the prompts to receive the  
appropriate voice guidance  
instructions.  
4. Say: [Beep] “New entry”  
5. Prompt: “Name please.”  
6. Say: [Beep] “XXXXX... (Ex. “Mary's  
phone”)” (Say a voice tag for the name  
registered.)  
7. Prompt: “Adding XXXXX... (Ex.  
“Mary's phone”) (Registered voice  
tag). Is this correct?”  
8. Say: [Beep] “Yes”  
9. Prompt: “Home, Work, Mobile, or  
Other?”  
10. Say: [Beep] “Mobile” (Say “Home”,  
“Work”, “Mobile”, or “Other”, for the  
desired location to be registered.)  
11. Prompt: “Mobile” (Location to be  
registered). Is this correct?  
12. Say: [Beep] “Yes”  
13. Prompt: “Number, please.”  
14. Say: [Beep] “XXXXXXXXXXX  
(Ex. “555-1234”)” (Say the phone  
number to be registered.)  
6-79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Bluetooth Hands-Free  
15. Prompt: “XXXXXXXXXXX (Ex.  
“555-1234”) (Phone number  
8. Say: [Beep] “XXXXX... (Ex. “Mary's  
phone”)” (Say a voice tag for the name  
registered.)  
registration). Is this correct? ”  
16. Say: [Beep] “Yes”  
9. Prompt: “Adding XXXXX... (Ex.  
“Mary's phone”) (Voice tag). Is this  
correct?”  
17. Prompt: “Number saved. Would you  
like to add another number for this  
entry?”  
10. Say: [Beep] “Yes”  
18. Say: [Beep] “Yes” or “No”.  
11. Prompt: “Number saved. Would you  
like to import another contact?”  
19. If “Yes”, an additional phone number  
registration can be made for the same  
entry.  
12. Say: [Beep] “Yes” or “No”  
13. If “Yes”, the procedure proceeds to  
If “No”, the procedure proceeds to  
Step 20.  
Step 5.  
If “No”, the procedure proceeds to  
20. Prompt: “Returning to main menu.”  
Step 14.  
Import contact  
14. Prompt: “Returning to main menu.”  
Phonebook data from your device (Mobile  
phone) can be sent and registered to your  
Bluetooth Hands-Free phonebook using  
Bluetooth.  
Making calls using the phonebook  
Telephone calls can be made by saying  
the name of a person (voice tag) whose  
phone number has been registered in  
Bluetooth Hands-Free in advance.  
For the phonebook setting method, refer  
to (page 6-83).  
1. Activate Bluetooth Hands-Free (page  
6-74).  
2. Say: [Beep] “Phonebook”  
1. Activate Bluetooth Hands-Free (page  
6-74).  
3. Prompt: “Select one of the following:  
New entry, edit, list names, delete,  
erase all or import contact.”  
2. Say: [Beep] “Call”  
4. Say: [Beep] “Import contact”  
3. Prompt: “Name please.”  
5. Prompt: “Ready to receive a contact  
from the phone.”  
4. Say: [Beep] “XXXXX... (Ex. “John's  
phone”)” (Say a voice tag registered in  
the phonebook.)  
6. Device (Mobile phone) operation:  
Select one entry from the phonebook  
and send it using Bluetooth.  
5. Prompt: “Calling XXXXX... (Ex.  
“John's phone”) XXXX (Ex. “at  
home”). Is this correct?” (Voice tag and  
phone number location registered in  
phonebook).  
7. Prompt: “X (Number of locations  
which include data) numbers have been  
imported. What name would you like  
to use for these numbers?”  
6. Say: [Beep] “Yes”  
7. Prompt: “Dialing”  
6-80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Bluetooth Hands-Free  
3. Prompt: “Microphone unmuted”  
qRedialing Function  
Redialing the number of the person  
previously dialed using the phone is  
possible.  
qTransferring a Call  
Transferring a call from Hands-Free to  
a device (Mobile phone)  
1. Activate Bluetooth Hands-Free (page  
6-74).  
Communication between the hands-free  
unit and a device (Mobile phone) is  
canceled, and the line can be switched to a  
standard call using a device (Mobile  
phone).  
2. Say: [Beep] “Redial”  
3. Prompt: “Dialing”  
qEmergency Calls  
1. Press the talk button (Short press).  
2. Say: [Beep] “Transfer call”  
A call can be made to the emergency  
phone number (911) using the voice input  
command.  
3. Prompt: “Transferred call to phone”  
Transferring a call from a device  
(Mobile phone) to Hands-Free  
1. Activate Bluetooth Hands-Free (page  
6-74).  
Communication between devices (Mobile  
phone) can be switched to Bluetooth  
Hands-Free.  
2. Say: [Beep] “Emergency”  
3. Prompt: “Dialing“911”, is this  
correct?”  
1. Press the talk button (Short press).  
4. Say: [Beep] “Yes”  
2. Say: [Beep] “Transfer call”  
5. Prompt: “Dialing”  
3. Prompt: “Transferred call to Hands  
Free system”  
qRefusing an Incoming Call  
qMulti-Call Functions  
For incoming call refusal, refer to  
“Receiving an incoming call” (page 6-78).  
Call waiting  
A call can be interrupted to receive an  
incoming call from a third party.  
qMute  
The microphone can be muted during a  
call.  
Call interrupt  
A call can be switched to a new incoming  
call.  
1. Press the talk button (Short press).  
2. Say: [Beep] “Mute”  
1. Press the pick-up button.  
3. Prompt: “Microphone muted”  
Canceling mute  
2. Prompt: “Swapping calls.”  
1. Press the talk button (Short press).  
2. Say: [Beep] “Mute off”  
6-81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Bluetooth Hands-Free  
NOTE  
Redialing function  
l
To refuse an incoming call, press the hang-  
1. Press the talk button (Short press).  
2. Say: [Beep] “Redial”  
3. Prompt: “Dialing”  
Switching calls  
up button.  
After receiving a new incoming call, the  
previous call is placed on hold.  
l
Making a call using a telephone  
number  
Switching back to the previous call can  
also be done.  
1. Press the talk button (Short press).  
2. Say: [Beep] “Dial”  
Method 1  
3. Prompt: “Number please”  
1. Press the pick-up button.  
2. Prompt: “Swapping calls.”  
Method 2  
4. Say: [Beep] “XXXXXXXXXXX (Ex.  
“555-1234”) (Telephone number)”  
5. Prompt: “Dialing XXXXXXXXXXX  
(Ex. “555-1234”) (Telephone number)  
is this correct?”  
1. Press the talk button (Short press).  
2. Say: [Beep] “Swap call”  
3. Prompt: “Swapping calls”  
6. Say: [Beep] “Yes” or “No”.  
7. When “Yes” is spoken, the procedure  
proceeds to Step 8.  
When “No” is spoken, the procedure  
returns to Step 3.  
Ending the current call  
Press the hang-up button during the call.  
qThree-Way Call Function  
8. Prompt: “Dialing”  
Initiate  
Making calls using the phonebook  
1. Press the talk button (Short press).  
2. Say: [Beep] “Call”  
When two separate parties are established.  
1. Press the talk button (Short press).  
2. Say: [Beep] “Join call”  
3. Prompt: “Joining calls”  
Terminate  
3. Prompt: “Name please.”  
4. Say: [Beep] “XXXXX... (Ex. “John's  
phone”)” (Say a voice tag registered in  
the phonebook.)  
During a call between three parties.  
Press the hang-up button.  
5. Prompt: “Calling XXXXX... (Ex.  
“John's phone”) XXXX (Ex. “at  
home”). Is this correct?” (Voice tag and  
phone number location registered in  
phonebook).  
6. Say: [Beep] “Yes”  
7. Prompt: “Dialing”  
6-82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Bluetooth Hands-Free  
12. Say: [Beep] “XXXXXXXXXXX  
(Ex. “555-5678”)” (Say the new  
phone number to be registered.)  
qPhonebook Settings  
Editing phonebook  
The data registered to the Bluetooth  
Hands-Free phonebook can be edited.  
13. Prompt: “XXXXXXXXXXX (Ex.  
“555-5678”) (The new phone number  
to be registered). Is this correct?”  
1. Activate Bluetooth Hands-Free (page  
6-74).  
14. Say: [Beep] “Yes”  
2. Say: [Beep] “Phonebook”  
15. Prompt: “Number changed, returning  
3. Prompt: “Select one of the following:  
New entry, edit, list names, delete,  
erase all or import contact.”  
to main menu.”  
Phonebook data deletion  
Erasing individual phonebook data  
4. Say: [Beep] “Edit”  
Individual data registered to the Bluetooth  
Hands-Free phonebook can be cleared.  
5. Prompt: “Please say the name of the  
entry you would like to edit or say,  
“List names”.”  
1. Activate Bluetooth Hands-Free (page  
6-74).  
6. Say: [Beep] “XXXXX... (Ex. “Mary's  
phone”)” (Say the voice tag for the  
registered name to be edited in the  
phonebook.)  
2. Say: [Beep] “Phonebook”  
3. Prompt: “Select one of the following:  
New entry, edit, list names, delete,  
erase all or import contact.”  
7. Prompt: “Home, Work, Mobile, or  
Other?”  
4. Say: [Beep] “Delete”  
8. Say: [Beep] “Home” (Say the  
registered location to be edited:  
“Home”, “Work”, “Mobile”, or  
“Other”).  
5. Prompt: “Please say the name of the  
entry you would like to delete or say,  
“List names”.”  
6. Say: [Beep] “XXXXX... (Ex. “John's  
phone”)” (Say the registered voice tag  
to be deleted from the phonebook.)  
9. Prompt: “XXXXX... (Ex. “Mary's  
phone”) (Registered voice tag) XXXX  
(Ex. “home”) (Registered location). Is  
this correct?”  
7. Prompt: “Deleting XXXXX... (Ex.  
“John's phone”) (Registered voice tag)  
Home (Registered location). Is this  
correct?”  
10. Say: [Beep] “Yes”  
11. Prompt: “The current number is  
XXXXXXXXXXX (Ex. “555-1234”)  
(Currently registered number). New  
number, please.”  
8. Say: [Beep] “Yes”  
9. Prompt: “XXXXX... (Ex. “John's  
phone”) (Registered voice tag) Home  
(Registered location) deleted, returning  
to main menu.”  
NOTE  
If there was no previous phone number  
registered to a location (Ex. “Work”), the  
prompt will only read out “Number, please”.  
6-83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Bluetooth Hands-Free  
Complete deletion of the phonebook  
data  
4. Say: [Beep] “List names”  
5. Prompt: “XXXXX..., XXXXX...,  
XXXXX... (Ex. “John's phone”, Mary's  
phone, Bill's phone)” (Voice guidance  
reads out the voice tags registered to  
the phonebook.)  
All data registered to the Bluetooth  
Hands-Free phonebook can be erased.  
1. Activate Bluetooth Hands-Free (page  
6-74).  
Press the talk button (Short press) during  
the read-out at the desired name, and then  
say one of the following voice commands  
to execute it.  
2. Say: [Beep] “Phonebook”  
3. Prompt: “Select one of the following:  
New entry, edit, list names, delete,  
erase all or import contact.”  
l
“Continue”: Continues the list read-  
out.  
4. Say: [Beep] “Erase all”  
l
“Call”: Calls the registered phonebook  
5. Prompt: “Are you sure you want to  
erase everything from your Hands Free  
system phonebook?”  
data when the talk button is short-  
pressed.  
“Edit”: Edits the registered phonebook  
l
data when the talk button is short-  
pressed.  
“Delete”: Deletes the registered  
phonebook data when the talk button is  
short-pressed.  
“Previous”: Returns to the previous  
6. Say: [Beep] “Yes”  
l
7. Prompt: “You are about to delete  
everything from your Hands Free  
system phonebook. Do you want to  
continue?”  
l
phonebook data in read-out when the  
talk button is short-pressed.  
8. Say: [Beep] “Yes”  
9. Prompt: “Please wait, erasing the  
Hands Free system phonebook.”  
6. Prompt: “End of list, would you like  
to start from the beginning?”  
10. Prompt: “Hands-Free system  
phonebook erased, returning to main  
menu.”  
7. Say: [Beep] “No”  
8. Prompt: “Returning to main menu.”  
Read-out of names registered to the  
Bluetooth Hands-Free phonebook  
qDTMF (Dual Tone Multi-  
Frequency Signal) Transmission  
Bluetooth Hands-Free can read out the list  
of names registered to its phonebook.  
This function is used when transmitting  
DTMF via the user's voice. The receiver  
of a DTMF transmission is generally a  
home telephone answering machine or a  
company's automated guidance call center  
(When you send tone signals back  
according to the voice guidance  
recording).  
1. Activate Bluetooth Hands-Free (page  
6-74).  
2. Say: [Beep] “Phonebook”  
3. Prompt: “Select one of the following:  
New entry, edit, list names, delete,  
erase all or import contact.”  
1. Press the talk button (Short press).  
6-84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Bluetooth Hands-Free  
2. Say: [Beep] “XXXX... send” (Say  
DTMF code)  
Hands-Free Setting  
qDevice  
3. Prompt: “Sending XXXX... (DTMF  
code)”  
Device registration  
For the registration of a Bluetooth  
equipped device to Bluetooth Hands-Free,  
refer to “Bluetooth Hands-Free  
preparation” (page 6-76).  
Registered device read-out  
Bluetooth Hands-Free can read-out the  
devices registered to its system.  
1. Activate Bluetooth Hands-Free (page  
6-74).  
2. Say: [Beep] “Setup”  
3. Prompt: “Select one of the following:  
Pairing options, confirmation prompts,  
language, passcode, select phone or  
select music player.”  
4. Say: [Beep] “Pairing options”  
5. Prompt: “Select one of the following:  
Pair, edit, delete, or list.”  
6. Say: [Beep] “List”  
7. Prompt: “XXXXX..., XXXXX...,  
XXXXX... (Ex. Device A, device B,  
device C)” (The voice guidance reads  
out the device tags registered to the  
hands-free system.)  
Press the talk button (Short press) during  
the read-out at the desired device, and  
then say one of the following voice  
commands to execute it.  
l
“Select phone”: Selects device (Mobile  
phone) when the talk button is short-  
pressed.  
“Select music player”: Selects device  
l
(Music player) when the talk button is  
short-pressed.  
6-85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Bluetooth Hands-Free  
l
“Edit”: Edits device when the talk  
button is short-pressed.  
“Continue”: Continues the list read-  
7. Prompt: “XXXXX... (Ex. device B...)  
(Registered device tag) selected, is this  
correct?”  
l
out.  
8. Say: [Beep] “Yes”  
l
“Delete”: Deletes the registered device  
when the talk button is short-pressed.  
“Previous”: Returns to the previous  
device in read-out when the talk button  
is short-pressed.  
9. Prompt: “XXXXX... (Ex. device B...)  
(Device tag) will temporarily override  
phone priorities, returning to main  
menu.”  
l
8. Prompt: “End of list, would you like  
to start from the beginning?”  
Music player  
1. Activate Bluetooth Hands-Free (page  
6-74).  
9. Say: [Beep] “No”  
10. Prompt: “Returning to main menu.”  
Device selection  
2. Say: [Beep] “Setup”  
3. Prompt: “Select one of the following:  
Pairing options, confirmation prompts,  
language, passcode, select phone or  
select music player.”  
If several devices have been programmed,  
the Bluetooth unit links the device last  
programmed. If you would like to link a  
different programmed device, it is  
necessary to change the link. The order of  
device priority after the link has been  
changed is maintained even when the  
ignition is switched off (LOCK).  
4. Say: [Beep] “Select music player”  
5. Prompt: “Please say 1 for XXXXX...  
(Ex. device A), 2 for XXXXX... (Ex.  
device B...)”  
6. Say: [Beep] “X” (Say the number for  
the music player to be connected.)  
Hands-free phone  
1. Activate Bluetooth Hands-Free (page  
6-74).  
7. Prompt: “XXXXX... (Ex. device B...)  
(Registered device tag) selected, is this  
correct?”  
2. Say: [Beep] “Setup”  
3. Prompt: “Select one of the following:  
Pairing options, confirmation prompts,  
language, passcode, select phone or  
select music player.”  
8. Say: [Beep] “Yes”  
9. Prompt: “XXXXX... (Ex. device B...)  
(Device tag) selected.”  
NOTE  
4. Say: [Beep] “Select phone”  
Device (Music player) selection can also be  
done by operating the panel button (page  
6-64).  
5. Prompt: “Please say 1 for XXXXX...  
(Ex. device A), 2 for XXXXX... (Ex.  
device B...)”  
6. Say: [Beep] “X” (Say the number for  
the mobile phone to be connected.)  
6-86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Bluetooth Hands-Free  
Registered device (Mobile phone)  
deletion  
2. Say: [Beep] “Setup”  
3. Prompt: “Select one of the following:  
Pairing options, confirmation prompts,  
language, passcode, select phone or  
select music player.”  
Registered devices (Mobile phone) can be  
deleted individually or collectively.  
1. Activate Bluetooth Hands-Free (page  
6-74).  
4. Say: [Beep] “Pairing options”  
2. Say: [Beep] “Setup”  
5. Prompt: “Select one of the following:  
Pair, edit, delete, or list.”  
3. Prompt: “Select one of the following:  
Pairing options, confirmation prompts,  
language, passcode, select phone or  
select music player.”  
6. Say: [Beep] “Edit”  
7. Prompt: “Please say 1 for XXXXX...  
(Ex. device A), 2 for XXXXX... (Ex.  
device B...), which device please?”  
(The device tag of the registered device  
is read out by the HFP.)  
4. Say: [Beep] “Pairing options”  
5. Prompt: “Select one of the following:  
Pair, edit, delete, or list.”  
8. Say: [Beep] “X” (Say the number of  
the device to be edited.)  
NOTE  
A registered device (Mobile phone) can be  
deleted using the registration list.  
9. Prompt: “New name please?”  
10. Say: [Beep] “XXXXX... (Ex. device  
C)” (Speak a “device tag”, an  
6. Say: [Beep] “Delete”  
7. Prompt: “Please say 1 for XXXXX...  
(Ex. device A), 2 for XXXXX... (Ex.  
device B...)” (The device tag of the  
registered device is read out by the  
HFP.).  
arbitrary name for the device.)  
11. Prompt: “XXXXX... (Ex. device C)  
(Device tag), is this correct?”  
12. Say: [Beep] “Yes”  
8. Say: [Beep] “X” (Say the number of  
the device to be deleted.)  
13. Prompt: “New name saved, returning  
to main menu.”  
NOTE  
Say “All” to delete all devices (Mobile phone).  
qSecurity Setting  
If a passcode is set, the system cannot be  
activated unless the passcode is input.  
9. Prompt: “Deleting XXXXX... (Ex.  
device B...) (Registered device tag). Is  
this correct?”  
Passcode setting  
10. Say: [Beep] “Yes”  
11. Prompt: “Deleted”  
Registered device editing  
1. Activate Bluetooth Hands-Free (page  
6-74).  
2. Say: [Beep] “Setup”  
1. Activate Bluetooth Hands-Free (page  
6-74).  
6-87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Bluetooth Hands-Free  
3. Prompt:“Select one of the following:  
Pairing options, confirmation prompts,  
language, passcode, select phone or  
select music player.”  
Canceling the passcode  
1. Activate Bluetooth Hands-Free (page  
6-74).  
2. Say: [Beep] “Setup”  
4. Say: [Beep] “Passcode”  
3. Prompt: “Select one of the following:  
Pairing options, confirmation prompts,  
language, passcode, select phone or  
select music player.”  
5. Prompt: “Passcode is disabled. Would  
you like to enable it?”  
6. Say: [Beep] “Yes”  
7. Prompt:“Please say a 4-digit passcode.  
Remember this passcode. It will be  
required to use this system.”  
4. Say: [Beep] “Passcode”  
5. Prompt:“Passcode is enabled. Would  
you like to disable it?”  
8. Say: [Beep] “XXXX” (Say a desired 4-  
digit passcode, “PCode”.)  
6. Say: [Beep] “Yes”  
7. Prompt:“Passcode is disabled,  
returning to main menu.”  
9. Prompt:“Passcode XXXX (Passcode,  
PCode). Is this correct?”  
Confirmation Prompts  
10. Say: [Beep] “Yes”  
The confirmation prompt confirms the  
command content to the user before  
advancing to the operation requested by  
the user. When this function is turned on,  
the system reads out the voice input  
command previously received and  
confirms whether the command is correct  
before advancing to the command  
execution.  
When the confirmation prompt function is  
turned on:  
(Ex. “Calling John's device. Is this  
correct?”)  
11. Prompt:“Passcode is enabled,  
returning to main menu.”  
Using Bluetooth Hands-Free with a  
passcode  
1. Activate Bluetooth Hands-Free (page  
6-74).  
2. Prompt:“Hands-Free system is locked.  
State the passcode to continue.”  
3. Say: [Beep] “XXXX” (Say the set  
passcode “PCode”.)  
When the confirmation prompt function is  
turned off:  
(Ex. “Calling John's device.”)  
4. If the correct passcode is input, voice  
guidance “XXXXXX... (Ex. “Mary's  
device) (Device tag) is connected” is  
announced.  
NOTE  
If the passcode is incorrect, voice  
guidance “XXXX (4-digit passcode,  
Pcode) incorrect passcode, please try  
again” is announced.  
If the confirmation prompt function is turned  
off when making an emergency call, the system  
reads out and confirms the command before  
executing it.  
1. Activate Bluetooth Hands-Free (page  
6-74).  
6-88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Bluetooth Hands-Free  
2. Say: [Beep] “Setup”  
When voice recognition learning is  
done for the first time  
3. Prompt:“Select one of the following:  
Pairing options, confirmation prompts,  
language, passcode, select phone or  
select music player.”  
1. Activate Bluetooth Hands-Free (page  
6-74).  
2. Say: [Beep] “Voice training”  
4. Say: [Beep] “Confirmation prompts”  
3. Prompt: “This operation must be  
performed in a quiet environment while  
the vehicle is stopped. See the owner's  
manual for the list of required training  
phrases. Press and release the talk  
button when you are ready to begin.  
Press the hangup button to cancel at  
any time.”  
5. Prompt:“Confirmation prompts are  
on/off. Would you like to turn  
confirmation prompts off/on?”  
6. Say: [Beep] “Yes”  
7. Prompt:“Confirmation prompts are  
off/on, returning to main menu.”  
4. Press the talk button (Short press).  
qVoice Recognition Learning  
Function (Speaker Enrollment)  
5. The voice guidance reads out the voice  
input command number (refer to the  
voice input command list for voice  
recognition learning). (Ex. “Please read  
phrase 1”)  
The voice recognition learning function  
enables voice recognition appropriate to  
the characteristics of the user's voice.  
If the recognition of the voice input  
commands to the system is not adequate,  
this function can largely improve the  
system's voice recognition of the user. If  
your voice can be recognized sufficiently  
without using this function, you may not  
realize the added benefit of the function.  
To register your voice, the voice input  
command list must be read out. Read out  
the list when the vehicle is parked.  
Perform the registration in as quite a place  
as possible (page 6-74).  
6. Say: [Beep] “0123456789” (Say the  
voice input command for voice  
recognition learning (1 to 8) according  
to the voice guidance.)  
7. Prompt: “Speaker enrollment is  
complete, returning to main menu.”  
NOTE  
If an error occurred in the voice recognition  
learning, re-learning can be done by pressing  
the talk button (Short press).  
The registration must be performed  
completely. The required time is a few  
minutes. The user needs to be seated in  
the driver's seat with the voice input  
command list for voice recognition  
learning open to the page indicated below.  
Voice recognition re-learning  
If voice recognition learning has already  
been done.  
1. Activate Bluetooth Hands-Free (page  
6-74).  
2. Say: [Beep] “Voice training”  
6-89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Bluetooth Hands-Free  
3. Prompt: “Enrollment is enabled/  
disable. Would you like to disable/  
enable or retrain?”  
(For example, “1234” must be read out  
“one, two, three, four”, not “twelve, thirty  
four”.)  
l
Do not read out parentheses. “ (” and  
4. Say: [Beep] “Retrain”  
hyphens “-” are used for separating  
numbers in a phone number.  
Ex.  
“ (888) 555-1212” must be spoken “Eight,  
eight, eight, five, five, five, one, two, one,  
two.”  
5. Prompt: “This operation must be  
performed in a quiet environment while  
the vehicle is stopped. See the owner's  
manual for the list of required training  
phrases. Press and release the talk  
button when you are ready to begin.  
Press the hangup button to cancel at  
any time.”  
Phrase  
Command  
0123456789  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
(888) 555-1212  
Call  
6. Press the talk button (Short press).  
Dial  
7. The voice guidance reads out the voice  
input command number (refer to the  
voice input command list for voice  
recognition learning). (Ex. “Please read  
phrase 1”)  
Setup  
Cancel  
Continue  
Help  
NOTE  
8. Say: [Beep] “0123456789” (Say the  
voice input command for voice  
recognition learning (1 to 8) according  
to the voice guidance.)  
l
The applicable phrase appears in the  
display.  
l
After user voice registration is completed,  
voice guidance “Speaker enrollment is  
complete, returning to main menu” is  
announced.  
9. Prompt: “Speaker enrollment is  
complete, returning to main menu.”  
NOTE  
Voice recognition learning on/off  
If an error occurred in the voice recognition  
learning, re-learning can be done by pressing  
the talk button (Short press).  
1. Activate Bluetooth Hands-Free (page  
6-74).  
2. Say: [Beep] “Voice training”  
Voice input command list for voice  
recognition learning  
3. Prompt: “Enrollment is enabled/  
disable. Would you like to disable/  
enable or retrain?”  
When reading out, the following points  
must be observed:  
l
Read out the numbers one at a time  
4. Say: [Beep] “Disable” or “Enable”  
correctly and naturally.  
5. When “Disable” is spoken, the voice  
recognition learning is turned off.  
When “Enable” is spoken, the voice  
recognition learning is turned on.  
6-90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Bluetooth Hands-Free  
6. Prompt: “Speaker Enrollment is  
disabled/enabled, returning to main  
menu.”  
When Bluetooth Hands-  
Free Cannot be Used  
Bluetooth Hands-Free cannot be used  
under the following conditions:  
l
The device is outside of the  
communication area.  
The device has a malfunction.  
The device is not connected to the  
l
l
hands-free unit equipped on the  
vehicle.  
The device's battery is weak.  
The device is turned off.  
The device is placed where radio  
l
l
l
reception is difficult.  
When the ignition is turned off  
l
(LOCK).  
6-91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Bluetooth Hands-Free  
Safety Certification  
Mazda Bluetooth Hands-  
Free Customer Service  
FCC ID: CB2MBLUEC07 IC:279B-  
MBLUEC07  
This device complies with Part 15 of the  
FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry  
Canada. Operation is subject to the  
following two conditions:  
For toll-free Bluetooth Hands-Free  
customer service call 800-430-0153 or go  
to www.MazdaUSA.com/bluetooth for  
assistance.  
(1) This device may not cause harmful  
interference, and  
(2) This device must accept any  
interference received, including  
interference that may cause undesired  
operation.  
WARNING  
Changes or modifications not  
expressively approved by the party  
responsible for compliance could void  
the user's authority to operate the  
equipment.  
The term “IC: ” before the radio  
certification number only signifies that  
Industry Canada technical specifications  
were met.  
The antenna used for this transmitter must  
not be co-located or operating in  
conjunction with any other antenna or  
transmitter. End-users and installers must  
be provided with installation instructions  
and transmitter operating conditions for  
satisfying RF exposure compliance.  
6-92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Interior Equipment  
qVanity Mirrors  
Sunvisors  
To use the vanity mirror, lower the  
sunvisor.  
The vanity mirror light will illuminate  
when you open the cover.  
When you need a sunvisor, lower it for  
use in front or swing it to the side.  
Sunvisor  
qSide Extension Sunvisors  
The visor extender extends the sunvisor's  
range of sun shading.  
To use, pull it out.  
CAUTION  
When moving the sunvisor, retract  
the visor extender to its original  
position. Otherwise, the visor  
extender could hit the rearview  
mirror, headliner, or overhead  
console.  
6-93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Interior Equipment  
qOverhead Lights  
Interior Lights  
Front  
qIlluminated Entry System  
When the illuminated entry system  
operates, the overhead light (switch is in  
the DOOR position), the courtesy lights  
and the ground illumination light turn on  
for:  
l
About 30 seconds after the driver's  
door is unlocked and the ignition key is  
removed (without advanced key) or the  
ignition is switched off (with advanced  
key).  
l
About 15 seconds after all doors are  
closed.  
Rear  
(With Advanced key)  
About 5 seconds after all doors when  
the advanced key is outside of the  
vehicle.  
l
About 15 seconds after the ignition is  
switched off (LOCK) and the ignition  
key removed (without advanced key)  
with all doors closed.  
The light also turns off when:  
l
The ignition is switched on and all  
doors are closed.  
The driver's door is locked.  
l
Switch  
Position  
Overhead Lights  
NOTE  
l
Battery saver  
Light off  
If any door is left opened, the light turns off  
after about 30 minutes to save the battery.  
The light turns on again when the ignition  
is switched on, or when any door is opened  
after all doors have been closed.  
l
Light is on when any door is open  
Light is on or off when the  
illuminated entry system is on  
l
Light on  
l
The operation of the illuminated entry  
system can be changed.  
Refer to Personalization Features on page  
10-8.  
6-94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Interior Equipment  
qMap Lights  
The map lights are switched on or off by  
pressing the switches.  
qCourtesy Lights  
Turns on when any door is open or the  
illuminated entry system is on.  
Courtesy light  
6-95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Interior Equipment  
Information Display  
Climate control display  
Trip  
computer/clock  
display  
Audio/hands-free display  
Climate control  
display  
With trip computer  
With trip computer  
Without trip computer  
qInformation Display Functions  
The information display has the following functions:  
Clockí  
l
l
Climate Control Display (Fully Automatic Type Air Conditioning System)  
l
l
l
Audio Display  
Trip Computerí  
Bluetooth Hands-Free Displayí Refer to Bluetooth Hands-Free on page 6-72.  
6-96  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Interior Equipment  
3. When the button is released, the time  
will be reset as follows:  
qClock  
NOTE  
(Example)  
12:01―12:29→12:00  
12:30―12:59→1:00  
When the trip computer is being displayed,  
press the CLOCK button to change the display  
to the time.  
NOTE  
The time is displayed when the ignition is  
switched to ACC or ON.  
When the :00 button is released, the seconds  
will start at “00”.  
NOTE  
(With trip computer type only)  
The clock display can be switched on or off by  
pressing the CLOCK button.  
With navigation system  
Refer to the separate manual  
“NAVIGATION SYSTEM”.  
NOTE  
Minutes and seconds are adjusted by the GPS,  
however, it is necessary to adjust hours under  
the following conditions:  
Without navigation system  
Time setting  
l
Driving across different time zones  
l
Daylight saving time start and end  
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC or  
ON position.  
qClimate Control Display (Fully  
Automatic Type)  
2. Adjust the time using the time setting  
buttons (  
,
).  
The climate control system status is  
displayed. To operate the climate control  
system, refer to “Climate Control System”  
(page 6-2).  
The hours advance while the time  
setting button ( ) is pressed.  
The minutes advance while the time  
setting button ( ) is pressed.  
Time resetting (Without trip computer  
type only)  
qAudio Display  
The audio system status is displayed. To  
operate the audio system, refer to  
“Audio System” (page 6-16).  
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC or  
ON position.  
2. Press and hold the :00 button for 1.5  
seconds or more. The displayed time  
flashes.  
6-97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Interior Equipment  
qTrip Computerí  
U.S.A.  
The trip computer can display the  
following:  
l
The current fuel economy.  
The average fuel economy.  
The approximate distance you can  
l
l
travel on the available fuel.  
The average vehicle speed.  
l
Switch the ignition ON.  
Press the INFO switch to change the  
display mode.  
NOTE  
When the time is being displayed, press the  
INFO switch to change the display to the trip  
computer.  
CANADA  
If you have any problems with your trip  
computer, consult an Authorized Mazda  
Dealer.  
Current fuel economy mode  
This mode displays the current fuel  
economy by calculating the amount of  
fuel consumption and the distance  
traveled.  
Current fuel economy will be calculated  
and displayed every 2 seconds.  
When you've slowed to about 5 km/h (3  
mph), — L/100 km (—mpg) will be  
displayed.  
When this mode is selected, CONSUM  
CUR will be displayed.  
Average fuel economy mode  
This mode displays the average fuel  
economy by calculating the fuel  
consumption and the distance traveled  
since connecting the battery or resetting  
the data.  
Average fuel economy will be calculated  
and displayed every minute.  
When this mode is selected, CONSUM  
AV will be displayed.  
6-98  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Interior Equipment  
U.S.A.  
When this mode is selected, REMNG will  
be displayed.  
U.S.A.  
CANADA  
CANADA  
To clear the data being displayed, press  
the INFO switch for more than 1.5  
second.  
After pressing the INFO switch, — L/100  
km (— mpg) will be displayed for about 1  
minute before the fuel economy is  
recalculated and displayed.  
NOTE  
l
Even though the distance-to-empty display  
may indicate a sufficient amount of  
remaining mileage before refueling is  
required, refuel as soon as possible if the  
fuel gauge needle nears E or the low fuel  
warning light illuminates.  
Distance-to-empty mode  
This mode displays the approximate  
distance you can travel on the remaining  
fuel based on the fuel economy.  
l
The display won't change unless you add  
more than approximately 20 L (5.3 gal) of  
fuel.  
The distance-to-empty will be calculated  
and displayed every second.  
6-99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Interior Equipment  
Average vehicle speed mode  
Cup Holder  
WARNING  
Never use a cup holder to hold hot  
liquids while the vehicle is moving:  
Using a cup holder to hold hot liquids  
while the vehicle is moving is  
This mode displays the average vehicle  
speed by calculating the distance and the  
time traveled since connecting the battery  
or resetting the data.  
Average vehicle speed will be calculated  
and displayed every 10 seconds.  
dangerous. If the contents spill, you  
could be scalded.  
When this mode is selected, AV will be  
displayed.  
U.S.A.  
CAUTION  
To reduce the possibility of injury in  
an accident or a sudden stop, keep  
the cup holders closed when they are  
not in use, or when using them for  
storage.  
qFront  
To use the cup holder, open the center  
console by pressing the lower center part  
of its cover.  
CANADA  
To clear the data being displayed, press  
the INFO switch for more than 1.5  
second. After pressing the INFO switch,  
— km/h (— mile/h) will be displayed for  
about 1 minute before the vehicle speed is  
recalculated and displayed.  
6-100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Interior Equipment  
To fit small items in the cup holder,  
remove the flexible divider.  
Bottle Holder  
Bottle holders are on the inside of the  
front doors.  
Flexible divider  
qRearí  
Bottle holder  
The rear cup holder is on the rear center  
armrest.  
CAUTION  
Do not use the bottle holders for  
containers without caps. The  
contents may spill when the door is  
opened or closed.  
íSome models. 6-101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Interior Equipment  
qStorage Pocket  
Storage Compartments  
To open, push the release catch down and  
pull the lid downward.  
WARNING  
Keep storage boxes closed when  
driving:  
Driving with the storage boxes open  
is dangerous. To reduce the  
possibility of injury in an accident or  
a sudden stop, keep the storage  
boxes closed when driving.  
CAUTION  
Do not leave lighters or eyeglasses in  
the storage boxes while parked under  
the sun. A lighter could explode or  
the plastic material in eyeglasses  
could deform and crack from high  
temperature.  
qGlove Box  
To open the glove box, pull the latch  
toward you.  
Insert the key (auxiliary key*) and turn it  
clockwise to lock, counterclockwise to  
unlock.  
qOverhead Console  
This console box is designed to store a  
garage door opener or other accessories.  
Push and release to open.  
* Advanced key equipped vehicle  
Unlock  
Lock  
6-102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Interior Equipment  
Installing to the back side  
qCenter Console  
To open, pull the lower release handle.  
Storage tray  
Using the armrestí  
Storage trayí  
CAUTION  
The storage tray can be installed to the  
front/back side of the center console.  
When sliding the armrest, be careful  
not to hit a drink cup placed in a cup  
holder and spill its contents. Remove  
cups or other drink containers from  
the cup holders before pulling out the  
armrest.  
Installing to the front side  
Storage tray  
Press the button to slide the armrest  
frontward.  
íSome models. 6-103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Interior Equipment  
When storing the armrest, press and hold  
the button while pulling the armrest back,  
and remove your hand once it is in its  
stored position.  
qRear Coat Hooks  
WARNING  
Never hang heavy or sharp objects on  
the assist grips and coat hooks:  
Hanging heavy or sharp-ended  
objects such as a coat hanger from  
the assist grips or coat hooks is  
dangerous as they can fly off and hit  
an occupant in the cabin if a curtain  
air bag was to deploy, which could  
result in serious injury or death.  
Always hang clothes on the coat hooks  
and the assist grips without hangers.  
qShopping Bag Hook  
The shopping bag hook can be used for  
hanging shopping bags.  
CAUTION  
Do not hang excessive weight on the  
shopping bag hook as it could be  
damaged.  
Coat hook  
Shopping bag hook  
(tensile strength: 5.0  
kg (11 lb))  
6-104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Interior Equipment  
Center Console  
Accessory Sockets  
The accessory sockets can be used  
regardless of the position of the ignition  
switch.  
Only use genuine Mazda accessories or  
the equivalent requiring no greater than  
120 W (DC 12 V, 10 A).  
Front  
The ignition switch must be in the ACC  
or ON position.  
With Advanced Key  
To use, press the cover and open it.  
CAUTION  
To prevent accessory socket damage  
or electrical failure, pay attention to  
the following:  
Ø Do not use accessories that require  
more than 120 W (DC 12 V, 10 A).  
Ø Do not use accessories that are not  
genuine Mazda accessories or the  
equivalent.  
Without Advanced Key  
Ø Close the cover when the accessory  
socket is not in use to prevent  
foreign objects and liquids from  
getting into the accessory socket.  
Ø Correctly insert the plug into the  
accessory socket.  
Ø Do not insert the cigarette lighter  
into the accessory socket.  
Noise may occur on the audio  
playback depending on the device  
connected to the accessory socket.  
NOTE  
To prevent discharging of the battery, do not  
use the socket for long periods with the engine  
off or idling.  
6-105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior Comfort  
Interior Equipment  
Connecting the accessory socket  
1. Open the lid.  
2. Pass the connection plug cord through  
the cutout of the console and insert the  
plug into the accessory socket.  
Plug  
6-106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In Case of an Emergency  
7
Helpful information on what to do in an emergency.  
Parking in an Emergency ............................................................. 7-2  
Parking in an Emergency .......................................................... 7-2  
Flat Tire ......................................................................................... 7-3  
Spare Tire and Tool Storage ...................................................... 7-3  
Changing a Flat Tire ................................................................. 7-6  
Overheating ................................................................................. 7-11  
Overheating ............................................................................. 7-11  
Emergency Starting .................................................................... 7-13  
Starting a Flooded Engine ....................................................... 7-13  
Jump-Starting .......................................................................... 7-14  
Push-Starting ........................................................................... 7-16  
Emergency Towing ..................................................................... 7-17  
Towing Description ................................................................. 7-17  
Recreational Towing ............................................................... 7-18  
7-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In Case of an Emergency  
Parking in an Emergency  
Parking in an Emergency  
The hazard warning lights should always  
be used when you stop on or near a  
roadway in an emergency.  
The hazard warning lights warn other  
drivers that your vehicle is a traffic hazard  
and that they must take extreme caution  
when near it.  
Depress the hazard warning flasher and all  
the turn signals will flash.  
NOTE  
l
The turn signals do not work when the  
hazard warning lights are on.  
l
Check local regulations about the use of  
hazard warning lights while the vehicle is  
being towed to verify that it is not in  
violation of the law.  
7-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In Case of an Emergency  
Flat Tire  
Spare Tire and Tool Storage  
Spare tire and tools are stored in the locations illustrated in the diagram.  
Jack  
Long bolt for flat tire  
Spare tire  
Short bolt for flat tire  
Lug wrench  
7-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In Case of an Emergency  
Flat Tire  
To secure the jack  
qJack  
1. Insert the wing bolt into the jack with  
the jack screw pointing front and turn  
the wing bolt clockwise to temporarily  
tighten it.  
To remove the jack  
1. Open the trunk mat.  
2. Turn the jack screw in the direction  
shown in the figure.  
Wing bolt  
2. Remove the jack container lid.  
Jack screw  
3. Turn the wing bolt completely to  
secure the jack.  
NOTE  
If the jack is not completely secured, it could  
rattle while driving. Make sure the jack screw  
is sufficiently tightened.  
qSpare Tire  
Your Mazda has a temporary spare tire.  
The temporary spare tire is lighter and  
smaller than a conventional tire, and is  
designed only for emergency use and  
should be used only for VERY short  
periods. Temporary spare tires should  
NEVER be used for long drives or  
extended periods.  
3. Turn the wing bolt and jack screw  
counterclockwise.  
Wing bolt  
Jack screw  
7-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In Case of an Emergency  
Flat Tire  
To remove the spare tire  
WARNING  
1. Remove the trunk mat, and if a trunk  
board is equipped remove it also.  
Do not install the temporary spare tire  
on the front wheels (driving wheels):  
Driving with the temporary spare tire  
on one of the front driving wheels is  
dangerous. Handling will be affected.  
You could lose control of the vehicle,  
especially on ice or snow bound  
roads, and have an accident. Move a  
regular tire to the front wheel and  
install the temporary spare tire to the  
rear.  
CAUTION  
Ø When using the temporary spare  
tire, driving stability may decrease  
compared to when using only the  
conventional tire. Drive carefully.  
Ø To avoid damage to the temporary  
spare tire or to the vehicle, observe  
the following precautions:  
2. Turn the tire hold-down bolt  
counterclockwise.  
Ø
Do not exceed 80 km/h (50  
mph).  
Ø
Avoid driving over obstacles.  
Also, do not drive through an  
automatic car wash. This tire's  
diameter is smaller than a  
conventional tire, so the ground  
clearance is reduced about  
7 mm (0.3 in).  
To secure the spare tire  
Ø
Ø
Do not use tire chains on any  
type of tire, including the spare  
tire.  
Do not use your temporary  
spare tire on any other vehicle,  
it has been designed only for  
your Mazda.  
Use only one temporary spare  
tire on your vehicle at the same  
time.  
Perform the removal procedure in reverse.  
Ø
7-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In Case of an Emergency  
Flat Tire  
3. Turn on the hazard warning flasher.  
Changing a Flat Tire  
4. Have everyone get out of the vehicle  
and away from the vehicle and traffic.  
NOTE  
If the following occurs while driving, it could  
5. Remove the jack, tool, and spare tire  
(page 7-3).  
indicate a flat tire.  
l
l
l
Steering becomes difficult.  
The vehicle begins to vibrate excessively.  
The vehicle pulls in one direction.  
6. Block the wheel diagonally opposite  
the flat tire. When blocking a wheel,  
place a tire block both in front and  
behind the tire.  
If you have a flat tire, drive slowly to a  
level spot that is well off the road and out  
of the way of traffic to change the tire.  
Stopping in traffic or on the shoulder of a  
busy road is dangerous.  
WARNING  
Be sure to follow the directions for  
changing a tire, and never get under a  
vehicle that is supported only by a jack:  
Changing a tire is dangerous if not  
done properly. The vehicle can slip off  
the jack and seriously injure  
someone. If getting under the vehicle  
becomes necessary use vehicle  
NOTE  
When blocking a tire, use rocks or wood blocks  
of sufficient size if possible to hold the tire in  
place.  
support stands.  
Never allow anyone inside a vehicle  
supported by a jack:  
Allowing someone to remain in a  
vehicle supported by a jack is  
dangerous. The occupant could cause  
the vehicle to fall resulting in serious  
injury.  
NOTE  
Make sure the jack is well lubricated before  
using it.  
1. Park on a level surface off the right-of-  
way and firmly set the parking brake.  
2. Put a vehicle with an automatic  
transaxle in Park (P), a manual  
transaxle in Reverse (R) or 1, and turn  
off the engine.  
7-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In Case of an Emergency  
Flat Tire  
2. Loosen the lug nuts by turning them  
counterclockwise one turn each, but  
don't remove any lug nuts until the tire  
has been raised off the ground.  
qRemoving a Flat Tire  
1. If your vehicle is equipped with a  
wheel cover, pry off the wheel cover  
with the beveled end of the lug wrench.  
3. Place the jack under the jacking  
position closest to the tire being  
changed.  
NOTE  
Force the end of the lug wrench firmly between  
wheel and cover, or removal will be difficult.  
CAUTION  
Align the notch on the wheel cover  
with the valve stem when installing  
it.  
Notch  
Jacking position  
Tire valve  
Damage could occur during  
installation if the wheel cover is not  
properly aligned.  
7-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In Case of an Emergency  
Flat Tire  
5. Remove the lug nuts by turning them  
counterclockwise; then remove the  
wheel and center cap.  
WARNING  
Use only the front and rear jacking  
positions recommended in this manual:  
Attempting to jack the vehicle in  
positions other than those  
qLocking Lug Nutsí  
If your vehicle has optional antitheft  
wheel lug nuts, one on each wheel will  
lock the tires and you must use a special  
key to unlock them. This key is attached  
to the lug wrench and is stored with the  
spare tire. Register them with the lock  
manufacturer by filling out the card  
provided in the glove box and mailing it  
in the accompanying envelope. If you lose  
this key, consult an Authorized Mazda  
Dealer or use the lock manufacturer's  
order form, which is with the registration  
card.  
recommended in this manual is  
dangerous. The vehicle could slip off  
the jack and seriously injure or even  
kill someone. Use only the front and  
rear jacking positions recommended  
in this manual.  
Use only the jack provided with your  
Mazda:  
Using a jack that is not designed for  
your Mazda is dangerous. The vehicle  
could slip off the jack and seriously  
injure someone.  
Never place objects under the jack:  
Jacking the vehicle with an object  
under the jack is dangerous. The jack  
could slip and someone could be  
seriously injured by the jack or the  
falling vehicle.  
Antitheft lug nut  
Special key  
4. Turn the lug wrench clockwise and  
raise the vehicle high enough so that  
the spare tire can be installed. Before  
removing the lug nuts, make sure your  
Mazda is firmly in position and that it  
cannot slip or move.  
To remove an antitheft lug nut  
1. Obtain the key for the antitheft lug nut.  
2. Place the key on top of the nut, and be  
sure to hold the key square to it. If you  
hold the key at an angle, you may  
damage both key and nut. Don't use a  
power impact wrench.  
3. Place the lug wrench on top of the key  
and apply pressure. Turn the wrench  
counterclockwise.  
7-8  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In Case of an Emergency  
Flat Tire  
To install the nut  
3. Install the lug nuts with the beveled  
edge inward; tighten them by hand.  
1. Place the key on top of the nut, and be  
sure to hold the key square to it. If you  
hold the key at an angle, you may  
damage both key and nut. Don't use a  
power impact wrench.  
2. Place the lug wrench on top of the key,  
apply pressure, and turn it clockwise.  
qMounting the Spare Tire  
1. Remove dirt and grime from the  
mounting surfaces of the wheel and  
hub, including the hub bolts, with a  
cloth.  
WARNING  
Do not apply oil or grease to lug nuts  
and bolts and do not tighten the lug  
nuts beyond the recommended  
tightening torque:  
Applying oil or grease to lug nuts and  
bolts is dangerous. The lug nuts  
could loosen while driving and cause  
the tire to come off, resulting in an  
accident. In addition, lug nuts and  
bolts could be damaged if tightened  
more than necessary.  
4. Turn the lug wrench counterclockwise  
and lower the vehicle. Use the lug  
wrench to tighten the nuts in the order  
shown.  
WARNING  
Make sure the mounting surfaces of  
the wheel, hub and lug nuts are clean  
before changing or replacing tires:  
When changing or replacing a tire,  
not removing dirt and grime from the  
mounting surfaces of the wheel, hub  
and hub bolts is dangerous. The lug  
nuts could loosen while driving and  
cause the tire to come off, resulting in  
an accident.  
2. Mount the spare tire.  
7-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In Case of an Emergency  
Flat Tire  
If you're unsure of how tight the nuts  
should be, have them inspected at an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
Bolt type  
Wheel size  
Short bolt 16-inch wheel  
Long bolt 17-inch wheel, 18-inch wheel  
Nut tightening torque  
7. Store the damaged tire in the trunk  
(page 7-4).  
N·m (kgf·m, ft·lbf) 88―118 (9.0―12, 65―87)  
8. Check the inflation pressure. Refer to  
the specification charts on page 10-7.  
WARNING  
Always securely and correctly tighten  
the lug nuts:  
9. Have the flat tire repaired or replaced  
as soon as possible.  
Improperly or loosely tightened lug  
nuts are dangerous. The wheel could  
wobble or come off. This could result  
in loss of vehicle control and cause a  
serious accident.  
WARNING  
Do not drive with any tires that have  
incorrect air pressure:  
Driving on tires with incorrect air  
pressure is dangerous. Tires with  
incorrect pressure could affect  
handling and result in an accident.  
When you check the regular tires' air  
pressure, check the spare tire, too.  
Be sure to reinstall the same nuts you  
removed or replace them with metric  
nuts of the same configuration:  
Because the wheel studs and lug nuts  
on your Mazda have metric threads,  
using a non-metric nut is dangerous.  
On a metric stud, it would not secure  
the wheel and would damage the  
stud, which could cause the wheel to  
slip off and cause an accident.  
NOTE  
To prevent the jack and tool from rattling, store  
them properly.  
5. Remove the center cap by tapping it  
with the lug wrench.  
6. Store the damaged tire, using the tire  
hold-down bolt to hold it in place.  
16-inch wheel  
18-inch wheel  
Bolt  
Tire clamp  
17-inch wheel  
7-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In Case of an Emergency  
Overheating  
2. Put a vehicle with an automatic  
transaxle in park (P), a manual  
transaxle in neutral.  
Overheating  
If the temperature gauge indicates  
overheating, the vehicle loses power, or  
you hear a loud knocking or pinging  
noise, the engine is probably too hot.  
3. Apply the parking brake.  
4. Turn off the air conditioner.  
5. Check whether coolant or steam is  
escaping from under the hood or from  
the engine compartment.  
WARNING  
If steam is coming from the engine  
compartment:  
Don't go near the front of the vehicle.  
Stop the engine.  
Wait until the steam dissipates, then  
open the hood and start the engine.  
Switch the ignition to off and  
make sure the fan is not running before  
attempting to work near the cooling  
fan:  
Working near the cooling fan when it  
is running is dangerous. The fan  
could continue running indefinitely  
even if the engine has stopped and  
the engine compartment temperature  
is high. You could be hit by the fan  
and seriously injured.  
If neither coolant nor steam is  
escaping:  
Open the hood and idle the engine until  
it cools.  
CAUTION  
If the cooling fan does not operate  
while the engine is running, the  
engine temperature will increase.  
Stop the engine and call an  
Do not remove either cooling  
system caps when the engine and  
radiator are hot:  
When the engine and radiator are  
hot, scalding coolant and steam may  
shoot out under pressure and cause  
serious injury.  
Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
6. Make sure the cooling fan is operating,  
then turn off the engine after the  
temperature has decreased.  
Open the hood ONLY after steam is no  
longer escaping from the engine:  
Steam from an overheated engine is  
dangerous. The escaping steam could  
seriously burn you.  
7. When cool, check the coolant level.  
If it's low, look for coolant leaks from  
the radiator and hoses.  
If the temperature gauge indicates  
overheating:  
1. Drive safely to the side of the road and  
park off the right-of-way.  
7-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In Case of an Emergency  
Overheating  
If you find a leak or other damage, or if  
coolant is still leaking:  
Stop the engine and call an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer.  
If you find no problems, the engine is  
cool, and no leaks are obvious:  
Carefully add coolant as required (page  
8-21).  
CAUTION  
If the engine continues to overheat or  
frequently overheats, have the  
cooling system inspected. The engine  
could be seriously damaged unless  
repairs are made. Consult an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
7-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In Case of an Emergency  
Emergency Starting  
If the engine still does not start using the  
above procedure, have your vehicle  
inspected by an Authorized Mazda  
Dealer.  
Starting a Flooded Engine  
Except 3.7-liter engine  
If the engine fails to start, it may be  
flooded (excessive fuel in the engine).  
Follow this procedure:  
(Without Advanced Keyless Entry &  
Push Button Start System)  
1. If the engine does not start within five  
seconds on the first try, turn the key to  
the LOCK position, wait ten seconds  
and try again.  
2. Depress the accelerator all the way and  
hold it there.  
3. Turn the ignition switch to the START  
position and hold it there―for up to  
ten seconds. If the engine starts, release  
the key and accelerator immediately  
because the engine will suddenly rev  
up.  
4. If the engine fails to start, crank it  
without depressing the accelerator―for  
up to ten seconds.  
(With Advanced Keyless Entry & Push  
Button Start System)  
1. If the engine does not start within five  
seconds on the first try, wait ten  
seconds and try again.  
2. Depress the accelerator all the way and  
hold it there.  
3. Depress the clutch pedal then press the  
push button start. If the engine starts,  
release the key and accelerator  
immediately because the engine will  
suddenly rev up.  
4. If the engine fails to start, crank it  
without depressing the accelerator.  
7-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In Case of an Emergency  
Emergency Starting  
Jump-Starting  
Jump-starting is dangerous if done incorrectly. So follow the procedure carefully. If you  
feel unsure about jump-starting, we strongly recommend that you have a competent service  
technician do the work.  
WARNING  
Follow These Precautions Carefully:  
To ensure safe and correct handling of the battery, read the following precautions  
carefully before using the battery or inspecting it.  
Always wear eye protection when working near the battery:  
Working without eye protection is dangerous. Battery fluid contains SULFURIC ACID  
which could cause blindness if splashed into your eyes. Also, hydrogen gas produced  
during normal battery operation, could ignite and cause the battery to explode.  
Wear eye protection and protective gloves to prevent contact with battery  
fluid:  
Spilled battery fluid is dangerous.  
Battery fluid contains SULFURIC ACID which could cause serious injuries if it gets in  
eyes, skin or clothing. If this happens, immediately flush your eyes with water for 15  
minutes or wash your skin thoroughly and get medical attention.  
Always keep batteries out of the reach of children:  
Allowing children to play near batteries is dangerous. Battery fluid could cause  
serious injuries if it gets in the eyes or on the skin.  
Do not allow the positive ( ) terminal to contact any other metal object that  
could cause sparks:  
Flames and sparks near open battery cells are dangerous. Hydrogen gas, produced  
during normal battery operation, could ignite and cause the battery to explode. An  
exploding battery can cause serious burns and injuries. When working near a  
battery, do not allow metal tools to contact the positive ( ) or negative (  
terminal of the battery.  
)
7-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In Case of an Emergency  
Emergency Starting  
Keep all flames, including cigarettes, and sparks away from open battery cells:  
Flames and sparks near open battery cells are dangerous. Hydrogen gas, produced  
during normal battery operation, could ignite and cause the battery to explode. An  
exploding battery can cause serious burns and injuries.  
Do not jump-start a frozen battery or one with a low fluid level:  
Jump-starting a frozen battery or one with a low fluid level is dangerous. It may  
rupture or explode, causing serious injury.  
Connect the negative cable to a good ground point away from the battery:  
Connecting the end of the second jumper cable to the negative ( ) terminal of the  
discharged battery is dangerous.  
A spark could cause the gas around the battery to explode and injure someone.  
Route the jumper cables away from parts that will be moving:  
Connecting a jumper cable near or to moving parts (cooling fans, belts) is dangerous.  
The cable could get caught when the engine starts and cause serious injury.  
CAUTION  
Use only a 12 V booster system. You can damage a 12 V starter, ignition system, and  
other electrical parts beyond repair with a 24 V power supply (two 12 V batteries in  
series or a 24 V motor generator set).  
Connect cables in numerical order and disconnect in reverse order.  
2.5-liter engine  
3.7-liter engine  
Discharged battery  
Discharged battery  
Jumper cables  
Jumper cables  
Booster battery  
Booster battery  
7-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In Case of an Emergency  
Emergency Starting  
1. Make sure the booster battery is 12 V  
and that its negative terminal is  
grounded.  
Push-Starting  
Do not push-start your Mazda.  
2. If the booster battery is in another  
vehicle, don't allow both vehicles to  
touch. Turn off the engine of the  
vehicle with the booster battery and all  
unnecessary electrical loads in both  
vehicles.  
WARNING  
Never tow a vehicle to start it:  
Towing a vehicle to start it is  
dangerous. The vehicle being towed  
could surge forward when its engine  
starts, causing the two vehicles to  
collide. The occupants could be  
injured.  
3. Connect the jumper cables in the exact  
sequence as in the illustration.  
l
Connect one end of a cable to the  
positive terminal on the discharged  
battery (1).  
Attach the other end to the positive  
terminal on the booster battery (2).  
Connect one end of the other cable  
CAUTION  
Do not push-start a vehicle that has  
a manual transaxle. It can damage  
the emission control system.  
l
l
to the negative terminal of the  
booster battery (3).  
Connect the other end to the ground  
NOTE  
You can't start a vehicle with an automatic  
transaxle by pushing it.  
l
point indicated in the illustration  
away from the discharged battery  
(4).  
4. Start the engine of the booster vehicle  
and run it a few minutes. Then start the  
engine of the other vehicle.  
5. When finished, carefully disconnect the  
cables in the reverse order described in  
the illustration.  
7-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In Case of an Emergency  
Emergency Towing  
Towing Description  
CAUTION  
Do not tow the vehicle pointed  
backward with driving wheels on the  
ground. This may cause internal  
damage to the transaxle.  
We recommend that towing be done only  
by an Authorized Mazda Dealer or a  
commercial tow-truck service.  
Proper lifting and towing are necessary to  
prevent damage to the vehicle.  
Government and local laws must be  
followed.  
A towed vehicle usually should have its  
drive wheels (front wheels) off the  
ground. If excessive damage or other  
conditions prevent this, use wheel dollies.  
CAUTION  
Do not tow with sling-type  
equipment. This could damage your  
vehicle. Use wheel-lift or flatbed  
equipment.  
Wheel dollies  
When towing with the rear wheels on the  
ground, release the parking brake.  
7-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In Case of an Emergency  
Emergency Towing  
Recreational Towing  
An example of “recreational towing” is  
towing your vehicle behind a motorhome.  
The transaxle is not designed for towing  
this vehicle on all 4 wheels.  
When doing recreational towing refer to  
“Towing Description” (page 7-17) and  
carefully follow the instructions.  
7-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Care  
8
How to keep your Mazda in top condition.  
Introduction .................................................................................. 8-2  
Introduction ............................................................................... 8-2  
Scheduled Maintenance ................................................................ 8-3  
Scheduled Maintenance (USA, Canada, and Puerto Rico) ....... 8-3  
Scheduled Maintenance (Mexico) ............................................. 8-8  
Owner Maintenance ................................................................... 8-15  
Owner Maintenance Schedule ................................................ 8-15  
Owner Maintenance Precautions ............................................. 8-16  
Engine Compartment Overview .............................................. 8-18  
Engine Oil ............................................................................... 8-19  
Engine Coolant ....................................................................... 8-21  
Brake/Clutch Fluid .................................................................. 8-22  
Power Steering Fluid ............................................................... 8-23  
Automatic Transaxle Fluid (ATF) ........................................... 8-24  
Washer Fluid ........................................................................... 8-27  
Body Lubrication .................................................................... 8-28  
Wiper Blades ........................................................................... 8-28  
Battery ..................................................................................... 8-31  
Tires ........................................................................................ 8-32  
Light Bulbs ............................................................................. 8-37  
Fuses ....................................................................................... 8-46  
Appearance Care ........................................................................ 8-52  
How to Minimize Environmental Paint Damage .................... 8-52  
Exterior Care ........................................................................... 8-54  
Interior Care ............................................................................ 8-57  
8-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Care  
Introduction  
Introduction  
Be extremely careful and prevent injury to yourself and others or damage to your vehicle  
when using this manual for inspection and maintenance.  
If you're unsure about any procedure it describes, we strongly urge you to have a reliable  
and qualified service shop perform the work, preferably an Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
Factory-trained Mazda technicians and genuine Mazda parts are best for your vehicle.  
Without this expertise and the parts that have been designed and made especially for your  
Mazda, inadequate, incomplete, and insufficient servicing may result in problems. This  
could lead to vehicle damage or an accident and injuries.  
For expert advice and quality service, consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
The owner should retain evidence that proper maintenance has been performed as  
prescribed.  
Claims against the warranty resulting from lack of maintenance, as opposed to defective  
materials or authorized Mazda workmanship, will not be honored.  
Any auto repair shop using parts equivalent to your Mazda's original equipment may  
perform maintenance. But we recommend that it always be done by an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer using genuine Mazda parts.  
8-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Care  
Scheduled Maintenance  
Scheduled Maintenance (USA, Canada, and Puerto Rico)  
Follow Schedule 1 if the vehicle is operated mainly where none of the following conditions  
apply.  
l
Repeated short-distance driving  
Driving in dusty conditions  
Driving with extended use of brakes  
Driving in areas where salt or other corrosive materials are used  
Driving on rough or muddy roads  
Extended periods of idling or low-speed operation  
Driving for long periods in cold temperatures or extremely humid climates  
Driving in extremely hot conditions  
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Driving in mountainous conditions continually  
If any do apply, follow Schedule 2 (Canada and Puerto Rico residents follow Schedule 2).  
NOTE  
After the prescribed period, continue to follow the described maintenance at the recommended  
intervals.  
8-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Care  
Scheduled Maintenance  
qSchedule 1  
Number of months or kilometers (miles), whichever comes first  
Months  
×1000 km  
×1000 miles  
6
12  
24  
15  
18  
36  
24  
48  
30  
30  
60  
36  
72  
45  
42  
84  
48  
96  
60  
Maintenance Interval  
12  
7.5  
22.5  
37.5  
52.5  
ENGINE  
Engine valve clearance (for 2.5-liter engine)  
2.5-liter engine  
Audibly inspect every 120,000 km (75,000 miles),  
if noisy, adjust  
I
Drive belts  
Inspect every 168,000 km (105,000 miles)  
Replace every 240,000 km (150,000 miles)  
3.7-liter engine  
Engine oil  
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Engine oil filter  
COOLING SYSTEM  
Replace at first 192,000 km (120,000 miles) or 10 years; after  
that, every 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 5 years  
FL22 type*1  
Others  
Engine coolant  
Replace at first 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 4 years; after that,  
every 2 years  
FUEL SYSTEM  
2.5-liter engine  
3.7-liter engine  
R
Air filter  
C
R
C
I
Fuel lines and hoses*2  
I
Hoses and tubes for emission*2  
I
IGNITION SYSTEM  
2.5-liter engine  
3.7-liter engine  
Replace every 120,000 km (75,000 miles)  
Replace every 160,000 km (100,000 miles)  
Spark plugs  
CHASSIS and BODY  
Brake lines, hoses and connections  
Disc brakes  
I
I
I
I
I
I
Tire (Rotation)  
Rotate every 12,000 km (7,500 miles)  
I
Steering operation and linkages  
I
I
Front and rear suspension, ball joints and wheel  
bearing axial play  
I
Driveshaft dust boots  
I
I
Bolts and nuts on chassis and body  
Exhaust system and heat shields  
All locks and hinges  
T
T
Inspect every 72,000 km (45,000 miles) or 5 years  
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
8-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Care  
Scheduled Maintenance  
Number of months or kilometers (miles), whichever comes first  
Months  
×1000 km  
×1000 miles  
6
12  
24  
15  
18  
36  
24  
48  
30  
30  
60  
36  
72  
45  
42  
84  
48  
96  
60  
Maintenance Interval  
12  
7.5  
22.5  
37.5  
52.5  
AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM  
Cabin air filter  
Replace every 40,000 km (25,000 miles) or 2 years  
Chart symbols:  
I: Inspect: Inspect and clean, repair, adjust, fill up, or replace if necessary.  
R: Replace  
C: Clean  
L: Lubricate  
T: Tighten  
Remarks:  
*1 Use FL22 type coolant in vehicles with the inscription “FL22” on the radiator cap itself or the surrounding  
area. Use FL22 when replacing the coolant.  
*2 According to state/provincial and federal regulations, failure to perform maintenance on these items will not  
void your emissions warranties. However, Mazda recommends that all maintenance services be performed at  
the recommended time or mileage/kilometer period to ensure long-term reliability.  
8-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Care  
Scheduled Maintenance  
qSchedule 2  
Number of months or kilometers (miles), whichever comes first  
Months  
×1000 km  
×1000 miles  
4
8
5
8
12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48  
Maintenance Interval  
16 24 32 40 48 56 64 72 80 88 96  
10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60  
ENGINE  
Engine valve clearance (for 2.5-liter engine)  
2.5-liter engine  
Audibly inspect every 120,000 km (75,000 miles), if noisy,  
adjust  
I
Drive belts  
Inspect every 160,000 km (100,000 miles)  
Replace every 240,000 km (150,000 miles)  
Replace every 5,000 km (3,000 miles) or 3 months  
3.7-liter engine  
Puerto Rico  
Others  
Engine oil  
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Engine oil filter  
COOLING SYSTEM  
Replace at first 192,000 km (120,000 miles) or 10 years ;after  
that, every 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 5 years  
FL22 type*1  
Others  
Engine coolant  
Replace at first 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 4 years; after that,  
every 2 years  
Engine coolant level  
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
FUEL SYSTEM  
Puerto Rico  
Others  
R
R
Air filter (for 2.5-liter engine)  
R
R
Puerto Rico  
Others  
C
R
I
C
R
Air filter (for 3.7-liter engine)  
C
C
Fuel lines and hoses*2  
Hoses and tubes for emission*2  
I
I
IGNITION SYSTEM  
USA  
Replace every 96,000 km (60,000 miles)  
Replace every 120,000 km (75,000 miles)  
Replace every 96,000 km (60,000 miles)  
Replace every 160,000 km (100,000 miles)  
Spark plugs (for 2.5-liter engine)  
Spark plugs (for 3.7-liter engine)  
Others*3  
USA  
Others*3  
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM  
Function of all lights  
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
8-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Care  
Scheduled Maintenance  
Number of months or kilometers (miles), whichever comes first  
Months  
×1000 km  
×1000 miles  
4
8
5
8
12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48  
Maintenance Interval  
16 24 32 40 48 56 64 72 80 88 96  
10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60  
CHASSIS and BODY  
Brake lines, hoses and connections  
Brake fluid level  
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Disc brakes  
Tire (Rotation)  
Rotate every 8,000 km (5,000 miles)  
Tire inflation pressure and tire wear  
Steering operation and linkages  
Power steering fluid level  
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Front and rear suspension, ball joints and wheel  
bearing axial play  
I
I
Driveshaft dust boots  
I
I
Bolts and nuts on chassis and body  
Exhaust system and heat shields  
All locks and hinges  
T
T
Inspect every 72,000 km (45,000 miles) or 5 years  
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
Washer fluid level  
AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM  
Cabin air filter  
Replace every 40,000 km (25,000 miles) or 2 years  
Chart symbols:  
I: Inspect: Inspect and clean, repair, adjust, fill up, or replace if necessary.  
R: Replace  
C: Clean  
L: Lubricate  
T: Tighten  
Remarks:  
*1 Use FL22 type coolant in vehicles with the inscription “FL22” on the radiator cap itself or the surrounding  
area. Use FL22 when replacing the coolant.  
*2 According to state/provincial and federal regulations, failure to perform maintenance on these items will not  
void your emissions warranties. However, Mazda recommends that all maintenance services be performed at  
the recommended time or mileage/kilometer period to ensure long-term reliability.  
*3 If the vehicle is operated primarily under any of the following conditions, replace the spark plugs at every  
96,000 km (60,000 miles) or shorter.  
a) Repeated short-distance driving  
b) Extended periods of idling or low-speed operation  
c) Driving for long periods in cold temperatures or extremely humid climates  
8-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Care  
Scheduled Maintenance  
Scheduled Maintenance (Mexico)  
Follow Schedule 1 if the vehicle is operated mainly where none of the following conditions  
apply.  
l
Repeated short-distance driving  
Driving in dusty conditions  
Driving with extended use of brakes  
Driving in areas where salt or other corrosive materials are used  
Driving on rough or muddy roads  
Extended periods of idling or low-speed operation  
Driving for long periods in cold temperatures or extremely humid climates  
Driving in extremely hot conditions  
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Driving in mountainous conditions continually  
If any do apply, follow Schedule 2.  
NOTE  
After the prescribed period, continue to follow the described maintenance at the recommended  
intervals.  
8-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Care  
Scheduled Maintenance  
qSchedule 1  
Number of months or kilometers, whichever comes first  
Maintenance Interval  
Months  
6
12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72  
×1000 km  
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120  
ENGINE  
Engine valve clearance (for 2.5-liter engine)  
2.5-liter engine  
Audibly inspect every 120,000 km, if noisy, adjust  
I
I
I
Drive belts  
Inspect every 40,000 km or 2 years  
Replace every 240,000 km  
3.7-liter engine  
Engine oil  
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Engine oil filter  
COOLING SYSTEM  
Cooling system  
I
I
I
Replace at first 190,000 km or 10 years; after that, every  
60,000 km or 3 years  
FL22 type*1  
Others  
Engine coolant  
R
R
R
FUEL SYSTEM  
Air filter  
R
R
I*2  
I*2  
R
R
R
I*2  
I*2  
R
R
R
I
Fuel lines and hoses  
Hoses and tubes for emission  
Fuel filter  
I
R
IGNITION SYSTEM  
Spark plugs  
Replace every 60,000 km  
CHASSIS and BODY  
Brake lines, hoses and connections  
Brake fluid level  
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Brake fluid  
R
I
R
I
R
I
Disc brakes  
I
I
I
Tire (Rotation)  
Rotate every 10,000 km  
Tire inflation pressure and tire wear  
Steering operation and linkages  
Power steering fluid level  
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Front and rear suspension, ball joints and wheel  
bearing axial play  
I
I
I
I
I
I
Driveshaft dust boots  
I
T
I
I
T
I
I
T
I
I
T
I
I
T
I
I
T
I
Bolts and nuts on chassis and body  
Exhaust system and heat shields  
All locks and hinges  
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
Washer fluid level  
8-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Care  
Scheduled Maintenance  
Number of months or kilometers, whichever comes first  
Maintenance Interval  
Months  
6
12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72  
×1000 km  
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120  
AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM  
Cabin air filter  
R
R
R
Chart symbols:  
I: Inspect: Inspect and clean, repair, adjust, fill up, or replace if necessary.  
R: Replace  
L: Lubricate  
T: Tighten  
Remarks:  
*1 Use FL22 type coolant in vehicles with the inscription “FL22” on the radiator cap itself or the surrounding  
area. Use FL22 when replacing the coolant.  
*2 According to state/provincial and federal regulations, failure to perform maintenance on these items will not  
void your emissions warranties. However, Mazda recommends that all maintenance services be performed at  
the recommended time or kilometer period to ensure long-term reliability.  
8-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Care  
Scheduled Maintenance  
qSchedule 2  
Number of months or kilometers, whichever comes first  
Maintenance Interval  
Months  
3
5
6
9
12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 36  
×1000 km  
10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60  
ENGINE  
Engine valve clearance (for 2.5-liter engine)  
2.5-liter engine  
Audibly inspect every 120,000 km, if noisy, adjust  
I
Drive belts  
Inspect every 40,000 km or 2 years  
Replace every 240,000 km  
3.7-liter engine  
Engine oil  
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Engine oil filter  
COOLING SYSTEM  
Cooling system  
I
Replace at first 190,000 km or 10 years; after that, every  
60,000 km or 3 years  
FL22 type*1  
Others  
Engine coolant  
R
Engine coolant level  
FUEL SYSTEM  
Air filter  
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
C
R
C
R
I*2  
I*2  
R
C
R
Fuel lines and hoses  
Hoses and tubes for emission  
Fuel filter  
IGNITION SYSTEM  
Spark plugs  
Replace every 60,000 km  
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM  
Function of all lights  
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
8-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Care  
Scheduled Maintenance  
Number of months or kilometers, whichever comes first  
Maintenance Interval  
Months  
3
5
6
9
12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 36  
×1000 km  
10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60  
CHASSIS and BODY  
Brake lines, hoses and connections  
Brake fluid level  
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Brake fluid  
R
I
Disc brakes  
I
I
Tire (Rotation)  
Rotate every 10,000 km  
Tire inflation pressure and tire wear  
Steering operation and linkages  
Power steering fluid level  
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Front and rear suspension, ball joints and wheel  
bearing axial play  
I
I
I
Driveshaft dust boots  
I
T
I
I
T
I
I
T
I
Bolts and nuts on chassis and body  
Exhaust system and heat shields  
All locks and hinges  
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
Washer fluid level  
AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM  
Cabin air filter  
R
R
R
Chart symbols:  
I: Inspect: Inspect and clean, repair, adjust, fill up, or replace if necessary.  
R: Replace  
C: Clean  
L: Lubricate  
T: Tighten  
Remarks:  
*1 Use FL22 type coolant in vehicles with the inscription “FL22” on the radiator cap itself or the surrounding  
area. Use FL22 when replacing the coolant.  
*2 According to state/provincial and federal regulations, failure to perform maintenance on these items will not  
void your emissions warranties. However, Mazda recommends that all maintenance services be performed at  
the recommended time or kilometer period to ensure long-term reliability.  
8-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Care  
Scheduled Maintenance  
(Cont.)  
Number of months or kilometers, whichever comes first  
Maintenance Interval  
Months  
×1000 km  
39 42 45 48 51 54 57 60 63 66 69 72  
65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120  
ENGINE  
Engine valve clearance (for 2.5-liter engine)  
2.5-liter engine  
Audibly inspect every 120,000 km, if noisy, adjust  
I
I
Drive belts  
Inspect every 40,000 km or 2 years  
Replace every 240,000 km  
3.7-liter engine  
Engine oil  
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Engine oil filter  
COOLING SYSTEM  
Cooling system  
I
I
Replace at first 190,000 km or 10 years; after that, every  
60,000 km or 3 years  
FL22 type*1  
Others  
Engine coolant  
R
R
I
Engine coolant level  
FUEL SYSTEM  
Air filter  
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
C
R
I*2  
I*2  
R
C
R
C
R
I
Fuel lines and hoses  
Hoses and tubes for emission  
Fuel filter  
I
R
IGNITION SYSTEM  
Spark plugs  
Replace every 60,000 km  
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM  
Function of all lights  
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
8-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Care  
Scheduled Maintenance  
Number of months or kilometers, whichever comes first  
Maintenance Interval  
Months  
×1000 km  
39 42 45 48 51 54 57 60 63 66 69 72  
65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120  
CHASSIS and BODY  
Brake lines, hoses and connections  
Brake fluid level  
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Brake fluid  
R
I
R
I
Disc brakes  
I
Tire (Rotation)  
Rotate every 10,000 km  
Tire inflation pressure and tire wear  
Steering operation and linkages  
Power steering fluid level  
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Front and rear suspension, ball joints and wheel  
bearing axial play  
I
I
I
Driveshaft dust boots  
I
T
I
I
T
I
I
T
I
Bolts and nuts on chassis and body  
Exhaust system and heat shields  
All locks and hinges  
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
Washer fluid level  
AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM  
Cabin air filter  
R
R
R
Chart symbols:  
I: Inspect: Inspect and clean, repair, adjust, fill up, or replace if necessary.  
R: Replace  
C: Clean  
L: Lubricate  
T: Tighten  
Remarks:  
*1 Use FL22 type coolant in vehicles with the inscription “FL22” on the radiator cap itself or the surrounding  
area. Use FL22 when replacing the coolant.  
*2 According to state/provincial and federal regulations, failure to perform maintenance on these items will not  
void your emissions warranties. However, Mazda recommends that all maintenance services be performed at  
the recommended time or kilometer period to ensure long-term reliability.  
8-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Care  
Owner Maintenance  
Owner Maintenance Schedule  
The owner or a qualified service technician should make these vehicle inspections at the  
indicated intervals to ensure safe and dependable operation.  
Bring any problem to the attention of an Authorized Mazda Dealer or qualified service  
technician as soon as possible.  
qWhen Refueling  
l
Brake and clutch fluid level (page 8-22)  
Engine coolant level (page 8-21)  
Engine oil level (page 8-20)  
Washer fluid level (page 8-27)  
l
l
l
qAt Least Monthly  
Tire inflation pressures (page 8-32)  
qAt Least Twice a Year (For Example, Every Spring and Fall)  
l
Automatic transaxle fluid level (page 8-24)  
You can do the following scheduled maintenance items if you have some mechanical  
ability and a few basic tools and if you closely follow the directions in this manual.  
l
Engine coolant (page 8-21)  
Engine oil (page 8-19)  
l
8-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Care  
Owner Maintenance  
Owner Maintenance Precautions  
Improper or incomplete service may result in problems. This section gives instructions only  
for items that are easy to perform.  
As explained in the Introduction (page 8-2), several procedures can be done only by a  
qualified service technician with special tools.  
Improper owner maintenance during the warranty period may affect warranty coverage.  
For details, read the separate Mazda Warranty statement provided with the vehicle. If  
you're unsure about any servicing or maintenance procedure, have it done by an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
There are strict environmental laws regarding the disposal of waste oil and fluids. Please  
dispose of your waste properly and with due regard to the environment.  
We recommend that you entrust the oil and fluid changes of your vehicle to an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer.  
8-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Care  
Owner Maintenance  
WARNING  
Do not perform maintenance work if you lack sufficient knowledge and experience or  
the proper tools and equipment to do the work. Have maintenance work done by a  
qualified technician:  
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle is dangerous if not done properly. You  
can be seriously injured while performing some maintenance procedures.  
If you must run the engine while working under the hood, make certain that you  
remove all jewelry (especially rings, bracelets, watches, and necklaces) and all  
neckties, scarves, and similar loose clothing before getting near the engine or cooling  
fan which may turn on unexpectedly:  
Working under the hood with the engine running is dangerous. It becomes even  
more dangerous when you wear jewelry or loose clothing.  
Either can become entangled in moving parts and result in injury.  
Switch the ignition to off and make sure the fan is not running before  
attempting to work near the cooling fan:  
Working near the cooling fan when it is running is dangerous. The fan could  
continue running indefinitely even if the engine has stopped and the engine  
compartment temperature is high. You could be hit by the fan and seriously injured.  
Do not leave items in the engine compartment:  
After you have finished checking or doing servicing in the engine compartment, do  
not forget and leave items such as tools or rags in the engine compartment.  
Tools or other items left in the engine compartment could cause engine damage or a  
fire leading to an unexpected accident.  
NOTE  
Once the engine coolant exceeds a preset temperature, an electrical cooling fan turns on. It will  
continue running for about 10 minutes after the ignition is switched off.  
8-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Care  
Owner Maintenance  
Engine Compartment Overview  
2.5-liter engine  
Fuse block  
Automatic transaxle fluid-level dipstick  
(only for automatic transaxle)  
Engine coolant  
reservoir  
Brake/Clutch  
fluid reservoir  
Engine oil-filler cap  
Battery  
Windscreen washer  
fluid reservoir  
Engine oil dipstick  
Power steering fluid reservoir  
3.7-liter engine  
Brake fluid reservoir  
Fuse block  
Power steering fluid reservoir  
Battery  
Engine coolant  
reservoir  
Engine oil dipstick  
Windscreen washer  
fluid reservoir  
Engine oil-filler cap  
Automatic transaxle fluid-level dipstick  
8-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Care  
Owner Maintenance  
Only use oils “Certified For Gasoline  
Engines” by the American Petroleum  
Institute (API). An oil with this trademark  
symbol conforms to the current engine  
and emission system protection standards  
and fuel economy requirements of the  
International Lubricant Standardization  
and Approval Committee (ILSAC),  
comprised of U.S. and Japanese  
Engine Oil  
NOTE  
Changing the engine oil should be done by an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
qRecommended Oil  
Use SAE 5W-20 engine oil.  
Oil container labels provide important  
information.  
automobile manufacturers.  
A chief contribution this type of oil makes  
to fuel economy is reducing the amount of  
fuel necessary to overcome engine  
friction.  
–30  
–10  
10  
30  
–20  
0
20  
40 50  
–20  
80  
100  
0
20 40  
60  
120  
U.S.A. and CANADA  
5W-20  
Except U.S.A. and CANADA  
(ILSAC)  
(ILSAC)  
(Mexico)  
2.5-liter engine  
Use SAE 5W-20 engine oil. If SAE 5W-  
20 engine oil is not available, use SAE  
5W-30 engine oil.  
8-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Care  
Owner Maintenance  
3.7-liter engine  
3.7-liter engine  
Use SAE 5W-20 engine oil. If SAE 5W-  
20 engine oil is not available, use SAE  
10W-30 10W-40 5W-40 engine oil.  
Full  
Low  
The quality designation SM, or ILSAC  
must be on the label.  
–30  
–10  
10  
30  
–20  
0
20  
40 50  
–20  
80  
100  
0
20 40  
60  
120  
5. 2.5-liter engine  
Pull it out again and examine the level.  
It's OK between Low and Full.  
But if it's near or below Low, add  
enough oil to bring the level to Full.  
3.7-liter engine  
5W-20  
Pull it out again and examine the level.  
It's OK between Low and Full. But if  
it's below Low, add oil to raise the  
level within the hatching zone.  
qInspecting Engine Oil Level  
1. Be sure the vehicle is on a level  
surface.  
CAUTION  
Don't add engine oil over Full. This  
may cause engine damage.  
2. Warm up the engine to normal  
operating temperature.  
3. Turn it off and wait at least 5 minutes  
for the oil to return to the oil pan.  
6. Make sure the O-ring on the dipstick is  
positioned properly before reinserting  
the dipstick.  
4. Pull out the dipstick, wipe it clean, and  
reinsert it fully.  
2.5-liter engine  
Full  
OK  
Low  
8-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Care  
Owner Maintenance  
Inspect the antifreeze protection and  
coolant level in the coolant reservoir at  
least once a year―at the beginning of the  
winter season―and before traveling  
where temperatures may drop below  
freezing.  
Engine Coolant  
qInspecting Coolant Level  
WARNING  
Do not use a match or live flame in the  
engine compartment. DO NOT ADD  
COOLANT WHEN THE ENGINE IS HOT:  
A hot engine is dangerous. If the  
engine has been running, parts of the  
engine compartment can become  
very hot. You could be burned.  
Carefully inspect the engine coolant  
in the coolant reservoir, but do not  
open it.  
Inspect the condition and connections of  
all cooling system and heater hoses.  
Replace any that are swollen or  
deteriorated.  
The coolant should be at full in the  
radiator and between the FULL or F and  
LOW or L marks on the coolant reservoir  
when the engine is cool.  
Switch the ignition to off and  
make sure the fan is not running before  
attempting to work near the cooling  
fan:  
Working near the cooling fan when it  
is running is dangerous. The fan  
could continue running indefinitely  
even if the engine has stopped and  
the engine compartment temperature  
is high. You could be hit by the fan  
and seriously injured.  
If it's at or near LOW or L, add enough  
coolant to the coolant reservoir to provide  
freezing and corrosion protection and to  
bring the level to FULL or F.  
Do not remove the cooling  
system cap when the engine and  
radiator are hot:  
When the engine and radiator are  
hot, scalding coolant and steam may  
shoot out under pressure and cause  
serious injury.  
NOTE  
Changing the coolant should be done by an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
8-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Care  
Owner Maintenance  
Brake/Clutch Fluid  
CAUTION  
Ø Radiator coolant will damage  
paint.  
q
Inspecting Brake/Clutch Fluid Level  
Rinse it off quickly if spilled.  
Ø Use only soft (demineralized)  
water in the coolant mixture.  
Water that contains minerals will  
cut down on the coolant's  
effectiveness.  
Ø Don't add only water. Always add  
a proper coolant mixture.  
Ø The engine has aluminum parts  
and must be protected by an  
ethylene-glycol-based coolant to  
prevent corrosion and freezing.  
Ø DO NOT USE coolants Containing  
Alcohol, methanol, Borate or  
Silicate.  
The brakes and clutch draw fluid from the  
same reservoir.  
Inspect the fluid level in the reservoir  
regularly. It should be kept at MAX.  
The level normally drops with  
accumulated distance, a condition  
associated with wear of brake and clutch  
linings. If it is excessively low, have the  
brake/clutch system inspected by an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
2.5-liter engine  
These coolants could damage the  
cooling system.  
Ø DO NOT MIX alcohol or methanol  
with the coolant. This could  
damage the cooling system.  
Ø Don't use a solution that contains  
more than 60% antifreeze.  
This would reduce effectiveness.  
3.7-liter engine  
If the coolant reservoir is empty or new  
coolant is required frequently, consult an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
8-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Care  
Owner Maintenance  
qAdding Brake/Clutch Fluid  
Power Steering Fluid  
WARNING  
Be careful not to spill brake fluid on  
yourself or on the engine:  
qInspecting Power Steering Fluid  
Level  
Spilled brake fluid is dangerous. If it  
gets in your eyes, they could be  
seriously injured. If this happens,  
immediately flush your eyes with  
water and get medical attention.  
Brake fluid spilled on a hot engine  
could cause a fire.  
CAUTION  
To avoid damage to the power  
steering pump, don't operate the  
vehicle for long periods when the  
power steering fluid level is low.  
NOTE  
Use specified power steering fluid (page 10-4).  
If the brake/clutch fluid level is low,  
have the brakes and clutch inspected:  
Low brake/clutch fluid levels are  
dangerous. Low levels could signal  
brake lining wear or a brake system  
leak. Your brakes could fail and  
cause an accident.  
Inspect the fluid level in the reservoir at  
each engine oil change with the engine off  
and cold. Add fluid if necessary; it does  
not require periodic changing.  
2.5-liter engine  
If the fluid level is low, add fluid until it  
reaches MAX.  
Before adding fluid, thoroughly clean the  
area around the cap.  
CAUTION  
Ø Brake and clutch fluid will  
damage painted surfaces. If brake  
or clutch fluid does get on a  
painted surface, wash it off with  
water immediately.  
3.7-liter engine  
Ø Using nonspecified brake and  
clutch fluids (page 10-4) will  
damage the systems. Mixing  
different fluids will also damage  
them.  
If the brake/clutch system  
frequently requires new fluid,  
consult an Authorized Mazda  
Dealer.  
8-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Care  
Owner Maintenance  
The level must be kept between MIN and  
MAX.  
Automatic Transaxle Fluid  
(ATF)  
Visually examine the lines and hoses for  
leaks and damage.  
qInspecting Automatic Transaxle  
Fluid Level  
If new fluid is required frequently, consult  
an Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
The automatic transaxle fluid level should  
be inspected regularly. Measure it as  
described below.  
2.5-liter engine  
CAUTION  
Ø Always check the automatic  
transaxle fluid level according to  
the following procedure. If the  
procedure is not done correctly,  
the automatic transaxle fluid level  
cannot be measured accurately  
which could lead to automatic  
transaxle damage.  
Ø A low fluid level can cause  
transaxle slippage. Overfilling can  
cause foaming, loss of fluid, and  
transaxle malfunction.  
Ø Use only the specified fluid. A non-  
specified fluid could result in  
transaxle malfunction and failure.  
1. Park on a level surface and set the  
parking brake firmly.  
2. Make sure there is no ATF leakage  
from the ATF hose or the housing.  
3. Shift the shift lever to the park position  
(P), start the engine and warm it up.  
CAUTION  
Do not shift the shift lever while the  
engine is warming up. If the ATF level  
is extremely low, the automatic  
transaxle could be damaged.  
8-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Care  
Owner Maintenance  
4. While the engine is still idling, pull out  
the dipstick and wipe it clean, and then  
put it back.  
3.7-liter engine  
The volume of fluid changes with  
temperature. Fluid must be checked while  
idling the engine without driving at  
normal operating temperature.  
5. Check the ATF level. If there is no ATF  
adhering 5 mm from the end of the  
dipstick, add ATF.  
CAUTION  
CAUTION  
Ø Low fluid level causes transaxle  
slippage. Overfilling can cause  
foaming, loss of fluid, and  
If there is no ATF adhering to the  
dipstick even after the engine has  
been warmed up, do not drive the  
vehicle. Otherwise, the automatic  
transaxle could be damaged.  
transaxle malfunction.  
Ø Use specified fluid (page 10-4). A  
nonspecified fluid could result in  
transaxle malfunction and failure.  
6. Shift the shift lever to each range and  
position, and make sure there is no  
abnormality.  
1. Park on a level surface and set the  
parking brake firmly.  
2. Start the engine and depress the brake  
pedal.  
7. Drive the vehicle on city roads for  
5 km (3.1 mile) or more.  
3. Move the shift lever through all ranges,  
then set it at P.  
8. Park on a level surface and set the  
parking brake firmly.  
9. Shift the shift lever to the park position  
(P), check the ATF level while the  
engine is idling, and make sure that the  
ATF level is within the proper level. If  
the ATF level is not within the proper  
level, add ATF.  
WARNING  
Make sure the brake pedal is applied  
before shifting the shift lever:  
Shifting the shift lever without first  
depressing the brake pedal is  
dangerous. The vehicle could move  
suddenly and cause an accident.  
The proper fluid level is marked on the  
dipstick as follows.  
4. With the engine still idling, pull out the  
dipstick, wipe it clean, and put it back.  
Full  
Low  
8-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Care  
Owner Maintenance  
5. Pull it out again.  
The proper fluid level is marked on the  
dipstick as follows.  
Fully insert the dipstick. When adding  
fluid, inspect with the dipstick to make  
sure it doesn't pass full.  
NOTE  
Inspect the fluid on both sides of the dipstick in  
a well lit area for an accurate reading.  
Full  
A
Low  
Full  
B
Low  
Fluid hot scale A  
When the vehicle has been driven and the  
fluid is at normal operating temperature,  
about 65°C (150°F), the level must be  
between Full and Low.  
Fluid cold scale B  
When the engine has not been running  
and the outside temperature is about 20°C  
(70°F), the fluid level should be close to,  
but not above, the bottom notch on the  
dipstick.  
CAUTION  
Ø Use the cold scale only as a  
reference.  
Ø If outside temperature is lower  
than about 20°C (70°F), start the  
engine and inspect the fluid level  
after the engine reaches operating  
temperature.  
Ø If the vehicle has been driven for  
an extended period at high speeds  
or in city traffic in hot weather,  
inspect the level only after  
stopping the engine and allowing  
the fluid to cool for 30 minutes.  
8-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Care  
Owner Maintenance  
Inspect fluid level in the washer fluid  
reservoir; add fluid if necessary.  
Washer Fluid  
qInspecting Washer Fluid Level  
WARNING  
Use only windshield washer fluid or  
plain water in the reservoir:  
Using radiator antifreeze as washer  
fluid is dangerous. If sprayed on the  
windshield, it will dirty the  
windshield, affect your visibility, and  
could result in an accident.  
Using Washer Fluid Without Anti-freeze  
Protection in Cold Weather:  
Use plain water if washer fluid is  
unavailable.  
Operating your vehicle in  
temperatures below 4 degrees C (40  
degrees F) using washer fluid without  
anti-freeze protection is dangerous  
as it could cause impaired windshield  
vision and result in an accident. In  
cold weather, always use washer  
fluid with anti-freeze protection.  
But use only washer fluid in cold weather  
to prevent it from freezing.  
NOTE  
State or local regulations may restrict the use  
of volatile organic compounds (VOCs), which  
are commonly used as anti-freeze agents in  
washer fluid. A washer fluid with limited VOC  
content should be used only if it provides  
adequate freeze resistance for all regions and  
climates in which the vehicle will be operated.  
8-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Care  
Owner Maintenance  
Body Lubrication  
Wiper Blades  
CAUTION  
Ø Hot waxes applied by automatic  
car washers have been known to  
affect the wiper's ability to clean  
windows.  
All moving points of the body, such as  
door and hood hinges and locks, should  
be lubricated each time the engine oil is  
changed. Use a nonfreezing lubricant on  
locks during cold weather.  
Ø To prevent damage to the wiper  
blades, don't use gasoline,  
kerosene, paint thinner, or other  
solvents on or near them.  
Make sure the hood's secondary latch  
keeps the hood from opening when the  
primary latch is released.  
Contamination of either the windshield or  
the blades with foreign matter can reduce  
wiper effectiveness. Common sources are  
insects, tree sap, and hot wax treatments  
used by some commercial car washes.  
If the blades are not wiping properly,  
clean the window and blades with a good  
cleaner or mild detergent; then rinse  
thoroughly with clean water. Repeat if  
necessary.  
q
Replacing Windshield Wiper Blades  
When the wipers no longer clean well, the  
blades are probably worn or cracked.  
Replace them.  
CAUTION  
To prevent damage to the wiper arms  
and other components, don't try to  
sweep the wiper arm by hand.  
NOTE  
To prevent damage to the wiper arm blades  
when raising both the driver and passenger  
side wiper arms, raise the driver side wiper  
arm first. Conversely, when setting down the  
wiper arms, set the passenger side wiper arm  
down first.  
1. Raise the wiper arm.  
8-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Care  
Owner Maintenance  
2. Open the clip and slide the blade  
assembly in the direction of the arrow.  
4. Pull down the blade rubber and slide it  
out of blade holder.  
3. Tilt the blade assembly and remove it  
from the arm.  
5. Remove the metal stiffeners from each  
blade rubber and install them in the  
new blade.  
CAUTION  
To prevent damage to the windshield  
let the wiper arm down easily, don't  
let it slap down on the windshield.  
8-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Care  
Owner Maintenance  
CAUTION  
Ø Don't bend or discard the  
stiffeners. You need to use them  
again.  
Ø If the metal stiffeners are  
switched, the blade's wiping  
efficiency could be reduced.  
So don't use the driver's side metal  
stiffeners on the passenger's side,  
or vice versa.  
Ø Be sure to reinstall the metal  
stiffeners in the new blade rubber  
so that the curve is the same as it  
was in the old blade rubber.  
6. Carefully insert the new blade rubber.  
Then install the blade assembly in the  
reverse order of removal.  
8-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Care  
Owner Maintenance  
Battery  
WARNING  
Wash hands after handling the battery and related accessories:  
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds,  
chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm.  
Always wear eye protection when working near the battery:  
Working without eye protection is dangerous. Battery fluid contains SULFURIC ACID  
which could cause blindness if splashed into your eyes. Also, hydrogen gas produced  
during normal battery operation, could ignite and cause the battery to explode.  
Wear eye protection and protective gloves to prevent contact with battery fluid:  
Spilled battery fluid is dangerous.  
Battery fluid contains SULFURIC ACID which could cause serious injuries if it gets in  
eyes, or on the skin or clothing. If this happens, immediately flush your eyes with  
water for 15 minutes or wash your skin thoroughly and get medical attention.  
Always keep batteries out of the reach of children:  
Allowing children to play near batteries is dangerous. Battery fluid could cause  
serious injuries if it gets in the eyes or on the skin.  
Keep flames and sparks away from open battery cells and do not allow metal tools  
to contact the positive ( ) or negative ( ) terminal of the battery when working  
near a battery. Do not allow the positive ( ) terminal to contact the vehicle body:  
Flames and sparks near open battery cells are dangerous. Hydrogen gas, produced  
during normal battery operation, could ignite and cause the battery to explode. An  
exploding battery can cause serious burns and injuries. Keep all flames including  
cigarettes and sparks away from open battery cells.  
Keep all flames, including cigarettes, and sparks away from open battery cells:  
Flames and sparks near open battery cells are dangerous. Hydrogen gas, produced  
during normal battery operation, could ignite and cause the battery to explode. An  
exploding battery can cause serious burns and injuries.  
8-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Care  
Owner Maintenance  
qBattery Maintenance  
Tires  
For reasons of proper performance, safety,  
and better fuel economy, always maintain  
recommended tire inflation pressures and  
stay within the recommended load limits  
and weight distribution.  
WARNING  
Using Different Tire Types:  
Driving your vehicle with different  
types of tires is dangerous. It could  
cause poor handling and poor  
braking; leading to loss of control.  
Except for the limited use of the  
temporary spare tire, use only the  
same type tires (radial, bias-belted,  
bias-type) on all four wheels.  
To get the best service from a battery:  
l
l
l
Keep it securely mounted.  
Keep the top clean and dry.  
Keep terminals and connections clean,  
tight, and coated with petroleum jelly  
or terminal grease.  
Using Wrong-Sized Tires:  
l
l
Rinse off spilled electrolyte  
immediately with a solution of water  
and baking soda.  
If the vehicle will not be used for an  
extended time, disconnect the battery  
cables and charge the battery every six  
weeks.  
Using any other tire size than what is  
specified for your Mazda (page 10-7)  
is dangerous. It could seriously affect  
ride, handling, ground clearance, tire  
clearance, and speedometer  
calibration. This could cause you to  
have an accident. Use only tires that  
are the correct size specified for your  
Mazda.  
qTire Inflation Pressure  
WARNING  
Always inflate the tires to the correct  
pressure:  
Overinflation or underinflation of  
tires is dangerous. Adverse handling  
or unexpected tire failure could result  
in a serious accident.  
Refer to specification charts on page  
10-7.  
8-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Care  
Owner Maintenance  
Inspect all tire pressures monthly  
(including the spare) when the tires are  
cold. Maintain recommended pressures  
for the best ride, handling, and minimum  
tire wear.  
qTire Rotation  
To equalize tread wear, rotate the tires if  
irregular wear develops. According to the  
scheduled maintenance charts.Refer to  
Scheduled Maintenance on page 8-3.  
During rotation, inspect them for correct  
balance.  
Forward  
Do not include (TEMPORARY USE ONLY)  
spare tire in rotation.  
Refer to the specification charts (page  
10-7).  
NOTE  
Also, inspect them for uneven wear and  
damage. Abnormal wear is usually caused  
by one or a combination of the following:  
l
Always check tire pressure when tires are  
cold.  
l
Warm tires normally exceed recommended  
pressures. Don't release air from warm tires  
to adjust the pressure.  
Underinflation can cause reduced fuel  
economy, uneven and accelerated tire wear,  
and poor sealing of the tire bead, which  
will deform the wheel and cause separation  
of tire from rim.  
l
l
l
l
Incorrect tire pressure  
Improper wheel alignment  
Out-of-balance wheel  
Severe braking  
l
After rotation, inflate all tire pressures to  
specification (page 10-7) and inspect the  
lug nuts for tightness.  
l
Overinflation can produce a harsh ride,  
uneven and accelerated tire wear, and a  
greater possibility of damage from road  
hazards.  
Keep your tire pressure at the correct  
levels. If one frequently needs inflating,  
have it inspected.  
CAUTION  
Rotate unidirectional tires and radial  
tires that have an asymmetrical tread  
pattern or studs only from front to  
rear, not from side to side. Tire  
performance will be reduced if  
rotated from side to side.  
8-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Care  
Owner Maintenance  
If a tire wears evenly, a wear indicator  
will appear as a solid band across the  
tread.  
qReplacing a Tire  
WARNING  
Always use tires that are in good  
condition:  
Replace the tire when this happens.  
Tread wear indicator  
Driving with worn tires is dangerous.  
Reduced braking, steering, and  
traction could result in an accident.  
CAUTION  
(With Tire Pressure Monitoring  
System)  
When replacing/repairing the tires or  
wheels or both, have the work done  
by an Authorized Mazda Dealer, or  
the tire pressure sensors may be  
damaged.  
New tread  
Worn tread  
You should replace it before the band is  
across the entire tread.  
NOTE  
NOTE  
(With Tire Pressure Monitoring System)  
Tires degrade over time, even when they are  
not being used on the road. It is recommended  
that tires generally be replaced when they are  
6 years or older. Heat caused by hot climates  
or frequent high loading conditions can  
accelerate the aging process. You should  
replace the spare tire when you replace the  
other road tires due to the aging of the spare  
tire. Regarding the manufacturing week and  
year is indicated with 4 digit.  
l
When tires with steel wire reinforcement in  
the sidewalls are used, the system may not  
function correctly even with a genuine  
wheel.  
Refer to System Error Activation on page  
5-31.  
Be sure to install the tire pressure sensors  
whenever tires or wheels are replaced.  
Refer to Tires and Wheels on page 5-31.  
l
Refer to The tire labeling on page 9-24.  
qTemporary Spare Tire  
Inspect the temporary spare tire at least  
monthly to make sure it's properly inflated  
and stored.  
NOTE  
The temporary spare tire condition gradually  
deteriorates even if it has not been used.  
8-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Care  
Owner Maintenance  
The temporary spare tire is easier to  
qReplacing a Wheel  
handle because of its construction which  
is lighter and smaller than a conventional  
tire. This tire should be used only for an  
emergency and only for a short distance.  
WARNING  
Always use wheels of the correct size  
on your vehicle:  
Using a wrong-sized wheel is  
dangerous. Braking and handling  
could be affected, leading to loss of  
control and an accident.  
Use the temporary spare tire only until the  
conventional tire is repaired, which should  
be as soon as possible.  
Maintain its pressure at 420 kPa (4.2  
kgf/cm2 or bar, 60 psi).  
CAUTION  
Ø A wrong-sized wheel may  
adversely affect:  
CAUTION  
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Tire fit  
Ø Do not use your temporary spare  
tire rim with a snow tire or a  
conventional tire. Neither will  
properly fit and could damage  
both tire and rim.  
Ø The temporary spare tire has a  
tread life of less than 5,000 km  
(3,000 miles). The tread life may  
be shorter depending on driving  
conditions.  
Ø The temporary spare tire is for  
limited use, however, if the tread  
wear solid-band indicator  
appears, replace the tire with the  
same type of temporary spare  
(page 8-34).  
Wheel and bearing life  
Ground clearance  
Speedometer calibration  
Headlight aim  
Bumper height  
Tire Pressure Monitoring  
System  
Ø (With Tire Pressure Monitoring  
System)  
Ø
When replacing/repairing the  
tires or wheels or both, have the  
work done by an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer, or the tire  
pressure sensors may be  
damaged.  
Ø
The wheels equipped on your  
Mazda are specially designed  
for installation of the tire  
pressure sensors. Do not use  
non-genuine wheels, otherwise  
it may not be possible to install  
the tire pressure sensors.  
NOTE  
Tires degrade over time, even when they are  
not being used on the road. It is recommended  
that tires generally be replaced when they are  
6 years or older. Heat caused by hot climates  
or frequent high loading conditions can  
accelerate the aging process. You should  
replace the spare tire when you replace the  
other road tires due to the aging of the spare  
tire. Regarding the manufacturing week and  
year is indicated with 4 digit.  
NOTE  
Be sure to install the tire pressure sensors  
whenever tires or wheels are replaced. Refer to  
Tires and Wheels on page 5-31.  
Refer to The tire labeling on page 9-24.  
8-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Care  
Owner Maintenance  
When replacing a wheel, make sure the  
new one is the same as the original factory  
wheel in diameter, rim width, and offset.  
Proper tire balancing provides the best  
riding comfort and helps reduce tread  
wear. Out-of-balance tires can cause  
vibration and uneven wear, such as  
cupping and flat spots.  
8-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Care  
Owner Maintenance  
Light Bulbs  
Overhead light/Map light (Front)  
Overhead light (Rear)  
Front side marker lights  
Head lights (Low beam)  
Fog lights  
Front turn signal lights/  
Parking lights  
Head lights (High beam)  
License plate lights  
Reverse lights  
Rear side marker lights  
Brake lights/Tail lights  
Rear turn signal lights  
Some models.  
8-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Care  
Owner Maintenance  
qReplacing Exterior Light Bulbs  
Replacing a headlight bulb  
High-beam bulb  
WARNING  
Do not replace the xenon fusion bulbs  
yourself:  
Replacing the xenon fusion bulbs  
yourself is dangerous. Because the  
xenon fusion bulbs require high  
voltage, you could receive an electric  
shock if the bulbs are handled  
incorrectly. Consult an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer when the replacement  
is necessary.  
1. Make sure the ignition is switched off,  
and the headlight switch is off.  
2. Remove the attachment bolts and the  
coolant reservoir before replacing the  
light bulb.  
Never touch the glass portion of a  
halogen bulb with your bare hands and  
always wear eye protection when  
handling or working around the bulbs:  
When a halogen bulb breaks, it is  
dangerous. These bulbs contain  
pressurized gas. If one is broken, it  
will explode and serious injuries  
could be caused by the flying glass.  
If the glass portion is touched with  
bare hands, body oil could cause the  
bulb to overheat and explode when  
lit.  
3. Disconnect the electrical connector  
from the bulb by pressing the tab on  
the connector with your finger and  
pulling the connector downward.  
Always keep halogen bulbs out of the  
reach of children:  
4. Turn the socket and bulb assembly  
counterclockwise and remove it.  
Carefully remove the bulb from its  
socket in the reflector by gently pulling  
it straight backward out of the socket.  
Playing with a halogen bulb is  
dangerous. Serious injuries could be  
caused by dropping a halogen bulb  
or breaking it some other way.  
8-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Care  
Owner Maintenance  
5. Install the new bulb in the reverse order  
of removal.  
3. Turn the center section of the plastic  
retainers counterclockwise and remove  
them, then partially peel back  
mudguard.  
6. Install the coolant reservoir. If you are  
unsure of how tight the bolts should be,  
have them inspected at an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer.  
Removal  
NOTE  
l
To replace the bulb, contact an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer.  
l
If the halogen bulb is accidentally touched,  
Installation  
it should be cleaned with rubbing alcohol  
before being used.  
l
Use the protective cover and carton for the  
replacement bulb to dispose of the old bulb  
promptly and out of the reach of children.  
4. Turn the cover counterclockwise and  
remove it.  
Low-beam bulb  
(Xenon fusion bulb)  
You cannot replace the low beam bulbs by  
yourself.  
The bulbs must be replaced at an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
(Halogen bulbs)  
1. Make sure the ignition switch is turned  
off and the headlight switch is off.  
2. If you are changing the right headlight  
bulb, start the engine, turn the steering  
wheel all the way to the left, and turn  
off engine. If you are changing the left  
headlight bulb, turn the steering wheel  
to the right.  
8-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Care  
Owner Maintenance  
5. Detach the electrical connector from  
the bulb by pulling it to the rear.  
9. Remove the adapter.  
10. Replace the bulb.  
6. Unhook the bulb retaining spring.  
11. Install the new bulb in the reverse  
order of removal.  
NOTE  
l
To replace the bulb, contact an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer.  
l
If the halogen bulb is accidentally touched,  
it should be cleaned with rubbing alcohol  
before being used.  
l
Use the protective cover and carton for the  
replacement bulb to dispose of the old bulb  
promptly and out of the reach of children.  
7. Swing the retaining spring out and  
away to free the headlight bulb.  
8. Carefully remove the headlight bulb  
from the socket by pulling it straight  
back.  
8-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Care  
Owner Maintenance  
Fog light bulbsí  
3. Turn the socket and bulb assembly to  
remove it. Carefully remove the bulb  
from its socket in the reflector by  
gently pulling it straight backward out  
of the socket.  
1. Turn the bolt, the screws and the center  
section of the plastic retainers  
counterclockwise and remove them,  
then partially peel back the mudguard.  
Bolt  
4. Install the new bulb in the reverse order  
of removal.  
2. Disconnect the electrical connector  
from the bulb by pressing the tab on  
the connector with your finger and  
pulling the connector downward.  
NOTE  
l
To replace the bulb, contact an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer.  
l
If the halogen bulb is accidentally touched,  
it should be cleaned with rubbing alcohol  
before being used.  
l
Use the protective cover and carton for the  
replacement bulb to dispose of the old bulb  
promptly and out of the reach of children.  
Front side marker lights  
1. If you are changing the left side-maker  
light, start the engine, turn the steering  
wheel all the way to the right, and turn  
off the engine. If you are changing the  
right side-maker light, turn the steering  
wheel to the left.  
2. Turn the screws counterclockwise and  
remove them.  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-41  
Maintenance and Care  
Owner Maintenance  
3. Turn the bolt, the screws and the center  
section of the plastic retainers  
2. Turn the bolt, the screws and the center  
section of the plastic retainers  
counterclockwise and remove them,  
then partially peel back the mudguard.  
counterclockwise and remove them,  
then partially peel back the mudguard.  
Removal  
Installation  
Bolt  
4. Turn the socket and bulb assembly  
counterclockwise and remove it.  
3. Turn the socket and bulb assembly  
counterclockwise and remove it.  
5. Disconnect the bulb from the socket.  
4. Disconnect the bulb from the socket.  
6. Install the new side turn signal unit in  
the reverse order of removal.  
5. Install the new bulb in the reverse order  
of removal.  
Front turn signal lights/Parking lights  
High-mount brake light, Ground  
illumination lights  
1. Make sure the ignition switch is turned  
off and the headlight switch is off.  
Due to the complexity and difficulty of  
the procedure, the bulbs should be  
replaced by an Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
8-42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Care  
Owner Maintenance  
Brake lights/Taillights (Rear side  
marker lights)  
4. Install the new bulb in the reverse order  
of removal.  
With LED bulb  
NOTE  
To replace the bulb, contact an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer.  
Due to the complexity and difficulty of  
the procedure, the LED bulbs should be  
replaced by an Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
Rear turn signal lights  
NOTE  
1. Pull the center section of the plastic  
retainer and remove the retainers and  
partially open the trunk side trim.  
LED bulb replacement is not possible. The  
rear combination component must be replaced.  
With Non-LED bulb  
Removal  
1. 1.Pull the center section of the plastic  
retainer and remove the retainers and  
partially open the trunk side trim.  
Removal  
Installation  
Installation  
2. Turn the socket and bulb assembly  
counterclockwise and remove it.  
3. Disconnect the bulb from the socket.  
2. Turn the socket and bulb assembly  
counterclockwise and remove it.  
3. Disconnect the bulb from the socket.  
4. Install the new bulb in the reverse order  
of removal.  
8-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Care  
Owner Maintenance  
NOTE  
License plate lights  
To replace the bulb, contact an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer.  
1. Pull the center section of the plastic  
retainer and remove the retainers, then  
partially peel back the trunk rear trim.  
Reverse lights  
Removal  
1. Pull the center section of the plastic  
retainer and remove the retainers, then  
partially peel back the trunk rear trim.  
Removal  
Installation  
Installation  
2. Turn the socket and bulb assembly  
counterclockwise and remove it.  
3. Disconnect the bulb from the socket.  
2. Turn the socket and bulb assembly  
counterclockwise and remove it.  
3. Disconnect the bulb from the socket.  
4. Install the new bulb in the reverse order  
of removal.  
4. Install the new bulb in the reverse order  
of removal.  
8-44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Care  
Owner Maintenance  
Courtesy lights  
qReplacing Interior Light Bulbs  
Overhead light/Map light (Front),  
Overhead light (Rear), Courtesy lights,  
Vanity mirror lights  
1. Wrap a small flathead screwdriver with  
a soft cloth to prevent damage to the  
lens and remove the lens by carefully  
prying on the edge of the lens with the  
flathead screwdriver.  
2. Disconnect the bulb by pulling it out.  
Overhead light/Map light (Front)  
Vanity mirror lights  
Overhead light (Rear)  
3. Install the new bulb in the reverse order  
of removal.  
Trunk light  
1. Press both sides of the lens cap to  
remove it.  
Edge  
8-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Care  
Owner Maintenance  
2. Disconnect the bulb by pulling it out.  
Fuses  
Your vehicle's electrical system is  
protected by fuses.  
If any lights, accessories, or controls don't  
work, inspect the appropriate circuit  
protector. If a fuse has blown, the inside  
element will be melted.  
If the same fuse blows again, avoid using  
that system and consult an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.  
3. Install the new bulb in the reverse order  
of removal.  
qFuse Replacement  
Replacing the fuses on the driver's side  
kick-panel  
If the electrical system does not work,  
first inspect the fuses on the driver's side  
kick-panel.  
1. Turn off the ignition switch and other  
switches.  
2. Open the fuse panel cover by sliding  
the cover straight back toward you.  
CAUTION  
Pulling the cover off sideways may  
break the retaining tabs off.  
8-46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Care  
Owner Maintenance  
3. Pull the fuse straight out with the fuse  
puller provided on the fuse block  
located in the engine compartment.  
Replacing the fuses under the hood  
If the headlights or other electrical  
components do not work and the fuses in  
the cabin are normal, inspect the fuse  
block under the hood. If a fuse is blown, it  
must be replaced. Follow these steps:  
1. Turn off the ignition switch and all  
other switches.  
2. Remove the fuse block cover.  
4. Inspect the fuse and replace it if it's  
blown.  
3. If any fuse but the MAIN fuse is  
blown, replace it with a new one of the  
same amperage rating.  
Blown  
Normal  
5. Insert a new fuse of the same amperage  
rating, and make sure it fits tightly. If it  
does not fit tightly, have an expert  
install it. We recommend an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
If you have no spare fuses, borrow one  
of the same rating from a circuit not  
essential to vehicle operation, such as  
the AUDIO or CIGAR circuit.  
Normal  
Blown  
CAUTION  
Always replace a fuse with one of the  
same rating. Otherwise you may  
damage the electric system.  
8-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Care  
Owner Maintenance  
4. Install the right side of the fuse block  
cover first as shown the figure.  
WARNING  
Do not replace the main fuse by  
yourself. Have an Authorized Mazda  
Dealer perform the replacement:  
Replacing the fuse by yourself is  
dangerous because the MAIN fuse is  
a high current fuse. Incorrect  
replacement could cause an electrical  
shock or a short circuit resulting in a  
fire.  
8-48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Care  
Owner Maintenance  
qFuse Panel Description  
Fuse block (Engine compartment)  
FUSE  
DESCRIPTION  
PROTECTED COMPONENT  
Mirror defrosterí  
RATING  
1
2
M.DEF  
ST SIG  
10 A  
5 A  
Starter sig  
3
ABS SOL  
P.WIND (P)  
P.SEAT (P)  
SUN ROOF  
TAIL  
30 A  
25 A  
30 A  
15 A  
15 A  
15 A  
30 A  
60 A  
40 A  
40 A  
20 A  
10 A  
15 A  
15 A  
60 A  
ABS, DSCí  
Power window  
Power seatí  
Moonroofí  
4
5
6
7
BCM, Tail lamp  
8
P.OUTLET (R)  
AUDIO  
Accessory sockets  
Audio system (Bose® Sound System-equipped model)  
ABS, DSCí  
Power window  
Rear window defroster  
Seat heat  
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
ABS MOTOR  
P.WIND (D)  
DEFOG  
SEAT HEAT  
A/C  
Air conditioner  
Fog lightsí  
FOG  
BLOWER 2  
FAN  
Blower motor  
Cooling fan  
íSome models.  
8-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Care  
Owner Maintenance  
FUSE  
DESCRIPTION  
PROTECTED COMPONENT  
RATING  
30 A  
30 A  
40 A  
40 A  
25 A  
15 A  
15 A  
10 A  
10 A*1  
20 A*2  
20 A  
20 A  
10 A  
40 A  
125 A  
20 A  
10 A  
10 A  
10 A  
15 A  
15 A  
10 A  
15 A  
10 A  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
P.SEAT (D)  
BTN  
Power seatí  
For protection of various circuits  
Starting system  
IG KEY2  
BLOWER  
FUEL PUMP  
ENGINE2  
EGI INJ  
Blower motor  
Fuel pump  
Engine control system  
Injector  
PCM  
Engine control system  
26  
ENGINE  
Engine control system  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
IG  
TCM  
For protection of various circuits  
TCMí  
ESCL  
Electronic steering lock  
For protection of various circuits  
For protection of all circuits  
DRLí  
IG KEY1  
MAIN  
DRL  
HAZARD  
ENG+B  
Hazard warning flashers  
PCM  
STOP  
Brake lights  
HORN  
Horn  
HEAD HI RH  
HEAD LO RH  
HEAD HI LH  
HEAD LO LH  
Headlight-high beam (Right)  
Headlight-low beam (Right)  
Headlight-high beam (Left)  
Headlight-low beam (Left)  
*1 2.5-liter engine  
*2 3.7-liter engine  
8-50  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Care  
Owner Maintenance  
Fuse block (Passenger's side)  
FUSE  
DESCRIPTION  
PROTECTED COMPONENT  
RATING  
30 A  
15 A  
7.5 A  
5 A  
1
2
P.WIND  
METER IG  
ILLUMI  
MIRROR  
SAS  
Power window  
For protection of various circuits  
BCM, Illumination  
3
4
Power control mirror  
Air bag, ABS  
5
5 A  
6
―
―
―
7
INT, LOCK/SHIFT  
―
5 A  
AT shiftí  
8
―
―
9
HEGO  
5 A  
Power control mirror  
Air conditioner  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
A/C  
10 A  
15 A  
25 A  
15 A  
25 A  
15 A  
―
P.OUTLET/CIGAR  
D.LOOK  
ENGINE IG  
WIPER  
Lighterí  
BCM, Door lock motor  
Engine control system  
Windshield wiper and washer  
Interior lights  
ROOM  
SPARE  
―
―
―
SPARE  
―
SPARE  
―
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-51  
Maintenance and Care  
Appearance Care  
qDamage Caused by Bird  
Dropping, Insects, or Tree Sap  
How to Minimize  
Environmental Paint Damage  
Occurrence  
The paintwork on your Mazda represents  
the latest technical developments in  
composition and methods of application.  
Bird droppings contain acids. If these  
aren't removed they can eat away the clear  
and color base coat of the vehicle's  
paintwork.  
Environmental hazards, however, can  
harm the paint's protective properties, if  
proper care is not taken.  
When insects stick to the paint surface  
and decompose, corrosive compounds  
form. These can erode the clear and color  
base coat of the vehicle's paintwork if  
they are not removed.  
Here are some examples of possible  
damage, with tips on how to prevent  
them.  
Tree sap will harden and adhere  
qEtching Caused by Acid Rain or  
Industrial Fallout  
permanently to the paint finish. If you  
scratch the sap off while it is hard, some  
vehicle paint could come off with it.  
Occurrence  
Prevention  
Industrial pollutants and vehicle emissions  
drift into the air and mix with rain or dew  
to form acids. These acids can settle on a  
vehicle's finish. As the water evaporates,  
the acid becomes concentrated and can  
damage the finish.  
It is necessary to have your Mazda  
washed and waxed to preserve its finish  
according to the instructions in this  
section. This should be done as soon as  
possible.  
And the longer the acid remains on the  
surface, the greater the chance is for  
damage.  
Bird droppings can be removed with a  
soft sponge and water. If you are traveling  
and these are not available, a moistened  
tissue may also take care of the problem.  
The cleaned area should be waxed  
according to the instructions in this  
section.  
Insects and tree sap are best removed with  
a soft sponge and water or a commercially  
available chemical cleaner.  
Prevention  
It is necessary to wash and wax your  
vehicle to preserve its finish according to  
the instructions in this section. These  
steps should be taken immediately after  
you suspect that acid rain has settled on  
your vehicle's finish.  
Another method is to cover the affected  
area with dampened newspaper for one to  
two hours. After removing the newspaper,  
rinse off the loosened debris with water.  
8-52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Care  
Appearance Care  
NOTE  
l
qWater Marks  
The paint chipping zone varies with the  
speed of the vehicle. For example, when  
traveling at 90 km/h (56 mph), the paint  
chipping zone is 50 m (164 ft).  
In low temperatures a vehicle's finish  
hardens. This increases the chance of paint  
chipping.  
Chipped paint can lead to rust forming on  
your Mazda. Before this happens, repair the  
damage by using Mazda touch-up paint  
according to the instructions in this section.  
Failure to repair the affected area could  
lead to serious rusting and expensive  
repairs.  
Occurrence  
Rain, fog, dew, and even tap water can  
contain harmful minerals such as salt and  
lime. If moisture containing these  
minerals settles on the vehicle and  
evaporates, the minerals will concentrate  
and harden to form white rings. The rings  
can damage your vehicle's finish.  
l
l
Prevention  
It is necessary to wash and wax your  
vehicle to preserve its finish according to  
the instructions in this section. These  
steps should be taken immediately after  
you find water marks on your vehicle's  
finish.  
qPaint Chipping  
Occurrence  
Paint chipping occurs when gravel thrown  
in the air by another vehicle's tires hits  
your vehicle.  
How to avoid paint chipping  
Keeping a safe distance between you and  
the vehicle ahead reduces the chances of  
having your paint chipped by flying  
gravel.  
8-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Care  
Appearance Care  
Scratches occur on the paint surface  
when:  
The vehicle is washed without first  
Exterior Care  
l
Follow all label and container directions  
when using a chemical cleaner or polish.  
Read all warnings and cautions.  
rinsing off dirt and other foreign  
matter.  
The vehicle is washed with a rough,  
l
dry, or dirty cloth.  
The vehicle is washed at a car wash  
that uses brushes that are dirty or too  
stiff.  
Cleansers or wax containing abrasives  
qMaintaining the Finish  
l
Washing  
l
CAUTION  
are used.  
When the wiper lever is in the AUTO  
position and the ignition switch is in  
the ON position, the wipers may  
move automatically in the following  
cases:  
NOTE  
l
Mazda is not responsible for scratches  
caused by automatic car washes or  
improper washing.  
Ø If the windshield above the rain  
sensor is touched.  
l
Scratches are more noticeable on vehicles  
with darker paint finishes.  
Ø If the windshield above the rain  
sensor is wiped with a cloth.  
Ø If the windshield is struck with a  
hand or other object.  
Ø If the rain sensor is struck with a  
hand or other object from inside  
the vehicle.  
To minimize scratches on the vehicle's  
paint finish:  
Rinse off any dirt or other foreign  
l
matter using lukewarm or cold water  
before washing.  
Use plenty of lukewarm or cold water  
l
and a soft cloth when washing the  
vehicle. Do not use a nylon cloth.  
Rub gently when washing or drying the  
Be careful not to pinch hands or  
fingers as it may cause injury, or  
damage the wipers. When washing  
or servicing your Mazda, make sure  
the wiper lever is in the OFF position.  
l
vehicle.  
l
Take your vehicle only to a car wash  
that keeps its brushes well maintained.  
Don't use abrasive cleansers or wax  
that contain abrasives.  
To help protect the finish from rust and  
deterioration, wash your Mazda  
thoroughly and frequently, at least once a  
month, with lukewarm or cold water.  
l
CAUTION  
Don't use steel wool, abrasive  
cleaners, or strong detergents  
containing highly alkaline or caustic  
agents on chrome-plated or anodized  
aluminum parts. This may damage  
the protective coating; also, cleaners  
and detergents may discolor or  
deteriorate the paint.  
If the vehicle is washed improperly, the  
paint surface could be scratched. Here are  
some examples of how scratching could  
occur.  
8-54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Care  
Appearance Care  
Pay special attention to removing salt,  
dirt, mud, and other foreign material from  
the underside of the fenders, and make  
sure the drain holes in the lower edges of  
the doors and rocker panels are clean.  
2. Use a good grade of natural wax for  
metallic, mica, and solid colors.  
3. When waxing, coat evenly with the  
sponge supplied or a soft cloth.  
4. Wipe off the wax with a soft cloth.  
Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings,  
industrial fallout, and similar deposits can  
damage the finish if not removed  
immediately. When prompt washing with  
plain water is ineffective, use a mild soap  
made for use on vehicles.  
NOTE  
A spot remover to remove oil, tar, and similar  
materials will usually also take off the wax.  
Rewax these areas even if the rest of the  
vehicle doesn't need it.  
qRepairing Damage to the Finish  
Thoroughly rinse off all soap with  
lukewarm or cold water. Don't allow soap  
to dry on the finish.  
Deep scratches or chips on the finish  
should be repaired promptly. Exposed  
metal quickly rusts and can lead to major  
repairs.  
After washing the vehicle, dry it with a  
clean chamois to prevent water spots from  
forming.  
CAUTION  
If your Mazda is damaged and needs  
metal parts repaired or replaced,  
make sure the body shop applies  
anti-corrosion materials to all parts,  
both repaired and new. This will  
prevent them from rusting.  
WARNING  
Dry wet brakes by driving very slowly  
and applying the brakes lightly until  
brake performance is normal:  
Driving with wet brakes is  
dangerous. Increased stopping  
distance or the vehicle pulling to one  
side when braking could result in a  
serious accident. Light braking will  
indicate whether the brakes have  
been affected.  
qBright-Metal Maintenance  
l
Use tar remover to remove road tar and  
insects. Never do this with a knife or  
similar tool.  
To prevent corrosion on bright-metal  
surfaces, apply wax or chrome  
l
Waxing  
Your vehicle needs to be waxed when  
water no longer beads on the finish.  
Always wash and dry the vehicle before  
waxing it. In addition to the vehicle body,  
wax the metal trim to maintain its luster.  
preservative and rub it to a high luster.  
During cold weather or in coastal areas,  
l
cover bright-metal parts with a coating  
of wax or preservative heavier than  
usual. It would also help to coat them  
with noncorrosive petroleum jelly or  
some other protective compound.  
1. Use wax which contains no abrasives.  
Waxes containing abrasive will remove  
paint and could damage bright metal  
parts.  
8-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Care  
Appearance Care  
WARNING  
CAUTION  
Dry wet brakes by driving very slowly  
and applying the brakes lightly until  
brake performance is normal:  
Driving with wet brakes is  
Don't use steel wool, abrasive  
cleaners, or strong detergents  
containing highly alkaline or caustic  
agents on chrome-plated or anodized  
aluminum parts. This may result in  
damage to the protective coating and  
cause discoloration or paint  
dangerous. Increased stopping  
distance or the vehicle pulling to one  
side when braking could result in a  
serious accident. Light braking will  
indicate whether the brakes have  
been affected.  
deterioration.  
qUnderbody Maintenance  
qAluminum Wheel Maintenanceí  
Road chemicals and salt used for ice and  
snow removal and solvents used for dust  
control may collect on the underbody. If  
not removed, they will speed up rusting  
and deterioration of such underbody parts  
as fuel lines, frame, floor pan, and exhaust  
system, even though these parts may be  
coated with anti-corrosive material.  
A protective coating is provided over the  
aluminum wheels. Special care is needed  
to protect this coating.  
NOTE  
l
Do not use a wire brush or any abrasive  
cleaner, polishing compound, or solvent on  
aluminum wheels. They may damage the  
coating.  
Thoroughly flush the underbody and  
wheel housings with lukewarm or cold  
water at the end of each winter. Try also  
to do this every month.  
l
Only use a mild soap or neutral detergent  
and always use a sponge or soft cloth to  
clean the wheels.  
Rinse thoroughly with lukewarm or cold  
water. Also, be sure to clean the wheels  
after driving on dusty or salted roads. This  
helps prevent corrosion.  
Avoid washing your vehicle in an automatic  
car wash that uses high-speed or hard  
brushes.  
If your aluminum wheels lose luster, wax  
the wheels.  
(With Tire Pressure Monitoring System)  
Check special requirements for Tire Pressure  
Monitoring System.  
Pay special attention to these areas  
because they easily hide mud and dirt. It  
will do more harm than good to wet  
down the road grime without removing  
it.  
l
The lower edges of doors, rocker panels,  
and frame members have drain holes that  
should not be clogged. Water trapped  
there will cause rusting.  
l
Refer to Tires and Wheels on page 5-31.  
8-56  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Care  
Appearance Care  
To keep the fabric looking clean and  
fresh, take care of it. Otherwise its color  
will be affected, it can be stained easily,  
and its fire-resistance may be reduced.  
Interior Care  
qDashboard Precautions  
Prevent caustic solutions such as perfume  
and cosmetic oils from contacting the  
dashboard. They'll damage and discolor it.  
If these solutions get on the dashboard,  
wipe them off immediately.  
CAUTION  
Use only recommended cleaners and  
procedures. Others may affect  
appearance and fire-resistance.  
CAUTION  
Do not use glazing agents.  
Glazing agents contain ingredients  
which may cause discoloration,  
wrinkling, cracks and peeling.  
qCleaning the Lap/Shoulder Belt  
Webbing  
Clean the webbing with a mild soap  
solution recommended for upholstery or  
carpets. Follow instructions. Don't bleach  
or dye the webbing; this may weaken it.  
qCleaning the Upholstery and  
Interior Trim  
After cleaning the belts, thoroughly dry  
the belt webbing and make sure there is  
no remaining moisture before retracting  
them.  
Vinyl  
Remove dust and loose dirt from vinyl  
with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.  
Clean vinyl with a leather-and-vinyl  
cleaner.  
WARNING  
Have an Authorized Mazda Dealer  
replace damaged seat belts  
immediately:  
Leatherí  
Real leather isn't uniform and may have  
scars, scratches, and wrinkles. Clean it  
with a leather cleaner or mild soap.  
Using damaged seat belts is  
dangerous. In a collision, damaged  
belts cannot provide adequate  
protection.  
Wipe it with a damp soft cloth; then dry  
and buff it with a dry soft cloth.  
Fabricí  
Remove dust and loose dirt from fabric  
with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.  
Clean it with a mild soap solution good  
for upholstery and carpets. Remove fresh  
spots immediately with a fabric spot  
cleaner.  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-57  
Maintenance and Care  
Appearance Care  
qCleaning the Window Interiors  
If the windows become covered with an  
oily, greasy, or waxy film, clean them  
with glass cleaner. Follow the directions  
on the container.  
CAUTION  
Ø Don't scrape or scratch the inside  
of the rear window. You may  
damage the rear window defroster  
grid.  
Ø When washing the inside rear  
window, use a soft cloth  
dampened in lukewarm water,  
gently wiping the antenna lines.  
Use of glass cleaning products  
could damage the antenna.  
8-58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Information and Reporting  
Safety Defects  
9
Important consumer information including warranties and add-on equipment.  
Customer Assistance ............................... 9-2  
Customer Assistance (U.S.A.) ............ 9-2  
Customer Assistance (Canada) ........... 9-6  
Customer Assistance (Puerto Rico) .... 9-9  
Customer Assistance (Mexico) ......... 9-10  
Tire Information (U.S.A.) ..................... 9-24  
Tire Labeling ..................................... 9-24  
Location of the Tire Label  
(Placard) ............................................ 9-30  
Tire Maintenance .............................. 9-33  
Vehicle Loading ................................ 9-36  
Steps for Determining the Correct Load  
Limit: ................................................ 9-42  
Mazda Importer/Distributors ............... 9-12  
Importer/Distributor .......................... 9-12  
Distributor in Each Area ................... 9-12  
Reporting Safety Defects ....................... 9-43  
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S.A.) .... 9-43  
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada) ... 9-44  
Warranty ................................................ 9-14  
Warranties for Your Mazda ............... 9-14  
Outside the United States .................. 9-15  
Outside Canada ................................. 9-16  
Service Publications .............................. 9-45  
Service Publications .......................... 9-45  
Registering Your Vehicle in A Foreign  
Country (Except United States and  
Canada) ............................................. 9-17  
Add-On Non-Genuine Parts and  
Accessories ....................................... 9-18  
Cell Phones ............................................. 9-19  
Cell Phones Warning ......................... 9-19  
Type Approval of Equipment ............... 9-20  
Type Approval of Equipment ............ 9-20  
Uniform Tire Quality Grading System  
(UTQGS) ................................................ 9-22  
Uniform Tire Quality Grading System  
(UTQGS) .......................................... 9-22  
9-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Customer Assistance  
Customer Assistance (U.S.A.)  
Your complete and permanent satisfaction is our business. We are here to serve you. All  
Authorized Mazda Dealers have the knowledge and the tools to keep your Mazda vehicle  
in top condition.  
If you have any questions or recommendations for improvement regarding the service of  
your Mazda vehicle or servicing by Mazda Dealer personnel, we recommend that you take  
the following steps:  
qSTEP 1: Contact Your Mazda Dealer  
Discuss the matter with an Authorized Mazda Dealer. This is the quickest and best way to  
address the issue. If your concern has not been resolved by the CUSTOMER RELATIONS,  
SALES, SERVICE, or PARTS MANAGER, then please contact the GENERAL  
MANAGER of the dealership or the OWNER.  
qSTEP 2: Contact Mazda North American Operations  
If for any reason you feel the need for further assistance after contacting your dealership  
management, you can reach Mazda North American Operations by one of the following  
ways.  
Log on: at www.mazdaUSA.com  
Answers to many questions, including how to locate or contact a local Mazda dealership in  
the U.S., can be found here.  
E-mail: click on “Contact Us” located on the “Inside Mazda” tab, or at the bottom of the  
page at www.mazdaUSA.com  
By phone at: 1 (800) 222-5500  
By letter at:  
Attn: Customer Assistance  
Mazda North American Operations  
7755 Irvine Center Drive  
Irvine, CA 92618-2922  
P.O. Box 19734  
Irvine, CA 92623-9734  
In order to serve you efficiently and effectively, please help us by providing the following  
information:  
1. Your name, address, and telephone number  
9-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Customer Assistance  
2. Year and model of vehicle  
3. Vehicle Identification Number (17 digits, noted on your registration or title or located on  
the upper driver's side corner of the dash)  
4. Purchase date and current mileage  
5. Your dealer's name and location  
6. Your question(s)  
If you live outside the U.S.A., please contact your nearest Mazda Distributor.  
qSTEP 3: Contact Better Business Bureau (BBB)  
Mazda North American Operations realizes that mutual agreement on some issues may not  
be possible. As a final step to ensure that your concerns are being fairly considered, Mazda  
North American Operations has agreed to participate in a dispute settlement program  
administered by the Better Business Bureau (BBB) system, at no cost to you the consumer.  
BBB AUTO LINE works with consumers and the manufacturer in an attempt to reach a  
mutually acceptable resolution of any warranty related concerns. If the BBB is not able to  
facilitate a settlement they will provide an informal hearing before an arbitrator.  
You are required to resort to BBB AUTO LINE before exercising rights or seeking  
remedies under the Federal Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C. § 2301 et seq. To the  
extent permitted by the applicable state “Lemon Law”, you are also required to resort to  
BBB AUTO LINE before exercising any rights or seeking remedies under the “Lemon  
Law”. If you choose to seek remedies that are not created by the Magnuson-Moss Warranty  
Act or the applicable state “Lemon Law”, you are not required to first use BBB AUTO  
LINE.  
The whole process normally takes 40 days or less. The arbitration decision is not binding  
on you or Mazda else you accept the decision. For more information about BBB AUTO  
LINE, including current eligibility standards, please call 1-800-955-5100 or visit the BBB  
website at www.lemonlaw.bbb.org.  
Being truly committed to customer satisfaction is more than a phrase with Mazda. We hope  
to satisfy every customer directly, but if there is ever a question about our decision, Mazda  
believes in providing a fast, fair and free method such as the BBB AUTO LINE to ensure  
Mazda delivers on our commitment to do the right thing for our customers!  
9-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Customer Assistance  
qCalifornia Customers  
1. Mazda North American Operations (“Mazda”) participates in BBB AUTO LINE, a  
mediation/arbitration program administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus  
[4200 Wilson Boulevard, Arlington, Virginia 22203] through local Better Business  
Bureaus. BBB AUTO LINE and Mazda have been certified by the Arbitration  
Certification Program of the California Department of Consumer Affairs.  
2. If you have a problem arising under a Mazda written warranty, we encourage you to  
bring it to our attention. If we are unable to resolve it, you may file a claim with BBB  
AUTO LINE. Claims must be filed with BBB AUTO LINE within six (6) months after  
the expiration of the warranty.  
3. To file a claim with BBB AUTO LINE, call 1-800-955-5100. There is no charge for the  
call.  
4. In order to file a claim with BBB AUTO LINE, you will have to provide your name and  
address, the brand name and vehicle identification number (VIN) of your vehicle, and a  
statement of the nature of your problem or complaint. You will also be asked to provide:  
the approximate date of your acquisition of the vehicle, the vehicle's current mileage, the  
approximate date and mileage at the time any problem(s) were first brought to the  
attention of Mazda or one of our dealers, and a statement of the relief you are seeking.  
5. BBB AUTO LINE staff may try to help resolve your dispute through mediation. If  
mediation is not successful, or if you do not wish to participate in mediation, claims  
within the program's jurisdiction may be presented to an arbitrator at an informal  
hearing. The arbitrator's decision should ordinarily be issued within 40 days from the  
time your complaint is filed; there may be a delay of 7 days if you did not first contact  
Mazda about your problem, or a delay of up to 30 days if the arbitrator requests an  
inspection/report by an impartial technical expert or further investigation and report by  
BBB AUTO LINE.  
6. You are required to use BBB AUTO LINE before asserting in court any rights or  
remedies conferred by California Civil Code Section 1793.22. You are also required to  
use BBB AUTO LINE before exercising rights or seeking remedies created by Title I of  
the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C. sec. 2301 et seq. If you choose to seek  
redress by pursuing rights and remedies not created by California Civil Code Section  
1793.22 or Title I of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, resort to BBB AUTO LINE is  
not required by those statutes.  
9-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Customer Assistance  
7. California Civil Code Section 1793.2 (d) requires that, if Mazda or its representative is  
unable to repair a new motor vehicle to conform to the vehicle's applicable express  
warranty after a reasonable number of attempts, Mazda may be required to replace or  
repurchase the vehicle. California Civil Code Section 1793.22 (b) creates a presumption  
that Mazda has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its  
applicable express warranties if, within 18 months from delivery to the buyer or 18,000  
miles on the vehicle's odometer, whichever occurs first, one or more of the following  
occurs:  
l
The same nonconformity [a failure to conform to the written warranty that  
substantially impairs the use, value or safety of the vehicle] results in a condition that  
is likely to cause death or serious bodily injury if the vehicle is driven AND the  
nonconformity has been subject to repair two or more times by Mazda or its agents  
AND the buyer or lessee has directly notified Mazda of the need for the repair of the  
nonconformity; OR  
l
The same nonconformity has been subject to repair 4 or more times by Mazda or its  
agents AND the buyer has notified Mazda of the need for the repair of the  
nonconformity; OR  
l
The vehicle is out of service by reason of repair of nonconformities by Mazda or its  
agents for a cumulative total of more than 30 calendar days after delivery of the  
vehicle to the buyer.  
NOTICE TO Mazda AS REQUIRED ABOVE SHALL BE SENT TO THE  
FOLLOWING ADDRESS:  
Mazda North American Operations  
7755 Irvine Center Drive  
Irvine, CA 92618  
ATTN: Customer Mediation  
8. The following remedies may be sought in BBB AUTO LINE: repairs, reimbursement  
for money paid to repair a vehicle or other expenses incurred as result of a vehicle  
nonconformity, repurchase or replacement of your vehicle, and compensation for  
damages and remedies available under Mazda's written warranty or applicable law.  
9. The following remedies may not be sought in BBB AUTO LINE: punitive or multiple  
damages, attorneys' fees, or consequential damages other than as provided in California  
Civil Code Section 1794 (a) and (b).  
10. You may reject the decision issued by a BBB AUTO LINE arbitrator. If you reject the  
decision, you will be free to pursue further legal action. The arbitrator's decision and  
any findings will be admissible in a court action.  
11. If you accept the arbitrator's decision, Mazda will be bound by the decision, and will  
comply with the decision within a reasonable time not to exceed 30 days after we  
receive notice of your acceptance of the decision.  
12. Please call BBB AUTO LINE at 1-800-955-5100 for further details about the program.  
9-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Customer Assistance  
Customer Assistance (Canada)  
qSatisfaction Review Process  
Your complete and permanent satisfaction is of primary concern to Mazda. All Authorized  
Mazda Dealers have both the knowledge and tools to keep your Mazda in top condition. In  
our experience, any questions, problems, or complaints regarding the operation of your  
Mazda or any other general service transactions are most effectively resolved by your  
dealer. If the cause of your dissatisfaction cannot adequately be addressed by normal  
dealership procedures, we recommend that you take the following steps:  
qSTEP 1: Contact the Mazda Dealer  
Discuss the matter with a member of dealership management. If the Service Manager has  
already reviewed your concerns, contact the owner of the dealership or its General  
Manager.  
qSTEP 2: Contact the Mazda Regional Office  
If you feel that you still require assistance, ask the dealer Service Manager to arrange for  
you to meet the local Mazda Service Representative. If more expedient, contact Mazda  
Canada Inc.Regional Office nearest you for such arrangements. Regional Office address  
and phone numbers are shown (page 9-8).  
qSTEP 3: Contact the Mazda Customer Relations Department  
If still not substantially satisfied, contact the Customer Relations Department, Mazda  
Canada Inc., 55 Vogell Road, Richmond Hill, Ontario, L4B 3K5 Canada TEL: 1 (800)  
263-4680.  
Provide the Department with the following information:  
1. Your name, address and telephone number  
2. Year and model of vehicle  
3. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). Refer to the “Vehicle Identification Labels” page  
of section 10 of this manual for the location of the VIN.  
4. Purchase date  
5. Present odometer reading  
6. Your dealer's name and location  
7. The nature of your problem and/or cause of dissatisfaction  
The Department, in cooperation with the local Mazda Service Representative, will review  
the case to determine if everything possible has been done to ensure your satisfaction.  
9-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Customer Assistance  
Please recognize that the resolution of service problems in most cases requires the use of  
your Mazda dealer's service facilities, personnel and equipment. We urge you to follow the  
above three steps in sequence for most effective results.  
qMediation/Arbitration Program  
Occasionally a customer concern cannot be resolved through Mazda's Customer  
Satisfaction Program. If after exhausting the procedures in this manual your concern is still  
not resolved, you have another option.  
Mazda Canada Inc. participates in an arbitration program administered by the  
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP). CAMVAP will advise you about  
how your concern may be reviewed and resolved by an independent third party through  
binding arbitration.  
Your complete satisfaction is the goal of Mazda Canada Inc. and our dealers.  
Mazda's participation in CAMVAP makes a valuable contribution to our achieving that  
goal. There is no charge for using CAMVAP. CAMVAP results are fast, fair and final as the  
award is binding on both you and Mazda Canada Inc.  
qCanadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP)  
If a specific item of concern arises, where a solution cannot be reached between an owner,  
Mazda, and/or one of it's dealers (that all parties cannot agree upon), the owner may wish  
to use the services offered by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).  
CAMVAP uses the services of Provincial Administrators to assist consumers in scheduling  
and preparing for their arbitration hearings. However, before you can proceed with  
CAMVAP you must follow your Mazda dispute resolution process as outlined previously.  
9-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Customer Assistance  
CAMVAP is fully implemented in all provinces and territories.  
Consumers wishing to obtain further information about the Program should contact the  
Provincial Administrator at 1 (800) 207-0685, or by contacting the  
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan Office at:  
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan  
235 Yorkland Boulevard, suite 300  
North York, Ontario  
M2J 4Y8  
http://camvap.ca  
Provincial Administrators may be reached locally as listed below:  
Province/Territory  
British Columbia & Yukon Territories  
Alberta & Northwest Territories  
Saskatchewan  
CAMVAP Number  
1 (800) 207-0685  
1 (800) 207-0685  
1 (800) 207-0685  
1 (800) 207-0685  
1 (800) 207-0685  
1 (800) 207-0685  
1 (800) 207-0685  
Manitoba  
Ontario  
Atlantic Canada  
Quebec  
qRegional Offices  
REGIONAL OFFICES  
AREAS COVERED  
MAZDA CANADA INC.  
WESTERN REGION  
8171 ACKROYD ROAD  
SUITE 2000  
ALBERTA,  
BRITISH COLUMBIA,  
MANITOBA,  
RICHMOND B.C.  
V6X 3K1  
SASKATCHEWAN,  
YUKON  
(604) 303-5670  
MAZDA CANADA INC.  
CENTRAL/ATLANTIC REGION  
55 VOGELL ROAD,  
ONTARIO  
RICHMOND HILL,  
ONTARIO, L4B 3K5  
(905) 787-7000  
MAZDA CANADA INC.  
QUEBEC REGION  
6111 ROUTE TRANS  
CANADIENNE  
QUEBEC,  
NEW BRUNSWICK,  
NOVA SCOTIA,  
POINTE CLAIRE, QUEBEC  
H9R 5A5  
PRINCE EDWARD ISLAND,  
NEWFOUNDLAND  
(514) 694-6390  
9-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Customer Assistance  
Customer Assistance (Puerto Rico)  
Your complete and permanent satisfaction is our business. That is why all Authorized  
Mazda Dealers have the knowledge and the tools to keep your Mazda vehicle in top  
condition.  
If you have any questions or recommendations for improvement regarding the service of  
your Mazda vehicle or servicing by Mazda Dealer personnel, we recommend that you take  
the following steps:  
qSTEP 1  
Discuss the matter with an Authorized Mazda Dealer. This is the quickest and best way to  
address the issue. If your concern has not been resolved by the CUSTOMER RELATIONS,  
SALES, SERVICE, or PARTS MANAGER, then please contact the GENERAL  
MANAGER of the dealership or the OWNER.  
qSTEP 2  
If, after following STEP 1, you feel the need for further assistance, please contact your  
area's Mazda representative (Indicated on the next page).  
Please help us by providing the following information:  
1. Your name, address, and telephone number  
2. Year and model of vehicle  
3. Vehicle Identification Number (17 digits, noted on your registration or title or located on  
the upper driver's side corner of the dash)  
4. Purchase date and current mileage  
5. Your dealer's name and location  
6. Your question(s)  
9-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Customer Assistance  
Customer Assistance (Mexico)  
Your complete and permanent satisfaction is our business. We are here to serve you. All  
Authorized Mazda Dealers have the knowledge and the tools to keep your Mazda vehicle  
in top condition.  
If you have any questions or recommendations for improvement regarding the service of  
your Mazda vehicle or servicing by Mazda Dealer personnel, we recommend that you take  
the following steps:  
qSTEP 1: Contact Your Mazda Dealer  
Discuss the matter with an Authorized Mazda Dealer. This is the quickest and best way to  
address the issue.  
l
If your concern has not been resolved by the CUSTOMER RELATIONS, SALES,  
SERVICE, or PARTS MANAGER, then please contact the GENERAL MANAGER of  
the dealership or the OWNER.  
If it becomes necessary to have the components or wiring system for the supplementary  
l
restraint system modified to accommodate a person with certain medical conditions in  
accordance with a certified physician, go to STEP2.  
qSTEP 2: Contact Mazda Motor de Mexico  
If for any reason you feel the need for further assistance after contacting your dealership  
management and it becomes necessary to have the components or wiring system for the  
supplementary restraint system modified to accommodate a person with certain medical  
conditions in accordance with a certified physician, you can reach Mazda Motor de Mexico  
by one of the following ways.  
Log on: at www.MazdaMexico.com.mx  
Answers to many questions, including how to locate or contact a local Mazda dealership in  
Mexico, can be found here.  
E-mail: click on “Contactanos” at the top of the page at www.MazdaMexico.com.mx  
By phone at: 1 (866) 315 0220  
By letter at:  
Attn: Customer Assistance  
Mazda North American Operations  
7755 Irvine Center Drive  
Irvine, CA 92618-2922  
P.O. Box 19734  
Irvine, CA 92623-9734  
9-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Customer Assistance  
In order to serve you efficiently and effectively, please help us by providing the following  
information:  
1. Your name, address, and telephone number  
2. Year and model of vehicle  
3. Vehicle Identification Number (17 digits, noted on your registration or title or located on  
the upper driver's side corner of the dash)  
4. Purchase date and current mileage  
5. Your dealer's name and location  
6. Your question(s)  
9-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Mazda Importer/Distributors  
Importer/Distributor  
Distributor in Each Area  
qU.S.A.  
qCANADA  
Mazda North American Operations  
7755 Irvine Center Drive  
Mazda Canada Inc.  
55 Vogell Road, Richmond Hill,  
Irvine, CA 92618-2922 U.S.A.  
P.O. Box 19734  
Irvine, CA 92623-9734 U.S.A.  
TEL: 1 (800) 222-5500 (in U.S.A.)  
(949) 727-1990 (outside U.S.A.)  
Ontario, L4B 3K5 Canada  
TEL: 1 (800) 263-4680 (in Canada)  
(905) 787-7000 (outside Canada)  
q
PUERTO RICO/U.S. Virgin Islands  
Plaza Motors Corp. (Mazda de Puerto  
Rico)  
P.O. Box 362722, San Juan, Puerto Rico  
00936-2722  
TEL: (787) 641-9300  
qMEXICO  
Mazda Motor de Mexico  
Circuito Guillermo Gonzalez Camarena N  
1500 Col. Centro de Ciudad Santa Fe.  
01210, Mexico, D.F.  
TEL: Center of Attention to Clients:  
01 (800) 016 2932. in Mexico  
qGUAM  
Triple J Motors  
157 South Marine Drive, Tamuning,  
GUAM 96911 USA  
P.O. Box 6066 Tamuning, Guam 96931  
TEL: (671) 649-6555  
qSAIPAN  
Pacific International Marianas, Inc.  
(d.b.a. Midway Motors)  
P.O. Box 887 Saipan, MP 96950  
TEL: (670) 234-7524  
9-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Mazda Importer/Distributors  
Triple J Saipan, Inc.  
(d.b.a. Triple J Motors)  
P.O. Box 500487 Saipan, MP 96950-0487  
TEL: (670) 234-7133/3051  
qAMERICAN SAMOA  
Polynesia Motors, Inc.  
P.O. Box 1120, Pago Pago, American  
Samoa 96799  
TEL: (684) 699-9347  
9-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Warranty  
Warranties for Your Mazda  
l
l
l
l
l
New Vehicle Limited Warranty  
Distributor Major Component Limited Warranty (Canada only)  
Safety Restraint System Limited Warranty  
Anti-perforation Limited Warranty  
Federal Emission Control Warranty (U.S.A. only)  
l
Emission Defect Warranty  
Emission Performance Warranty  
l
l
l
l
l
California Emission Control Warranty (U.S.A. only)  
Emission Control Warranty (Canada only)  
Replacement Parts and Accessories Limited Warranty  
Tire Warranty  
NOTE  
Detailed warranty information is provided with your Mazda.  
9-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Warranty  
Outside the United States  
Government regulations in the United States require that automobiles meet specific  
emission regulations and safety standards. Therefore, vehicles built for use in the United  
States may differ from those sold in other countries.  
The differences may make it difficult or even impossible for your vehicle to receive  
satisfactory servicing in other countries. We strongly recommend that you NOT take your  
Mazda outside the United States. However, in the event that you are moving to Canada  
permanently, Mazda vehicles built for use in the United States could be eligible for  
exportation to Canada with specific vehicle modifications to comply with the Canadian  
Motor Vehicle Safety requirements (CMVSS).  
NOTE  
The above is applicable for a permanent import/export situation and not related to travelers on  
vacation.  
You may have the following problems if you do take your vehicle outside of the United  
States:  
l
Recommended fuel may be unavailable. Any kind of leaded fuel or low-octane fuel will  
affect vehicle performance and damage the emission controls and engine.  
Proper repair facilities, tools, testing equipment, and replacement parts may not be  
l
available.  
Please refer to your Manufacturer's Warranty Booklet for more information.  
9-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Warranty  
Outside Canada  
Government regulations in Canada require that automobiles meet specific emission  
regulations and safety regulations. Therefore, vehicles built for use in Canada may differ  
from those sold in other countries.  
The differences may make it difficult or even impossible for your vehicle to receive  
satisfactory servicing in other countries. We strongly recommend that you NOT take your  
Mazda outside Canada. However, in the event that you are moving to the United States  
permanently, Mazda vehicles built for use in Canada could be eligible for exportation to the  
United States with specific vehicle modifications to comply with the United States Federal  
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS).  
NOTE  
The above is applicable for a permanent import/export situation and not related to travelers on  
vacation.  
You may have the following problems if you do take your vehicle outside of Canada:  
l
Recommended fuel may be unavailable. Any kind of leaded fuel or low-octane fuel will  
affect vehicle performance and damage the emission controls and engine.  
Proper repair facilities, tools, testing equipment, and replacement parts may not be  
l
available.  
Please refer to your Manufacturer's Warranty Booklet for more information.  
9-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Warranty  
Registering Your Vehicle in A Foreign Country (Except  
United States and Canada)  
Government regulations in your country could require that automobiles meet specific  
emission and safety standards.  
Vehicles built for your country may differ from those built for other countries. In addition  
to registration problems, satisfactory service may be difficult or even impossible in another  
country.  
The fuel specified for your vehicle may be unavailable.  
Parts, servicing techniques, and tools necessary to maintain and repair your vehicle may be  
unavailable.  
There might not be an Authorized Mazda Dealer in the country you plan to take your  
vehicle.  
The Mazda warranty is valid only in certain countries.  
9-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Warranty  
Add-On Non-Genuine Parts and Accessories  
Non-genuine parts and accessories for Mazda vehicles can be found in stores.  
These may fit your vehicle, but they are not approved by Mazda for use with Mazda  
vehicles. When you install non-genuine parts or accessories, they could affect your  
vehicle's performance or safety systems; the Mazda warranty doesn't cover this. Before you  
install any non-genuine parts or accessories, consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
WARNING  
Always consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer before you install non-genuine parts or  
accessories:  
Installation of non-genuine parts or accessories is dangerous. Improperly designed  
parts or accessories could seriously affect your vehicle's performance or safety  
systems. This could cause you to have an accident or increase your chances of  
injuries in an accident.  
Be very careful in choosing and installing add-on electrical equipment, such as  
mobile telephones, two-way radios, stereo systems, and car alarm systems:  
Incorrectly choosing or installing improper add-on equipment or choosing an  
improper installer is dangerous. Essential systems could be damaged, causing engine  
stalling, air-bag (SRS) activation, ABS/TCS/DSC inactivation, or a fire in the vehicle.  
Mazda assumes no responsibility for death, injury, or expenses that may result from the  
installation of add-on non-genuine parts or accessories.  
9-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Cell Phones  
Cell Phones Warning  
WARNING  
Please comply with the legal regulations concerning the use of communication  
equipment in vehicles in your State or Province:  
Use of any electrical devices such as cell phones, computers, portable radios, vehicle  
navigation or other devices by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous.  
Dialing a number on a cell phone while driving also ties-up the driver's hands. Use of  
these devices will cause the driver to be distracted and could lead to a serious  
accident. If a passenger is unable to use the device, pull off the right-of-way to a safe  
area before use. If use of a cell phone is necessary despite this warning, use a hands-  
free system to at least leave the hands free to drive the vehicle. Never use a cell  
phone or other electrical devices while the vehicle is moving and, instead,  
concentrate on the full-time job of driving.  
9-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Type Approval of Equipment  
Type Approval of Equipment  
Immobilizer system  
9-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Type Approval of Equipment  
Keyless entry system  
9-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Uniform Tire Quality Grading System (UTQGS)  
Uniform Tire Quality Grading System (UTQGS)  
This information relates to the tire grading system developed by the U.S. National  
Highway Traffic Safety Administration for grading tires by tread wear, traction, and  
temperature performance.  
qTread Wear  
The tread wear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested  
under controlled conditions on a specified government test course.  
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one-and-a-half times as well on the government  
course as a tire graded 100.  
The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however,  
and may depart significantly from the norm because of variations in driving habits, service  
practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.  
qTraction-AA, A, B, C  
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades represent  
the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on  
specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor  
traction performance.  
WARNING  
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking (straight ahead) traction  
tests and does not include acceleration cornering (turning), hydroplaning, or peak  
traction characteristics.  
qTemperature-A, B, C  
The temperature grades A (the highest), B, and C, represent the tire's resistance to the  
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions  
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.  
Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire  
life, and excessive temperatures can lead to sudden tire failure.  
Grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger vehicle tires must meet  
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent  
higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by  
law.  
9-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Uniform Tire Quality Grading System (UTQGS)  
WARNING  
Keep your vehicle's tires properly inflated and not overloaded:  
Driving with improperly inflated or overloaded tires is dangerous. Excessive speed,  
underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause  
heat buildup and possible tire failure. The temperature grade for this tire is  
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.  
These grades will be added to the sidewalls of passenger vehicle tires over the next several  
years according to a schedule established by the NHTSA and the tire manufacturers.  
The grade of tires available as standard or optional equipment on Mazda vehicles may vary  
with respect to grade.  
ALL PASSENGER VEHICLE TIRES MUST CONFORM TO THESE GRADES AND  
TO ALL OTHER FEDERAL TIRE-SAFETY REQUIREMENTS.  
qUniform Tire Quality Grading  
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder  
and maximum section width.  
For example:  
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A  
UTQGS MARK (example)  
TREADWEAR 200 TRACTION AA  
TEMPERATURE A  
9-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Tire Information (U.S.A.)  
Tire Labeling  
Federal law requires tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of  
all tires. This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire  
and also provides a tire identification number for safety standard certification and in case of  
a recall.  
qInformation on Passenger Vehicle Tires  
Please refer to the diagram below.  
1. TIN: U.S. DOT tire identification number  
2. Passenger car tire  
3. Nominal width of tire in millimeters  
4. Ratio of height to width (aspect ratio)  
5. Radial  
6. Rim diameter code  
7. Load index & speed symbol  
8. Severe snow conditions  
9. Tire ply composition and materials used  
10. Max. load rating  
9-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Tire Information (U.S.A.)  
11. Tread wear, traction and temperature grades  
12. Max. permissible inflation pressure  
13. SAFETY WARNING  
P215/65R15 95H is an example of a tire size and load index rating. Here is an explanation  
of the various components of that tire size and load index rating. Note that the tire size and  
load index rating may be different from the example.  
P
Indicates a tire that may be installed on cars, SUVs, minivans and light trucks as designated  
by the Tire and Rim Association (T&RA).  
NOTE  
If your tire size does not begin with a letter this may mean it is designated by either ETRTO  
(European Tire and Rim Technical Organization) or JATMA (Japan Tire Manufacturing Association).  
215  
“215” is the nominal width of the tire in millimeters. This three-digit number gives the  
width in millimeters of the tire from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger  
the number, the wider the tire.  
65  
“65” is the aspect ratio. This two-digit number indicates the tire's ratio of height to width.  
R
“R” is the tire construction symbol. R indicates “Radial ply construction”.  
15  
“15” is the wheel rim diameter in inches.  
95  
“95” is the Load Index. This two-or three-digit number indicates how much weight each  
tire can support.  
9-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Tire Information (U.S.A.)  
H
“H” is the speed rating. The speed rating denotes the maximum speed for which the use of  
the tire is rated.  
Letter Rating  
Speed Rating  
99 mph  
Q
R
S
106 mph  
112 mph  
118 mph  
124 mph  
130 mph  
149 mph  
168* mph  
186* mph  
T
U
H
V
W
Y
* For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph, tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR. For  
tires with a maximum speed capability over 186 mph, tire manufacturers always use the letters ZR.  
M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow  
AT: All Terrain.  
AS: All Season. The “M+S” or “M/S” indicates that the tire has some functional use in  
mud and snow.  
U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN)  
This begins with the letters “DOT” which indicates the tire meets all federal standards. The  
next two numbers or letters are the plant code where it was manufactured, and the last four  
numbers represent the week and year the tire was manufactured. For example, the numbers  
457 means the 45st week of 1997. After 2000 the numbers go to four digits. For example,  
the number 2102 means the 21th week of 2002. The other numbers are marketing codes  
used at the manufacturer's discretion. This information is used to contact consumers if a tire  
defect requires a recall.  
Tire Ply Composition and Materials Used  
The number of plies indicates the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire. In  
general, the greater the number of plies, the more weight a tire can support. Tire  
manufacturers also must indicate the tire materials, which include steel, nylon, polyester,  
and other.  
Maximum Load Rating  
This number indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by  
the tire.  
Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure  
This number is the greatest amount of air pressure that should ever be put in the tire under  
normal driving conditions.  
9-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Tire Information (U.S.A.)  
Tread Wear, Traction and Temperature Grades  
Tread wear: The tread wear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire  
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For  
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the  
government course as a tire graded 100.  
Traction: The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The grades  
represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions  
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have  
poor traction performance.  
Temperature: The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the tire's  
resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under  
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.  
Snow Tires  
In some heavy snow areas, local governments may require true snow tires, those with very  
deeply cut tread. These tires should only be used in pairs or placed on all four wheels.  
Make sure you purchase snow tires that are the same size and construction type as the other  
tires on your vehicle.  
SAFETY WARNING  
The following safety warning appears on the tire's sidewall.  
SERIOUS INJURY MAY RESULT FROM:  
l
EXPLOSION OF TIRE/RIM ASSEMBLY DUE TO IMPROPER MOUNTING-  
MATCH TIRE DIAMETER TO RIM DIAMETER; NEVER EXCEED 40 psi (275 kPa)  
TO SEAT BEADS-ONLY SPECIALLY TRAINED PERSONS SHOULD MOUNT  
TIRES.  
l
TIRE FAILURE DUE TO UNDER-INFLATION/OVERLOADING/DAMAGE-  
FOLLOW OWNER'S MANUAL AND PLACARD IN VEHICLE-FREQUENTLY  
CHECK INFLATION PRESSURE AND INSPECT FOR DAMAGE.  
9-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Tire Information (U.S.A.)  
qInformation on Temporary Tires  
Please refer to the diagram below.  
1. Temporary tires  
2. Nominal width of tire in millimeters  
3. Ratio of height to width (aspect ratio)  
4. Diagonal  
5. Rim diameter code  
6. Load index&speed symbol  
T115/70D 16 90M is an example of a tire size and load index rating. Here is an explanation  
of the various components of that tire size and load index rating. Note that the tire size and  
load index rating may be different from the example.  
T
Indicates a tire that may be installed on cars, SUVs, minivans and light trucks as designated  
by the Tire and Rim Association (T&RA).  
115  
“115” is the nominal width of the tire in millimeters. This three-digit number gives the  
width in millimeters of the tire from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger  
the number, the wider the tire.  
9-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Tire Information (U.S.A.)  
70  
“70” is the aspect ratio. This two-digit number indicates the tire's ratio of height to width.  
D
“D” is the tire construction symbol. D indicates “diagonal ply construction”.  
16  
“16” is the wheel rim diameter in inches.  
90  
“90” is the Load Index. This two-or three-digit number indicates how much weight each  
tire can support.  
M
“M” is the speed rating. The speed rating denotes the maximum speed for which the use of  
the tire is rated.  
Letter Rating  
Speed Rating  
M
81 mph  
9-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Tire Information (U.S.A.)  
Location of the Tire Label (Placard)  
You will find the tire label containing tire inflation pressure by tire size and other important  
information on the driver's side B-pillar or on the edge of the driver's door frame.  
SAMPLE  
qRecommended Tire Inflation Pressure  
On the tire label you will find the recommended tire inflation pressure in both kPa and psi  
for the tires installed as original equipment on the vehicle. It is very important that the  
inflation pressure of the tires on your vehicle is maintained at the recommended pressure.  
You should check the tire pressure regularly to insure that the proper inflation pressure is  
maintained.  
Refer to Tires on page 10-7.  
NOTE  
Tire pressures listed on the vehicle placard or tire information label indicate the recommended cold  
tire inflation pressure, measured when the tires are cold, after the vehicle has been parked for at least  
3 hours. As you drive, the temperature in the tire warms up, increasing the tire pressure.  
9-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Tire Information (U.S.A.)  
WARNING  
Always check the tire inflation pressures on a regular basis according to the  
recommended tire inflation pressure on the tire label and in conjunction with the  
information in this owner's manual:  
Driving your vehicle with under-inflated tires is dangerous.  
Under-inflation is the most common cause of failures in any kind of tire and may  
result in severe cracking, tread separation or “blowout”, with unexpected loss of  
vehicle control and increased risk of injury. Under-inflation increases sidewall flexing  
and rolling resistance, resulting in heat buildup and internal damage to the tire. It  
results in unnecessary tire stress, irregular wear, loss of control and accidents. A tire  
can lose up to half of its air pressure and not appear to be flat!  
It is impossible to determine whether or not tires are properly inflated just by looking  
at them.  
qChecking Tire Pressure  
1. When you check the air pressure, make sure the tires are cold ―meaning they are not  
hot from driving even a mile.  
2. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire.  
3. Firmly press a tire gauge onto the valve.  
4. Add air to achieve recommended air pressure.  
5. If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the metal stem in the center of the  
valve. Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge.  
6. Replace the valve cap.  
7. Repeat with each tire, including the spare.  
NOTE  
Some spare tires require higher inflation pressure.  
8. Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other objects embedded that  
could poke a hole in the tire and cause an air leak.  
9. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges, cuts, bulges, cracks or other  
irregularities.  
NOTE  
Warm tires normally exceed recommended pressures. Don't release air from warm tires to adjust the  
pressure.  
Under-inflation can cause serious failures and accidents.  
Over-inflation can produce a harsh ride and the greater possibility of damage from road hazards.  
9-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Tire Information (U.S.A.)  
qGlossary of Terms  
Tire Placard: A label indicating the OE tire sizes, recommended inflation pressure, and  
the maximum weight the vehicle can carry.  
Tire Identification Number (TIN): A number on the sidewall of each tire providing  
information about the tire brand and manufacturing plant, tire size, and date of  
manufacture.  
Inflation Pressure: A measure of the amount of air in a tire.  
kPa: Kilopascal, the metric unit for air pressure.  
psi: Pounds per square inch, the English unit for air pressure.  
B-pillar: The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the front door.  
Original Equipment (OE): Describes components originally equipped on the vehicle.  
Vehicle Load Limit: The maximum value of the combination weight of occupants and  
cargo.  
Bead Area of the Tire: Area of the tire next to the rim.  
Sidewall Area of the Tire: Area between the bead area and the tread.  
Tread Area of the Tire: Area on the perimeter of the tire that contacts the road when it's  
mounted on the vehicle.  
Seating capacity means the total allowable number of vehicle occupants. Seating capacity  
is described on the tire label.  
Production options weight is the combination weight of installed regular production  
options weighing over 2.3 kilograms in excess of the standard items which they replace,  
and not previously considered in the curb weight or accessory weight, including heavy  
duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim.  
Rim is the metal support (wheel) for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire  
beads are seated.  
9-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Tire Information (U.S.A.)  
Tire Maintenance  
Improper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can cause tires to wear abnormally. Here are  
some important maintenance points:  
qTire Inflation Pressure  
Inspect all tire pressure monthly (including the spare) when the tires are cold. Maintain  
recommended pressures for the best ride, top handling, and minimum tire wear. Use the  
pressures specified on the vehicle tire information placard or tire label for optimum service.  
qTire Rotation  
To equalize tread wear, rotate the tires every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or sooner if irregular  
wear develops. During rotation, inspect them for correct balance.  
Forward  
Do not include (TEMPORARY USE ONLY)  
spare tire in rotation.  
Inspect the tires for uneven wear and damage. Abnormal wear is usually caused by one or a  
combination of the following:  
l
Incorrect tire pressure  
Improper wheel alignment  
Out-of-balance wheel  
Severe braking  
l
l
l
After rotation, inflate all tire pressures to specification (page 10-7) and inspect the lug nuts  
for tightness.  
CAUTION  
Rotate unidirectional tires and radial tires that have an asymmetrical tread pattern  
or studs only from front to rear, not from side to side. Tire performance will be  
weakened if rotated from side to side.  
9-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Tire Information (U.S.A.)  
qReplacing a Tire  
WARNING  
Always use tires that are in good condition:  
Driving with worn tires is dangerous. Reduced braking, steering, and traction could  
result in an accident.  
If a tire wears evenly, a wear indicator will appear as a solid band across the tread. Replace  
the tire when this happens.  
Tread wear indicator  
New tread  
Worn tread  
You should replace it before the band is across the entire tread.  
NOTE  
Tires degrade over time, even when they are not being used on the road. It is recommended that tires  
generally be replaced when they are 6 years or older. Heat caused by hot climates or frequent high  
loading conditions can accelerate the aging process. You should replace the spare tire when you  
replace the other road tires due to the aging of the spare tire. Regarding the manufacturing week and  
year is indicated with 4 digit. Refer to The tire labeling on page 9-24.  
qSafety Practices  
The way you drive has a great deal to do with your tire mileage and safety. So cultivate  
good driving habits for your own benefit.  
l
Observe posted speed limits  
Avoid fast starts, stops and turns  
Avoid potholes and objects on the road  
Do no run over curbs or hit the tire against the curb when parking  
l
l
l
9-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Tire Information (U.S.A.)  
CAUTION  
If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving or you suspect your  
tire or vehicle has been damaged, immediately reduce your speed. Drive with caution  
until you can safely pull off the road. Stop and inspect the tire for damage. If the tire  
is under-inflated or damaged, deflate it, remove the tire and rim and replace it with  
your spare tire. If you cannot detect a cause, have the vehicle towed to the nearest  
vehicle or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected.  
9-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Tire Information (U.S.A.)  
Vehicle Loading  
WARNING  
Do not tow a trailer with this vehicle:  
Towing a trailer with this vehicle is dangerous because it has not been designed to  
tow a trailer and doing so will affect the drive system which could result in vehicle  
damage.  
This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle, to keep your loaded  
vehicle weight within its design rating capability. Properly loading your vehicle will  
provide maximum return of vehicle design performance. Before loading your vehicle,  
familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining your vehicle's weight ratings,  
from the vehicle's Safety Certification Label and Tire and Load Information Label:  
WARNING  
Overloaded Vehicle:  
Overloading a vehicle is dangerous. The results of overloading can have serious  
consequences in terms of passenger safety. Too much weight on a vehicle's  
suspension system can cause spring or shock absorber failure, brake failure,  
handling or steering problems, irregular tire wear, tire failure or other damage.  
Overloading makes a vehicle harder to drive and control. It also increases the  
distance required for stopping. In cases of serious overloading, brakes can fail  
completely, particularly on steep grades. The load a tire will carry safely is a  
combination of the size of the tire, its load range, and corresponding inflation  
pressure.  
Never overload the vehicle and always observe the vehicle's weight ratings from the  
vehicle's Safety Certification and Tire and Load Information labels.  
9-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Tire Information (U.S.A.)  
Base Curb Weight is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of fuel and all  
standard equipment. It does not include passengers, cargo, or optional equipment.  
Vehicle Curb Weight is the weight of your new vehicle when you picked it up from your  
dealer plus any aftermarket equipment.  
PAYLOAD  
Payload is the combination weight of cargo and passengers that the vehicle is designed to  
carry. The maximum payload for your vehicle can be found on the Tire and Load  
Information label on the driver's door frame or door pillar. Look for “THE  
COMBINATION WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND CARGO SHOULD NEVER  
EXCEED XXX kg or XXX lbs” for your maximum payload. The payload listed on the tire  
label is the maximum payload for the vehicle as built by the assembly plant. If any  
aftermarket or dealer installed equipment has been installed on the vehicle, the weight of  
the equipment must be subtracted from the payload listed on the tire label in order to be  
accurate.  
9-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Tire Information (U.S.A.)  
SAMPLE  
CARGO  
Cargo Weight includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight, including cargo and  
optional equipment.  
The cargo weight limit decreases depending on the number of vehicle occupants. The cargo  
weight limit can be calculated by subtracting the total weight of the vehicle occupants from  
the “combination weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed” value on the tire  
label.  
9-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Tire Information (U.S.A.)  
Examples: Based on a single occupant weight of 68 kg (150 lbs), and a value of 385 kg  
(849 lbs) for the “combination weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed”:  
_
The cargo weight limit with one occupant is 385 kg (849 lbs) 68 kg (150 lbs) = 317 kg  
(699 lbs)  
_
The cargo weight limit with two occupants is 385 kg (849 lbs) (68 × 2) kg ( (150 × 2)  
lbs) = 249 kg (549 lbs)  
If the weight of the occupant increases, the cargo weight limit decreases by that much.  
GAW (Gross Axle Weight) is the total weight placed on each axle (front and rear) -  
including vehicle curb weight and all payload.  
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) is the maximum allowable weight that can be carried  
by a single axle (front or rear). These numbers are shown on the Safety Compliance  
Certification Label located on the driver's door frame or door pillar. The total load on  
each axle must never exceed its GAWR.  
GVW  
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) is the Vehicle Curb Weight  
cargo  
passengers.  
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) is the maximum allowable weight of the fully  
loaded vehicle (including all options, equipment, passengers and cargo). The GVWR is  
shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label located on the driver's door  
frame or door pillar. The GVW must never exceed the GVWR.  
9-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Tire Information (U.S.A.)  
SAMPLE  
WARNING  
Exceeding Axle Weight Rating Limits:  
Exceeding the Safety Certification Label axle weight rating limits is dangerous and  
could result in death or serious injury as a result of substandard vehicle handling,  
performance, engine, transmission and/or structural damage, serious damage to the  
vehicle, or loss of control.  
Always keep the vehicle within the axle weight rating limits.  
Do not tow a trailer with this vehicle:  
Towing a trailer with this vehicle is dangerous because it has not been designed to  
tow a trailer and doing so will affect the drive system which could result in vehicle  
damage.  
9-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Tire Information (U.S.A.)  
GCW  
GCW (Gross Combination Weight) is the weight of the loaded vehicle (GVW).  
GCWR (Gross Combination Weight Rating) is the maximum allowable weight of the  
vehicle - including all cargo and passengers - that the vehicle can handle without risking  
damage. The GCW must never exceed the GCWR.  
WARNING  
Exceeding GVWR or GAWR Specifications:  
Exceeding the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the certification label is dangerous.  
Exceeding any vehicle rating limitation could result in a serious accident, injury, or  
damage to the vehicle.  
Do not use replacement tires with lower load carrying capacities than the originals  
because they may lower the vehicle's GVWR and GAWR limitations. Replacement  
tires with a higher limit than the originals do not increase the GVWR and GAWR  
limitations.  
Never exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the certification label.  
9-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Tire Information (U.S.A.)  
Steps for Determining the Correct Load Limit:  
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit:  
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should  
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle's placard.  
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be  
riding in your vehicle.  
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg  
or XXX lbs.  
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load  
capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there  
will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available  
_
cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 750 (5 × 150) = 650  
lbs.)  
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the  
vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage  
load capacity calculated in Step 4.  
9-42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Reporting Safety Defects  
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S.A.)  
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could  
cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway  
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mazda Motor  
Corporation (Your Mazda Importer/Distributor).  
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it  
finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and  
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual  
problems between you, your dealer, or Mazda Motor Corporation (Your Mazda  
Importer/Distributor).  
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-  
327-4236 (TTY:1-800-424-9153) ; go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:  
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington, DC,  
20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from  
http://www.safercar.gov.  
NOTE  
If you live in the U.S.A., all correspondence to Mazda Motor Corporation should be forwarded to:  
Mazda North American Operations  
7755 Irvine Center Drive  
Irvine, California 92618-2922  
or  
P.O. Box 19734  
Irvine, CA 92623-9734  
Customer Assistance Center or toll free at 1 (800) 222-5500  
If you live outside of the U.S.A., please contact the nearest Mazda Distributor shown (page 9-12) in  
this booklet.  
9-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Reporting Safety Defects  
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada)  
Canadian customers who wish to report a safety-related defect to Transport Canada, Defect  
Investigations and Recalls, may telephone the toll free hotline 1-800-333-0510, or contact  
Transport Canada by mail at: Transport Canada, ASFAD, Place de Ville Tower C, 330  
Sparks Street, Ottawa ON K1A 0N5.  
For additional road safety information, please visit the Road Safety website at:  
http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/menu.htm  
9-44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Service Publications  
Service Publications  
Factory-authorized Mazda service publications are available for owners who wish to do  
some of their own maintenance and repair.  
When requesting any of our publications through an Authorized Mazda Dealer, refer to the  
chart below.  
If they don't have what you need in stock, they can order it for you.  
PUBLICATION ORDER NUMBER  
9999-95-063B-09  
PUBLICATION DESCRIPTION  
2009 WORKSHOP MANUAL (English)  
2009 WORKSHOP MANUAL (Spanish)  
2009 WIRING DIAGRAM (English)  
2009 WIRING DIAGRAM (Spanish)  
2009 OWNER'S MANUAL  
9999-MX-063B-09  
9999-95-039G-09  
9999-MX-039G-09  
9999-95-078C-09R (U.S.A. only)  
9999-EC-078C-09R (Canada only)  
9999-PR-078C-09R (Puerto Rico, Mexico only)  
9999-95-101F-09  
2009 OWNER'S MANUAL  
2009 OWNER'S MANUAL  
2009 SERVICE HIGHLIGHTS  
9999-95-NAV3-09 (U.S.A. only)  
9999-EC-NAV3-09 (Canada only)  
9999-PR-NAV3-09 (Puerto Rico, Mexico only)  
2009 NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER'S MANUAL  
2009 NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER'S MANUAL  
2009 NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER'S MANUAL  
qWORKSHOP MANUAL:  
Covers recommended maintenance and repair procedures of the drive train, body and  
chassis.  
qWIRING DIAGRAM:  
Provides electrical schematics as well as component location for the entire electrical  
system.  
qOWNER'S MANUAL:  
This booklet contains information regarding the proper care and operation of your vehicle.  
This is not a technician's manual.  
qSERVICE HIGHLIGHTS:  
Provides description and operation of the many systems of your Mazda.  
9-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects  
Service Publications  
qNAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER'S MANUAL:  
This booklet contains information regarding the proper operation and use of the navigation  
system. This is not a technician's manual.  
9-46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
10  
Technical information about your Mazda.  
Identification Numbers ............................................................... 10-2  
Vehicle Information Labels ..................................................... 10-2  
Specifications ............................................................................... 10-4  
Specifications .......................................................................... 10-4  
Personalization Features ............................................................ 10-8  
Personalization Features .......................................................... 10-8  
10-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Identification Numbers  
qChassis Number  
Vehicle Information Labels  
Open the cover shown in the figure to  
check the chassis number.  
qVehicle Identification Number  
The vehicle identification number legally  
identifies your vehicle. The number is on  
a plate attached to the left top side of the  
dashboard. This plate can easily be seen  
through the windshield.  
qVehicle Emission Control  
Information Label  
q
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard Label  
10-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Identification Numbers  
qTire Pressure Label  
qEngine Number  
2.5-liter engine  
Forward  
3.7-liter engine  
Forward  
10-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
Specifications  
qEngine  
Specification  
Item  
2.5-liter engine  
DOHC-16V in-line, 4-cylinder  
89.0 × 100 mm (3.50 × 3.94 in)  
2,488 ml (2,488 cc, 151.8 cu in)  
9.7  
3.7-liter engine  
DOHC-24V 60°V, 6-cylinder  
95.5 × 86.7 mm (3.75 × 3.41 in)  
3,726 ml (3,726 cc, 227.4 cu in)  
10.3  
Type  
Bore×Stroke  
Displacement  
Compression ratio  
qElectrical System  
Item  
Classification  
12V-46AH/5HR  
Battery  
LFG1 18 110*1  
2.5-liter engine  
Spark-plug number  
L3Y2 18 110  
CY01 18 110*1  
3.7-liter engine  
2.5-liter engine  
3.7-liter engine  
1.25―1.35 mm (0.049―0.053 in)  
1.29―1.45 mm (0.051―0.057 in)  
Spark-plug gap  
*1 ex factory  
CAUTION  
When cleaning the iridium plugs, do not use a wire brush.  
(2.5-liter engine) The fine particulate coating on the iridium alloy and platinum tips  
could be damaged.  
(3.7-liter engine) The fine particulate coating on the platinum alloy could be  
damaged.  
qLubricant Quality  
Lubricant  
Classification  
Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on page  
8-19.  
Engine oil  
API Service  
SAE  
GL-4 or GL-5  
75W-90  
Any temperature  
Manual transaxle oil  
API Service  
SAE  
GL-4 or GL-5  
80W-90  
Above 10°C (50°F)  
2.5-liter engine  
3.7-liter engine  
ATF M-V  
JWS3309  
ATF M-V  
Automatic transaxle fluid  
Power steering fluid  
Brake/Clutch fluid  
SAE J1703 or FMVSS116 DOT-3  
10-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
qCapacities  
(Approximate Quantities)  
Item  
Capacity  
With oil filter replacement  
Without oil filter replacement  
With oil filter replacement  
Without oil filter replacement  
5.0 L (5.3 US qt. 4.4 Imp qt)  
4.6 L (4.9 US qt. 4.0 Imp qt)  
5.2 L (5.5 US qt. 4.6 Imp qt)  
4.7 L (5.0 US qt. 4.1 Imp qt)  
9.4 L (9.9 US qt. 8.3 Imp qt)  
9.8 L (10 US qt. 8.6 Imp qt)  
2.85 L (3.01 US qt, 2.51 Imp qt)  
8.14 L (8.60 US qt, 7.16 Imp qt)  
7.0 L (7.4 US qt, 6.2 Imp qt)  
70.0 L (18.5 US gal, 15.4 Imp gal)  
2.5-liter engine  
Engine oil  
3.7-liter engine  
2.5-liter engine  
3.7-liter engine  
Coolant  
Manual transaxle oil  
Automatic transaxle fluid  
Fuel tank  
2.5-liter engine  
3.7-liter engine  
Check oil and fluid levels with dipsticks or reservoir gauges.  
qDimensions  
Item  
Specification  
Without license plate holder  
Overall length  
4,920 mm (193.7 in)  
4,940 mm (194.5 in)  
1,840 mm (72.4 in)  
1,470 mm (57.9 in)  
1,595 mm (62.8 in)  
1,595 mm (62.8 in)  
1,585 mm (62.4 in)  
1,595 mm (62.8 in)  
1,595 mm (62.8 in)  
1,585 mm (62.4 in)  
2,790 mm (109.8 in)  
With license plate holder  
Overall width  
Overall height  
16-inch  
Front tread  
17-inch  
18-inch  
16-inch  
17-inch  
18-inch  
Rear tread  
Wheelbase  
qWeights  
2.5-liter engine  
Manual transaxle  
Item  
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)  
Front  
Weight  
1,969 kg (4,340 lb)  
1,037 kg (2,286 lb)  
935 kg (2,062 lb)  
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)  
Rear  
10-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
Automatic transaxle  
Item  
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)  
Weight  
1,996 kg (4,400 lb)  
1,066 kg (2,350 lb)  
934 kg (2,059 lb)  
Front  
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)  
Rear  
3.7-liter engine  
Item  
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)  
Weight  
2,082 kg (4,590 lb)  
1,140 kg (2,513 lb)  
943 kg (2,079 lb)  
Front  
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)  
Rear  
qAir Conditioner  
Item  
Classification  
Refrigerant Type  
HFC134a (R-134a)  
qLight Bulbs  
Exterior light  
Category  
Light bulb  
Wattage  
ECE R (SAE)  
H9 (H9)  
High beam  
65  
55  
Headlights  
Low beam  
Halogen  
Xenon fusion  
H7 (H7)  
35  
D2S (D2S)  
― (#7444NA)  
H11 (H11)  
― (#168)  
― (―)  
Front turn signal lights/Parking lights  
Fog lightsí  
28/8  
55  
Front side-marker lights  
High-mount brake light  
Rear turn signal lights  
4.9  
LED*1  
26.9  
26.9/6.7  
LED*1  
17.9  
4.8  
― (#3757A)  
― (#3057A)  
― (―)  
Brake lights/Taillights (Rear side-marker lights)  
Reverse lights  
W16W (#921)  
― (t94)  
License plate lights  
Ground illumination lightí  
5.5  
― (―)  
*1 LED is the abbreviation for Light Emitting Diode.  
10-6  
íSome models.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
Interior light  
Category  
Light bulb  
Wattage  
ECE R  
―
Trunk light  
3
8
Overhead light/Map lights (Front)  
Overhead light (Rear)  
Courtesy lights  
―
10  
5
―
W5W  
―
Vanity mirror lights  
2.1  
qTires  
NOTE  
l
The tires have been optimally matched with the chassis of your vehicle.  
When replacing tires, Mazda recommends that you replace tires of the same type originally fitted  
to your vehicle. For details, contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
l
When changing tires extra care must be taken to be sure the TPMS is working. (page 5-27)  
Check the tire pressure label for tire size and inflation pressure.  
Refer to Tire Inflation Pressure on page 8-32.  
Standard tire  
Inflation pressure  
Tire size  
P205/65R16 94H  
Front  
Rear  
220 kPa (32 psi)  
220 kPa (32 psi)  
220 kPa (32 psi)  
220 kPa (32 psi)  
220 kPa (32 psi)  
220 kPa (32 psi)  
P215/55R17 93V  
P235/45R18 94W  
Temporary spare tire  
T115/70D16 92M  
qFuses  
Tire size  
Inflation pressure  
420 kPa (60 psi)  
Refer to the fuse rating on page 8-46.  
10-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Personalization Features  
Personalization Features  
The following “Personalization Features” are possible. These settings can only be changed by an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer.  
Setting  
Function  
Initial Setting After Setting Change  
Adjusts headlight illumination on/off timing  
based on surrounding lightness/darkness  
Auto headlight on/off  
2000―4000 lx  
1000―2000 lx  
Time required for headlights to turn off after  
ignition is switched off  
Auto headlight off  
Turn indicator  
30 seconds  
0/60/120 seconds  
Sets beep sound volume level  
High  
Low  
Blind spot warning Deactivates warning beep function  
Activated  
Deactivated  
Time required for interior lamp to turn off  
automatically after all doors are closed  
15 seconds  
7.5/30/60 seconds  
Deactivates function that allows interior lamp  
to illuminate automatically when ignition is  
switched off  
Activated  
Deactivated  
Deactivates function that allows interior lamp  
Illumination entry  
to illuminate automatically when doors are  
unlocked  
Activated  
30 minutes  
Deactivated  
Deactivated  
10 minutes  
Activated  
Time required for interior lamp to turn off  
automatically  
(prevents battery depletion when a door is  
open/ajar)  
Activates function that allows turn signal lights  
Smart turn  
to flash three times with momentary turn switch  
operation (when changing lanes)  
Selects unlocking method with the retractable  
key  
Press×2  
Press×1  
Time required for doors to relock automatically  
after unlocking with transmitter  
30 seconds  
60/90 seconds  
Keyless entry  
Deactivates function that allows horn to sound  
automatically when doors are locked by  
pressing transmitter two consecutive times  
Activated  
Deactivated  
10-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Personalization Features  
Setting  
Function  
Initial Setting After Setting Change  
Activates function to automatically lock doors  
when leaving vehicle  
Deactivated  
Activated  
(with key being carried away)  
Deactivates advanced key remaining battery  
level warning light in instrument cluster  
Activated  
Low  
Deactivated  
High/Deactivated  
Low  
Adjusts sound volume of answer-back beep  
during keyless entry system operation  
Adjusts sound volume of warning beep for  
advanced keyless entry system  
High  
Chooses whether permission is given to open  
trunk when advanced keys are both inside trunk  
or outside vehicle  
Permitted  
Activated  
Not permitted  
Deactivated  
Deactivates function that allows power supply  
to turn off automatically when ignition has been  
switched to ACC for a long period of time  
Advanced keyless  
entry  
Selects a transition pattern in which ignition  
position can be switched when pressing push  
button start  
ON> Off  
Activated  
ON> ACC> Off  
Deactivated  
Deactivates advanced key function  
2. Touch the handle,  
and all doors unlock./3.  
Press the request  
switch once to unlock  
driver's door. Press  
1. Touch the  
Selects door unlocking method with the door  
handle sensor and/or the request switch.  
handle, and only again to unlock the  
the driver's door rest./4. Touch the  
unlocks.  
handle to unlock  
driver's door, then  
press the request  
switch to unlock the  
rest.  
The following “Personalization Features” can be changed by customer.  
Setting  
Function  
Initial Setting After Setting Change  
Activated Deactivated  
Welcome sound  
Deactivates welcome sound function 6-28  
10-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
11  
11-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
A
B
Accessory Socket ............................ 6-105  
Add-On Non-Genuine Parts and  
Battery  
Emergency starting .................... 7-13  
Accessories ....................................... 9-18  
Advanced Key ..................................... 3-2  
Advanced key maintenance ......... 3-5  
Advanced key suspend  
Maintenance ............................... 8-31  
Specifications ............................. 10-4  
Beeps  
Electronic Steering Lock ............ 5-59  
Ignition key reminder ................. 5-59  
Seat belt warning beep Sounds... 5-59  
Tire inflation pressure warning  
function ...................................... 3-19  
Auxiliary key .............................. 3-18  
Locking, unlocking doors ............ 3-8  
Opening the trunk lid with request  
switch ......................................... 3-10  
Operational range ......................... 3-7  
Remote control function ............. 3-16  
Service ......................................... 3-6  
Warning and beep sounds .......... 3-19  
When warning indicator/beep is  
beep ............................................ 5-59  
Before Starting the Engine .................. 4-5  
After getting in ............................. 4-5  
Before getting in .......................... 4-5  
Blind Spot Monitoring  
(BSM) System .................................. 5-33  
BSM OFF Indicator Light .......... 5-35  
BSM OFF Switch ....................... 5-36  
Care of Radar Sensors ................ 5-36  
Warning Light/Beep ................... 5-35  
Bluetooth Audio ............................... 6-63  
Bluetooth Hands-Free ....................... 6-72  
Basic Bluetooth Hands-Free  
activated ..................................... 3-22  
Air Bag Systems ............................... 2-41  
Antenna ............................................. 6-16  
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ......... 5-7  
Warning light ............................... 5-8  
Appearance Care ............................... 8-52  
Audio System ................................... 6-16  
Audio control switch .................. 6-56  
Audio set .................................... 6-27  
AUX mode ................................. 6-59  
Operating tips for audio  
Operation ................................... 6-76  
Convenient Use of the Hands-Free  
System ........................................ 6-79  
Hands-Free Setting ..................... 6-85  
Mazda Bluetooth Hands-Free  
system ........................................ 6-16  
Safety certification ..................... 6-62  
Automatic Transaxle  
Customer Service ....................... 6-92  
Safety Certification .................... 6-92  
When Bluetooth Hands-Free Cannot  
be Used ...................................... 6-91  
Body Lubrication .............................. 8-28  
Bottle Holder ................................... 6-101  
Brake/Clutch  
Driving tips ................................ 5-18  
Fluid ........................................... 8-24  
Manual shift mode ..................... 5-15  
Shift-lock override ..................... 5-14  
Shift-lock system ....................... 5-14  
Transaxle ranges ........................ 5-13  
Fluid ........................................... 8-22  
11-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
B
D
Brakes  
Defroster  
Anti-lock brake system (ABS) ..... 5-7  
Mirror ......................................... 5-69  
Rear window .............................. 5-68  
Dimensions ....................................... 10-5  
Door Locks ....................................... 3-29  
Driving In Flooded Area ..................... 4-9  
Driving on Uneven Road .................. 4-11  
Driving Tips ........................................ 4-6  
Automatic transaxle ................... 5-18  
Break-in period ............................ 4-6  
Driving in flooded area ................ 4-9  
Driving on uneven road .............. 4-11  
Hazardous driving ........................ 4-7  
Money-saving suggestions ........... 4-6  
Rocking the vehicle ...................... 4-8  
Winter driving .............................. 4-8  
Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) ..... 5-25  
DSC OFF indicator light ............ 5-26  
DSC OFF switch ........................ 5-26  
TCS/DSC indicator light ............ 5-25  
Brakes assist ................................. 5-9  
Foot brake .................................... 5-5  
Pad wear indicator ........................ 5-9  
Parking brake ............................... 5-6  
Warning light ............................... 5-7  
Break-In Period ................................... 4-6  
Bulb Replacement ............................. 8-37  
C
Capacities .......................................... 10-5  
Carbon Monoxide ............................... 4-4  
Catalytic Converter ............................. 4-3  
Cell Phones ....................................... 9-19  
Center Console ................................ 6-103  
Child Restraint  
Child restraint precautions ......... 2-27  
Installing child-restraint  
systems ....................................... 2-31  
LATCH child-restraint  
E
systems ....................................... 2-37  
Child Safety Locks for Rear Doors ... 3-32  
Climate Control System ...................... 6-2  
Gas specifications ...................... 10-6  
Clock ................................................. 6-97  
Courtesy Lights ................................. 6-95  
Cruise Control ................................... 5-19  
Cup Holder ...................................... 6-100  
Customer Assistance ........................... 9-2  
Emergency Starting ........................... 7-13  
Flooded engine ........................... 7-13  
Jump-starting .............................. 7-14  
Push-starting .............................. 7-16  
Emergency Towing ........................... 7-17  
Emission Control System .................... 4-3  
Engine  
Coolant ....................................... 8-21  
Exhaust gas .................................. 4-4  
Hood release .............................. 3-46  
Oil .............................................. 8-19  
Overheating ................................ 7-11  
Starting ......................................... 5-4  
Engine Compartment Overview ........ 8-18  
D
Dashboard Illumination .................... 5-41  
Daytime Running Lights ................... 5-62  
11-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
E
H
Hazard Warning Flasher .................... 5-70  
Hazardous Driving .............................. 4-7  
Headlights  
Engine Coolant  
Overheating ................................ 7-11  
Engine Coolant Temperature  
Control ....................................... 5-60  
Flashing ...................................... 5-62  
High-low beam .......................... 5-62  
Leveling ..................................... 5-62  
HomeLink Wireless Control  
System .............................................. 5-70  
Hood Release .................................... 3-46  
Horn .................................................. 5-69  
Gauge ................................................ 5-40  
Exhaust Gas ........................................ 4-4  
Exterior Care ..................................... 8-54  
F
Flasher  
Hazard warning .......................... 5-70  
Headlights .................................. 5-60  
Flat Tire ............................................... 7-3  
Changing ...................................... 7-6  
Spare tire and tool storage ............ 7-3  
Fluids  
Classification .............................. 10-4  
Owner maintenance ................... 8-15  
Fog Lights ......................................... 5-64  
Foot Brake .......................................... 5-5  
Front Seats  
I
Ignition  
Keys ........................................... 3-23  
Switch .......................................... 5-2  
Illuminated Entry System ................. 6-94  
Immobilizer System  
(with Advanced Key) ........................ 3-50  
Immobilizer System  
(without Advanced Key) ................... 3-53  
Indicator Lights ................................. 5-43  
BSM OFF ................................... 5-58  
Cruise ......................................... 5-57  
DSC OFF .................................... 5-57  
Headlight high-beam .................. 5-55  
Security ...................................... 5-55  
Shift position .............................. 5-56  
TCS OFF .................................... 5-56  
TCS/DSC ................................... 5-56  
Turn signal/hazard warning ........ 5-58  
Information Display .......................... 6-96  
Audio display ............................. 6-97  
Climate control display .............. 6-97  
Clock .......................................... 6-97  
Information display functions .... 6-96  
Trip computer ............................. 6-98  
(Electrically Operated Seats) ............... 2-4  
Front Seats  
(Manually Operated Seats) ................. 2-2  
Fuel  
Filler lid and cap ........................ 3-44  
Gauge ......................................... 5-41  
Requirements ............................... 4-2  
Tank capacity ............................. 10-5  
Fuses ................................................. 8-46  
Panel description ........................ 8-49  
Replacement ............................... 8-46  
G
Gauges .............................................. 5-38  
Glove Box ....................................... 6-102  
11-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
I
M
Inside Trunk Release Lever ............... 3-36  
Instrument Cluster ............................. 5-38  
Interior Care ...................................... 8-57  
Interior Lights ................................... 6-94  
Mirrors  
Outside mirrors .......................... 3-59  
Rearview mirror ......................... 3-60  
Money-Saving Suggestions ................ 4-6  
Moonroof .......................................... 3-47  
J
O
Jump-Starting .................................... 7-14  
Odometer and Trip Meter .................. 5-39  
Outside Mirrors ................................. 3-59  
Outside Temperature Display ............ 5-42  
Overhead Console ........................... 6-102  
Overhead Lights ................................ 6-94  
Overheating ....................................... 7-11  
Overloading ...................................... 4-10  
K
Keyless Entry System ....................... 3-24  
Keys .................................................. 3-23  
L
Label Information ............................. 10-2  
Lane-Change Signals ........................ 5-63  
Light Bulbs  
Replacement ............................... 8-37  
Specifications ............................. 10-6  
Lighting Control ............................... 5-60  
Lubricant Quality .............................. 10-4  
P
Paint Damage .................................... 8-52  
Parking Brake ..................................... 5-6  
Parking in an Emergency .................... 7-2  
Personalization Features ................... 10-8  
Power Door Locks ............................ 3-31  
Power Steering .................................. 5-19  
Fluid ........................................... 8-23  
Power Windows ................................ 3-37  
Push-Starting ..................................... 7-16  
M
Maintenance  
Introduction .................................. 8-2  
Owner maintenance  
R
precautions ................................. 8-16  
Owner maintenance schedule ..... 8-15  
Scheduled ..................................... 8-3  
Manual Transaxle Operation ............. 5-10  
Recommendations for shifting.... 5-11  
Map Lights ........................................ 6-95  
Meters and Gauges ........................... 5-38  
Mirror Defroster ................................ 5-69  
Rear Coat Hooks ............................. 6-104  
Rear Door Child Safety Locks .......... 3-32  
Rear Seat ........................................... 2-10  
Rear Window Defroster .................... 5-68  
Rearview Mirror ................................ 3-60  
Recreational Towing ......................... 7-18  
Registering Your Vehicle in A Foreign  
Country ............................................. 9-17  
11-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
R
S
Rocking the Vehicle ............................ 4-8  
Starting the Engine.............................. 5-4  
Steering Wheel .................................. 3-59  
Horn ........................................... 5-69  
Storage Compartments .................... 6-102  
Center console .......................... 6-103  
Glove box ................................. 6-102  
Overhead console ..................... 6-102  
Rear coat hooks ........................ 6-104  
Shopping bag hook .................. 6-104  
Storage pocket .......................... 6-102  
Storage Pocket ................................ 6-102  
Sunshade ........................................... 3-49  
Sunvisors .......................................... 6-93  
S
Safety Defects, Reporting ................. 9-43  
Seat Belt System  
3-point type ................................ 2-19  
Automatic locking ...................... 2-18  
Belt minder ................................. 2-25  
Emergency locking .................... 2-17  
Extender ..................................... 2-23  
Pregnant women ........................ 2-17  
Pretensioner and load limiting.... 2-21  
Seat belt precautions .................. 2-15  
Warning light/beep ..................... 2-25  
Seats  
T
Front seat  
(Electrically operated seats) ......... 2-4  
Front seat  
Tachometer ........................................ 5-40  
Temporary Spare Tire ....................... 8-34  
Theft-Deterrent System ..................... 3-55  
Tire Information ................................ 9-24  
Tire Pressure Monitoring System ...... 5-27  
System error activation .............. 5-31  
Tire pressure monitoring system  
(Manually operated seats) ............ 2-2  
Rear seat ..................................... 2-10  
Seat warmer ................................ 2-13  
Security System  
Immobilizer system  
(with advanced key) ................... 3-50  
Immobilizer system  
warning light .............................. 5-29  
Tires and wheels ......................... 5-31  
Tires  
(without advanced key) .............. 3-53  
Theft-deterrent system ............... 3-55  
Service Publications .......................... 9-45  
Shopping Bag Hook ........................ 6-104  
Side Extention Sunvisors .................. 6-93  
Spare Tire and Tool Storage ................ 7-3  
Specifications .................................... 10-4  
Speedometer ...................................... 5-39  
SRS Air Bags  
Flat tire ......................................... 7-3  
Inflation pressure ........................ 8-32  
Replacement ............................... 8-34  
Rotation ...................................... 8-33  
Snow tires .................................... 4-8  
Spare tire and tool storage ............ 7-3  
Specifications ............................. 10-7  
Tire chains .................................... 4-9  
Uniform tire quality grading system  
(UTQGS) ................................... 9-22  
Tool ..................................................... 7-3  
How the Air Bags Work ............. 2-47  
Supplemental restraint systems  
precautions ................................. 2-41  
11-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
T
W
Warning Lights ................................. 5-43  
ABS ............................................ 5-46  
Air bag system ........................... 5-48  
Automatic transaxle ................... 5-51  
Brake system .............................. 5-45  
Charging system ......................... 5-47  
Check engine.............................. 5-47  
Check fuel cap ........................... 5-49  
Door-ajar .................................... 5-51  
Electronic Steering Lock ............ 5-55  
Engine oil pressure ..................... 5-47  
Front seat belt pretensioner  
Towing  
Description ................................. 7-17  
Emergency towing ..................... 7-17  
Recreational towing ................... 7-18  
Trailer towing ............................. 4-12  
Traction Control System (TCS) ........ 5-23  
TCS OFF indicator light ............ 5-24  
TCS OFF switch ........................ 5-24  
TCS/DSC indicator light ............ 5-23  
Trailer Towing .................................. 4-12  
Trip Meter ......................................... 5-39  
Trunk Lid .......................................... 3-33  
Inside trunk release lever ............ 3-36  
Trunk Light ....................................... 3-35  
Turn and Lane-Change Signals ......... 5-63  
system ........................................ 5-48  
KEY Warning Light  
(Red)/KEY Indicator Light  
(Green) ....................................... 5-53  
Low fuel ..................................... 5-49  
Low washer fluid level ............... 5-51  
Powertrain malfunction/reduced  
power .......................................... 5-48  
Seat belt ...................................... 5-49  
Tire pressure monitoring  
V
Vanity Mirrors ................................... 6-93  
Vehicle Information Labels ............... 10-2  
system ........................................ 5-51  
Warranty ............................................ 9-14  
Washer Fluid ..................................... 8-27  
Weights ............................................. 10-5  
Wheel Replacement .......................... 8-35  
Windows  
Power windows .......................... 3-37  
Windshield Washer ........................... 5-68  
Windshield Wipers ............................ 5-65  
Blades replacement .................... 8-28  
Winter Driving .................................... 4-8  
11-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Lanzar Car Audio Car Stereo System 2 IN 1 CAR AUDIO SYSTEM WITH DVDVCDJPEGMP4MP3WMACD DISC PLAYER AND AM FM STEREO DIGITAL TUNING RADIO User Manual
Learning Resources Car Amplifier LER 4403 User Manual
Lexicon Home Theater System Lexicon MC 12 User Manual
LG Electronics Computer Monitor W2053TQ User Manual
LG Electronics Microwave Oven MC 808WAR User Manual
Linn CD Player CD Playback System User Manual
LOREX Technology Switch SHS 2SA User Manual
Marmitek Indoor Furnishings LM12 User Manual
Melissa Toaster 243 012 User Manual
Mellerware Bathroom Aids 20500 User Manual